PLANÈTE PSY : DÉFINITION T

TAC --- TAX --- TAR --- TE --- TEM --- TES --- THÉ --- THÉR --- TI --- TO --- TOP --- TR --- TRE --- TRI --- TRO --- TROU --- TU --- TW --- TY

Tabagisme : Voir Fumer.

Tabet Paola ( ) : Anthropologue et féministe italienne, spécialisée dans l'étude du racisme, des rapports de sexe et de la prostitution.

	TABET, P. (1987). Du don au tarif. Les relations sexuelles impliquant compensation. Les Temps Modernes, 490, 1-53.
	TABET, P. (1991). Les dents de la prostituée : échange, négociation, choix dans les rapports économico-sexuels. Dans M.-C. Hurtig, M. Kail & H. Rouch (Eds.), Sexe et genre. De la hiérarchie entre les sexes (p. 227-243). Paris : Éditions du CNRS.
	TABET, P. (1998). La construction sociale de l’inégalité des sexes. Des outils et des corps. Paris : L’Harmattan/Bibliothèque du féminisme.
	TABET, P. (2001). La grande arnaque. L’expropriation de la sexualité des femmes. Actuel Marx, 30, 131-152.
	TABET, P. (2004). La grande arnaque. Sexualité des femmes et échange économico-sexuel. Paris : L’Harmattan.

Tableau : Présensation des résultats d'une recherche sous forme de cellules logiquement disposées selon deux axes (tableau à double entrée). Par convention, on place le titre au-dessus du tableau, les résultats de l'analyse principale dans les cellules du haut et les résultats de l'analyse secondaire dans les cellules du bas.

Tableau 1
Comparaisons entre les hommes et femmes sur le plan de la scolarité, du revenu et des réponses à la question 2.

Analyse principale --»

Indicateurs	Groupes	n=		Test t	Valeur de p	<0,05 = *
Scolarité (en année)	Hommes	15	17,20	-0,727	0,473
	Femmes	15	16,87
Revenu annuel (en $)	Hommes	15	57669	2,684	0,006	*
	Femmes	15	43297
			Foui	Khi carré
Question no 2	Hommes	15	10	4,821	0,028	*
	Femmes	15	4

Analyse secondaire --»

Tableau croisé : Crosstabs.

Tabou : Taboo.

	FREUD, S. (1972). Totem et tabou. Paris : Payot.
	McMULLEN, R.J. (1990). Male rape : Breaking the silence on the last taboo. London : GMP Publishers Ltd.
	SIMMIE, S. & NUNES, J. (2002). The last taboo : A survival guide to mental health in Canada. Toronto : McClelland and Stewart.
	POPE, K.S., SONNE, J.L. & GREENE, B.G. (2006). What therapists don’t talk about and why : Understanding taboos that hurt us and our clients. Washington, DC : American Psychological Association.

Tabou de l'inceste : Interdiction à caractère sexuel qui exclut les relations sexuelles au sein de la famille élargie. Selon Freud, le tabou de l’inceste serait à l’origine de la formation de groupes en société en imposant l’exogamie c-à-d la pratique des activités sexuelles à l’extérieur du groupe d'appartenance. Tabou de l'inceste et inceste.

	FREUD, S. (1972). Totem et tabou. Paris : Payot.
	DURKHEIM, É. (1896-1897/1969). La prohibition de l’inceste et ses origines. L’Année Sociologique, 1, 1-70. / Paris : PUF.
	McMULLEN, R.J. (1990). Male rape : Breaking the silence on the last taboo. London : GMP Publishers Ltd.
	LEVI-STRAUSS, C. (1949/67). Les structures élémentaires de la parenté. Paris : Presses Universitaires de France/La Haye-Paris : Mouton et Cie.

Tabula rasa : Du latin tabula et rasa, qui signifie «table rase». Renvoie à l'idée que toute connaissance serait acquise, ce qui signifie qu'à la naissance l'humain serait vierge ou ignorant. = degré zéro de la connaissance (ou de l'apprentissage). Tabula rasa.

Tâche : Le terme a au moins deux sens : a) Dans une recherche expérimentale ou quasi-expérimentale, ce que l'on demande aux participants de faire ou de dire. Cette tâche est habituellement présentée oralement ou par écrit aux sujets avant le début de l'expérience (= consignes). Elle permet d'observer et de mesurer la variable indépendante. Il peut s'agir d'un test, d'une épeuvre ou d'une mise en situation. Dans certains cas, la tâche et la variable indépendante se confondent. ( ): tâche de jugement d'identité de lettres, tâche de rappel, tâche de rappel Brown-Peterson, tâche de sélection de Wason, tâche de Sternberg, tâche double. b) Une tâche, c'est aussi ce qu'il faut faire dans un contexte donné, et ce contexte varie beaucoup (travail, maison, etc.). Task.

	a

	b
	RAUSCHER, F.H., SHAW, G.L. & KY, K.N. (1993). Music and spatial task performance. Nature, 365, 611.

Tâches (Analyse des...) : Job analysis.

	SANCHEZ, J.I. & LEVINE, E.L. (1989). Determining important tasks within jobs : A policy capturing approach. Journal of Applied Psychology, 74, 336-342.
	BRANNICK, M.T., BRANNICK, J.P. & LEVINE, E.L. (1992). Job analysis, personnel selection and the ADA. Human Resource Management Review, 2, 171-182.
	SANCHEZ, J.I. & LEVINE, E.L. (1999). Is job analysis dead, misunderstood or both? New forms of work analysis and design. In A.I. Kraut & A.K. Korman (Eds.), Evolving practices in human resource management (pp. 43-68.). San Francisco : Jossey-Bass.

Tâches (Complexité des...) : Niveau de difficulté des tâches, de leur exécution aussi bien que de leur organisation.

	SWELLER, J. (1976). The effect of task complexity and sequence on rule learning and problem solving. British Journal of Psychology, 67, 553-558.

Tâches (Organisation des...) : Ensemble des règles et des principes qui régissent l'organisation de ce qu'il faut faire au sein d'un groupe ou d'une entreprise. La division des tâches consiste à diviser l'ensemble du travail en plus petites unités, que l'on nomme fonctions ou tâches.

	DEUTSCH, M. (1951). Task structure and group process. American Psychologist, 6, 324-325.
	BENBASAT, I. & LIM, L.H. (1984). The effects of group, task, context, and technology variables on the usefulness of group support systems : a meta-analysis of experimental studies. Small Group Research, 24, 430-462.
	ZACCARO, S.J. & McCOY, M.C. (1988). The effects of task and interpersonal cohesiveness on performance of a disjunctive group task. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 18, 837-851.
	ZACCARO, S.J. & LOWE, C.A. (1988). Cohesiveness and performance on an additive task : evidence for multidimensionality. Journal of Social Psychology, 128, 547-558.
	McGRATH, J.E., ARROW, J.E., GRUENFELD, D.H., HOLLONGSHEAD, A.B. & O'COONER, K.M. (1993). Groups, tasks, and technology : the effects of experience and change. Small Group Research, 24, 406-420.
	LAM, S.S.K. (1997). The effects of group decision support systems and task structures on group communication and decision quality. Journal of Management Information Systems Archive, 13 (4), 193-215.
	MANSON, T.M., LEVINE, E.L. & BRANNICK, M. (2000). The construct validity of task inventory ratings: A multi-trait multi-method analysis. Human Performance, 13, 1-22.

Tâche de jugement d'identité de lettres : Épreuve développée par Posner, qui consiste à comparer des lettres. = tâche de reconnaissance des lettres.

Tâche de rappel : Épreuve utilisée dans les expériences sur la mémoire pour mesurer la capacité de rappel des participants. Elle comporte habituellement deux étapes : 1) Le participant doit d'abord mémoriser une liste de mots, de chiffre ou de syllabes non-sens; 2) Il doit ensuite écrire ou dire ces mots ou ces syllabes, ce qui permet au chercheur d'évaluer sa capacité de rappel. ( ): tâche Brown-Peterson, tâche de Sternberg. Task.

	TURNER, M.L. & ENGLE, R.W. (1989). Is working memory capacity task dependent? Journal of Memory & Language, 28, 127-154.

Tâche de rappel Brown-Peterson : Tâche de rappel développé par Brown pour montrer l'effet d'interférence, qui consiste d'abord à présenter aux participants de deux groupes une suite de trois consonnes (EX: P-Z-V). Immédiatement après la présentation, on demande au premier groupe (groupe contrôle) de se rappeler les consonnes et au second groupe (groupe expérimental) de se livrer à une tâche de comptage à rebours à partir d'un nombre composé de trois chiffres, de 3 en 3 (EX: 777-774-771, etc.) avant d'effectuer la tâche de rappel des consonnes. La tâche de comptage s'effectue à haute voix au rythme d'un métronome. L'analyse des résultats indique sans surprise que le rappel immédiat (groupe 1) suscite un excellent rappel des consonnes tandis que le rappel précédé de la tâche de comptage à rebours interfère avec la mémoire à court terme, tant et si bien que le rappel est nul lorsque cette tâche dure plus de 18 secondes. Brown-Peterson's task.

	BROWN, J. (1958). Some tests of the decay theory of immediate memory. Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology, 10, 12-21.

Tâche de sélection de Wason : Épreuve logique qui met en évidence l'usage de l'implication (modus tollens et modus ponens). Tâche de Wason et raisonnement. Wason selection task


	WASON, P.C. & SHAPIRO, D. (1966). Natural and contrived experience in a reasoning problem. In B.M. Foss (Ed.), New horizons in psychology. Harmondsworth : Penguin.
	GRIGGS. R. & COX, J. (1982). The elusive thematic-materials effect in Wason's selection task. British Journal of Psychology, 73, 407-420.
	COSMIDES, L. (1989). The logic of social exchange : Has natural selection shaped how humans reason? Studies with the Wason selection task. Cognition, 31 (3), 187-276.
	LEIGHTON, J.P. & DAWSON, M.R.W. (2001). A parallel processing model of Wason's card selection task. Cognitive Systems Research , 2-3, 207-231.
	VAN DER HENST, J.-B. (2002). Le raisonnement humain. In G. Politzer (Ed.), Une interprétation pragmatique de la tâche de Wason. Hermès.

Tâche de Sternberg : Tâche de rappel développé par Sternberg qui consiste à présenter au participant des listes de 1 à 6 chiffres. À la fin de chaque liste, on présente au participant un chiffre-cible et on lui demande de dire si ce chiffre fait partie ou non de la liste mémorisée. L'analyse des résultats révèlent que le temps de réaction lors du rappel augmente de façon linéraire en fonction du nombre de chiffres de la liste et ce, que le chiffre-cible appartienne ou non à la liste. Selon Sternberg, ces résultats indiquent que le rappel en mémoire à court terme s'effectue au moyen d'un balayage exhaustif par comparaison séquentielle de l'information-cible e de l'information en MCT. Sternerg's task.

	STERNBERG, S. (1966). High-speed scanning in human memory. Science, 153, 652-654.

Tâche double : Épreuve cognitive qui consiste à demander aux participants de réaliser simultanément deux tâches. = tâche concurrente. Dual task.

Tâches domestiques : Ensemble des tâches qui consistent à nettoyer et à entrenir son domicile et son environnement immédiat. Tâche et division des tâches. = tâche ménagère. Household labor.

	PRESSER, H.B. (1994). Employment schedules among dual-earner spouses and the division of household labor by gender. American Sociological Review, 59, 348-364.
	PRESSER, H.B. (2000). Nonstandard work schedules and marital instability. Journal of Marriage & the Family, 62, 93-110.
	LAROCHE, D. (2001). Le partage du temps productif et des tâches domestiques. Institut de la statistique du Québec, Portrait social du Québec.

Tâche visuospatiale : Spatial task.

	RAUSCHER, F.H., SHAW, G.L. & KY, K.N. (1993). Music and spatial task performance. Nature, 365, 611.

Tachylalie : Du grec tacky qui signifie «vitesse». Chez les schizophrènes, accélération du débit verbal qui rend le discours incompréhensible.

Tact : Concept développé par Skinner pour désigner un lien ou un con-tact entre un mot (ou comportement verbal) et un objet (stimulus), lien qui peut-être renforcé ou puni. Tact et commande. = contact avec les contingences. Tact.

	SKINNER, B.F. (1957). Verbal behavior. New York : Appleton-Century-Crofts.	PARTINGTON, J. W., SUNDBERG, M.L., NEWHOUSE, L. & SPENGLER, S. (1994). Overcoming an autistic child's failure to acquire a tact repertoire. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 27 (4), 733-734. [PDF]
	WENRICH, W.W. (1964).The tact relation : An experiment in verbal behavior. Journal of General Psychology, 71,71-78.
	LEMARRE, J. & HOLLAND, J.G. (1985). The functional independence of mands and tacts. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 43, 5-19. [PDF]	FERGUS, L.C, HORNE, P.J., HARRIS, F.D., RANDLE, V.R. (2002). Naming and categorization in young children : vocal tact training. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 78 (3), 527-549. [PDF]
	PLACE, U.T. (1985). Three senses of the word "tact." Behaviorism, 13 (1), 63-74.	ARNTZEN, E. & ALMAAS, I.K. (2002). Effects of mand-tact vs. tact-only training on the acquisition of tacts. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 35, 419-422. [PDF]
	SKINNER, B.F. (1985). Reply to Place: "Three senses of the word 'tact.'" Behaviorism, 13 (1), 75-76.	MIGUEL, C.F., PETURSDOTTIR, A. & CARR, J. (2005). The effects of multiple-tact and receptive-discrimination training on the acquisition of intraverbal behavior. The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 21, 27-41. [LIRE]
	CARROLL R.J. & HESSE, B.E. (1987). The effects of alternating mand and tact training on the acquisition of tacts. The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 5, 55–65. [PDF]	WALLACE, M., IWATA, B.A. & HANLEY, G.P. (2006). Establishment of mands following tact training as a function of reinforcer strength. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 39, 17-24. [LIRE]
	STAFFORD, M.W., SUNDBERG, M.L. & BRAAM, S.J. (1988). A preliminary investigation of the consequences that define the mand and the tact. The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 8, 31-41. [PDF]	WILLIAMS, G., CARNERERO, J.J. & PÉREZ-GONZALEZ, L.A. (2006). Generalization of tacting actions in children with autism. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 39 (2), 233-237. [LIRE]
	SUNDBERG, M.L., SAN JUAN, B., DAWDY, M. & ARGUELLES, M. (1990). The acquisition of tacts, mands, and intraverbals by individuals with traumatic brain injury. The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 8, 83-99. [PDF]	MIGUEL, C.F., PETURSDOTTIR, A.I., CARR, J.E. & MICHAEL, J. (2008). The role of naming in stimulus categorization by preschool children. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 89, 383-405. [LIRE]
	HORNE, P.J. & LOWE, C.F. (1996). On the origins of naming and other symbolic behavior. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 65, 185-241. [PDF]
	SUNDBERG, M.L., ENDICOTT, K. & EIGENHEER, P. (2000). The use of intraverbal prompts to teach tacts to children with autism. The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 17, 89-104. [PDF]	LEDOUX, S.F. (2010). Increasing tact control and student comprehension through such new postcedent terms as added and subtracted reinforcers and punishers. Behaviorology Today, 13 (1), 3-6.

Taguieff Pierre-André (Paris 1946-) : Philosophe et politologue français, spécialiste de la théorie du complot et du racisme.

	TAGUIEFF, P.-A. (1995). Les fins de l'antiracisme. Paris : Michalon.
	TAGUIEFF, P.-A. (1998). Le Racisme. Un exposé pour comprendre, un essai pour réfléchir. Paris : Flammarion.
	TAGUIEFF, P.-A. (2000). L’Effacement de l’avenir. Paris : Galilée/Débats.
	TAGUIEFF, P.-A. (2005). La foire aux illuminés : Esotérisme, théorie du complot, extrémisme. Paris : Mille et une nuits.
	TAGUIEFF, P.-A. (2007). L'imaginaire du complot mondial. Aspects d'un mythe moderne. Paris : Mille et une nuits.

Taille : Mesure de la longueur ou de la hauteur d'un organisme, ou de certaines de ces caractéristiques (EX: longueur des défenses, de la queue, etc.). Taille et poids. Body size.

	OLIVIER, G. (1980). The Increase of stature in France. Journal of Human Evolution, 9, 645 649.
	ZIBERGELD, B. (1983). The shrinking of America : Myths of psychological change. Boston: Little Brown.
	WELLS, M.S. (1988). Effects of body size and resource value on fighting behaviour in a jumping spider. Animal Behaviour, 36, 321-326.
	BEACHAM, J.L. (1988). The relative importance of body size and aggressive experience as determinants of dominance in pumpkinseed sunfish, Lepomis gibbosus. Animal Behaviour, 36, 621–623.
	BEAUGRAND, J.P., GOULET, C. & PAYETTE, D. (1991). Outcome of dyadic conflict in male green swordtail fish (Xiphophorus helleri) : Effects of body size and prior dominance. Animal Behaviour, 41, 187-194.
	BEAUGRAND, J.P., PAYETTE, D. & GOULET, C. (1996). Conflict outcome in male green swordtail fish dyads (Xiphophorus helleri) : Interaction of body size, prior dominance/subordination experience and prior residency. Behaviour, 133, 303-319.
	SLATER, A., MATTOCK, A. & BROWN, E. (1990). Size constancy at birth : Newborn infants’ responses to retinal and real size. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 49, 314-322.
	COUTURIER, S., OTTO, R.D., CÔTÉ, S.D., LUTHER, G. & MAHONEY, S.P. (2010). Body size variations in caribou ecotypes and relationships with demography. Journal of Wildlife Management , 74, 395-404.

Tajfel Henri ( ) : Psychosociologue belge, spécialisé dans l'étude de l'identité sociale et de la discrimination. Professeur de Bourhis. Collaborateur de Turner.

	TAJFEL, H. (1970). Experiments in intergroup discrimination. Scientific American, 233 (5), 96-102.
	TAJFEL, H. BILLIG, M.G., BUNDY, R.P. & FLAMENT, C. (1971). Social categorization and intergroup behavior. European Journal of Social Psychology, 1 (2), 149-178.
	TAJFEL, H. (1974). Social identity and intergroup behaviour. Social Science Information, 13, 65-93.
	TAJFEL, H. (Ed.) (1978). Differentiation between social groups : Studies in the social psychology of intergroup relations. London : Academic Press.
	TAJFEL, H. (1982). Social psychology of intergroup relations. Annual Review of Psychology, 33, 1-39.

Talent/Talentueux : Ensemble des facteurs physiques et psychologiques qui permettent à un individu de se distinguer, de s'élever au dessus de la moyenne, dans un domaine particulier. = don. *douance. Innate talent, talent.

	RÉVÉSZ, G.(1941). The indivisibility of mathematical talent. Acta Psychologica, 5, 1-21.	LUBINSKI, D. & BENBOW, C.P. (1995). Optimal development of talent : Respond educationally to individual differences in personality. Educational Forum, 59, 381-392.
	GAGNÉ, F. (1983). Douance et talent : deux concepts à ne pas confondre. Apprentissage et Socialisation, 6, 146-159.	HOWE, M.J.A., DAVIDSON, J.W. & SLOBODA, J.A. (1998). Innate talents : Reality or myth? Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 21, 399-442.
	BARTON, J. M. & STARNES, W.T. (1988). Distinguishing characteristics of gifted and talented/learning disabled students. Special Issue: Gifted students with disabilities. Roeper-Review, 12 (1), 23-29.	SIMONTON, D.K. (1999). Talent and its development : An emergenic and epigenetic model. Psychological Review, 106, 435-457.
	GAGNÉ, F. (1991). Toward a differentiated model of giftedness and talent. In N. Colangelo & G.A. Davis (Eds.), Handbook of gifted education (pp. 65-80). Boston : Allyn and Bacon.	HELLER, K.A., MÖNKS, F.J., STERNBERG, R.J. & SUBOTNIK, R. (Eds.) (2000). International handbook for research on giftedness and talent. Oxford : Pergamon Press.
	MILLS, C.J. (1992). Academically talented children : The case for early identification and nurturance. Pediatrics, 89, 156-157.
	PALMQUIST, M. & YOUNG, R.E. (1992). The notion of giftedness and student expectations about writing. Written Communication, 9 (1), 137-168.	SHEA, D.L., LUBINSKI, D. & BENBOW, C.P. (2001). Importance of assessing spatial ability in talented young adolescents : A 20-year longitudinal study. Journal of Educational Psychology, 93, 604-614
	PALMQUIST, M. & YOUNG, R.E. (1992). Is writing a gift? The impact on students who believe it is. In J.R. Hayes, R.E. Young, M.L. Matchett, M. McCaffrey, C. Cochran & T. Hajduk (Eds.) Reading empirical research studies : The rhetoric of research. Hillsdale NJ : Erlbaum.

Tamminga Carol A. ( ) : Psychiatre américaine et spécialiste du traitement et de l'étude de la schizophrénie.

	TAMMINGA, C.A., SCHAFFER, M.H., SMITH, R.C., DAVIS, J.M. (1978). Schizophrenic symptoms improve with apomorphine. Science, 200, 567-568.
	TAMMINGA, C.A., CRAYTON, J.W., CHASE, T.N. (1979) Improvement in tardive dyskinesia after muscimol therapy. Archives of General Psychiatry, 36, 595-598.
	TAMMINGA, C.A. & SCHAFFER, M.H. (1979) Treatment of Schizophrenia with ergot derivatives. Psychopharmacology, 66, 239-242.
	TAMMINGA, C.A. (1998) Principles of the pharmacotherapy of schizophrenia. In B.S. Bunney, B.S. (Ed.), Neurobiology of psychiatric disorders (pp. 272-285). New York : Oxford University Press,
	TAMMINGA, C.A. (2005). Partial dopamine agonists and thetreatment of psychosis. Current Neuropharmacology, 3, 3-8. [PDF]

Tarabulsy George M. ( ) : Psychologue écologiste québécois et professeur à l'Université Laval. Collaborateur de Tessier.

	TARABULSY, G.M., TESSIER, R. & KAPPAS, A. (1996). Contingency detection and the contingent organization of behavior in interactions : Implications for socioemotional development in infancy. Psychological Bulletin, 119, 1-17.
	LAROSE, S., BERNIER, A. & TARABULSY, G.M. (2005). Attachment state of mind, students’ learning dispositions, and academic performance during the college transition. Developmental Psychology, 41, 281-289.
	TARABULSY, G.M., BERNIER, A., PROVOST, M.A., MARANDA, J., LAROSE, S., MOSS, E., LAROSE, M. & TESSIER, R. (2005). Another look inside the gap : Ecological contributions to the transmission of attachment in a sample of adolescent mother-infant dyads. Developmental Psychology, 41, 212-224.
	TARABULSY, G.M., PASCUZZO, K., MOSS, E., ST-LAURENT, D., BERNIER, A. & CYR, C. (2008). Attachment-based interventions for maltreating families. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 78, 322-332.
	TARABULSY, G.M., MORAN, G., PEDERSON, D.R., PROVOST, M. & LAROSE, S. (2011). Adolescent motherhood, maternal sensitivity and early infant development. In D.W. Davis & C. Logdson (Eds.), Maternal sensitivity : A critical review for practitioners. Haupauge, NY: Nova Publishers.

Tarde Gabriel (Sarlat France 1843-1904 Paris) : Criminologue, sociologue et philosophe français. Il s'est notamment intéressé aux foules et à l'imitation. Il fut également un farouche adversaire des thèses de Durkheim.

	TARDE, G. (1880). La croyance et le désir ; la possibilité de leur mesure. Revue Philosophique, 10, 150-180/264-283.
	TARDE, G. (1887). Publications récentes sur la psychologie criminelle. Revue philosophique, 24, 625-644.
	TARDE, G. (1889). Le crime et l’épilepsie. Revue Philosophique, 27, 49-469.
	TARDE, G. (1890/2001). Les lois de l'imitation. Paris : Alcan/ Paris : Les empêcheurs de penser en rond.
	TARDE, G. (1901/1989/2006). L'opinion et la foule. Paris : Prresses Universitaires de France/L'Harmattan.

Tardif Jacques ( ) : Pédagogue socio-constructivisme et professeur à l'Université de Sherbrooke, spécialisé dans l'étude des compétences et du transfert des connaissances. Collaborateur de Meirieu.

	TARDIF, J. (1992). Pour un enseignement stratégique. L’apport de la psychologie cognitive. Montréal : Éditions Logiques.
	TARDIF, J. et MEIRIEU, P. (1996). Stratégie pour favoriser le transfert des connaissances. Vie pédagogique, 98, 4-7.
	TARDIF, J. (1998). Intégrer les nouvelles technologies de l’information. Quel cadre pédagogique? Paris : ESF.
	TARDIF, J. (1999). Le transfert des apprentissages. Montréal : Éditions Logiques.
	TARDIF, J. (2006). L’évaluation des compétences. Documenter le parcours de développement. Montréal : Chenelière Éducation.

Tardif Maurice ( ) : Pédagogue québécois et professeur à l'Université du Québec à Montréal. Collaborateur de Gauthier et Lessard.

	TARDIF, M., BÉLANGER, N. et GRENIER, D. (1994). L'idéologie cognitiviste et l'éducation. Canadian Journal of Education/Revue canadienne de l’éducation, 19 (3), 316-330.
	TARDIF, M., LESSARD, C. et GAUTHIER, C. (Dirs.) (1998). Formation des maîtres et contextes sociaux. Perspectives internationales. Paris : Pressses Universitaires de France.
	TARDIF, M. et LESSARD, C. (1999). Le travail enseignant au quotidien. Expérience, interactions humaines et dilemmes professionnels. Québec : Presses de l'Université Laval/ Bruxelles : De Boeck.
	TARDIF, M. et GAUTHIER, C. (Dirs.) (1999). Pour ou contre un ordre professionnel des enseignantes et des enseignants au Québec. Québec : Les Presses de l'Université Laval.
	TARDIF, M. et LESSARD, C. (2004). La profession d’enseignant aujourd’hui. Évolutions, perspectives et enjeux internationaux. Québec/Belgique : Presses de l’Université Laval/de Boeck.

Tarski Alfred (Varsovie 1902-1983 Berkeley États-Unis) : Philosophe et logicien américain d'origine polonaise. Collaborateur de Nagel et Suppes.

	TARSKI, A. (1944). The semantic conception of truth and the foundations of semantics. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research, 4, 341-376.
	NAGEL, E., SUPPES, P. & TARSKI, A. (1962). Logic, methodology and philosophy of science. Stanford : Stanford University Press.
	TARSKI, A. (1972). Logique, sémantique, mathématique. Paris : Armand Collin.

Tashakkori Abbas ( ) : Psychosociologue américain et spécialiste des méthodes mixtes.

	TASHAKKORI, A. & TEDDLIE, C. (1998). Mixed methodology : Combining qualitative and quantitative approaches. Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage.
	TASHAKKORI, A. & TEDDLIE, C. (2003). Handbook of mixed methods in social and behavioral research. Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage.
	TEDDLIE, C. & TASHAKKORI, A. (2006). A general typology of research designs featuring mixed methods. Research in the Schools, 13 (1), 12-28.
	TASHAKKORI, A. & CRESWELL, J. (2008). Mixed methodology across disciplines. Journal of Mixed Methods Research, 2 (1), 1-5.
	TASHAKKORI, A. & TEDDLIE, C. (2010). Putting the human back in “human research methodology”: The researcher in mixed methods research. Journal of Mixed Methods Research, 4 (4), 271-277.

T.A.T. : Voir Test d'aperception thématique.

Tatouage : Signe corporel inscrit dans la peau. Tatouage.

	DEGELMAN, D. & PRICE, N.D. (2002). Tattoos and ratings of personal characteristics. Psychological Reports, 90, 507-514.

Tautologie :

	RACHLIN, H.C. (1971). On the tautology of the matching law. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 15, 249-251.

Taux : Le taux s'exprime habituellement en pourcentage. Rate.

	FLEISS, J.L. (1981). Statistical methods for rates and proportions. New York : John Wiley.
	GILLES, A. (1984). Éléments de méthodologie et d'analyse statistique pour les sciences sociales. St-Laurent : Mcgraw-Hill Éditeurs.

Taux de réponse (d'un organisme) : Nombre de réponses émises par unité de temps. = fréquence relative d'un comportement. Rate of responding.

	KILLEEN, P.R., HANSON, S.J. & OSBORNE S.R. (1978). Arousal : its genesis and manifestation as response rate. Psychological Review, 85 (6), 571-581.
	MALCUIT, G., POMERLEAU, A. et MAURICE, P. (1995). Psychologie de l'apprentissage : termes et concepts. St-Hyacinthe : Edisem.

Taux de réponse (à un sondage) : Nombre d'individus sollicités pour répondre à un sondage (= participant) ou à un questionnaire divisé par le nombre de répondant. Taux de réponse et relance. Response rates.

	MATTESON, M. (1974). Type of transmittal letter and questionnaire colour as two variables influencing response rates in a mail survey. Journal of Applied Psychology, 39, 533-536.

Tavris Carol Anne (1944-) : Psychosociolologue et féministe américaine. Collaboratrice d'Aronson et de Russo.

	TAVRIS, C. (1993). The mismeasure of woman. Feminism & Psychology, 3, 149-168.
	TAVRIS, C. (1992). The longest war : Sex differences in perspective. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
	TAVRIS, C. (1992). The mismeasure of woman : Why women are not the better sex, the opposite sex, or the inferior sex. New York : Simon and Schuster.
	TAVRIS, C. (1989). Anger : The misunderstood emotion. New York : Simon & Schuster/Touchstone.
	TAVRIS, C. & SADD, S. (1977). The redbook report on female sexuality. New York : Delacorte.

Taxie : Chez les animaux, réactions innées d'orientation et de locomotion provoquées par des stimuli de l'environnement physique (lumière, humidité, chaleur). Taxie et tropisme.

	ABERCROMBIE, M., HICKMAN, C.J. & JOHNSON, M.L. (1980). Dictionary of biology. Londres : Penguin.

Taxon :

	MEEHL, P.E. (2004) What's in a taxon? Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 113, 39-43.

Taxonomie : Principes et règles de classification des objets réels et des concepts (inclusion, similitude, hiérarchie, etc.), notamment des animaux. = taxinomie. Taxonomy.

	PEARCE, P.L. & AMATO, P.R. (1980). A taxonomy of helping : A multidimensional scaling analysis. Social Psychology Quarterly, 43 (4), 363-371.
	RAVEN, B.H. (1986). A taxonomy of power in human relations. Annals of Psychiatry, 16, 633- 636.
	BLACKBURN, R. (1986) Patterns of personality deviation among violent offenders : replication and extension of an empirical taxonomy. British Journal of Criminology, 26, 254-269.
	BORMAN W.C. & BRUSH, D.H. (1993). More progress toward a taxonomy of managerial performance requirements. Human Performance, 6, 1- 21.
	SZIRMAK, Z. & DE RAAD, B. (1994). Taxonomy and structure of Hungarian personality traits. European Journal of Personality, 8, 95-117.
	GATI, I., KRAUSZ, M. & OSIPOW, S.H. (1996). A taxonomy of difficulties in career decision making. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 43 (4), 510-526.
	KIPNIS, D. (1997). Ghosts, taxonomies, and social psychology. American Psychologist, 52, 205-211.
	DEHAENE, S., CHANGEUX, J.P., NACCACHE, L., SACKUR, J. & SERGENT, C. (2006). Conscious, preconscious, and subliminal processing : A testable taxonomy. Trends in Cognitive Sciences, 10, 204-211.
	ABERCROMBIE, M., HICKMAN, C.J. & JOHNSON, M.L. (1980). Dictionary of biology. Londres : Penguin.

Taxonomie de Bloom : Taxonomie des objectifs d'apprentissage conçue par Bloom. Ces six objectifs sont : 1) Savoir; 2) Compréhension; 3) Application; 4) Analyse; 5) Synthèse; 6) Évaluation. Bloom's taxonomy.

Niveaux	Objectifs généraux	Verbes d'action/Objectifs spécifiques
1	Savoir	Arranger, définir, dupliquer, étiqueter, lister, mémoriser, nommer, ordonner, identifier, relier, rappeler, répéter, reproduire
2	Compréhension	Classifier, décrire, discuter, expliquer, exprimer, identifier, indiquer, situer, reconnaître, rapporter, reformuler, réviser, choisir, traduire
3	Application	Appliquer, choisir, démontrer, dramatiser, employer, illustré, interpréter, opérer, pratiquer, planifier, schématiser, résoudre, utiliser, écrire
4	Analyse	Analyser, estimer, calculer, catégoriser, comparer, contraster, critiquer, différencier, discriminer, distinguer, examiner, expérimenter, questionner, tester
5	Synthèse	Arranger, assembler, collecter, composer, construire, créer, concevoir, développer, formuler, gérer, organiser, planifier, préparer, proposer, installer, écrire
6	Évaluation	Arranger, argumenter, évaluer, rattacher, choisir comparer, justifier estimer, juger, prédire, chiffrer, élaguer, sélectionner, soutenir

	BLOOM, B.S. & KRATHWOHL, D.R. (1956/75). Taxonomy of educational objectives : The classification of educational goals, by a committee of college and university examiners. Handbook I : Cognitive Domain. New York : Longmans Green / Taxonomie des objectifs pédagogiques : Vol. 1 : Domaine cognitif. Montréal : PUQ.
	KRATHWOHL, D.R., BLOOM, B.S. et MASIA, B.B. (1970). Taxonomie des objectifs pédagogiques. Tome 2 (le domaine affectif). Éducation nouvelle.
	ANDERSON, L. & KRATHWOHL, D.R. (2001). Taxonomy for learning, teaching and assessing : A revision of Bloom's taxonomy of educational objectives. New York : Longman.
	WITTROCK, M.C. (2001). A taxonomy for learning, teaching and assessing : A revision of Bloom's taxonomy. New York : Allyn & Bacon.
	LEGENDRE, R. (1993). Dictionnaire actuel de l'éducation. Montréal : Guérin/Paris : ESKA.

Taylor Calvin W. (1915-2000) : Psychométricien américain et spécialiste de l'étude de l'intelligence et de la créativité. Étudiant de Thurstone.

	TAYLOR, C.W. (1968). Cultivating new talents : A way to reach the educationally deprived. The Journal of Creative Behavior, 2, 83-90.
	TAYLOR, C.W. (1964). Creativity: Progress and potential.
	TAYLOR, C.W. (1972). Climate for creativity. New York : Pergamon.
	TAYLOR, C.W. (1986). Cultivating simultaneous student growth in both multiple creative talents and knowledge. In J.S. Renzulli (Ed.), Systems and models for developing programs for the gifted and talented (pp. 307-350).

Taylor Charles (1931-) : Philosophe québécois. Il s'est notamment intéressé aux concepts d'identité sociale, d'individualisme et de modernité.

	TAYLOR, C. (1964). The explanation of behaviour. Londres : Routledge & Kagan Paul.
	TAYLOR, C. (1987/98). The sources of the self / Les sources du moi : la formation de l’identité moderne. Harvard : Harvard University Press/Montréal : Boréal.
	TAYLOR, C. (1992). Grandeur et misère de la modernité. Québec : Éditions Bellarmin.
	TAYLOR, C. (1994). Multiculturalisme, différence et démocratie. France : Aubier.

Taylor Frederick Winslow (Germantown États-Unis 1856-1915) : Ingénieur, spécialiste de l'organisation scientifique du travail et père d'un mouvement qui porte maintenant son nom, le Taylorisme.

	TAYLOR, F.W. (1912). Shop management.
	TAYLOR, F.W. (1912). Principles of scientific management.

Taylor Richard (1919-2003) : Philosophe américain et spécialiste de la métaphysique. Étudiant de Chisholm et professeur de Lehrer.

	TAYLOR, R. (1963). Metaphysics.
	TAYLOR, R. (1966). Action and purpose.
	TAYLOR, R. (1970). Good and evil.
	TAYLOR, R. (1991). Virtue ethics.

Taylorisme : Doctrine et système d'organisation du travail formulés par Taylor. Taylorism.

Teacher Educator (The...) : Revue scientifique qui consacre ses pages à l'enseignement . Éditeur : Taylor & Francis.

MOORE, K.D. & MARKAM, J.S. (1983). A competency model for the evaluation of teacher education program graduates. The Teacher Educator, 19 (1), 20-31.

Teachers College Record : Revue scientifique qui consacre ses pages à l'enseignement .

HUBERMAN, A.M. & MILES, M.B. (2002). Rethinking the quest for school improvement : Some findings from the DESSI study. Teachers College Record, 86 (1), 34-54.

Teachers Exceptional Children/Plus : Revue scientifique qui consacre ses pages à l'enseignement des enfants surdoués et talentueux.

LINDSLEY, O.R. (1990). Precision teaching : By teachers for children. Teaching Exceptional Children, 22 (3), 10-15.

Teaching & Teacher Education : Revue scientifique qui consacre ses pages à l'enseignement . Éditeur : Elsevier.

GOOD, T.L, SLAVINGS, R. & MASON, D. (1988). Learning to ask questions : Grade and school effects. Teaching & Teacher Education, 4 (4), 363-378.

Teaching of Psychology : Revue scientifique qui consacre ses pages à l'enseignement de la psychologie. Éditeur : Routdlege.

BROTHEN, T. & WAMBACH, C. (2001). Effective student use of computerized quizzes. Teaching of Psychology, 28 (4), 292-294.

Teaching Thinking & Problem Solving(1979-1995) : Revue scientifique qui consacre ses pages à l'enseignement . Éditeur : Routdlege.

JACKENDOFF, R. (1991). The paradox of language acquisition. Teaching Thinking & Problem Solving, 13 (5), 1-6.

Teasdale John D. ( ) : Psychologue cognitiviste américain, d'origine anglaise, spécialisé dans l'étude de la résignation acquise et de la dépression. Collaborateur de Abramson et Seligman.

	TEASDALE, J.D., FENNELL, M.J.V., HIBBERT, G.A. & AMIES, P.L. (1984). Cognitive therapy for major depressive disorder in primary care. British Journal of Psychiatry, 144, 400-406.
	TEASDALE, J.D. (1985). Psychological treatments for depression : How do they work? Behaviour Research & Therapy, 23, 157-165.
	TEASDALE, J.D. (1997). Assessing cognitive mediation of relapse prevention in recurrent mood disorders. Clinical Psychology and Psychotherapy, 4, 145-156.
	TEASDALE, J.D. (1999). Emotional processing, three modes of mind and the prevention of relapse in depression. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 37, S53-S78.
	TEASDALE, J.D., SCOTT, J., MOORE, R.G., HAYHURS, H., POPE, M. & PAYKEL, E.S. (2001). How does cognitive therapy prevent relapse in residual depression ? Evidence from a controlled trial. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 69 (3), 347-357. [PDF]

Technique : Terme générique qui désigne ce que l'on fait pour résoudre un problème ou atteindre un objectif, par opposition à la méthode qui décrit et explique pourquoi l'on fait ce que l'on fait. En principe, une technique repose sur des connaissances et des méthodes, mais il existe des techniques efficaces sans rationnel clair ou évident (Ex: les techniques d'anesthésie qui se sont développées sans que l'on comprenne exactement pourquoi et comment le cerveau «s'endormaient»).

Technique d'apprentissage : Voir Apprentissage.

Technique de mise en marché : Voir Mise en marché.

Technique de modification du comportement : Voir Modification du comportement.

Technique de persuasion : Manière d'influencer et de manipuler autrui. = stratégie de persuasion. ( ): technique de la porte-dans-la-face, technique du leurre, technique du low-ball, technique du pied-dans-la-porte.

Technique de recherche : Manière de collecter les données d'une recherche empirique.

Techniques de tri qualitatif : Q-sort method.

Technique thérapeutique : Désigne une façon particulière d'aider et de guérir un patient/client. En ce sens, une thérapie est un ensemble de techniques qui reposent sur des principes et des données scientifiques (qui expliquent évaluent l'efficacité de ces techniques) et l'exercice de ces techniques en conditions réelles (pratique).

Technique thérapeutique directive : Ensemble des techniques utilisées par la plupart des psychologues, sauf les humanistes, techniques qui, comme le nom l'indique, tentent d'amener systématiquement le client vers un but précis (révéler son inconscient, modifier ses comportements, prendre conscience de ses erreurs de raisonnement, accepter son sort, etc.). La plupart des humanistes préconisent plutôt des techniques qui permettent au client de trouver sa voie, de fixer leurs propres objectifs, reléguant ainsi le thérapeute au rôle d'accompagnateur ou de guide.

Technique thérapeutique non-directive : Ensemble des techniques utilisées par les humanistes, techniques qui, comme le nom l'indique, ne tente pas d'amener systématiquement le client vers un but précis (révéler son inconscient, modifier ses comportements, prendre conscience de ses erreurs de raisonnement, etc.), mais plutôt de favoriser un climat d'échange qui encourage le client à parler de lui, de ses expériences. ( ): l'empathie, la clarification, la reformulation et le reflet.

Technique de la porte-dans-la-face : Technique de persuasion en deux temps qui consiste d'abord à faire une demande ou une offre exagée à autrui, sachant qu'elle sera refusée, puis de revenir à la charge avec une offre ou une demande beaucoup plus raisonnable, mais qui en temps normal n'aurait probablement pas été accepté. Technique du pied-dans-la-porte et persuasion. = stratégie de la porte-dans-le-nez. Door-in-the-face technique, door-in-the-face procedure.

	CIALDINI, R.B., VINCENT, J.E., LEWIS, S.K., CATALAN, J., WHEELER, D. & DARBY, B.L. (1975). Reciprocal concessions procedure for inducing compliance : The door-in-the-face technique. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 31, 206-215.	DILLARD, J.P., HUNTER, J.E. & BURGOON, M. (1984). Sequential-request strategies : Meta-analysis of foot-in-the-door and door-in-the-face. Human Communication Research, 10, 461-488.
	CANN, A., SHERMAN, S.J. & ELKES, R. (1975). Effects of initial request size and timing of a second request on compliance : The foot in the door and the door in the face. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 32, 774-782.	OLDMAN, M. (1986). Compliance employing a combined foot-in-the-door and door-in-the-face procedure. Journal of Social Psychology, 126, 111-116.
	PENDLETON, M.G. & BATSON, C.D. (1979). Self-presentation and the door-in-the-face technique for inducing compliance. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 5 (1), 77-81.	ABRAHAMS, M.F. & BELL, R.A. (1994). Encouraging charitable contributions : An examination of three models of door-in-the-face Compliance. Communication Research, 21, 131-153.
	SCHWARZWALD, J., RAZ, M. & ZVIBEL, M. (1979). The applicability of the door-in-the face technique when established behavioral customs exist. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 9 (6), 576-586.	O'KEEFE, D.J. & HALE, S.L. (1998). The door-in-the-face influence strategy : A random-effects meta-analytic review. In M.E. Roloff (Ed.), Communication yearbook 21 (pp. 1-33). Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage.
	SHANAB, M. & ISONIO, S. (1980). The effects of delay upon compliance with socially undesirable requests in the Door-in-the-Face paradigm. Bulletin of the Psychonomic Society 15, 76–78.	O'KEEFE, D.J. & FIGGE, M. (1997). A guilt-based explanation of the door-in-the-face influence strategy. Human Communication Research, 24 (1), 64-81.
	MOWEN, J.C. & CIALDINI, R.B. (1980). On implementing the door-in-the-face compliance technique in a business context. Journal of Marketing Research, 27, 253-258.	TUSING, K.J. & DILLARD, J.P. (2000). The psychological reality of the door-in-the-face : It’s Helping, not Bargaining. Journal of Language & Social Psychology, 19 (1), 5-25.
	GOLDMAN, M., & CREASON, C. (1981). Inducing compliance by a two-door-in-the face pro- cedure and a self-determination request. The Journal of Social Psychology 114, 229–235.	GUÉGUEN, N. & JACOB, C. (2001). Fund raising on the Web : The effect of the electronic Foot-in-the-Door on prosocial request. CyberPsychology & Behavior, 4 (6), 705-709.
	GOLDMAN, M., McVEIGH, J.F. & RICHTERKESSING, J.L. (1984). Door-in-the-face procedure : Reciprocal concession, perceptual contrast, or worthy person. Journal of Social Psychology, 123, 245-251.	PASCUAL, A. & GUÉGUEN, N. (2005). Foot-in-the-door and door-in-the-face : A comparative Meta-analytic study. Psychological Reports, 96 (1), 122-128. [PDF]
		EBSTER C. & NEUMAYR, B. (2008). Applying the door-in-the-face compliance technique to retailing. The International Review of Retail, Distribution and Consumer Research, 18 (1), 121–128.
		GUÉGUEN, N. & JACOB, C. MEINERI, S. (2011). Effects of the door-in-the-face technique on restaurant customers’ behavior. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 30, 759-761. [PDF]

Technique de modification du comportement : Voir Comportement.

Technique du leurre : Technique de persuasion fondée sur l'engagement. = stratégie du leurre.

Technique du low-ball : Technique de persuasion fondée sur l'engagement. = stratégie du low-ball. Low-ball procedure.

	CIALDINI, R.B. & CACIOPPO, J., BASSET, R. & MILLER, B.L. (1978). Low-ball procedure for producing compliance : Commitment then cost. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 36, 599-604.
	GUÉGUEN, N., PASCUAL A. & DAGOT L. (2002). The low-ball techniqu e: An application in a field setting. Psychological Reports, 91, 81-84. [PDF]

Technique du pied-dans-la-porte : Technique de persuasion en deux temps qui consiste d'abord à faire une demande à autrui peu exigente ou une offre-que-l'on-ne-peut-refuser, sachant qu'elle sera d'emblé acceptée, puis de revenir à la charge avec une offre ou une demande beaucoup plus importante, qui en temps normal n'aurait probablement pas été accepté. Technique du pied-dans-la-porte et persuasion. = stratégie du pied-dans-la-porte, le pied-dans-la-porte. FITD, foot-in-the-door technique, foot-in-the-door technique.

	FREEDMAN, J.L. & FRASER, S.C. (1966). Compliance without pressure : The foot-in-the-door technique. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 4, 196-202.	DILLIARD, J. (1990). Self-inference and the foot-in-the-door technique : Quantity of behavior and attitudinal mediation. Human Communication Research, 16, 422-447.
	BEAMAN, A.L., SVANUM, S., MANLOVE, S. & HAMPTON, C. (1974). An attribution theory explanation of the foot-in-the-door effect. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 1, 122–123.
	CANN, A., SHERMAN, S.J. & ELKES, R. (1975). Effects of initial request size and timing of a second request on compliance : The foot in the door and the door in the face. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 32, 774-782.	GORASSINI, D. & OLSON, J. (1995). "Does self-perception change explain the foot-in-the door effect?" Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 69, 91-105.
	ZUCKERMAN, M., AZZARO, M. & WALDGEIR, D. (1979). "Undermining effects of the foot-in-the-door technique with extrinsic rewards. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 9, 292-296.	DOLIN, D.J. & BOOTH-BUTTERFIELD, S. (1995). Foot-in-the-door and cancer prevention. Health Communication, 7 (1), 55.
	BEAMAN, A.L., COLE, M., PRESTON, M., LENTZz, B. & MEHRKENS-STEBLAY, N. (1983). Fifteen years of foot-in-the-door research : A meta-analysis. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 9, 181–196.
	DILLIARD, J., HUNTER, J. & BURGOON, M. (1984). Sequential request persuasive strategies : Meta-analysis of foot-in-the-door and door-in-the-face. Human Communication Research, 10, 461-488.	GUÉGUEN, N. & JACOB, C. (2001). Fund raising on the Web : The effect of the electronic foot-in-the-door on prosocial request. CyberPsychology & Behavior, 4 (6), 705-709. [PDF]
	OLDMAN, M. (1986). Compliance employing a combined foot-in-the-door and door-in-the-face procedure. Journal of Social Psychology, 126, 111-116.	GUÉGUEN, N. (2002). Foot-in-the-door and computer-mediated communication. Computers in Human Behavior, 18 (1), 11-15. [PDF]
	JOULE, R.-V. (1987). Le pied-dans-la-porte: Un paradigme à la recherche d’une théorie. Psychologie Française, 32, 301–306.	BURGER, J.M. & CALDWELL, D.F. (2003). The effects of monetary incentives and labeling on the foot-in-the-door effect : Evidence for a self-perception process. Basic & Applied Social Psychology, 25 (3), 235.
	VREDENBURG, H. & MARSHALL, J. (1988). Extending the external validity of the FITD effect to the industrial marketplace. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 16 (2), 49-56.	PASCUAL, A. (2005). Foot-in-the-door and door-in-the-face : A comparative meta-analytic study. Psychological Reports, 96 (1), 122.
	GRIFFITHS, M. (2010). Online gambling, social responsibility and 'foot-in-the-door' techniques. i-Gaming Business, 62, 100-101.	GUÉGUEN, N., MEINERI, S., GRANDJEAN, I. & MARTIN, A. (2010). The combined effect of the Foot-in-the-Door technique and the “But you are free of technique”: An evaluation on the selective sorting of household wastes. EcoPsychology, 2 (4), 231-237. [PDF]

Technologie/Technologue : Toute discipline qui a pour but de de modifier les propriétés de son objet d'étude au moyen de techniques dont l'efficacité a été éprouvée scientifiquement (du moins en principe...). En psychologie, ces techniques se nomment thérapie. La psychologie clinique est donc une technologie car son but premier est d'aider et de guérir un patient/client/malade, donc de modifier les états psychologiques de cet individu, et non de décrire et d'expliquer ces états comme le fait la science. En principe, science et technologie travaillent en étroite collaboration : la pratique d'une technologie repose donc sur des connaissances acquises par la science (en grande partie mais non exclusivement); en retour, les praticiens des technologies communiquent à la science leurs observations cliniques et leurs interrogations, qui guident la science vers de nouveaux problèmes et contribuent à la découverte de nouvelles connaissances/solutions. EX: La médecine, le génie, la psychologie clinique. Le technologue est donc un rofessionnel qui utilise les connaissances développées par la science pour résoudre des problèmes concrets. EX: Guérir une dépression, un mal de ventre, construire un pont, analyser la qualité de l'eau, modifier le comportement d'un enfant hyperactif, etc. Science et technologie. = techniques scientifiques, thérapeutes, cliniciens. *science appliquée. Technology, practice.

Psychologie scientifique (= Science)


Connaissances	Observations cliniques


Psychologie clinique ( = Technologie)

	MECHNER, F. (1963). Science education and behavioral technology. In R. Glaser (Ed.), Teaching machines and programmed learning II (pp. 441-508). Washington, DC : National Education Association.
	WILLEMS, E.P. (1974). Behavioral technology and behavioral ecology. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7 (1), 151–165. [PDF]
	GOLDIAMOND, I. (1976). Protection of human subjects and patients : a social contingency analysis of distinctions between research and practice, and its implications. Behaviorism, 4 (1), 1- 41.
	BUNGE, M. (1991). Le système technique-science-philosophie : un ménage à trois fécond. Revue Internationale de Systémique, 5, 171-180.
	LATOUR, B. (1992). Aramis ou l'amour des techniques. Paris : La Découverte.
	JOHNSTON, J.M. (1996). Distinguishing between applied research and practice. The Behavior Analyst, 19 (1), 35-47. [PDF]
	MARTELL, C.R. & HOLLON S.D. (2001). Working together on shifting ground : Researcher and clinician collaboration in clinical trials. The Behavior Therapist, 24 (7), 144-146.
	HAWKINS, R.P. & ANDESON, C.M. (2002). On the distinction between science and practice : A reply to Thyer and Adkins. The Behavior Analyst, 25, 115-119. [PDF]

Technologie de l'information et de la communication (TIC) : Ensemble des technologies - principalement l'ordinateur - qui favorisent l'apprentissage scolaire, la formation du personnel et la comminication de renseignement divers. TIC et apprentissage assisté par ordinateur. = NTIC, TIC, TICE, IT. E-Learning, educationnal technology.

	LAURILLARD, D. (1993). Rethinking university teaching : a framework for the effective use of educational technology. Londres : Routledge.	CARROLL, D.W. (2004). Web-based assignments in the psychology of language class. Teaching of Psychology, 31, 204-206.
	KERKMAN, D., KELLISON, K., PINON, M., SCHIMDT, D. & LEWIS, S. (1994). The quiz game : Writing and explaining questions improve quiz scores. Teaching of Psychology, 21 (2), 104-06.	DEBORD, K.A., ARUGUETE, M.S. & MUHLIG, J. (2004). Are computer-assisted teaching methods effective? Teaching of Psychology, 31 (1), 65-68.
	BOSTOW, D.E., KRITCH, K.M. & TOMPKINS, B.F. (1995). Computers and pedagogy : Replacing telling with interactive computer-programmed instruction. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments & Computers, 27, 297-300.	SCHULT, C.A. & McINTSOH, J.L. (2004). Employing computer-administered exams in general psychology : student anxiety and expectations. Teaching of Psychology, 31 (3), 209-211.
	WHITE, R.J. & HAMMER, C.A. (2000). Quiz-o-Matic : A free Web-based tool for constructionof self-scoring on-line quizzes. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments & Computers, 32, 250-253.	KARSENTI, T. et LAROSE, F. (2005). L'intégration pédagogique des TIC dans le travail enseignant : recherches et pratiques. Québec : Presses de l'Université du Québec.
	BEAUDOIN, M.F. (2002). Learning or lurking? Tracking the "invisible" online student. The Internet & Higher Education, 5 (2), 147-155.	BARRETTE C. (2005). Vers une méta-synthèse des impacts des TIC sur l’apprentissage et l’enseignement dans les établissements du réseau collégial québécois. Mise en perspective. Clic, 57, 18-24.
	MAGLI, R. et WINIKIN, Y. (2002). Changement dans le rapport au savoir et au pouvoir : une approche ethnographique des TICE à l’école. Dans R. Guir (Dir.), Pratiquer les TICE, former les enseignants et les formateurs à de nouveaux usages (p. 63-75). Bruxelles : de Boeck.	DEAUDELIN, C. LEFEBVRE, S. BRODEUR, M., MERCIER, J., DUSSAULT, M. & RICHER, J. (2005). Évolution des pratiques et des conceptions de l’enseignement, de l’apprentissage et des TIC chez des enseignants du primaire en contexte de développement professionnel. Le Développement Professionnel des Enseignants, 31 (1), 79-110.
	MILLER, M.T. & POPE, M.L. (2003). Integrating technology into new student orientation programs at community colleges. Community College Journal of Research & Practice, 27, 15-33.	BIBEAU, R. (2006). Les TIC à l’école : proposition de taxinomies et analyse de quelques obstacles à leur intégration en classe, In Le matériel didactique et pédagogique : soutien à l’appropriation ou déterminant de l’intervention éducative (p. 297-325). Québec : Les Presses de l’Université Laval.
	POIRIER, C.R. & FELDMAN, R.S. (2004). Teaching in cyberspace : Online versus traditional instruction using a waiting-list experimental design. Teaching of Psychology, 31 (1), 59-61.	BARRETTE C. (2007). Réussir l'intégration pédagogique des TIC - un guide d'action de plus en plus précis. Bulletin Clic, 63, 11-19.
	GRANT, L.K. (2004). Teaching positive reinforcement on the internet. Teaching of Psychology, 31 (1), 69-71.	GRABE, M. FLANNERY, K. & CHRISTOPHERSON, K. (2008). Voluntary use of online study questions as a function of previous minimal use requirements and learner aptitude. The Internet and Higher Education, 11 (3-4), 145-151.

Technostructure : Chez Galbraith, concept selon lequel les individus qui prennent les décisions au sein des entreprises n'appartiennent plus à la classe des détenteurs de capitaux - les propriétaires ou les actionnaires - mais plutôt à une nouvelle catégorie d'acteurs qui se distinguent par ses connaissances technologiques et scientifiques : les gestionnaires (ou technologues).

Tectum : Partie sous-corticale du cerveau, plus précisément du mésencéphale.

	CARPENTER, M.B. & SUTIN, J. (1983). Human neuroanatomy. Londres : Williams & Wilkins.

Tegmentum : Partie sous-corticale du cerveau, plus précisément du mésencéphale. Il s'agit d'un réseau de neurones multisynaptique situé dans le tronc cérébral. Elle contient la substance noire (ou substentia nigra) et le noyau rouge, qui sont contribue à la posture, à son maintien, ainsi qu'aux mouvements volontaires.

	CARPENTER, M.B. & SUTIN, J. (1983). Human neuroanatomy. Londres : Williams & Wilkins.

Teilhard de Chardin Pierre (Sarcenat France 1881-1955 New-York) : Paléontologiste, géologue et philosophe français.

	TEILHARD DE CHARDIN, P. (1955). Le phénomène humain. Paris : Éditions du Seuil.
	TEILHARD DE CHARDIN, P. (1956). Le groupe zoologique Humain. Paris : Éditions Albin Michel.
	TEILHARD DE CHARDIN, P. (1957). Le milieu divin. Paris : Éditions du Seuil.
	TEILHARD DE CHARDIN, P. (1959). L'Avenir de l'Homme. Paris : Éditions du Seuil.
	TEILHARD DE CHARDIN, P. (1973). Man's place in nature. New York : Harper & Row.

Téléologie : Teleology.

	ROSENBLUETH, A., WIENER, N. & BIGELOW, J. (1943). Behavior, purpose and teleology. Philosophy of Science, 10, 18-24. [PDF]
	WRIGHT, L. (1968). The Case against teleological reductionism. The British Journal for the Philosophy of Science, 19, 211-23.
	WRIGHT, L. (1972). Explanation and teleology. Philosophy of Science, 39 (2), 204-218.
	WOODFIELD, A. (1976). Teleology, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press.
	WRIGHT, L. (1976). Teleological explanation. Berkeley : University of California Press.
	WRIGHT, L. (1977). Teleology. International Studies in Philosophy, 9, 187-189.
	NAGEL, E. (1979). Teleology revisited and other essays in the philosophy and history of science. New York : Columbia University Press.

Téléonomie : Du grec telos, qui signifie «but» et nomos, qui veut dure «loi».

	MONOD, J. (1970). Le hasard et la nécessité. Paris : Seuil.

Télépathie : Du grec tele qui signifie «à distance» pathos qui signifie «être touché par, être affecté». Forme de perception extra-sensorielle. Il s'agit en fait d'une croyance, donc d'une p seudophénomène qui consisterait en la capacité de communiquer à distance, par la pensée, sans la parole. Télépathie et parapsychologie. Telepathy.

	ROHEIM, G. (1932). Telepathy in a dream. Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 1, 277-291.
	ELLIS, A. (1947). Telepathy and psychoanalysis : a critique of recent findings. Psychiatric Quarterly, 21, 607-659.
	SOAL, S.G. & BATEMAN, F. (1954). Modern experiments in telepathy. New Haven, CT : Yale University Press.
	ULLMAN, M. (1969). Telepathy and dreams. Experimental Medicine and Surgery, 27, 19-38.
	KRIPPNER, S. & ULLMAN, M. (1970). Telepathy and dreams : Controlled experiment with electroencephalogram-electro-oculogram monitoring. Journal of Nervous & Mental Disease, 151, 394-403.
	ULLMAN, M., KRIPPNER, S. & VAUGHAN, A. (1973). Dream telepathy : Experiments in nocturnal ESP. Jefferson, NC : McFarland.
	MEEHL, P.E. (1978). Precognitive telepathy I : On the possibility of distinguishing it experimentally from psychokinesis. Noûs, 12, 235-266.
	MEEHL, P.E. (1978). Precognitive telepathy II : Some neurophysiological conjectures and metaphysical speculations. Noûs, 12, 371-395.
	HACKING, I. (1988). Telepathy : Origins of randomization in experimental design. Isis, 79 (A Special Issue on Artifact & Experiment), 427-451.

Télévision : Média d'information et de divertissement. = TV. Television.

	LINDSLEY, O.R. (1962). A behavioral measure of television viewing. Journal of Advertising Research, 2, 2-12.	HAROLD, S. (1986). A synthesis of 1043 effects of television on social behavior. Public Communication & Behavior, 1, 65-133.
	BERKOWITZ, L. & RAWLINGS, E. (1963). Effects of film violence on inhibitions against subsequent aggression. Journal of Abnormal & Social Psychology, 66, 405–412.
	BERKOWITZ, L. & GEEN, R.G. (1966). Film violence and the cue properties of available targets. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 3, 525–530.
	CHAFFEE, S. H. (1972). Television and adolescent aggressiveness (overview). In G.A. Comstock & E.A. Rubinstein (Eds.), Television and social behavior: A technical report to the Surgeon General's Scientific Advisory Committee on Television and Social Behavior. (Vol. 3, pp. 1-34). Washington, DC : U.S. Government Printing Office.	JOY, L A., KIMBALL, M M. & ZABRACK, M L. (1986). Television and children's aggressive behavior. In T. M. Williams (Ed.), The impact of television: A natural experiment in three communities (pp. 303-360). New York : Academic Press.
	U.S. SURGEON GENERAL'S SCIENTIFIC ADVISORY COMMITTEE/On Television and social behavior. (1972). Television and growing up : The impact of televised violence. Washington, DC.	WILLIAMS, T.M. (Ed.). (1986). The impact of television : A natural experiment in three communities. New York : Praeger.
	ERON, L.D., HUESMANN, L.R., LEFKOWITZ, M.M. & WALDER, L.O. (1972). Does television violence cause aggression ? American Psychologist, 27, 253-263. [PDF]	JOSEPHSON, W.L. (1987). Television violence and children's aggression : Testing the priming, social script, and disinhibition predictions. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 53, 882-890.
		ANDERSON, D.R., & COLLINS, P.A. (1988). The impact on children's education : Television's influence on cognitive development. Washington, DC: Office of Educational Research and Improvement.
	GERBNER, G. (1972). Violence in television drama: Trends and symbolic functions. In G.A. Comstock & E.A. Rubenstein (Eds.), Television and social behavior: Media content and control (Vol. 1. pp. 28-187). Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.	CENTERWALL, B.S. (1989). Exposure to television as a cause of violence. Public Communication and Behavior, 2, 1-58.
	FRIEDRICH, L.K. & STEIN, A.H. (1973). Aggressive and prosocial television programs and the natural behavior of preschool children. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 38, 1-64.	CENTERWALL, B.S. (1989). Exposure to television as a risk factor for violence. American Journal of Epidemiology, 129, 643-652.
		WOBER, J.M. (1990). Does television cultivate the British? Late 80s Evidence. In N. Signorielli & M. Morgan (Eds.), Cultivation analysis : New directions in media effects research. Newbury : Sage.
	WEIGEL, R.H. & JESSOR, R. (1973). Television and adolescent conventionality : An exploratory study. Public Opinion Quarterly, 37, 76-90.	SIGNORELLI, N. (1990). Television's mean and dangerous world : A continuation of the cultural indicators perspective. In N. Signorielli & M. Morgan (Eds.), Cultivation analysis: New directions in media effects research (pp. 85-106). Newbury Park, CA : Sage Publications.
	SURBECK, E. (1975). Young children’s emotional reactions to TV violence: The effect of children’s perceptions of reality. Dissertation Abstracts International, 35, 5139-A.	SAPOLSKY, B.S. & TABARLET, J.O. (1991). Sex in primetime television: 1979 versus 1989. Journal of Broadcasting & Electronic Media, 35, 505-516
	THOMAS, M.H., HORTON, R.W., LIPPINCOTT, E.C. & DRABMAN, R.S. (1977). Desensitization to portrays of real life aggression as a function of television violence. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 35, 450-458.	COMSTOCK, G. & PAIK, H.J. (1991). Television and the American child. New York : Academic Press.
		HUESMANN, L.R., ERON, L.D., BERKOWITZ, L. & CHAFFEE, S. (1992). The effects of television violence on aggression: A reply to a skeptic. In P. Suedfeld & P. E. Tetlock (Eds.), Psychology and social policy (pp. 191-200). New York : Hemisphere.
	TOWER, R.B., SINGER, D.G., SINGER, L.J., & BIGGS, A. (1979). Differential effects of television programming on preschoolers' cognition and play. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 49, 265-281	CENTERWALL, B.S. (1992). Television and violence. The scale of the problem and where to go from here. Journal of the American Medical Association, 267, 3059-3063.
	SINGER, D.G. & SINGER, J.L. (1980). Television viewing and aggressive behavior in preschool children: A field study forensic psychology and Psychiatry. Annals of the New York Academy of Science, 347, 289-303.	FREEDMAN, J.L. (1992). Television violence and aggression : What psychologists should tell the public. In P. Suedfeld & P. Tetlock (Eds.), Psychology and social policy (pp. 179-189). New York : Hemisphere Publishing.
		DELLI CARPINI, M.X. & WILLIAMS, B.A. (1994). Methods, metaphors, and media research : The uses of television in political conversation. Communication Research, 21, 782-812.

	SINGER, D.G. ZUCKERMAN, D.M. & SINGER, J.L. (1980). Helping elementary school children learn about T.V. Journal of Communication, 30, 166-174.	MARES, M.L. (1996). Positive effects of television on social behavior : A meta-analysis. Philadelphia : Annenberg Public Policy Center.
	BRYANT, J., ARVETH, R.A. & BROWN, D. (1981). Television viewing and anxiety : An experimental examination. Journal of Communication, 31, 106-119.	WILSON, B.J., KUNKEL, D., LINZ, D., POTTER, J. DONNERSTEIN, E., SMITH, S.L., BLUMENTHAL, E. & GRAY, T. (1997). Violence in television programming overall: University of California, Santa Barbara study. In M. Seawall (Ed.), National television violence study (Vol. 1, pp. 3-184). Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage Publications.
		SHANAHAN, J. (1998). Television and authoritarianism : Exploring the concept of mainstreaming. Political Communication, 15, 483-495
	PHILLIPS, D.P. (1982). The impact of fictional television stories on U.S. adult fatalities : New evidence on the effect of the mass media on violence. American Journal of Sociology, 87, 1340-1359.	WILSON, B.J., KUNKEL, D., LINZ, D., POTTER, J. DONNERSTEIN, E., SMITH, S.L., BLUMENTHAL, E. & BERRY, M. (1998). Violence in television programming overall : University of California, Santa Barbara study. In M. Seawall (Ed.), National television violence study (Vol. 2, pp. 3-204). Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage Publications.
		DILL, K.E. & DILL, J.C. (1998). Video game violence : A review of the empirical literature. Aggressive and Violent Behavior, 3, 407-428. [PDF]
	NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF MENTAL HEALTH (1982). Television and behavior : Ten years of scientific progress and implications for the eighties. Washington, DC : U.S. Government Printing Office.	CANTOR, J. (1998). Children’s attraction to violent television programming. In J.H. Goldstein (Ed.), Why we watch: The attractions of violent entertainment (pp. 88-115). New York : Oxford University Press.
	PHILLIPS, D.P. (1982). The impact of fictional television stories on U.S. adult fatalities : New evidence on the effect of the mass media on violence. American Journal of Sociology, 87, 1340-1359.	SINGER, M.I., SLOVAK, K., FRIERSON, T. & YORK, P. (1998). Viewing preferences, symptoms of psychological trauma, and violent behaviors among children who watch television. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 37 (10), 1041-1048.
	HUESMANN, L.R. (1982). Television violence and aggressive behavior. In D. Pearl & L. Bouthilet (Eds.), Television and behavior: Ten years of scientific progress and implications for the 80s. Washington, DC : U. S. Government Printing Office	FURNHAM, A., GUNTER, B. & WALSH, D. (1998). Effects of programme context on memory of humorous television commercials. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 12, 555-567.
	ZILLMANN, D. (1982). Television viewing and arousal. In D. Pearl, L. Bouthilet & J. Lazar (Eds.), Television and behavior : Ten years of scientific progress and implications for the eighties. Vol. 2., pp. 53-67). Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.	COMSTOCK, G. & SCHARRER, E. (1999). Television : What's on, who's watching, and what it means. New York : Academic Press.
		SHANAHAN, J. & MORGAN, M. (1999) Television and its Vewers : Cultivation Theory and Research. Cambridge University Press
		WITT, S.D. & BURRISS, K.G. (2000). The influence of television on children’s gender role socialization. Childhood Education, 76 (5), 322.
	MILAVSKY, J.R., KESSLER, R., STIPP, H.R., UBENS, W.S. PEARL, D., BOUTHILET, L. & LAZAR, J. (Eds.) (1982). Television and behavior : Ten years of scientific progress and implications for the eighties. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.	BUSHMAN, B.J. & HUESMANN, L.R. (2000). Effects of televised violence on aggression. In D.G. Singer & J.L. Singer (Eds.), Handbook of children and the media (pp. 223-254). Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage Publications.
	GUNTER, B. (1983). Do aggressive people prefer violent television? Bulletin of the British Psychological Society, 36, 166-168.	BUSHMAN, B.J. & HUESMANN, L.R. (2001). Effects of televised violence on aggression. In D. Singer & J. Singer (Eds.), Handbook of children and the media (pp. 223-254). Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage Publications. [PDF]
	SINGER, J.L., SINGER, D. G. & RAPACZYNSK, W.S. (1984). Family patterns and television viewing as predictors of children's beliefs and aggression. Journal of Communication, 34 (2), 73-89.	FURNHAM, A., BERGLAND, J. & GUNTER, B. (2002). Memory for television advertisements as a function of advertisement-programme congruity. Applied Cognitive Psychology 16, 525-545.
		GRABE, M.E., ZHOU, S. & BARNETT, B. (2001) Explicating sensationalism in television news: Content and the bells and whistles of Form. Journal of Broadcasting & Electronic Media, 45, 635-655.
	KENNY, D.A. (1984). Television violence, aggression, and the NBC study. Journal of Communication, 34, 176-188.	GRABER, D.A. (2001). Processing politics: Learning from television in the internet age. University of Chicago Press
	ZUCKERMAN, M. & ZUCKERMAN, B.S. (1985). Television's impact on children. Pediatrics, 75, 233-240.	HU, F.B., Li, T.Y., COLDITZ, G.A., WILLET, W.C. & MANSON, , J.E. (2003). Television watching and other sedentary behaviors in relation to risk of obesity and Type 2 diabetes mellitus in women. Journal of the American Medical Association, 289, 1785-1791.
	SINGER, J.L & SINGER, D.G. (1986). Television viewing and family communication style as predictors of children’s emotional behavior. Journal of Children in Contemporary Society, 17, 75-91.	HUESMANN, L.R., MOISE-TITUS, J., PODOLSKI, C. & ERON, L.D. (2003). Longitudinal relations between children's exposure to TV violence and their aggressive and violent behavior in young adulthood : 1977-1992. Developmental Psychology, 39, 201-221. [PDF]
	VAN DER VOORT, T.H.A. (1986). Television violence : A child’s-eye view. New York: Elsevier Science.	FUNK, J.B., BALDACCI, H.B., PASOLD, T. & BAUMGARDNER, J. (2004). Violence exposure in real-life, video games, television, movies, and the internet : is there desensitization? Journal of Adolescence, 27 (1), 23-39
	SINGER, J.L & SINGER, D.G. (1986). Family experiences and television viewing as predictors of children’s imagination, restlessness, and aggression. Journal of Social Issues, 42 (3), 107-124.	JENVEY, V.B. (2007). The relationship between television viewing and obesity in young children : a review of existing explanations. Early Child Development & Care, 177 (8), 809-820.
	HUESMANN, L.R. & ERON, L.D. (1986). Television and the aggressive child : A cross-national comparison. Lawrence Erlbaum.	SWING, E., GENTILE, D.A., ANDERSON, C.A. & WALSH, D.A. (2010). Television and video game exposure and the development of attention problems. Pediatrics, 126, 214-221.
	WILLIAMS, T.M. (1986). The impact of television : A natural experiment in three communities. New York : Academic Press.

Télévision (Violence à la...) : Voir Violence.

Témoin/Témoignage : Personne qui a vu un crime, un accident ou un simple incident, et qui refuse d'aider la victime ou se voit dans l'incapacité ou l'impossibilité de le faire. *passant. Eyewitness, witness.

	BESTERMAN, T. (1932). The psychology of testimony in relation to paraphysical phenomena : Report of an experiment. Proceedings of the Society for Psychical Research, 40, 363-387.	LOFTUS, E. (1996). Eyewitness testimony. Cambridge, MA : Harvard University Press.
	ROSENTHAL A.M. (1964). Thirty-eight witnesses. New York : McGraw-Hill.	ALLWOOD, C.M., ASK, K. & GRANHAG, P.A. (2005). The cognitive interview : Effects on the realism in witnesses’ confidence in their free recall. Psychology, Crime, & Law, 11, 183-198.
	CECI, S.J. & BRUCK, M. (1993). Suggestibility of the child witness : A historical review and synthesis. Psychological Bulletin, 113, 403–439.	FAHSING, I.A., ASK, K. & GRANHAG, P.A. (2004). The man behind the mask : Accuracy and predictors of eyewitness offender descriptions. Journal of Applied Psychology, 89, 722-729.
	LOFTUS, E. & KETCHAM, K. (1996). Witness for the defense : The accused, the eyewitness and the expert who puts memory on trial. St. Martin's Press.	ASK, K. & GRANHAG, P.A. (2007). Motivational bias in criminal investigators’ judgments of witness reliability. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 37, 561-591.
		WILCOCK, R., BULL, R. & VRIJ, A. (2007). Are old witnesses always poorer witnesses? Psychology : Crime & Law, 13, 305-316.

Tempérament : Ensemble des réactions ou comportements innées relativement stables qui modulent l’expression du niveau d’activité, le style d’approche et de réaction à un stimulus ou à une situation donnée. Temperament.

	SHELDON, H. (1942). The varieties of temperament. Harper.	PRIOR, M. (1992). Childhood temperament. Journal of Child Psychology & Psychiatry, 33, 249-279.
	DIAMNOND, S. (1957). Personality and temperament. New York : Harper.	BRAUNGART, J.M., PLOMIN, R., DEFRIES, J.C. & FULKER, D.W. (1992). Genetic influence on tester-rated infant temperament as assessed by Bayley's Infant Behavior Record : Nonadoptive and adoptive siblings and twins. Developmental Psychology, 28, 40-47.
	ROWE, D.C. & PLOMIN, R. (1977). Temperament in early childhood. Journal of Personality Assessment, 41, 150-156.	AHADI, S.A., ROTHBART, M.K., & YE, R. (1993). Children's Temperament in the U.S. and China : Similarities and differences. European Journal of Personality, 7, 359-378. [PDF]
	THOMAS, A. & CHESS, S. (1977). Temperament and development. New York : Brunner/Mazel.	MARTIN, R.P. (1994). Child temperament and common problems in schooling : Hypotheses about causal connections. Journal of School Psychology, 32, 119-134.
	RONALD S. & KING, M. (1978). Existential-phenomenological alternatives for psychology. Oxford U Press.	PICHOT, P. (1995). Histoire du concept de tempérament. Revue Internationales de Psychopathologie, 17, 5-23.
	CAMPBELL, S.B. (1979). Patterns of mother-infant interaction and maternal ratings of temperament. Child Psychiatry & Human Development, 10, 67-76.	ROTHBART, M.K., AHADI, S.A. & HERSHEY K.L. (1994). Temperament and social behaviour in childhood. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 40 (1), 21-39.
	ROTHBART, M.K. (1981). Measurement of temperament in infancy. Child Development, 52, 569-578. [PDF]	TLEFLEY, H.P. (1998). Temperament : Theory and practice.The American Journal of Psychiatry, 155 (1), 144.
	ROTHBART, M.K. (1982). The concept of difficult temperament : A critical analysis of Thomas, Chess & Korn. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 28, 35-40. [PDF]	TARABULSY, G.M. (Dir.) (1998). Le tempérament de l’enfant : Cinq études, Sainte-Foy : Québec, Presses de l’Université du Québec.
	BUSS, A.H. & PLOMIN, R. (1984). Temperament : Early developing personality traits. Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.	STRELAU, J. (1987). Temperament : A psychological perspective. New York : Plenum Press.
	ROTHBART, M.K. (1986). Longitudinal observation of infant temperament. Developmental Psychology, 22, 356-365.	KAGAN, J. (1999). La part de l'inné; temperament et nature humaine. Paris : Bayard.
	STRELAU, J. (1987). Emotion as a key concept in temperament research. Journal of Research in Personality, 21, 510-28.	ROTHBART, M.K. & HWANG, J. (2002). Measuring infant temperament. Infant Behavior & Development, 25(1), 113-116.
	GOLDSMITH, H.H., BUSS A. H., PLOMIN, R., ROTHBART, M.K., THOMAS, A. & CHESS, S. (1987). What is temperament ? : Four approaches. Child Development, 58, 505-529.	KEOGH, B.K. (2003). Temperament in the classroom. Baltimore : Brookes Publishing.
	ROTHBART, M.K. (1988). Temperament and the development of inhibited approach. Child Development, 59, 1241-1250.	KAGAN, J. (2004). The long shadow of temperament. Harvard : Harvard University Press.
	WHIFFEN, V.E. & GOTLIEB, I.H. (1989). Infants of postpartum depressed mothers : Temperament and cognitive status. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 98 (3), 274-279.	CALKINS, S.D. (2005). Temperament and its impact on child development: Comments on Rothbart, Kagan, and Eisenberg. In R.E. Tremblay, R.G. Barr RG & RDeV, Peters (Eds.), Encyclopedia on early childhood development. (pp. 1-6). Montreal, Quebec : Centre of Excellence for Early Childhood Development. [LIRE]
	EYSENCK, H.J. (1991). Dimensions of personality : the biosocial approach to personality. In J. Strelau & A. Angleitner (Eds.), Explorations in temperament : international perspectives on theory and measurement (pp. 87-103). London : Plenum.	LEMELIN, J.-P., TARABULSY, G.M. & PROVOST, M.A. (2006). Predicting preschool cognitive development from infant temperament, maternal sensitivity, and psychosocial risk. Merrill Palmer Quarterly, 52, 779-806.
	STRELAU, J. & AGLEITNER, A. (1991). Explorations in temperament : International perspectives on theory and measurement. London : Plenum.	TSAI, J.L., LEVENSON, R.W. & McCOY, K. (2006). Cultural and temperamental variation in emotional response. Emotion, 6, 484-497.
		KAGAN, J. (2008). The biological contributions to temperaments and emotions. European Jour nal of Developmental Science, 2, 38-51
		ZENTNER, M & BATES, J.E. (2008). Child temperament: An integrative review of concepts, research programs, and measures. European Journal of Developmental Science, 2 (1/2), 7–37. [PDF]
		ROTHBART, M.K. (2011). Becoming who we are : Temperament and personality in development. Guilford Press.

Température : Variable qui influence certains comportements, notamment l'agressivité et la violence. Hot temperature.

	HERSH, A.H. (1924). The effects of temperature upon the heterozygotes in the bar series of drosophila. Journal of Experimental Zoology, 39, 55-71.	ANDERSON, C.A., BUSHMAN, B.J. & GROOM, R.W. (1997). Hot years and serious and deadly assault : Empirical tests of the heat hypothesis. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 73, 1213-1223.
	ANDERSON, C.A.& ANDERSON, D.C. (1984). Ambient temperature and violent crime: Tests of the linear and curvilinear hypotheses. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 46, 91-97.	ANDERSON, C.A. & ANDERSON, K.B. (1998). Temperature and aggression : Paradox, controversy, and a (fairly) clear picture. In R. Geen & E. Donnerstein (Eds.), Human aggression: Theories, research and implications for policy (pp. 247-298). San Diego, CA : Academic Press.
	COTTON, J.L. (1986). Ambient temperature and violent crime. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 16, 786-801.	ANDERSON, C.A. (2001). Heat and violence. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 10, 33-38.
	ANDERSON, C.A. (1989). Temperature and aggression : Ubiquitous effects of heat on occurrence of human violence. Psychological Bulletin, 106, 74-96.	RASHOTTE, M.E., ACKERT, A.M. & OVERTON, J.M. (2002). Ingestive behavior and body temperature during the ovarian cycle in normotensive and hypertensive rats. American Journal of Physiology : Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology, 282, 216-225.
	ANDERSON, C.A., DEUSER, W.E. & DENEVE, K. (1995). Hot temperatures, hostile affect, hostile cognition, and arousal : Tests of a general model of affective aggression. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 21, 434-448.	DEWALL, C.N. & BUSHMAN, B J. (2009). Hot under the collar in a lukewarm environment : Hot temperature primes increase aggressive thoughts and hostile perceptions. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 45 (4), 1045-1047.
	ANDERSON, C.A., ANDERSON, K.B. & DEUSER, W.E. (1996). Examining an affective aggression framework : Weapon and temperature effects on aggressive thoughts, affect, and attitudes. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 22, 366-376.	HSEE, C.K. & TANG, J. (2007). Sun and water : On a modulus-based measurement of happiness. Emotion, 7, 213-218.
		RISEN, J.L & GILOVICH, T. (2008). Why people are reluctant to tempt fate. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 95, 293-307. [PDF]

Tempo cognitif : Rythme avec lequel une information est traité par le cerveau. Cognitive tempo.

	IRWIN, R.A. & GROSS, A.M. (1995). Cognitive tempo, violent video games, and aggressive behavior in young boys. Journal of Family Violence, 10, 337-350.

Temporairement vraie/fausse : Expression qui souligne le caractère temporel d'une hypothèse corroborée par les faits disponibles (plutôt que possibles). EX. L'affirmation Tous les éléphants sont gris est une affirmation temporairement vraie car elles correpond aux faits actuels, mais non-définitive puisqu'on ne peut exclure la possibilité que l'on trouve un jour sur la planète Etylik-5 un éléphant rose. Pour y parvenir, il faudrait passer en revue toutes les époques et tous les lieux où il est possible d'observer des éléphants. Ce faisant, il se pourrait qu'un jour on découvre une nouvelle planète (Etylik-5 ou Sirhose-12 ) où sébattent en toute tranquilité des millions de troupeaux d'éléphants roses et ronds. /définitivement fausse.

Temps (réel) : Mouvement ou changement d'état de la matière vivante ou non. Le temps est donc la différence entre deux états. Ainsi défini, il ne peut y avoir de temps sans mouvement (ou énergie) ou sans transformation de l'état initial (T₁-----»T₂ ). La matière et l'énergie précèdent donc le temps. = temps naturel. Time.

	GRÜNBAUM, A. (1962). The nature of time. In R.G. Colodny (Ed.), Frontiers of science and philosophy (Vol. I., pp. 147-188). Pittsburgh, PA : University of Pittsburgh Press.
	HAWKING, S.H. (1988). A brief history of time : From the big bang to black holes. Toronto : Bantam Books.

Temps (humain) : Mouvement ou changement d'état décomposé en portion équivalente et périodique (ou durée) par une machine (sablier, montre, horloge nucléaire, etc). = temps objectif.

	SHAFFER, H. & HARDWICK, J. (1969). Monitoring simultaneous auditory messages. Perception & Psychophysics, 6, 401-404.
	ELMAN, J.L. (1990). Finding structure in time. Cognitive Science, 14, 179-211.

Temps (subjectif) : Perception du temps réel et estimation de sa durée. = temps psychologique. Mental time.

	HEIDEGGER, M. (1927/64). L’Être et le temps. Paris : Gallimard.	ELMAN, J. (2003). Development : It’s about time. Developmental Science, 6, 430-433.
	PIAGET, J. (1941). Quelques observations sur le développement psychologique de la notion de temps. Compte rendu des séances de la Société de physique et d'histoire naturelle de Genève, 58, 21-24. [PDF]	STRATHMAN, A. & JOIREMAN, J. (Eds.) (2005). Understanding behavior in the context of time : Theory, research, and application. Mahwah, NJ : Lawrence Erlbaum.
	PIAGET, J. (1942). Une expérience sur le développement de la notion de temps. Revue Suisse de Psychologie et de Psychologie appliquée, 1, 179-185. [PDF]	NOBRE, A.C., CORREA, A. & COULL, J.T. (2007). The hazards of time. Current Opinion in Neurobiology, 17, 1-6.
		SUDDENDORF, T. & CORBALIS, M.C. (2007). The evolution of foresight : What is mental time travel, and is it unique to humans? Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 30, 299–313.
	ZEEMAN, W.P.C. (1949). The subjective duration of time-intervals. Acta Psychologica, 6, 126-177.	ROITMAN, J., BRANNON, E.M. & PLATT, M.L. (2007). Assessing a single mechanism for time and number representation in humans. Acta Psychologica, 124, 296-318.
	ROELOFS, O.C & ZEEMAN, W.P.C. (1949).The subjective duration of time-intervals. II the influence of order in the estimation of duration of two sucessive intervals. Acta Psychologica, 6, 289-336.	FIELD D. P. & HINELINE, P.N. (2008). Dispositioning and the obscured roles of time in psychological explanation. Behavior and Philosophy, 36, 5-69.
	COHEN, J. (1954). The experience of time. Acta Psychologica, 10, 207-219.	ZIMBARDO, P.G. & BOYD, J. (2008). The time paradox : The new psychology of time that will change your life. New York : The Free Press.
	ELMAN, J.L. (1990). Finding structure in time. Cognitive Science, 14, 179-211.	BRANNON, E.M., LIBERTUS, M., MECK, W.H. & WOLDORFF, M. (2008). Electrophysiological measures of time processing in infant and adult brains : Weber's law holds. Journal of Cognitive Neuroscience, 20, 193-203. [PDF]
	GIBBON, J. & CHURCH, R.M. (1990). Representation of time. Cognition, 37, 23–54.	WILSON, A.E. GUNN, G.R. & ROSS, M. (2009). The role of subjective time in identity regulation. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 23, 1164-1178.
	SUDDENDORF, T. & CORBALIS, M.C. (1997). Mental time travel and the evolution of the human mind. General, Social, and General Psychology Monographs, 123, 133–167.	CASASANTO, D., FOTAKOPOULOU, O. & BORODITSKY, L. (2010). Space and time in the child’s mind : Evidence for a cross-dimensional ssymmetry. Cognitive Science, 34, 387–405. [PDF]

Temps de réaction : Laps de temps qui s'écoule entre le début de la présentation d'un stimulus et le début de la réponse de l'organisme. Ce concepts, initialement développé en physiologie, a été appliqué en psychologie par Donders. En psychologie cognitive, le temps de réaction permet d'inférer le temps de traitement d'une information (temps machine), notamment lors des tâches de rappel. Temps de réaction et balayage. = temps de réponse. Processing time, reaction time, speed, speed-of-processing, response time.

	DONDERS, F.C. (1869). On the speed of mental processes. Acta Psychologica, 30, 412-431.	BRIGGS, G.E. (1974). On the predictor variable for choice reaction time. Memory & Cognition, 2, 575-580.
	HENMON, V.A.C. (1915). Reaction time. Psychological Bulletin, 12 (11), 414-415.	SHAW, M.L. (1978). A capacity allocation model for reaction time. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Human Perception & Performance, 4, 586-598.
	BEHAR, I. (1963). On the relation between response uncertainty and reaction time in category judgments. Perceptual & Motor Skills, 16, 595-596.	RATCLIFF, R. (1979). Group reaction time distributions and an analysis of distribution statistics. Psychological Bulletin, 86, 446-461.
	SEIBEL, R. (1963). Discrimination reaction time for a 1,023 alternative task. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 66, 215-226.	ASHBY, F.G., TOWNSEND, J.T. (1980). Decomposing the reaction time distribution: Pure insertion and selective influence revisited. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 21, 93-123.
	ZAHN, T.P. & ROSENTHAL, D. (1966). Simple reaction time as a function of the relative frequency of the preparatory interval. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 72, 15-19.	NIEMI P. & NÄÄTÄNEN, R. (1981). Foreperiod and simple reaction time. Psychological Bulletin, 89, 133-62.
	BAMBER, D. (1969). Reaction times and error rates for “same”-“different” judgments of multidimensional stimuli. Perception and Psychophysics, 6, 169-174.	HOCKLEY, W.E. (1984). Analysis of response time distributions in the study of cognitive processes. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Learning, Memory & Cognition, 10, 598-615.
	ATKINSON, R.C., HOLMGREN, J.E &, JUOLA J.F. (1969). Processing time as influenced by the number of elements in a visual display. Perception & Psychophysics, 6, 321-326.	LUCE, R.D. (1986). Response times, their role in inferring elementary mental organization. New York : Oxford university press.
	STERNBERG, S. (1969). Memory-scanning : Mental processes revealed by reaction-time experiments. American Scientist, 57, 421-457.	KAMIN, L.J. & GRANT-HENRY, S. (1987). Reaction time, race, and racism. Intelligence, 11, 299-304. RATCLIFF, R. (1993). Methods for dealing with reaction time outliers. Psychological Bulletin, 114, 510-532.
	SWANSON, J.M. & BRIGGS, G.E. (1969). Information processing as a function of speed versus accuracy. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 81, 223-229.	GEARY, D. C. & WILEY, J G. (1991). Cognitive addition: Strategy choice and speed-of-processing differences in young and elderly adults. Psychology & Aging, 6, 474-483.
	STERNBERG, S. (1969). The discovery of processing stages : Extensions of Donders' method. Acta Psychologica, 30, 276-315.	ROBERT, S. & STERNBERG, S. (1993). The meaning of additive reaction-time effects : Tests of three alternatives. In D.E. Meyer & S. Kornblum (Eds.), Attention and performance XIV : Synergies in experimental psychology, artificial intelligence, and cognitive neuroscience (pp. 611-653). Cambridge, MA : M.I.T. Press.
	VIKREY, C. & NEURINGER, A. (1970). Pigeon reaction time, Hick's law and intelligence. Psychonomic Bulletin & Review, 7, 284-291.	ULRICH, R. & MILLER, J. (1994). Effects of outlier exclusion on reaction time analysis. Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 123, 34-80.
	YONAS, A. & PITTENGER, J. (1973). Searching for many targets : An analysis of speed and accuracy. Perception & Psychophysics, 13, 513-516.	NICOLSON, R.I. & FAWCETT, A.J. (1994). Reaction times and dyslexia. Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology, 47A, 29-48.
	PACHELLA, R.G. (1974). The interpretation of reaction time in information processing research. In. B.H. Kantowitz (Ed.), Human information processing : Tutorials in performance and cognition (pp. 41-42). Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.	DZHAFAROV, E.N. (1997). Process representations and decompositions of response times. In A.A.J. Marley (Ed.), Choice, decision, and measurement (pp. 255-278). Mahwah, NJ : Erlbaum.
		MINIUSSI, C., WILDING E.L., COULL, J.T. & NOBRE, A.C. (1999). Orienting attention in time : modulation of brain potentials. Brain, 122, 1507-1518.
		RATCLIFF, R., VAN ZANDT, T. & McKOON, G. & McKoon, G. (1999). Connectionist and diffusion models of reaction time. Psychological Review, 106, 261-300.

Temps de rétention : Propriété d'une mémoire. Laps de temps qui s'écoule entre l'entreposage d'une information donnée et son oubli.

Temps libre : Période de tmeps que l'on consacre à des activités de son choix, que l'on peut aménager à sa guise.

	OSBORNE, J.G. (1969). Free time as a reinforcer in the management of classroom behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2,113-118. [PDF]

Temps machine : Durée de traitement de l'information d'une ou de plusieurs tâches double ou quasi-simultanées (temps partagé) réalisé par un ordinateur ou un humain. Le temps machine peut être partagé entre deux ou plusieurs tâches. EX: Vous calculez le montant de vos achats (tâche no 1), vous vous demandez où est votre foutu portefeuille (tâche no 2), tout en essayant de vous rappeler le nombre de billets de 20 $ qu'il vous reste (tâche no 3). = gestion du temps machine.

	SHAFFER, H. & HARDWICK, J. (1969). Monitoring simultaneous auditory messages. Perception & Psychophysics, 6, 401-404.
	ELMAN, J.L. (1990). Finding structure in time. Cognitive Science, 14, 179-211.
	GEARY, D. C. & WILEY, J G. (1991). Cognitive addition : Strategy choice and speed-of-processing differences in young and elderly adults. Psychology & Aging, 6, 474-483.

Temps neural : Neural time.

	LIBET, B. (1992). The neural time-factor in perception, volition and free will. Revue de Métaphysique, 2, 255-272.

Temps partagé : Timesharing.

	GREENWALD, A.G. (1972). On doing two things at once : Timesharing as a function of ideomotor compatibility. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 94, 52-57. [PDF]

Temps réel : En méthodologie, concept qui désigne la quasi-simultanéité de deux opérations; d'un côté, l'expérience qui produit le phénomène à l'étude, de l'autre, la mesure ou l'évaluation de ce phénomène, ainsi que l'analyse des données. Real time.

	RATCLIFF, R. & LAYTON, W.M. (1981). A microcomputer interface for control of real time experiments in cognitive psychology. Behavior Research Methods & Instrumentation, 13, 216-220.

Tendance : Régularité qui se dégage de l'observation d'un phénomène chez un individu ou un groupe, et qui donne à penser que ce phénomène n'est pas dû à l'effet du hasard, mais plutôt à l'existence d'un mécanisme psychologique (ou d'une autre nature).

Tendance à l'autoactualisation : Pour Maslow et Rogers, motivation fondamentale de tout être humain, qui pousse la personne à s'accomplir, à réaliser son plein potentiel. Pour Maslow, il s'agit chez l'humain du dernier besoin à se développer.

Tensions raciales : Tension racial et racisme. Racial tension.

	ARONSON, E., BLANEY, N., SIKES, J. STEPHAN, C. & SNAPP, M. (1979). Busing and racial tension : The jigsaw route to learning and liking. In V.J. Derlega & L.H. Janda (Eds.), Personal Adjustment : Selected readings. Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman.

Tentative de suicide : Voir Suicide.

Tepperman Lorne ( ) : Sociologue canadien. Collaborateur de Curtis.

	TEPPERMAN, L. (1975). Deviance as a search process. Canadian Journal of Sociology, 1 (3), 277-294.
	TEPPERMAN, L. (1975). Social mobility in Canada. Toronto : McGraw-Hill Ryerson.
	TEPPERMAN, L. (1977). Crime control : The urge toward authority. Toronto : McGraw-Hill Ryerson.
	TEPPERMAN, L. & CURTIS, J. (2004). What is sociology? In L. Tepperman & J. Curtis (Eds.), Sociology : A Canadian perspective (pp. 1-31). Toronto : Oxford University Press.
	TEPPERMAN, L. (2005). Straight and narrow : An introduction to the sociology of deviance and control. Toronto : Oxford University Press.

Terman Lewis Madison (Johnson County États-Unis 1877-1956 Palo Alto États-Unis) : Psychométricien américain spécialisé dans l'étude et la mesure de l'intelligence. Inventeur du test d'intelligence Stanford-Binet (1916). Président de l'APA en 1923. N.D.L.R. : La seule chose que Terman ne semble pas avoir mesuré, c'est son influence sur la psychologie ! Étudiant de Hall. Professeur de Goodenough, Kelly et Mcnemar.

No 72	TERMAN L.M. (1916). The uses of intelligence tests. Boston : Houghton Mifflin.
	TERMAN, L.M. (1919). The intelligence of school children. Boston : Houghton Mifflin.
	TERMAN, L.M. (1924). The mental test as a psychological method. Psychological Review, 31, 93-117.
	TERMAN, L.M. & MERRILL, M. (1937). Revised Stanford-Binet scale. Boston : Houghton Mifflin.
	TERMAN, L. & MERRILL, M. (1937). Measuring intelligence. Boston : Houghton Mifflin.

Terminaison neurale : Ramifications de l'axone du neurone.

Termote Marc ( ) : Démographe québécois, professeur à l'Université de Montréal et spécialiste de l'étude de l'immigration.

	LEDENT, J. et TERMOTE, M. (1999). L'immigration et la croissance des régions métropolitaines : implications politiques. Options Politiques - Policy Options, 20, 39-44.
	TERMOTE, M. (2002). The explanatory power of migration models. In R. Franck (Ed.), The explanatory power of models (pp. 165-179). Boston/Dordrecht/London : Kluwer Academic Publishers.
	TERMOTE, M. (2002). La mesure de l'impact économique de l'immigration internationale. Problèmes méthodologiques et résultats empiriques. Cahiers Québécois de Démographie, 31 (1), 35-67.
	TERMOTE, M. (2003). L'immigration n'est qu'une solution partielle. Le cas des États-Unis et du Canada. Forum, Revue Suisse pour l'Étude des Migrations et de la Population, 2, 32-36.
	TERMOTE, M. (2002). La dynamique démolinguistique du Québec et de ses régions. Dans V. Piché et C. Le Bourdais (Dirs.), La démographie québécoise : Enjeux du XXI^e siècle (p. 264-299). Montréal : Les Presses de l'Université de Montréal.

Terrace Herbert S. ( ) : Psychologue et primatologue cognitivo-behavioriste américain. Il a mis sur pied un laboratoire d'étude de la cognition chez les primates, à l'Université Columbia. Terrace et Nim Chimpsy. Professeur de Brannon et Roitblat.

	TERRACE, H.S. (1963). Errorless transfer of a discrimination across two continua. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 6 (2), 223–232. [PDF]
	TERRACE, H.S. (1979). Nim : A chimpanzee who learned sign language. New York : Knopf.
	TERRACE, H.S., PETITTO, L.A., SNADERS, R.J. & BEVER, T.G. (1979). Can an ape create a sentence ? Science, 206, 891-902.
	TERRACE, H.S., SON, L.K. & BRANNON, E.M. (2003). Serial expertise of rhesus macaques. Psychological Science, 14 (1). [PDF]
	TERRACE, H.S. (2005). The simultaneous chain : a new approach to serial learning. Trends in Cognitive Sciences, 9 (4), 202-210. [PDF]

Terrain : Partie du milieu naturel d'un organisme que l'on souhaite étudier. = in vivo, conditions réelles, conditions naturelles, vraie vie. /laboratoire. Natural environment.

	THARP, R.G. & WETZEL, R.J. (1969). Behavior modification in the natural environment. New York : Academic Press.
	BEAUD, S. et WEBER, F. (2003). Guide de l'enquête de terrain. Paris : La Découverte.

Terrisse Bernard ( ) : Psychologue québécois d'origine française, spécialisé en éducation spécialisée. Il enseigne à l'Université du Québec à Montréal. Collaborateur de Larivée.

	TERRISSE, B. et DANSEREAU, S. (1988). Une approche systémique en intervention précoce. International Journal of Early Chilhood, 20 (2), 11-22.
	TERRISSE, B., ROBERTS, D., PALACIO-QUINTIN, E. & MACDONALD, B. (1998). Parenting practices and child development. Swiss Journal of Psychology, 57, (2), 114-123.
	TERRISSE, B. (2002). Enfance et résilience. Cahiers de Psychopédagogie Curative et Interculturelle, 1 (2), 34-52.
	LAROSE, F., TERRISSE, B. et BÉDARD, J. (2006). Les représentations de parents québécois au regard de l’intervention socioéducative au préscolaire. Brock Education. A Journal of Educational Research and Practice, 15 (2), 148-174.

Territoire/Territorialité : Espace occupé (et défendu dans la plupart des cas) par un individu, un groupe, une population ou un pays. Celui qui occupe le territoire se nomme habitant ou résidant, tandis que celui qui le pénètre est un étranger (avec permission) ou un envahisseur (sans permission). Territoire et priorité de résidence. Territory.

	TINBERGEN, N. (1957). The fonction of territory. Bird study, 4, 14-27.
	ZAYAN, R.C. (1975). Défense du territoire et reconnaissance individuelle chez Xiphophorus (Pisces, Poeciliidae). Behaviour, 52, 266-312.
	TULLOCK, G. (1978). On the adaptive significance of territoriality : Comment. The American Naturalist, 113, 5, 772-775.
	WELLS, K.D. (1978). Territoriality in the green frog (Rana clamitans) : vocalizations and agonistic behaviour. Animal Behaviour, 26, 1051-1063.
	LUCKMANN, T. (1982). Territorial borders as system boundaries. In R. Strassoldo & G. Delli Zotti (Eds.), Cooperation and conflict in border areas (pp. 235-244). Franco Angeli Editore.
	SACHSER, N. & PRÖVE, E. (1984). Short-term effects of residence on the testosterone responses to fighting in alpha male guinea pigs. Aggressive Behavior, 10, 285-292

Terrorisme : Terrorisme, violence et victime. ( ): 11 septembre. Terrorism.

	OCHBERG, F.M. (1978). The victim of terrorism : Psychiatric considerations. Terrorism, 1, 147-168.	PAPE, R..A. (2003). The strategic logic of suicide terrorism. American Political Science Review, 97 (3), 343-361.
	MARTIN, L.J. (1985). The media's role in international terrorism. Terrorism : An International Journal, 8, 127-143.	TURK, A.T. (2004). Sociology of terrorism. Annual Review of Sociology, 30, 271-286.
		MOGHADDAM, F.M. & MARSELLA, A.J. (2004). Understanding terrorism : Psychosocial roots, causes and consequences. Washington, DC : American Psychological Association Press.
		MILLER, A.M. & HELDRING, M. (2004). Mental health and primary care in a time of terrorism : psychological impact of terrorism attacks. Families Systems & Health, 22, 7-30.
		TILLY, C. (2004). Terror, terrorism, terrorist. Sociological Theory, 22 (1), 5-13.
	TAYLOR M. (1988). The terrorist. London : Brassey’s.	MOGHADDAM, F.M. (2005). The staircase to terrorism : A psychological exploration. American Psychologist, 60 (2), 161–169. [PDF]
	CORRADO, R.R. & TOMPKINS, E. (1989). A comparative model of the psychological effects on the victims of state and anti-state terrorism. International Journal of Law & Psychiatry, 12, 281-293.	GARCIA-GARCIA, M., TORRES-PÉREZ, I. & VALDES-DIAZ, M. (2005). Ten outstandind references about : Psychopathology and terrorism. Annuary of Clinical and Health Psychology, 1 39-51. [PDF]
	PEARLSTEIN, R.M. (1991). The mind of the political terrorist. Wilmington, DE : Scholarly Resources.	ARENA, M.P. & ARIGO, B.A. (2005). Social psychology, terrorism, and identity : A preliminary re-examination of theory, culture, self, and society. Behavioral Sciences & the Law, 23 (4), 485-506.
	SPRANG, G. (1999). Post-disaster stress following the Oklahoma City bombing : An Examination of three community groups. Journal of Interpersonal Violence, 14,69–83.
	NORTH, C.S., NIXON, S. J., SHARIAT, S., MALLONCE, S., McMILLEN, J.C., SPITZNAGEL E.L. & SMITH, E. (1999). Psychiatric disorders among survivors of the Oklahoma City bombing. Jourrnal of American Medical Association, 282, 755-762	MOGHADDAM, F.M. (2005). Psychological processes and the staircase to terrorism. American Psychologist, 60, 1039-1044.
	NORTH, C.S. & PFEFFERBAUM, B. (2002). Research on the mental health effects of terrorism. Journal of the American Medical Association, 288, 633– 636.	ARENA, M.P. & ARIGO, B.A. (2005). Identity and the terrorist threat : An interpretative and explanatory model. In L. Snowden & B. Whistel (Eds.), Terrorism : Research, readings and realities (pp. 11-45). Upper Saddle River, NJ : Person – Prentice Hall.
	RUBY, C.L. (2002). Are terrorists mentally deranged? Analysis of Social Issues and Public Policy, 2, 15–26.	MARTIN, G. (2005). Understanding terrorism. Thousand Oaks, CA : SAGE Publications.
	STOUT, C.E. (2002). The psychology of terrorism : Theoretical understandings and perspectives. Westport : Praeger.	ROSZAK, T. (2006). World beware! American triumphalism in an age of terror /La menace américaine. Le triomphalisme américain à l’âge du terrorisme. Paris : Édition le cherche midi.
	SCHLENGER, W.E., CADDELL, J.M., EBERT, L., JORDAN, B. K., ROURKE, K.M., WILSON, D.,THALJI, L. DENNIS, M. FAIRBANK, J.A. & KULKA, R.A. (2002). Psychological reactions to terrorist attacks. Findings from the national study of American’s reactions to september 11. Journal of the American Medical Association, 288, 581-588.	HARROW, M. (2008). Inside a wave of terrorism : The dynamic relation between terrorism and the factors leading to terrorism. Journal of Global Change & Governance, 1 (3), 1-18. [PDF]
	NORTH, C.S. & PFERFFERBAUM, B. (2002). Research on the mental health effects of terrorism. Jourrnal of American Medical Association, 288, 633- 636.	KRUGLANSKI, A.W. & FISMAN, S. (2009). What makes terrorism tick ? Its individual, group, and organizational aspects. Revista de Psicologia Social, 24, 139-162.
	BAHDI, R. (2003). No exit : Racial profiling and Canada’s war against terrorism. Osgoode Hall Law Journal, 41 (2-3), 293-316.
	BLEICH, A., GELKOPF, M. and SOLOMONZ. (2003). Exposure to terrorism, stress-related mental health symptoms, and coping behaviours among a nationally representative sample in Israel. Jourrnal of American Medical Association, 290, 612-620.	KRUGLANSKI, A.W. & FISMAN, S. (2009). The psychology of terrorism : Syndrome versus tool perspectives. Journal of Terrorism and Political Violence, 18, 193-215.
	SIDMAN, M. (2003). Introduction : Terrosrism as behavior. Behavior & Social Issues, 12, 83-89.	OREHEK, E., DOSSJE, B., KRUGLANSKI, A. W., COLE, A., SADDLER, T. & JACKSON, J. (2010). Need for Closure and the Social Response to Terrorism. Basic and Applied Social Psychology, 32, 279-290.
		PERLINGER, A. & PEDAHZUR, A. (2011). Social network analysis in the study of terorism and political violence. Political Science & Politics, 44, 45-50.

Tessier Réjean ( ) : Psychologue écologiste québécois et professeur à l'Université Laval. Il se spécialise dans l'étude du développement psychologique et social des enfants nés prématurément. Collaborateur de Nadeau et Tarabulsy.

	TARABULSY, G.M., TESSIER, R. & KAPPAS, A. (1996). Contingency detection and the contingent organization of behavior in interactions : Implications for socioemotional development in infancy. Psychological Bulletin, 119, 1-17.
	TESSIER, R. CRISTO, M.E., VELEZ, S., GIRON, M., NADEAU, L. & CHARPAK, N. (2003). Kangaroo mother-care : A method of protecting high-risk premature infants against developmental delay. Infant Behavior & Development, 26, 384-397.
	NADEAU, L., TESSIER, R., BOIVIN, M., LEFEVBRE, F. & ROBAEY, P. (2003). Extreme premature and very low birthweight infants : A double hazard population? Social Development, 12, 235-248.
	NADEAU, L. & TESSIER, R. (2003). Relations sociales entre enfants à l’âge scolaire : effet de la prématurité et de la déficience mo0trice. Enfance, 55, 48-55.
	LAGANIÈRE, J., TESSIER, R. & NADEAU, L. (2003). Attachement mère-enfant prématuré : Un lien médiatisé par les perceptions maternelles. Enfance, 55, 101-117.

Test : En science, le mot possède au moins quatre acceptions : a) En psychologie, il désigne une expérience personnelle qui consiste à confronter ses perceptions à la réalité (test de réalité). Reality test. b) toujours en psychologie, le mot renvoie à un outil qui permet d'évaluer de manière objective ou subjective certaines propriétés psychologique de l'humain ou de l'animal (intelligence, personnalité, apprentissage, etc); On dit passer ou administrer un test. Psychological test, mental test. c) En méthodologie, le test prend la forme d'une expérience scientifique ou d'une simulation dont la fonction est de mettre à l'épreuve une hypothèse en la confrontant directement aux faits (test empirique) de manière à pouvoir affirmer que cette hypothèse est vraie ou fausse. Le test permet donc de vérifier une hypothèse, et indirectement la théorie qui a engendrée cette hypothèse. Test et inférence forte. Empirical test. d) Finalement, en relation avec 3, on utilise ce terme pour désigner la procédure mathématique et logique qui permettent de vérifier si une hypothèse statistique est vraie ou fausse en la confrontant aux résultats d'une recherche (données empiriques), et en comparant ces résultats à ceux que l'on pourrait obtenir au hasard (données de la variable aléatoire). = test statistique. Statistical test.

Test psychologique

Test statistique

	a

	b
	GULLILSEN, H. (1950). Theory of mental tests. NewYork : Wiley.
	c
	WILTON, R. N. & CLEMENTS, R.O. (1971). The role of information in the emission of observing responses : a test of two hypotheses. Journal of theExperi-mental Analysis of Behavior, 16, 161-166. [PDF]
	d

Test bilatéral : Tout test statistique qui permet de refuser l'hypothèse nulle (Ho) et donc d'accepter l'hypothèse alternative (H1) selon laquelle le groupe A est différent du groupe B. Différent signifie deux choses : ou bien A > B, ou bien A < B, d'où le préfixe bi qui signifie «deux». Tests unilatéral et bilatéral. = test bidirectionnel ou bicaudale. Two-sided test, two-tailed test.

	LEVENTHAL, L. & HUYNH, C-L. (1996). Directional decisions for two-tailed tests : Power, error rates, and sample size. Psychological Methods, 1 (3), 278-292.
	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test binomial : Test statistique qui permet notamment de comparer au hasard les données des classes d'un échantillon. = modèle de la pièce de monnaie (pile ou face), test dichotomique. Binomial test.

	KEMP, K.E. & D. F. BUTCHER, D.F. (1972). Methods of analyzing binomial data in a two-factor experiment compared by computer simulation. JRSS, Series C 21 (3).
	BUTCHER, D.F. & KEMP, K.E. (1974). Analyzing binomial data in a two-factor experiment with unequal observations per cell. JRSS, Series C 23, 190.
	ABDI, H. (2007). Binomial distribution : Binomial and sign tests. In N.J. Salkind (Ed.), Encyclopedia of measurement and statistics. Thousand Oaks (CA) : Sage.
	GOULET, C. (2003). Tutoriel SPSS / Comment faire un test binomial. Montréal : Collège Ahuntsic [Disponible sur ce site].
	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test clinique : Voir Essai clinique.

Test d'Ansari-Bradley : Test statistique non-paramétrique. Ansari-Bradley scale test.

Test d'anxiété : Test anxiety.

	ZEIDNER M. (1991). Test anxiety and aptitude test performance in an actual college admissions testing situation: Temporal considerations. Personality & Individual Differences, 12 (2), 101-109.
	ZEIDNER M. (1998). Test anxiety : The state of the art. New York : Plenum Press.
	OOSTDAM, R. & MEIJER, J. (2003). Influence of test anxiety on measurement of intelligence. Psychological Reports, 92, 3-20.

Test d'aperception thématique (TAT) : Test projectif, inventé par Murray, dans lequel on demande au répondant d'interpréter une série d'illustrations ambiguës mettant en scène des personnes. Thematic Apperception Test.


	MURRAY, H.A. (1943). Thematic Apperception Test Manual. Cambridge, MA : Harvard University Press.
	TOMKINS, S.S. (1947). The thematic apperception test. A theory and technique of interpretation. New York USA : Grune & Stratton.
	PICA, M. (2001). The responses of dissociative patients on the Thematic Apperception Test. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 57, 847-864.

Test d'Apgar : Outil de diagnostic inventé par Apgar en 1952, pour évaluer l'état d'un nouveau-né, ses signes vitaux. Le mot Apgar est un acronyme pour : Apparence (coloration), Pouls (fréquence cardiaque), Grimace (réflexe à l'irritation), Activité (tonus musculaire) et Respiration. = Score d'Apgar.

Valeur	Apparence (Coloration)	Pouls (Fréquence cardiaque)	Grimace (Réflexe à l'irritation ou réactivité)	Activité (Tonus musculaire)	Respiration
0	Corps bleu (cyanose) ou gris	Absente	Aucune	Flasque ou Faible	Absente
1	Extrémité des membres bleutées	< 100	Faible grimace	Flexion des membres	Irrégulière
2	Rose	> 100	Réaction vive de l'ensemble du visage	Grande activité	Régulière

Test d'aptitude : ( ): SAT.

Test d'hypothèse : Tests statistiques de comparaison, développés à l'origine par Pearsons et Neyman, ayant pour but de vérifier une hypothèse qui stipule que le groupe A est différent du groupe B. EX: test t. Hypothesis testing, test of signifiance.

	HENKEL, R.E. (1976). Tests of signifiance. London : Sage.

Test d'intelligence : Voir Intelligence.

Test de Barbeau-Pinard : Test d'intelligence inventé par Barbeau et Pinard.

Test de Bartlett : Test statistique visant à comparer l'homoscédascité de deux échantillons. Il permet d'estimer si les différentes sous-catégories d'une variable de distribution normale ont la même variance. Bartlett test.

Test de Binet-Simon : Premier test d'intelligence, inventée en 1905 par Binet et Simon. = test d'intelligence Binet-Simon, le Binet-Simon, échelle métrique d'intelligence.

Test de Cochran : Test statistique non-paramétrique d'analyse des données binaires développé par Cochran. Il permet de tester l'hypothèse que k échantillons appariés de fréquences ou de proportions proviennent de la même population. Cochran Q-test.

	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de comparaison : Test statistique visant à comparer l'homoscédascité de deux échantillons. Il permet d'estimer si les différentes sous-catégories d'une variable de distribution normale ont la même variance. Bartlett test.

Tests de conformité : ( ):

Test de contingence : = coefficient de contingence.

	GOULET, C. (2003). Tutoriel SPSS/Comment calculer un coefficient de contingence. Montréal : Collège Ahuntsic. [Disponible sur ce site]
	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de continuité de Yates : Yates continuity correction.

	CONOVER, W.J. (1974). Some reasons for not using the Yates continuity correction on 2 x 2 Contingency Tables. Journal of the American Statistical Association, 69, 374-382.

Test de corrélation : Test statistique développé par Pearsons, à partir du concept de variation proposé par Galton, qui permet de mesurer l'intensité d'un lien linéaire entre deux ou plusieurs variables quantitatives. = corrélation de Pearson, coefficient R. Correlation.

	FISHER, R.A. (1921). On the " probable error " of a coefficient of correlation deduced from a small sample. Metron, 4, 1-32.
	GOULET, C. (2003). Tutoriel SPSS/Comment calculer un coefficient de corrélation. Montréal : Collège Ahuntsic. [Disponible sur ce site]
	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de Cramer-Von Mises :

Test de Duncan : Test statistique élaboré par Duncan. Duncan's new multiple range test.

	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de dépression : Test psychologique qui permet d'évaluer le niveau de dépression d'un individu.

Test de différence d'aptitude : Ensemble de tests qui permettent de mesurer les différences d'aptitude entre hommes et femmes. DAT.

Test de Fisher-Yates : Test statistique non-paramétrique.

Test de Fligner-Kileen : Test statistique non-paramétrique de comparaison de variances dans les sous-catégories d'une variable continue.

Test de Friedman : Test statistique non-paramétrique développé par Friedman. Il s'agit d'un test de comparaison de populations sur échantillons appariés. Test de Friedman et Kruskal-Wallis. = Anova de Friedman. Friedman test, Friedman anova by rank.

	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de Jarque Bera : Test statistique de normalité .

Test de Jonckheree-Terpstra : Test statistique non-paramétrique.

Test de Kappa : Voir Kappa (coefficient de...).

Test de Klotz : Test statistique non-paramétrique qui consiste à comparer K échantillons indépendants. Klotz scale test.

Test de Kolmogorov-Smirnov : Test statistique de normalité développé par Smirnov. Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, K-S test.

	GOODMAN, L.A. (1954). Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests for psychological research. Psychological Bulletin, 51, 160.
	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de Kruskal-Wallis : Test statistique non-paramétrique développé par Kruskal et Wallis. Il est utilisé lorsqu'il faut décider si k échantillons indépendants sont issus de la même population. Il permet aussi de comparer la moyenne des rangs des données de groupes indépendants. Test de Kruskal-Wallis et test de Friedman. = ANOVA univariée sur les rangs, Anova avec données ordinales. Kruskal-Wallis 1 way anova.

	KRUSKAL, W. & WALLIS, W.A. (1952). Use of ranks in one-criterion variance analysis. Journal of the American Statistical Association, 47, (260), 583-621.
	RUXTON, G.D. & BEAUCHAMP, G. (2008). Some suggestions about appropriate use of the Kruskal-Wallis test. Animal Behaviour 76, 1083-1087.
	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de Kuiper : Test statistique non-paramétrique.

Test de Mann-Witney : Voir Test U de Mann-Witney.

	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de la médiane : Test paramétrique. Median test.

	SCHERRER, B. (1984). Biostatistique. Chicoutimi : Gaëtan Morin.

Test de la personnalité : Ensemble de tests objectifs et projectifs qui permet d'évaluer les diverses facettes de la personnalité. ( ): test objectif, test projectif, MMPI, Échelle F, 16 pf, TAT, test de Rorschach. Personality scales.

	CATTELL, R.B. (1952). Objective personality tests : A reply to Dr. Eysenck. Occupational Psychology, 38, 69-86.
	MEEHL, P.E. (1945). The dynamics of “structured” personality tests. In L. D. Goodstein & R.I. Lanyon (Eds.), Readings in personality assessment (pp. 245–253). New York : Wiley. [PDF]
	GOLDBERG, L.R. (1971). A historical survey of personality scales and inventories. In P. McReynolds (Ed.), Advances in psychological assessment (Vol. 2, pp. 293-336). Palo Alto, CA : Science and Behavior Books.

Test de Hue : Test of hue memory.

	BURNHAM, R.W. & CLARKE, J.R. (1955). A test of hue memory. Journal of Applied Psychology, 39 (3), 164-172.

Test de lecture : Test composé de questions à choix multiples ou de questions ouvertes, qui permet d'évaluer les apprentissages réalisées grâce aux lectures faites dans le cadre d'un cours ou d'une formation. Test de lecture, examen et netquiz. Quizz.

	TOWNSEND, N.R. & WHEATLEY, G.H. (1975). Analysis of frequency of tests and varying feedback delays in college mathematics achievement. College Student Journal, 9, 32-36.	WILDER, D.A., FLOOD, W.A & STROMESNES, W. (2001). The use of random extra credit quizzes to increase student attendance. Journal of Instructional Psychology, 28, 117-120.
	ANDERSON, J.E. (1984). Frequency of quizzes in a behavioral science course: An attempt to increase medical student study behavior. Teaching of Psychology, 11, 34.	RAYMARK, P.H. & CONNOR-GREENE, P.A. (2002). The syllabus quiz. Teaching of Psychology, 29 (4), 286.
	LANDRRUM, R.E. (1992). Students' perceptions of the effects of test delays. College Student Journal, 26, 387-389.	BROTHEN, T. & WAMBACH, C. (2004). The value of time limits on internet quizzes. Teaching of Psychology, 31, 62-64.
	KERKMAN, D., KELLISON, K., PINON, M., SCHIMDT, D. & LEWIS, S. (1994). The quiz game : Writing and explaining questions improve quiz scores. Teaching of Psychology, 21 (2), 104-106.	KOUYOUMDJIAN, H. (2004). Influence of unannounced quizzes and cumulative exam on attendance and study behavior. Teaching of Psychology, 31 (2), 110.
	GRAHAM, R.B. (1999). Unannounced quizzes raise test scores selectively for mid-range students. Teaching of Psychology, 26 (4), 271-273.	PADILLA-WALKER, L.M. (2007). The impact of daily extra credit quizzes on exam performance. Teaching of Psychology 33 (4), 236.
	RUSCIO, J. (2001). Administering quizzes at random to increase students’ reading. Teaching of Psychology, 28 (3), 204-206.	NARLOCH, R., GARBIN, C.P. & TURNAGE, K.D. (2007). Benefits of prelecture quizzes. Teaching of Psychology 33 (2), 109.
	BROTHEN, T. & WAMBACH, C. (2001). Effective student use of computerized quizzes. Teaching of Psychology, 28, 292-294.	LANDRRUM, R.E. (2008). Introductory psychology student performance : weekly quizzes followed by a cumulative final exam. Teaching of Psychology, 34 (3), 177.

Test de Levene : Tests d'homogénéité des variances, développé par Levene, qui permet d'évaluer si les variances de deux populations sont égales ou non. Levene's test.

	CARROLL R.J. & SCHNEIDEIR, H. (1985). A note on Levene’s tests for equality of variances. Statistics and Probability Letters 3, 191-194.
	LEVENE, H. (1990). Robust tests for equality of variances. In I. Olkin (Ed.), Contributions to probability and statistics (pp. 278-292). Palo Alto, California : Stanford University Press.
	GASTWIRTH, J.L., GEL, Y.L. & MIAO, W. (2009). The impact of Levene’s test of equality of variances on statistical theory and practice. Statistical Science, 24 (3), 343-360.

Test de Luria-Nebraska : Batterie de tests objectifs qui permet d'évaluer la santé neurocognitive d'un patient. Luria-Nebraska, neuropsychological battery, LNNB.

Test de McNemar : Test statistique non-paramétrique développé par McNemar. McNemar test.

Test de mémoire sémantique : Test développé par Warrington, qui permet de diagnostiquer la démence sémantique . SWAT.

	WARRINGTON, E.K. & RUTCH, S.J. (2007). A within-modality test of semantic knowledge : The size/weight attribute test. Neuropsychology, 21 (6), 803-811.

Test de Mood : Test statistique non-paramétrique qui consiste à comparer K échantillons indépendants. Mood scale test.

Test de normalité : Ensemble de tests qui vise à estimer la conformité d'une distribution de données ou d'un échantillon à la loi normale. ( ): test de Jarque Bera, t est de Kolmogorov-Smirnov, test de Shapiro-Wilk.

Test de Page : Test statistique non-paramétrique.

Test de rang : Test statistique non-paramétrique développé par Kendall. Voir corrélation de rang.

	KENDALL M.G. (1938). A new measure of rank correlation. Biometrika, 30, 81-93.
	KENDALL M.G. (1962). Rank correlation methods. Londres : Griffin.
	CONOVER, W.J. (1973). Rank tests for one sample, two samples, and k-Samples without the assumption of a continuous distribution function. Annals of Statistics, 1, 1105-1125.
	CONOVER, W.J. & IMAN, R.L. (1977). On the power of the t-Test and some ranks tests when outliers may be present. The Canadian Journal of Statistics, 5 (2), 187-193.

Test de rang de Kendall : Test statistique non-paramétrique développé par Kendall. Voir corrélation de rang.

Test de rang de Kruskal et Wallis : Test statistique non-paramétrique. Kruskal-Wallis one-way analysis of variance.

	KRUSKAL, W. & WALLIS, W.A. (1952). Use of ranks in one-criterion variance analysis. Journal of the American Statistical Association, 47 (260), 583-621.

Test de rang de Spearman. Test statistique non-paramétrique. Spearman’s rank correlation.

	SPEARMAN, C.E. (1904). Proof and measurement of association between two things. American Journal of Psychology, 15, 72-101. [PDF]
	SPEARMAN, C.E. (1914). The theory of two factors. Psychological review, 21, 101-115.

Test de réalité : Chez Freud, confrontation du fantasme ou du désir à la réalité du patient/sujet. Reality testing.

	WÄLDER, R. (1936). The problem of freedom in psycho-analysis and the problem of reality-testing. International Journal of Psycho-analysis, 17, 89-108.	HURVICH, M. (1970). On the concept of reality testing. International Journal of Psycho-analysis, 51, 299-312.
	FRENCH, T.M. (1937). Reality testing in dreams. Psychoanalytic Quaterly, 6, 62-77.	JACOBSON, J.G. (1973). Reliving the past, perceptual experience and the reality-testing functions of the ego. International Journal of Psycho-analysis, 54, 399-413.
	KANZER, M. (1957). Acting out, sublimation and reality testing. Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association, 5, 663-684.	SCHWABER, E.A. (1997). Psychic reality and psychic testing. International Journal of Psycho-analysis, 78, 157-158.
	RUBINFINE, D.L. (1961). Perception, reality testing, and symbolism. Psychoanalytic Study of Child, 16, 73-89.	FIGUEIREDO, L.C. (2006). Sense of reality, reality testing and reality processing in borderline patients. International Journal of Psycho-analysis, 87, 769-787.
	ARLOW, J.A. (1969). Fantasy, memory, and reality testing. Psychoanalytic Quaterly, 38, 28-51

Test de robustesse de Moses : Test statistique non-paramétrique.

Test de Rorschach : Test projectif de personnalité élaboré par Rorschach, dans lequel on demande au patient/répondant d'interpréter des taches d'encre abstraites et symétriques. Il sert à diagnostiquer certains désordres de la personnalité ou maladie smentales. Rorshach test.


	ELLIS, A., HERTZ, M.R. & SYMONDS, P.M. (1947). Rorschach methods and other projective techniques. Review of Educational Research, 17, 78-100.	ALBERT, S., FOX, H.M. & KAHN, M.W. (1980). Faking psychosis on the Rorschach : can expert judges detect malingering? Journal of Personality Assessment, 44, 115-119.
	BANDURA, A. (1954). The Rorschach white space response and “oppositional” behavior. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 18, 17-21.	BLATT, S.J. & BERMAN, W. (1984). A methodology for the use of the Rorschach in clinical research. Journal of Personality Assessment, 48, 226-239.
	BANDURA, A. (1954). The Rorschach white space response and perceptual reversal. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 48, 113-117.	FRUEH, C.B. & KINDER, B.N. (1994). The susceptibility of the Rorschach Inkblot Test to malingering of combat-related PTSD. Journal of Personality Assessment, 62, 280-298.
	SINGER, J.L. & SPOHN, H. (1954). Some behavioral correlates of Rorschach's experience type. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 18, 1-9.	FRUEH, C.B., LEVERETT, J.P. & KINDER, B.N. (1995). Interrelationship between MMPI-2 and Rorschach variables in a sample of Vietnam veterans with PTSD. Journal of Personality Assessment, 64, 312-318.
	SCHAFER R. (1954). Psychoanalytic interpretation in Rorschach testing. New York : Grune & Stratton.	GARB, H.N., WOOD, J.M., NEZWORSKIM.T., GROVE, W.M. & STEJSKAL W.J. (2001). Toward a resolution of the Rorschach controversy. Psychological Assessment, 13, 433-448.
	SINGER, J.L. (1955). Non-pojective aspects of the Rorschach : Implications for clinical application. Journal of Social Psychology, 44, 207-214.	MOULLER, V., SABA, G., VERDON, C.-M. & JANUEL, D. (2004). Étude de la rémission dans la schizophrénie à l’aide du test de Rorschach. Pratiques Psychologiques, 10 (4), 365-377.
	LOISELLE, R.H., O'LEARY, V.E. & PARRISH, K. (1968). A comparison of the stimulus value of Rorschach Inkblots and their percept as perceived by children and schizophrenics. Journal of Projective Techniques crud Personality Assessment, 32, 237-245.	WOOD, J.M., NEZWORSKI, M. T., LILIENFELD, S.O. & GARB, H N. (2003). What's wrong with the Rorschach : Science confronts the controversial inkblot test. New York : Jossey-Bass.
	EKEHAMMAR, B. (1971). A psychophysical approach to the study of individuals' perceptions of Rorschach cards. Perceptual & Motor Skills, 33, 951-965.	HUPRICH, S.K., O’NEILL, R. M., BORNSTEIN, R. F., KUSAJ, C & SMITH, P.Q. (2003). Detecting social interest in dependent patients with the Rorschach Interpersonal cluster. Individual Differences Research, 1, 64-72.
	EXNER, J.E. (1974). The Rorschach : A comprehensive system. New York : Wiley.	HUPRICH, S.K., GACONO, C.B., SCNEIDER, R.B. & BRIDGES, M.R. (2004). Rorschach oral dependency in psychopaths, pedophiles, and sexual homicide perpetrators. Behavioral Sciences & the Law, 22, 345-356.
	BLATT, J.S. & RITZLER, B.A. (1974). Suicide and the representation of transparency and cross sections on the Rorschach. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 42, 280-287.	COSTA, P.T. & McCRAE, R.R. (2005). A Five-Factor Theory perspective on the Rorschach. Rorschachiana, 27, 76-96.

Test de Shapiro-Wilk : Test statistique de normalité. Shapiro-Wilk test.

	SHAPIRO, S.S. & WILK, M.B. (1965). An analysis of variance test for normality (complete samples). Biometrika, 52, 591-611.

Test de signification : Significance test.

	NEYMAN, J. & PEARSON, S.E. (1933). On the problem of the most efficient tests of statistical hypotheses. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society, 289-337.	OAKES, M.J. (1986). Statistical inference : A commentary for social and behavioral sciences. New York : Wiley.
	BAKAN, D. (1966). The test of significance in psychological research. Psychological Bulletin, 66, 1-29.	McCLURE, J. & SUEN, H.K. (1994). Interpretation of statistical significance testing: A matter of perspective. Topics in Early Childhood Special Education, 14, 88-100.
		MEEHL, P.E. (1997). The problem is epistemology, not statistics : Replace significance tests by confidence intervals and quantify accuracy of risky numerical predictions. In L.L. Harlow, S.A. Mulaik & J.H. Steiger (Eds.), What if there were no significance tests? Mahwah, NJ : Erlbaum. [PDF]
	KRUSKAL, W. (1968). Significance, Tests of. In The international encyclopedia of the social science (pp. 238-250). New York : The Macmillan Co. and the Free Press.	HUNTER, J.E. (1997). Needed : A ban on the significance test. American Psychological Society, 8, 3-7.
	MORRISON, D.E. & HENKEL, R.E. (1969). Significance tests reconsidered. The American Sociologist, 4, 131-140.	BRANCH, M.N. (1999). Some things significance testing does and does not do. The Behavior Analyst, 22, 87-92.
	GOLD, D. (1969). Statistical tests and substantive significance. The American Sociologist, 5, 42-46.	JONES, L. & TUKEY, J.W. (2000). A sensible formulation of the significance test. Psychological Methods, 5 (4), 411-414.
	HENKEL, R.E. (1976). Tests of significance. London : Sage.	MARKUS, K.A. (2001). The converse inequality argument against tests of statistical significance. Psychological Methods, 6 (2), 147-160.
		KILLEEN, P.R. (2005). An alternative to hypothesis significance tests. Psychological Science, 16 (5), 345-353.

Test de Stanford-Binet : Test d'intelligence développé par Binet et Simon, puis modifié et adapaté en 1916 par Terman et Merrill. Stanford-Binet scale, Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scale.

	TERMAN, M.L. MERRILL, M.A. (1916). The Stanford Revision of the Binet-Simon Tests. Boston, Houghton Mifflin.
	TERMAN, M.L. MERRILL, M.A. (1937). Revised Stanford-Binet Scale. Boston : Houghton Mifflin.
	McNEMAR, Q. (1942). The revision of the Stanford-Binet scale. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co.
	TERMAN L.M. & MERRILL, M.A. (1960). Stanford -Binet Intelligence Scale. Boston : Houghton Mifflin Compagny.
	THORNDIKE, R.L., HAGEN, E.P. & SATTLER, J.M. (1986). Stanford-Binet intelligence scale Fourth edition (Technical Manual). Chicago: Riverside.
	CARSON, D. & ROID, G. (2004). Acceptable use of the Stanford-Binet Form L-M: Guidelines for the professional use of the Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scale. Itasca, IL : Riverside Publishing.

Test de Stuart-Maxwell : Test statistique non-paramétrique.

Test des gobelets :

Test des signes : Test statistique non-paramétrique, qui permet de comparer K échantillons ou groupes appariés. Sign test.

	RAISON, J. (1957). Le test des signes. Note complémentaire théorique. Revue de Statistique Appliquée, 5 (3), 91-98.

Test de Szondi : Test psychologique projectif et non-verbal développé par Szondi, et qui a pour but de révéler la dynamique des pulsions.

Test de Turing : Voir Turing.

Test de Van der Waerden : Test statistique non-paramétrique. Van der Waerden 1-way anova.

Test de Wald : Test statistique développé par Wald pour vérifier l'existence d'une relation entre deux variables ordinales ou nominales. Wald test.

Test de Wald-Wolfowitz : Test statistique élaboré par Wald et Wolfowitz. Wald-Wolfowitz runs test.

	FRIEDMAN, J.H. & RAFSKY, L.C. (1979). Multivariate generalizations of the Wald-Wolfowitz and Smirnov two-sample tests. Annals of Statistics, 7 (4), 697-717.

Test de Wason : Tâche de Wason.

Test de Wilcoxon : Test non-paramétrique élaboré par Wilcoxon. Wilcoxon signed-rank test. = Test de rang de Wilcoxon, test de rangs signés de Wilcoxon, test Mann-Whitney-Wilcoxon, test MWW. Wilcoxon signed-rank test.

	WILCOXON, F. (1945). Individual comparisons by ranking methods. Biometrics, 1, 80-83.
	KRUSKAL, W. (1957). Historical notes on the Wilcoxon unpaired two-sample test. Journal of the American Statistical Association, 52, 356- 360.
	BLAIR, R.C. & HIGGINS, J.J. (1980). A comparison of the power of Wilcoxon’s rank- sum test to that of Student’s t statistic under various nonnormal distributions. Journal of Educational Statistics, 5, 309-335.

Test du détour : Procédure expérimentale qui permet d'évaluer la représentation spatiale chez les animaux et les nourrissons.

Test du khi carré : Prononcez Qui carré. Test d'hypothèse qui permet de comparer deux ou plusieurs variables qualitatives nominales, inventé par Pearson, afin d'inférer un lien de dépendance. N.D.L.R. : Doit-on écrire Khi-carré avec un trait d'union ou non ? L'usage semble hésitant... = χ2, khi-deux ou test du khi carré, khi de Pearson. Pearson's chi-square test.

	MOORE, D.S. (1986). Tests of chi-squared type. In R.B. D’Agostino & M. A. Stephens (Eds.), Goodness- of-fit techniques (pp. 63-96). New York : Marcel Dekker.
	GOULET, C. (2003). Tutoriel SPSS/Comment faire un Khi-deux. Montréal : Collège Ahuntsic [Disponible sur ce site].

Test du log-anova : Test statistique visant à comparer l'homoscédascité de deux échantillons.

Test du miroir : Dispositif expérimental utilisé de manière différente selon que l'on s'intéresse à la conscience de soi ou à l'agressivité : a) En psychologie, cette procédure expérimentale mise au point par Gallup pour vérifier la capacité d'un enfant ou d'un animal de se reconnaître dans un miroir (conscience de soi). On utilise également ce test pour accroître la conscience de soi. b) En éthologie, le test du miroir est également utilisé pour induire des comportements agressifs chez des espèces qui ne se reconnaissent pas dans un miroir (notamment chez les poissons comme le Xiphophorus helleri). Test du miroir, reconnaissance de soi et conscience de soi. = épreuve du miroir. Mirror test, mirror effect.

	a
	GALLUP, G.G. (1970). Chimpanzees : self-recognition. Science, 167, 86-87.
	ANDERSON, J.R. (1984). Monkeys with mirrors : some questions for primate psychology. International Journal of Primatology 5, 81-98.
	EPSTEIN, R., LANZA, R.P. & SKINNER, B.F. (1981). "Self-awareness" in the pigeon. Science, 212, 695-696.
	GLANZER, M. & ADAMS, J.K. (1990). The mirror effect in recognition memory : Data and theory. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Learning, Memory, & Cognition 16, 5-16.
	GLANZER, M. & ADAMS, J.K. & IVERSON, G. (1991). Forgetting and the mirror effect in recognition memory : Concentering of underlying distributions. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Learning, Memory, & Cognition 17, 81-93.
	GLANZER, M., KIM, K. & ADAMS, J.K. (1998). Response distribution as an explanation of the mirror effect. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Learning Memory, & Cognition, 24, 633-644.
	b
	DE WAAL, F.B.M., DINDO, M., FREEMAN, C.A. & HALL, M. (2005). The monkey in the mirror : Hardly a stranger. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 102, 11140-11147.

Test du MMPI : Sigle pour Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory. Test de personnalité objectif, l'un des plus utilisés dans le monde. MMPI et personnalité. Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory, MMPI.

	MEEHL, P.E. (1946). Profile analysis of the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory in differential diagnosis. Journal of Applied Psychology, 30, 517-524.	PERKINS, J. & GOLDBERG, L.R. (1964). Contextual effects on the MMPI. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 28, 133-140.
	McKINLEY, J.C., HATHAWAY S.R. & MEEHL, P.E. (1948). The Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory : VI. The K scale. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 12, 20-31.	GOLDBERG, L.R. (1969). The search for configural relationships in personality assessment : The diagnosis of psychosis vs. neurosis from the MMPI. Multivariate Behavioral Research, 4, 523-536.
	HATHAWAY S.R. & MEEHL, P.E. (1951). An atlas for the clinical use of the MMPI. Minneapolis : University of Minnesota Press.	WIGGINS, J.S., GOLDBERG, L.R. & APPLEBAUM, M. (1971). MMPI content scales : Interpretative norms and correlations with other scales. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 37, 403-410.
	MEEHL, P.E. (1959). A comparison of clinicians with five statistical methods of identifying MMPI profiles. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 6, 102-109.	GOLDEN, R. & MEEHL, P.E. (1979). Detection of the schizoid taxon with MMPI indicators. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 88, 217-233.
		WOYCHYSHYN, C.A., McELHERAN, W.G. & ROMENY, D. M. (1992). MMPI validity measures: A comparative study of iriginal with alternative indices. Journal of Personality Assessment, 58, 138-148.
		FRUEH, C.B., LEVERETT, J.P. & KINDER, B.N. (1995). Interrelationship between MMPI-2 and Rorschach variables in a sample of Vietnam veterans with PTSD. Journal of Personality Assessment, 64, 312-318.
	MEEHL, P.E. & DAHLSTROM, W.G. (1960). Objective configural rules for discriminating psychotic from neurotic MMPI profiles. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 24, 375-387.	BISSON, T. (1997). Le M.M.P.I. Grenoble : Presses universitaires de Grenoble.
		ZHANG, J.X. SONG, W.Z. & ZHANG, M.Q. (1999). Introduction on Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory-2 (MMPI-2) and it's standardization process in mainland China and Hong Kong. Chinese Mental Health Journal, 1, 29-31.

Test du pouvoir : Test de réalité qu'une parti politique doit subir lorsqu'il forme le gouvernement. En effet, une fois au pouvoir, les partis sacrifient souvent de grands pans de leur idéologie et de leur programme politique. Des projets ou des valeurs au coeur de ces programmes sont mis sur la glace ou en veilleuses, soit parce qu'ils étaient irréalistes ou flous, soit parce qu'ils n'étaient en fait que des stratégies ou des techniques pour persuader l'électeur, ou bien encore en raison de la conjoncture sociale et économique qui ne se prêtent pas à la réalisation de tels projets/valeurs. De fait, les partis trop à gauche ou à droite gouvernent souvent au centre et les élections qui les portent au pouvoir sont souvent le théâtre d'une migration idéologique vers le «petit mou commun».

Test du signe : Voir Test non-paramétrique. Sign test.

Test empirique/Tester : En méthodologie, le test est une recherche qui vise à éprouver la véracité d'une hypothèse et la solidité d'une théorie en les confrontant directement aux faits. Le test permet donc de vérifier si hypothèse/théorie sont vraies ou fausses. Le résultat de ce test peut êter favorable ou non (test négatif) à la théorie. = recherche empirique.

Test exact de Fisher : Test statistique élaboré par Fisher. Fisher's exact test.

	FISHER, R.A. (1922). On the interpretation of χ2 from contingency tables, and the calculation of P. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, 85 (1), 87-94.

Test F : Voir Test d'hypothèse. F test.

Test G : Test de conformité.Test of goodness-of-fit.

	FISHER, R.A. (1922). The goodness of fit of regression formula, and the distribution of regression coefficients. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, 85, 597-612.
	SOKAL, R.R. & ROHLF, F.J. (1994). Biometry : the principles and practice of statistics in biological research. New York : Freeman.

Test mental : Voir Test d'intelligence.

Test négatif : Test empirique qui se solde par l'infirmation ou la falsification d'une hypothèse. En science, cette vérification ou mise à l'épreuve prend la forme d'une recherche empirique. = hypothèse infirmée, confrontation négative. /test positif.

Test non-paramétrique : Test et statistique non-paramétrique.

	CONOVER, W.J. (1971/99). Practical nonparametric statistics. New York : John Wiley and Sons.
	BELL, W.D., ROTHSTEIN, S.M. & LIi, W. (1982). Empirical study of some non-parametric tests of dispersion of correlated data. Journal of Statistical Computation & Simulation, 15, 9-15.
	GIBBONS, J.D. (1998). Non parametric Methods for quantitative analysis. Columbus, Ohio: American Sciences Press, Inc.

Test objectif : Tout test psychologique dont les bonnes réponses sont déterminées par le chercheur. Il contient habituellement des questions à choix multiple ou des mises en situation. EX: MMPI. /test projectif. Objective test.

Test projectif : Tout test psychologique dont les bonnes réponses ne sont pas déterminées par le chercheur. Il contient habituellement des figures ou des mises en situation floues ou ambiguës. = test subjectif, méthode projective. /test objectif. ( ): C.A.T., Test de Rorscharch, Test de Szondi, T.A.T. Projective test.

	GEMELLI, A. (1950). Le film comme methode projective. Acta psychologica, 7, 190-195.
	VAN LENNEP, D.J. & HOUWINK, R.H. (1951/52). Projection tests and overt behavior. Acta psychologica, 8, 240-253.
	JENSEN, A.R. (1959). The reliability of projective techniques : methodology. Acta Psychologica, 16, 108-136.
	MEEHL, P.E. (1959). Structured and projective tests : Some common problems in validation. Journal of Projective Techniques, 23, 268-272.
	LILIENFELD, S.O., WOOD, J. & GARB, H.N. (2000). The scientific status of projective tests. Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 1, 27-66.

Test psychologique : Outil de collecte de données et d'intervention qui permet de mesurer et d'évaluer un grand nombre de propriétés psychologiques au moyen de questions et de mises en situation réelles ou virtuelles. Les tests permettent d'évaluer les traits de personnalité, les états émotionnels, les troubles cognitifs, les capacités intellectuelles, les intérêts, les habiletés, les valeurs, les opinions, etc. Test psychologique et psychométrie. ( ): test objectif, test projectif. Mental test, psychological test.

Tests psychologiques
Test objectif	Test projectif
Épreuve de conservation
Inventaire d'anxiété de Beck
Inventaire de comportement d'enfant de Eyberg
Inventaire de comportement obsessif-compulsif de Clark et Beck
Inventaire de dépression de Beck
MMPI	C.A.T.
NEMI	Test de Rorscharch
Test de Binet-Simon	Test de Szondi
Test de Cattel	T.A.T.
Test de Luria-Nebraska
Test de Stanford-Binet
Test du détour
Test du miroir
Test seize (16) PF
WAIS
WBIS
WISC
WPPSI

	CATTELL, J.M. (1890). Mental tests and measurements. Mind, 15, 373-381.	ANASTASI, A. (1986). Evolving concepts of test validations. Annual Review of Psychology, 37, 1-15
	BURT, C. (1909). Experimental tests of general intelligence. British Journal of Psychology, 3, 94-177.	KLINE, P. (1986). A handbook of test construction : Introduction to psychometric. Design. London : Methuen.
	KENT, G.H. (1923). A combination mental test for clinical use. Journal of applied Psychology, 7, 246-257.	CROCKER, L. & ALGINA, J. (1986). Introduction to classical and modern test theory. New York : Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
	KENT, G.H. (1938). Use and abuse of mental tests in clinical diagnosis. Psychological Record, 2, 391-400.	CRONBACH, L.J. (1990). Essentials of psychological testing. New York : Harper International.
	GULLIKSEN, H. (1950). Theory of mental tests. New York : Wiley.	McDONALD, R.P. (1999). Test theory. A unified treatment. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
	KENT, G.H. (1950). Mental tests in clinics for children. New York : D. Van Nostrand Company, Inc.	WARWICK, K. (2000). QI : the quest for intelligence. London : Judy Piatkus Publishers Ltd.
	ANASTASI, A. (1983). What do intelligence tests measure? In S.B. Anderson & J.S. Helmick (Eds.), On educational testing : Intelligence, performance standards, test anxiety, and latent traits (pp. 5-28). San Francisco : Jossey-Bass.	KLINE, P. (2000). Handbook of psychological testing. London : Routledge.
		KOHN, A. (2000). The case against standardized testing. Portsmouth, NH : Heinemann.

Test-retest (méthode) : Expression utilisée pour désigner la capacité d'un outil de fournir une mesure ou une évaluation stable dans le temps c-à-d- indépendante du moment où cette évaluation/mesure est faite. EX : Deux mesures enregistrées par le même outil pour un même échantillon, à des moments différents. Il s'agit de l'un des deux éléments de la fidélité test-retest. Méthode test-retest et équivalence des mesures. = stabilité de la mesure. Test-retest.

	WINDLE, C. (1954). Test-retest on personality questionnaires. Educational Psychology Measurement, 14, 617-633.
	GOLDBERG, L.R. & RORER, L.G. (1964). Test-retest item statistics. Psychological Reports, 15, 413-414.
	SPENCER, F.H. & BORNHOLT, L.J. (2005). Investigating moderators of test-retest reliability in screening children's cognitive functioning. Australian Journal of Educational & Developmental Psychology, 5, 91-106.

Test seize (16) PF : Test de personnalité inventé par Cattell pour mesurer les diverses facettes de la personnalité, telles que décrites par sa théorie. = seize facteurs de personnalité.

	CATTELL, R.B. & DREVDAHL, J.E. (1955). A comparison of the personality profile (16 P.F.) of eminent teachers and administrators, and of the general population. British Journal of Psychology, 46, 248-261.
	GOLDBERG, L.R., NORMAN, W.T. & SCHWARTZ, E. (1980). The comparative validity of questionnaire data (16PF scales) and objective test data (O-A Battery) in predicting five peer-rating criteria. Applied Psychological Measurement, 4, 183-194.
	KIRTON, M.J. & DE CIANTIS, S.M. (1986). Cognitive styles and personality: The Kirton Adaptation-Innovation and Cattell 16-PF Personal- ity Factors Inventories. Personality and Individual Differences, 7, 141-146.
	KRUG, S.E. & JOHNS, E.F. (1986). A large scale cross-validation of second-order personality structure defined by the 16PF. Psychological Reports, 59 (2), 683–693.
	GROSSMAN, L.S. & CRAIG, R.J. (1995). Comparison of MCMI-II and 16PF Validity Scales. Journal of Personality Assessment, 64, 384-389.
	CATTELL H.E.P. & MEAD, A.D. (2007). The 16 Personality Factor Questionnaire (16PF). In G.J. Boyle, G. Matthews & D.H. Saklofske (Eds.), Handbook of personality theory and testing : Vol. 2: Personality measurement and assessment. London: Sage.

Test standardisé :

	HAMILTON, M. (1969). Standardised assessment and recording of depressive symptoms. Psychiatria, Neurologia, Neurochirurgia, 72, 201-205.

Test statistique : Ensemble des tests et des analyses qui permettent de vérifier une hypothèse statistique, et d'affirmer si l'hypothèse de recherche est vraie ou fausse. ( ): test d'hypothèse, test de conformité à la distribution théorique, test de corrélation. Statistical test.

Tests et analyses statistiques
Analyse acheminatoire	Test de Cochran	Test de Page
Analyse de la covariance	Test de contingence	Test de rang de Kendall
Analyse de la variance (ANOVA)	Test de continuité de Yates	Test de rang de Kruskal et Wallis
Analyse de régression	Test de corrélation	Test de robustesse de Moses
Analyse des données dyadiques	Test de Cramer-Von Mises	Test de Shapiro-Wilk
Analyse des séries temporelles	Test de Duncan	Test de Stuart-Maxwell
Analyse discriminante	Test de Fisher-Yates
Analyse en composantes	Test de Fligner-Kileen	Test de Van der Waerden
Analyse factorielle	Test de Friedman	Test de Wald
Analyse multivariée (MANOVA)	Test de Jarque Bera	Test de Wald-Wolfowitz
Analyse par partionnement	Test de Jonckheree-Terpstra	Test des signes
Analyse séquentielle	Test de Klotz	Test du log-anova
Coefficient de Kappa	Test de Kolmogorov-Smirnov	Test F
Coefficient alpha	Test de Kruskal-Wallis	Test G
Coefficient de contingence	Test de Kuiper
Coefficient de concordance de Kendall	Test de Mann-Witney
Test binomial	Test de la médiane	Test T
Test d'Ansari-Bradley	Test de Levene	Test U de Mann-Witney
Test de Bartlett	Test de McNemar	Test Z
	Test de Mood


	NEYMAN, J. & PEARSON, S.E. (1933). On the problem of the most efficient tests of statistical hypotheses. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society, 289-337.
	MORRISON, D. & HENKEL, R.E. (1970). The significance test controversy. Chicago Aldine.

Test statistique paramétrique : Ensemble de tests qui se fonde sur la normalité des distibutions de données. Ce principe conduit à l'estimation des paramètres de ces distributions. EX: la moyenne et le test T. Test paramétrique et loi normale.

Test statistique non paramétrique : Contrairement aux tests paramétriques, ces tests ne formulent aucune hypothèse sur la normalité de la distribution de X. Non-parametric statistic, free distribution test.

	SIEGEL, S. (1956). Non-parametric statistics for the behavioral sciences. New York : McGraw-Hill.
	DALMAY, F. PREUX, P.M., DRUET-CABANAC, M. & VERGNENÈGRE, A. (2003). Qu'est-ce qu'un test non paramétrique ? Revue des Maladies Respiratoires, 20 (6), 955-958.

Test t : Test d'hypothèse élaboré par Gosset, qui permet de comparer la moyenne de deux groupes. = test de Student, test de comparaison des moyennes, test de Gosset. T test, Student's t.


	STUDENT/GOSSET, W.S. (1908). The probable error of a mean. Biometrika, 6, 1-25.
	CONOVER, W.J. & KEMP, K.E. (1973). Robustness and power of the t-Test compared with some nonparametric alternatives when sampling from a poisson distribution. Journal of Statistical Computation and Simulation, 2, 293-307.
	GOULET, C. (2003). Tutoriel SPSS/Comment faire un test T. Montréal : Collège Ahuntsic. [Disponible sur ce site]
	COUSINEAU, D. (2007). Computing the power of t-tests. Tutorials in Quantitative Methods for Psychology, 3 (2), 60-62.

Test U de Mann-Witney : Test statistique non-paramétrique élaboré séparément par Mann et Witney d'un côté et Wilcoxon de l'autre. = test Mann-Whitney-Wilcoxon, test MWW, test de rang de Wilcoxon. Mann-Whitney U, Mann-Whitney-Wilcoxon test, test MWW, Wilcoxon rank-sum test , Mann-Whitney comparaison.

	MANN, H.B. & WHITNEY, D.R. (1947). On a test of whether one of 2 random variables is stochastically larger than the other. Annals of Mathematical Statistics, 18, 50-60.
	WILCOXON, F. (1945). Individual comparisons by ranking methods. Biometrics Bulletin, 1, 80-83.

Test unilatéral : Tout test statistique qui permet de refuser l'hypothèse nulle et donc d'accepter l'hypothèse alternative selon laquelle le groupe A est > que B ou l'inverse (mais non les deux possibilités car le préfixe un signifie un seul). Contrairement au test bilatéral, le test unilatéral permet de préciser le sens de la différence entre A et B. Tests unilatéral et bilatéral. = test unidirectionnel ou unicaudale. One-sided test, one-tailed test.

	DEUTSCH, M. (1977). Recurrent themes in the study of social conflict. Journal of Social Issues, 33, 222-225.

Test Z : Test d'hypothèse. Z test.

Testostérone : Hormone masculine sécrétée par les testicules. Elle agit, entre autres, sur le développement des caractères sexuels. Testostérone, agressivité et agression. Testosterone.

	STONE, C.P. (1938). Activation of impotent male rats by injections of testosterone propionate. Comparative Psychology, 25, 445-450.	MAZUR A. & BOOTH, A. (1998). Testosterone and dominance in men. Behavioral & Brain Science, 21, 353-397.
	ROSE, R., BERNSTEIN, I. & GORDON, T. (1975). Consequences of social conflict on plasma testosterone levels in rhesus monkeys. Psychosomatic Medicine, 37, 50-61.	DABBS, J.M. & DABBS, M.G. (2000). Heroes, rogues, and lovers : Testosterone and Behavior. New York : McGraw-Hill.
	ALEXANDER, G.M. & SHERWIN, B.B., BANCROFT, J.B. & DAVIDSON, D.W. (1990). Testosterone and sexual behavior in oral contraceptive users and nonuser s: A prospective study. Hormones & Behavior, 24, 388-402.	RABKIN, J.G. WAGNER, G.J. & RABKIN, R. (2001). Testosterone's effects not limited to mood (letter). Archives of General Psychiatry, 58, 403-404.
	ALEXANDER, G.M. & SHERWIN, B.B. (1991). The association between testosterone, sexual arousal, and selective attention for erotic stimuli in men. Hormones & Behavior, 25, 367-381.	O'CONNOR, D.B., ARCHER, J., HAIR, M. & WU, F.W.C. (2001). Activational effects of testosterone on cognitive function in men. Neuropsychologia, 39, 1385-1394.
	MAZUR, A., BOOTH, A. & DABBS, J. (1992). Testosterone and chess competition. Social Psychology Quarterly, 55, 70-77.	BOOK, A.S., STARZYK, K.B. & QUINSEY, V.L. (2001). The relationship between testosterone and aggression : A meta-analysi. Aggression & Violent Behavior, 6 (6), 579-599.
		MAZUR, A. (2002). Does testosterone cause machismo ? Contemporary Psychology, 47, 275-276.
	ALEXANDER, G.M., PACKARD, M.G. & HINES, M. (1994). Testosterone has rewarding affective properties in male rats : Implications for the biological basis of sexual motivation. Behavioral Neuroscience, 108, 424-428.	HINES, M., GOLOMBOK, S., RUST, J., JOHNSTON, K.J., & GOLDING, J. (2002). Testosterone during pregnancy and gender role behavior of preschool children : A longitudinal, population study. Child Development, 73, 1678-1687.
	DABBS, J.M., CARR, T.S., FRADY, R.L. & RIAD, J.K. (1995). Testosterone, crime, and misbehavior among 692 male prison inmates. Personality & Individual Differences, 18 (5), 627-633.	O'CONNOR, D.B., ARCHER, J. & WU, F.C.W. (2004). Effects of testosterone on mood, aggression and sexual behavior in young men : A double-blind, placebo-controlled, cross-over study. Journal of Clinical Endocrinology & Metabolism, 89, 2837-2845.
	DABBS, J.M. (1997). Testosterone, smiling, and facial appearance. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior, 21, 45-55.
	SAPOLSKY, R. (1998). The trouble with testosterone : And other essays on the biology of the human predicament. Scribner.	ISIDORI A.M., GIANETTA, E., GIANFRILLI, D., GRECO, E.A., BONIFACIO, V., AVERSA, A., ISIDORI, A., FABBRI, A. & LENZI, A. (2005). Effects of testosterone on sexual function in men : Results of a meta-analysis. Clinical Endocrinology, 63, 381-394.
	DABBS, J.M. (1998) Testosterone and the concept of dominance. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 21, 370-371.	MAZUR, A. (2006). Testosterone supplementation in the aging male : Which Questions Have to be Answered?, Allan Mazur, coauthor. The Aging Male, 8, 31-38.
	BENRHARDT, P.C., DABBS, J.M., FIELDEN, J.A. & LUTTER, C.D. (1998) Testosterone changes during vicarious experiences of winning and losing among fans at sporting events. Physiology & Behavior, 65, 59-62.	ARCHER, J. (2006). Testosterone and human behavior : An evaluation of the challenge hypothesis. Neuroscience and Biobehavioral Reviews, 30, 319-345.
	TREMBLAY, R.E., SCHAAL, B., BOULERICE, B., ARSENEAULT, L., SOUSSIGNAN, R.G., PAQUETTE, D. & LAURENT, D. (1998). Testosterone, physical aggression, dominance, and physical development in early adolescence. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 22, 753–777.	KINSBERG, S., SHIFREN, J., WEKSELMAN, K., RODENBERG, C., KOOCHAKI P. & DEROGATIS, L. (2007). Evaluation of the clinical relevance of benefits associated with transdermal testosterone treatment in postmeno- pausal women with hypoactive sexual desire disorder. Journal of Sexual Medicine, 4, 1001-1008.
		ALLAN, C.A., FORBES, E.A., SRAUSS, B.J. & McLACHIAN, R.I. (2008). Testosterone therapy increases sexual desire in ageing men with low-normal testosterone levels and symptoms of androgen deficiency. International Journal of Impotence Research, 20, 396-401.

Tête : Voir Blessure à la tête.

Thagard Paul R. (Yorkton Canada 1950-) : Philosophe cognitiviste canadien, spécialisé dans l'étude du raisonnement (modèle computationnel). Collaborateur de Holyoak, Nisbett et Holland.

	THAGARD, P.R. (1982). From the descriptive to the normative in psychology and logic. Philosophy of Science, 49, 24-42.
	HOLLAND, J.H., HOLYOAK, K.J., NISBETT, R.E. & THAGARD, P.R. (1986). Processes of inference, learning, and discovery. Cambridge, MA/London : Computational Models of Cognition and Perception series/MIT Press.
	THAGARD, P. (1988). Computational philosophy of science. Press/Bradford Books.
	THAGARD, P.R. (1992). Adversarial problem solving : Modelling an opponent using explanatory coherence. Cognitive Science, 16, 123-149.
	THAGARD, P.R. (1996/2005). Mind : Introduction to cognitive science. Cambridge, MA : MIT Press/Bradford Books.

Thalamus : Structure du cerveau découverte par Galien. Il s'agit en fait de deux noyaux de matière grise - qui relaie et filtre les messages sensoriels au cortex cérébral. Thalamus et amygdale. Thalamus.

	JONES, E.G. (1985). The Thalamus. New York : Plenum Press.
	EDELINE, J.M. & WEINBERGER, N.M. (1991). Thalamic short-term plasticity in the auditory system : associative returning of receptive fields in the ventral medial geniculate body. Behavioral Neuroscience, 105 (5), 618-639.
	EDELINE, J.M. & WEINBERGER, N.M. (1992). Associative retuning in the thalamic source of input to the amygdala and auditory cortex : receptive field plasticity in the medial division of the medial geniculate body. Behavioral Neuroscience, 106 (1), 81-105.
	LEDOUX, J.E., FARB, C. & RUGGIERO, D.A. (1990). Topographic organization of neurons in the acoustic thalamus that project to the amygdala. Journal of Neuroscience, 10 (4), 1043-1054.
	PURPURA, K.P. & SCHIFF, N.D. (1997). The thalamic intralaminar nuclei : a role in visual awareness. The Neuroscientist, 3, 8-15.
	VAN DER WERF, Y.D., WITTER, M.P., UYLINGS, H.B., JOLLES, J. (2000). Neuropsychology of infarctions in the thalamus : a review. Neuropsychologia, 38, 613-627.
	GAILLOUD, P, CAROTA A, BOGOUSSLAVSKY, J. & FASEL, J. (2003). Histoire de l’anatomie du thalamus de l’antiquité à la fin du XIX^e siècle. Archives Suisses de Neurologie, Neurochirurgie et de Psychiatrie, 154, 49-58.

Thème de recherche : Domaine de recherche qui englobe un certain nombre de phénomènes, de théories et de recherches qui s'articulent autour de problèmes scientifiques. Theme.

	DEUTSCH, M. (1977). Recurrent themes in the study of social conflict. Journal of Social Issues, 33, 222-225.

Thanatos : Thanatos est un dieu grec. Chez Freud, pulsion qui engendre des comportements haineux, violents et destructeurs. = pulsion de mort. /Éros. Thanatos.

	ADAMS, W.J. (1974). The life and times of the central limit theorem. New York : Kaedmon.

Théorème : Proposition dont la véracité peut être logiquement ou mathématiquement démontrée. Théorème et axiome.

	LUCE, D. (1952). Two decomposition theorems for a class of finite oriented graphs. American Journal of Mathematics, 74, 701-722.

Théorème central limite :

	ADAMS, W.J. (1974). The life and times of the central limit theorem. New York : Kaedmon.

Théorème de Bayes : Théorème proposé par Bayes.

	WINKLER, R.L. (1972). Introduction to Bayesian inference and decision. New York : Holt.
	EFRON, B. (1986). Why Isn't Everyone a Bayesian? The American Statistician, 1-11.
	SMITH, J.Q. (1988). Decision analysis : A Bayesian approach. London : Chapman and Hull.
	SCHOOLER, L.J., SHIFFRIN, R.M. & RAAIJMAKERS, J.G.W. (2001). A Bayesian model for implicit effects in perceptual identification. Psychological Review, 108, 257-272.
	FELDMAN, J. (2009). Bayes and the simplicity principle in perception. Psychological Review, 116 (4), 875-88

Théorêt Manon ( ) : Psychologue béhavioriste, féministe et écologiste québécoise, professeure au département de psychopédagogie et d'andragogie de l'Université de Montréal. Elle s'intéresse à l'apprentissage et au décrochage en milieu scolaire, à la discrimination envers les filles à l'école et à la résilience. Elle est l'un des quatre fondatrices des Scientifines. Étudiante de Bélanger. Collaboratrice de Chamberland, Garon et Hrimech.

	CHAMBERLAND, C., THÉORÊT, M. et GARON, R. (1995). Les Scientifines en action : conception, implantation et évolution. Montréal : Université de Montréal : École de service social.
	THÉORÊT, M. et GARON, R. (1995). Reconnaître les plans à cas unique en sciences de l’éducation. Mesure et évaluation en éducation, 28, 1.
	THÉORÊT, M., GARON, R. et HRIMECH, M. (2000). Évaluation d'une intervention de mentorat visant a reduire le risque d'abandon scolaire. Revue Canadienne de Psycho-Education, 29 (1), 65-86.
	THÉORÊT, M., LEROUX, M., CARPENTER, A. et BERTRAND, C. (2005). Analyse de l’appropriation de la réforme du curriculum par des enseignants et évaluation d’impact sur la réussite en mathématiques d’élèves à risque. Projet Transmaths. Montréal : Université de Montréal.
	THÉORÊT, M., GARON, R., HRIMECH, M. et CARPENTIER, A. (2006). Exploration de la résilience éducationnelle chez des enseignants. International Review of Education, 52 (6), 575-598.

Théorie (scientifique) : Synonyme d'explication. En science, il s'agit d'un système de suppositions et de principes organisés plus ou moins logiquement, visant à décrire et à expliquer un ensemble donné de phénomènes et leurs relations. Une théorie comprend au moins deux concepts logiquement reliés (EX: ça-moi-surmoi chez Freud ou Sd-R-C chez Skinner), desquels on peut déduire une hypothèse vérifiable ou potentiellement vérifiable. Théorie et explication. = explication scientifique, modèle scientifique. Theory, scientific explanation.

Problème	Théorie	Solution

	Recherche

	Méthodes scientifiques

	SPEARMAN, C.E. (1914). The theory of two factors. Psychological Review, 21, 101-115.	SHWEDER, R.A. & FISKE, D.W. (Eds.) (1986). Metatheory in social science : Pluralisms and subjectivities. Chicago : The University of Chicago Press
	WOODGER, J. H. (1939). The technique of theory construction. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
	HULL, C.L., ROSS, R.T., HALL, M., PERKINS, D.T. & FITCH, F.B. (1940). Mathematico-deductive theory of rote learning. New Haven, NJ : Yale University Press.	GREENWALD, A.G., PRATKANIS, A.R., LEIPPE, M.R. & BAUMGARDNER, M.H. (1986). Under what conditions does theory obstruct research progress? Psychological Review, 93, 216-229.
	KANTOR, J.R. (1941). Current trends in psychological theory. Psychological Bulletin, 1941, 38, 29-65.
	SKINNER, B.F. (1950). Are thories of learning necessary? Psychological Review, 57, 193-216.	ANKER, J.D. (Ed.) (1987). Systems and theories in psychology. New York : McGraw Hill.
	BORING, E.G. (1953). The role of theory in experimental psychology. American Journal of Psychology, 66, 169-184.	ANKER, J.D. (Ed.) 1987). Systems and theories in psychology. New York : McGraw Hill.
	DALLENBACH, K.M. (1953). The place of theory in science. Psychological Review, 60 (1), 33-39.	MARX, M.H. & CRONAN-HILLIX, W.A. (1987). Systems and theories in psychology. New York : McGraw-Hill.
	HEMPEL, C.G. (1965). Aspects of scientic explanation. New York : Free Press.	STAGNER R. (1988). A history of psychological theories. New York : Macmillan.
	SUPPES, P. (1967). What is a scientific theory? In S. Morgenbesser (Ed.), Philosophy of science today (pp. 55-67). New York : Basic Books.	GREENWALD, A.G. & PRATKANIS, A.R. (1988). On the use of "theory" and the usefulness of theory. Psychological Review, 95, 575-579.
	MEEHL, P.E. (1967). Theory-testing in psychology and physics : a methodological paradox. Philosophy of Science, 34, 103–115. [PDF]	SUPPE, F. (1989). The semantic conception of theories and scientific realism. Chicago : University of Illinois Press.
	NORMAN, D.A. (1968). Toward a theory of memory and attention Psychological Review, 75, 522-536.	MEEHL, P.E. (1990). Appraising and amending theories : The strategy of Lakatosian defense and two principles that warrant It. Psychological Inquiry, 1 (2), 108-141. [PDF]
	MALINOWSKI, B. (1968). Une théorie scientifique de la culture. Paris : Maspéro.	HINELINE, P.N. (1990). The prigins of environment-based psychological theory. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 53 , 305-320.
	SUPPE, F. (1972). What’s wrong with the received view on the structure of scientific theories? Philosophy of Science, 39, 1-19.	DECERF, A. (Dir.) (1991). Les théories scientifiques ont-elles un sexe ? Moncton : Éditions d'Acadie.
	DUNCAN, S. & FISKE, D.W. (1977). Face-to-face interaction : Research, methods, and theory. Hillsdale, New Jersey : Lawrence Erlbaum associates Publishers.	LUNDIN, R.W. (1991). Theories and systems of psychology. Lexington, MA : Heath. STAGNER, R. (1988). A history of psychological theories. New York : Macmillan.
	PAPINEAU, D. (1979). Theory and meaning. Oxford : Clarendon Press.	BAUM, W.M. & HEATH, J.L. (1992). Behavioral explanation and intentional explanations in psychology. American Psychologist, 47, 1312-1317.
	CHAPLIN, J.P. & KRAWIEK, T.S. (1979). Systems and theories of psychology. New York : Holt, Rinehart & Winston.	LEIGLAND S. (1997). Systems and theories in behavior analytic science : An overview of alternatives. In L.J. Hayes & P.M. Ghezzi (Eds.), Investigations in behavioral epistemology (pp. 11-31). Reno, NV : Context Press.
	LOWRY, R. (1982). The evolution of psychological theory. New York : Aldine.	PYLYSHYN, Z.W. (2002). Mental imagery : In search of a theory. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 25 (2), 157-237. [PDF]
		LATTAL, K.A. & CHASE, P.N. (Eds.) (2003). Behavior theory and philosophy. New York : Plenum Publishing.
	NORMAN, D.A. (1984). Theories and models in cognitive psychology. In E. Donchin (Ed.), Cognitive psychophysiology : Event-related potentials and the study of cognition. The Carmel conferences: Volume I. Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.	WYNNE, L. (2004). The missing theory : Why behavior analysis has little impact on voluntary adult outpatient services. Ethical Human Psychology & Psychiatry, 6 (2), 135-146.
	SHIMP, C.P. (1985). The development of theory : Logic of method or underlying processes? Commentary on "Associations across time : The hippocampus as a temporary memory store" by J.N.P. Rawlins. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 8, 511-512.	GEARY, D.C. (2005). Role of theory in study of learning difficulties in mathematics. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 38, 305-307.
		BURGOS, J.E. (2007). The theory debate in psychology. Behavior & Philosophy, 35, 149-183. [PDF]
		WYNNE, L. (2007). The missing theory II : Further musings on a new zeitgeist for clinicalpsychology. Ethical Human Psychology & Psychiatry, 9 (2), 87-98.
		DODDS, W.K. (2009)). Laws, theories, and patterns in ecology. San Francisco : University of California Press.
		GORELICK, R. (2011). What is theory. Ideas in Ecology & Evolution, 4, 1-10. [PDF]

Théorie (Qualités d'une...) : Les théories possèdent au moins sept propriétés : la cohérence (ou l'absence de contradiction), la précision (concepts définis de manière à réduire l'erreur de mesure), la puissance (capacité à prédire les faits, à formuler des hypothèses), la vérificabilité (concept formulé de manière à être confrontés aux faits), synthétique (qui embrasse la réalité la plus large possible), fécondité (qui donne naissance à de nouvelle explication), la clarté (qui est exempte de flous). Certaines propriétés sont dite interne car elles ne concernent que les aspects logique de la théorie, alors que d'autres propriétés.

Les qualités d'une théorie
Interne	Externe
Cohérente	-
Claire	-
-	Précise
-	Puissante
-	Vérifiable/Falsibiable
-	Synthétique
-	Féconde ou heuristique

Théorie ancrée : Théorie proposée par Glaser et Strauss = théorie auto-régulée empiriquement. Grounded theory.

	GLASER, B. & STRAUSS, A. (1967). The discovery of grounded theory : Strategies for qualitative research. Chicago : Aldine.	MAY, K.A. (1996). Diffusion, dilution, or distillation? : The case of grounded theory method. Qualitative Health Research, 6 (3), 309-311.
	GLASER, B.G. (1978). Advances in the methodology of grounded theory : Theoretical sensitivity. Mill Valley, CA : The Sociology Press.	STARRIN, B., DAHLGREN, L., LARSSON, G. & STYBORN, S. (1997). Along the path of discovery. Qualitative methods and grounded theory. Lund, Sweden : Student Litteratur.
	STERN, P.N. (1980). Grounded theory methodology : Its uses and processes. Image. The Journal of Nursing Scholarship, 12 (1), 20-23.	DEMAZIÈRE, D. & DUBAR, C. (1997). E.C. Hughes, intitiatieur et précurseur critique de la grounded theory. Sociétés Contemporaines, 27, 49-55.
	MARTIN, P.Y. & TURNER, B.A. (1986). Grounded theory and organizational research. The Journal of Applied Behavioral Science, 22 (2), 141.	GLASER, B.G. (1998). Doing grounded theory : Issues and discussions. Mill Valley, CA : Sociology Press.
	GLASER, B.G. (1992). Basics of grounded theory analysis. Mill Valley, CA : Sociology Press.	NORTON, L. (1999). The philosophical bases of grounded theory and their implications for research practice. Nurse Researcher, 7 (1), 31-43.
	CORBIN, J. & STRAUSS, A.L. (1990). Grounded theory research : Procedures, canons, and evaluative criteria. Qualitative Sociology, 13 (1), 3-21.	GILGUN, J.F. (2001). Grounded theory and other inductive research methods. Dans B.A. Thyer (Ed.), The handbook of social work research methods (pp. 345-364). Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage.
	D'AMBROISE, G. & NKONGOLO-BAKENDA, J.-M. (1992). Le "Grounded Theory" et ses possibilités d'utilisation en sciences de l'administration. Québec : Faculté des sciences de l'administration de l'Université Laval.	HUTCHISON, S.A. & WILSON, H.S. (2001). Grounded theory : The method. In P.L. Munhall (Ed.), Nursing research : A qualitative perspective (pp. 209-243). Sudbury, MA : Jones & Bartlett.
	STRAUSS, A.L. & CORBIN, J. (1994). Grounded theory methodology : An overview. IN N.K. Denzin & Y.S. Lincoln (Eds.), Handbook of qualitative research (pp. 273-285). Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage.	GLASER, B.G. (2001). The grounded theory perspective : Conceptualization contrasted with description. Mill Valley, CA : Sociology Press.
	PAILLÉ, P. (1994). L'analyse par théorisation ancrée. Cahiers de recherche sociologique, 23, 147-181.	GLASER, B.G. (2005). The grounded theory perspective III : Theoretical coding. Mill Valley, CA : Sociology Press.
		JOHNSON, R. B., McGOWAN, M.W., & TURNER, L.A. (2010). Grounded theory in practice: Is it inherently a mixed method? Research in the Schools, 17 (2), 65-78.

Théorie Cannon-Bard : Théorie proposée par Cannon et Bard pour expliquer les émotions.

Stimulus		Émotion
		Activation

	CANNON, W.B. (1913/20). The interrelation of emotion suggest by recent physioiogical research. American Journal of psychology, 256/Année Psychologique, 421.
	CANNON, W.B. (1927). The James-Lange theory of emotion : a critical examination and an alternative theory. American Journal of Psychology, 39, 106-124.
	BARD, P. (1929). The neuro-humoral basis of emotional reactions. In C.A. Munchison (Ed.), Foundations of experimental psychology (pp. 449-87). Worcester : Clark University Press.

Théorie cognitive : Voir Cognitivisme.

Théorie de l’action raisonnée : Théorie proposée par Aizen et Fishbein pour expliquer et prédire le comportement. Theory of reasoned action.

	AJZEN, I. & FISHBEIN, M. (2004). Questions raised by a reasoned action approach : Comment on Ogden (2003). Health Psychology, 23, 431-434.
	AJZEN, I. & ALBARRACIN, D. (2007). The theory of reasoned action approach. In I. Ajzen, D. Albarracín & R. Hornik (Eds.), Prediction and change of health behavior : Applying the theory of reasoned action approach. Mahwah, NJ : Lawrence Erlbaum.

Théorie de l’apprentissage : Ensemble de théories qui postule que le principal mécanisme ou processus de changement psychologique chez l'humain et l'animal provient de l'apprentissage (et non de la personnalité, du développement ou des gènes). Ces changements peuvent être de nature comportemental (pour les behavioristes) ou cognitive (pour les cognitivistes).

Théorie de l’apprentissage structuré : Théorie proposée par Scandura, qui postule que l'individu apprend non pas des comportements mais des règles de conduite.

	SCANDURA, J.M. (1973). Structural learning I : Theory and research. London : Gordon & Breach.
	SCANDURA, J.M. (1976). Structural learning II : Issues and approaches. London : Gordon & Breach.
	SCANDURA, J.M. & SCANDURA, A. (1980). Structural learning and concrete operations : An approach to piagetian conservation. New York : Praeger.

Théorie de la boîte noire : Ensemble de théories qui refusent de postuler l'existence de processus pour l'instant inobservable, en tout ou en partie (comme la conscience ou l'apprentissage), pour se concentrer sur l'étude des données observables (dites input/output) qui alimentent (stimuli) ou émanent (comportement) de ces processus. /cerveau virtuel. Black box theory.

	BUNGE, M. (1963). A general black box theory. Philosophy of Science, 30, 346-358.
	WHITHLEY, R. (1972). Black boxism and the sociology of science; a discussion of the major developments in the field. The Sociological Review Monograph 18, 61-91.
	RICHARDSON, R.C. (1999). Heuristics; Black box, figure-ground, modularity, split brain effects and Zeigarnik effect. In R. Audi (Ed.), The Cambridge dictionary of philosophy (pp. 310-311, 379, 579, 874-5, 987). Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.
	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (1999). Disorder as a black box essentialist concept. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 108, 465-472.
	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (2000). Aristotle as sociobiologist : The 'function of a human being' argument, black box essentialism, and the concept of mental disorder. Philosophy, Psychiatry, and Psychology, 7, 17-44.

Théorie de la cohérence : En philosophie,...

Théorie de la communication : Ensemble de théories qui étudient le contexte social et l'efficacité de la transmission du message. Communication theory.

	GABOR, D. (1946). Theory of communication. Journal of the Institute of Electrical Engineers, 93, 429-441.
	SHANNON, C. (1948). Mathematical theory of communication. Bell System Technical Journal, 27, 379-423/623-656.
	SHANNON, C.E. & WEAVER, W. (1964/69). The mathematical theory of communication. Chicago : The University of Illinois Press//London : Urbana.
	ESCARPIT, R. (1970). Théorie générale de l’information et de la communication. Paris : Hachette.

Théorie de la décision : Voir Décision.

Théorie de la détection du signal : Voir Détection du signal. Signal detection theory.

Théorie de la mémoire floue : Théorie de la mémoire floue. Fuzzy-trace theory.

	REYNA, V.F. & BRAINERD, C.J. (1991). Fuzzy-trace theory and framing effects in choice : gist extraction, truncation, and conversion. Journal of Behavior Decision Making, 4, 249-62
	REYNA, V.F. (2000). Fuzzy-trace theory and source monitoring : An evaluation of theory and false memory data. Learning & Individual Differences, 12, 163-175.
	REYNA, V.F. & ADAM, M.B. (2003). Fuzzy-trace theory, risk communication, and product labeling in sexually transmitted diseases. Risk Analysis, 23, 325-42.

Théorie de la personnalité : Ensemble de théories qui postule l'existence d'une organisation stable de la psyché (personnalité), laquelle organisation serait à l'origine des comportements, des émotions ou de l'interprétation de nos expériences. EX: Théorie de la personnalité de Freud (ca-moi-surmoi).

Théorie de la réponse : Item response theory.

	LORD, F.M. (1982). Application of item response theory to practical testing problems. Hillsdale, NJ : LEA
	EMBRETSON, S.E. & REISE, S.P. (2000). Item response theory for psychologists. Lawrence Erlbaum Ass.

Théorie de l'attribution : Ensemble de théories qui tentent d'expliquer comment les individus attribuent ou inférent les causes de leurs comportements (ou d'autres phénomènes) et de ceux d'autrui. ( ): théorie de Jones et Davis, théorie de Kelley,théorie de Wiener. Attribution theory.

	JONES, E.E. & DAVIS, K.E. (1965). From acts to dispositions : The attribution process in person perception. In L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in experimental social psychology. Orlando, FL : Academic Press.
	KELLEY, H.H. (1967). Attribution theory in social psychology. In D. Levine (Ed.), Nebraska symposium on motivation (Vol. 15, pp. 192-238). Lincoln : University of Nebraska Press.
	WEINER, B. (1972). Theory, achievement motivation, and the educational process. Review of Educational Research, 42, (2), 203-215.
	SMITH, E.R. (1994). Attribution theory and research : Returning to Heider's conceptions. In P.G. Devine, D.L. Hamilton & T.M. Ostrom (Eds.), Social cognition : Its impact on social psychology (pp. 77-108). Orlando, FL : Academic Press.

Théorie de l'autodétermination : Théorie élaborée par Deci et Ryan pour expliquer la motivation. Elle repose sur trois besoins : le besoin d’autonomie, le besoin de compétence et le besoin d’appartenance sociale. Self-determination theory.

	LORD, F.M. (1982). Application of item response theory to practical testing problems. Hillsdale, NJ : LEA
	EMBRETSON, S.E. & REISE, S.P. (2000). Item response theory for psychologists. Lawrence Erlbaum Ass.

Théorie de la décision (psychologique) :

Théorie de la décision (statistique) :

Théorie de la frustration/agression : Ensemble de théories qui postule l'existence d'un lien étroit entre la frustration (cause) et l'agressivité (effet et l'agression). Frustration-aggression hypothesis.

	DOLLARD, J., DOOB, L.W., MILLER, N.E., MOWRER, O.H. & SEARS, R.R. (1939). Frustration and aggression. New Haven : Yale University Press.
	SEARS, R.R., HOVLAND, C.I. & MILLER, N.E. (1940). Minor studies of aggression : I. Measurement of aggressive behavior. Journal of Psychology, 9, 275-295.
	BARKER, R., DEMBO, T. & LEWIN, K. (1941). Frustration and aggression : An experiment with young children. University of Iowa Studies in Child Welfare, 18, 1-314.
	MILLER, N.E. & BUGELSKI, R. (1948). Minor studies of aggression II. The influence of frustrations imposed by the in-group on attitudes expressed toward out-groups. Journal of Psychology, 25, 437-442.
	ELLIS, A. (1969). Sex, frustration and aggression. Rogue, 18, 27-30
	BERKOWITZ, L. (1989). The frustration-aggression hypothesis : Examination and reformulation. Psychological Bulletin, 106, 59-73.
	CAPRARA, G.V. (1982). A comparison of the frustration-aggression and emotional susceptibility hypothesis. Aggressive Behavior, 8, 234-236.
	DILL, J. & ANDERSON, C.A. (1995). Effects of justified and unjustified frustration on aggression. Aggressive Behavior, 21, 359-369.

Théorie de la preuve : En logique, étude des relations logiques entre les éléments d'un raisonnement théorique et ses critères de vérité ou son degré de véracité, sans égard aux aspects sémantiques de la question.

Théorie de la personnalité : Ensemble de théories qui tente de décrire et d'expliquer la personnalité. Theories of personality.

	HALL, C.S. & LINDZEY, G. (1957). Theories of personality. New York : John Wiley & Sons.
	DOHERTY, M.A (1973). Sexual bias in personality theory. The Counseling Psychologist, 4, 67-75.
	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (1989). Levels of explanation in personality theory. In D. Buss & N. Cantor (Eds.), Personality psychology : Recent trends and emerging directions (pp. 333-346). New York : Springer-Verlag.
	FEIST, J. (1994). Theories of personality. Harcourt Brace.
	HALL, C., LINDZEY, G. & CAMPBELL, J.B. (1997). Theories of personality. New York : Wiley.
	RYCKMAN, R. (2004). Theories of personality. Belmont, CA : Thomson/Wadsworth.

Théorie de la réciprocité : Theory of reciprocity.

	FALKA, A. & FISHBACHE, U. (2006). A theory of reciprocity. Games and Economic Behavior, 54 (2), 293-315.

Théorie de la référence : Théorie qui explique comment les mots et les concepts sont reliés aux objets qu'ils désignent ou dénotent. ( ): théorie de la référence descriptive, théorie de la référence causale.

	QUINE, W.V.O (1974). The roots of reference open court. La Salle, IL.
	JACKSON, F.C. (1998). Reference and description revisited. Philosophical Perspectives : Language, Mind, and Ontology, 12, 201-218.

Théorie de la séduction :

Théorie de la signifiation : Theory of meaning.

	PAPINEAU, D. (1979). Theory of meaning. Oxford : Clarendon Press.
	JOHNSON-LAIRD, P.N. & BYRNE, R.M.J. (2002). Conditionals : A theory of meaning, pragmatics, and inference. Psychological Review, 109, 646-678.

Théorie de l'apprentissage : Voir Apprentissage.

Théorie de l'esprit : Ensemble des processus cognitifs qui permettent à un individu d'expliquer ou de prédire ses propres actions et celles des autres. Theory of mind.

	AJZEN, I. (1977). Intuitive theories of events and the effects of base-rate information on prediction. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 35, 303-314.	HEYES, C.M. (1998). Theory of mind in nonhuman primates. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 21, 101-148.
	PREMARK, D. & WOODRUFF, G. (1978). Does the chimpanzee have a theory of mind? Behavior & Brain Science, 1, 515-526.	LESLIE, A.M. (1999). The innate capacity to acquire a theory of mind : synchronic or diachronic modularity? Mind & Language, 17, 141-155.
	WIMMER, H. & PERNER, J. (1983). Beliefs about beliefs : Representing and constraining function of wrong beliefs in young children's understanding of deception. Cognition, 13, 103-128.	KRAUSS, R.M., FREYBERG, R. & MORSELLA, E. (2002). Inferring speaker’s physical attributes from their voices. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 38 (6), 618-625.
	TERRACE, H.S. (1984). A behavioral-theory of mind. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 7 (4), 569-571.
	BARON-COHEN, S., LESLIE, A.M. & FRITH, U. (1985). Does the autistic child have a "theory of mind"? Cognition, 21.	OLSON, M.A. & FAZIO, R.H. (2004). Trait inferences as a function of automatically-activated racial attitudes and motivation to control prejudiced reactions. Basic & Applied Social Psychology, 26, 1-11.
	MELOT, A.M. (1993). Métacognition et théories de l'esprit. Journal International de Psychologie, 28, 581-593.	SALLY, D. & HILL, E. (2006). The development of interpersonal strategy : Autism, theory-of-mind, cooperation and fairness. Journal of Economic Psychology, 27 (1), 73-97.
	LIVERTA-SEMPIO, O. & MARCHETTI, A. (1997). Cognitive development and theories of mind : Towards a contextual approach. European Journal of Psychology Education, 12 (1), 3-21.	CALL, J. & TOMASELLO, M. (2008).Does the chimpanzee have a theory of mind ? 30 years later. Trends in Cognitive Sciences, 12 (5), 187-192. [PDF]

Théorie de l'étiquettage : Labelling theory.

Théorie de l'évolution : Théorie proposée pour expliquer l'évolution des espèces. = lutte pour la survie, théorie synthétique de l'évolution. Theory of evolution.

	MAYNARD SMITH, J. (1959). The theory of evolution. London : Penguin Books.
	RICHARDS, R.J. (1987). Darwin and the emergence of evolutionary theories of Mind & Behavior. Chicago : The University of Chicago Press.
	GAULIN, S.J.C. (1995). Does evolutionary theory predict sex differences in the brain? In M.S. Gazzaniga (Ed.), The cognitive neurosciences (pp. 1211-1225). Cambridge : MIT Press.

Théorie de l'évolution et des jeux : Théorie des jeux appliquée à l'évolution. Théorie qui tente de mesurer les avantages (pertes) et les inconvénients (gains) d'un comportement ou d'une stratégie collective (= espèce). ( ): Beaugrand, Maynard Smith, Parker. Evolution games theory, EGT.

	LEWONTIN, R.C. (1961). Evolution and the theory of games. Journal of Theoretical Biology, 1, 382-403.
	MAYNARD SMITH, J. & MICHIE, D. (1965). Machines that play games. New Scientist, 12, 367-369.
	MAYNARD SMITH, J. (1974). The theory of games and animal conflicts. Journal of Theoretical Biology, 47, 209-221.
	MAYNARD SMITH, J. (1976). Evolution and the theory of games. American Scientist, 64, 41-45.
	GIRALDEAU, L.-A. & LIVORELLI, B. (1998). Game theory and social foraging, In L.A. Dugatkin, et H.K. Reeve (Eds.), Game theory and animal behavior. New York : Oxford University Press.
	STEPHENS, D.W. & CLEMENTS, K.C. (1995). Game theory and learning : The law of effect and altruistic cooperation. In L.A. Dugatkin & H.K. Reeve (Eds.), Advances in game theory and the study of animal behavior. Oxford, UK : Oxford University Press.
	MAYNARD SMITH, J. (2003). Games and theories. New Scientist, 178, 48-51.

Théorie de l'identité (de l'esprit) : Théorie élaborée par Feigl et Place, qui postule l'existence d'une identité entre les états mentaux et les états physiques (ou neurobiologiques) du cerveau. Identité et théorie de l'identité. = Théorie de l'identité, théorie de l'identité cerveau-esprit Identity theory of mind, mind-brain identity theory.

	LEWIS, D. (1966). An argument for the identity theory. Journal of Philosophy, 63 17-25.
	KIM, J. & BRANDT, R.B. (1967). The logic of the identity theory. Journal of Philosophy, 64, 515-37.
	HORGAN, T.E. (1976). Functionalism and token physicalism. Synthese, 59, 321-38.
	RICHADSON, R.C. (1981). Disappearance and the identity theory. The Canadian Journal of Philosophy, 11, 473-485.

Théorie de l'information : Théorie é laborée par Shannon et Weaver. = modèle de l'information, modèle de Shannon et Weaver. Information theory.

	SHANNON, C. (1948). Mathematical theory of communication. Bell System Technical Journal, 27, 379-423/623-656.
	SHANNON, C.E. & WEAVER, W. (1969). The mathematical theory of communication. Chicago : The University of Illinois Press//London : Urbana.
	ESCARPIT, R. (1970). Théorie générale de l’information et de la communication. Paris : Hachette.
	WOLFOWITZ, J. (1978). Coding theorems of information theory. New York : Springer-Verlag.
	LUCE, D. (2003). Whatever happened to information theory in psychology? Review of General Psychology, 7, 183-188.

Théorie de l'intelligence multiple : Théorie proposée par Gardner pour expliquer le développement de l'intelligence. Theory of multiple intelligences.

	GARDNER, H. (1983). Multiple intelligences : The theory in practice. New York : Basic Books.
	WALTER, J.M. & GARDNER, H. (1986). The theory of multiple intelligences : Some issues and answers. In R.J. Sternberg & R.K. Wagner (Eds.), Practical intelligence : Nature and origins of competence in the everyday world (pp. 163-182). Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.

Théorie de l'investissement parental :.

Théorie des automates :

	VON NEUMANN, J. (1951). The general and logical theory of automata. In L.A. Jeffress (Ed.), Cerebral mechanisms in behavior (pp. 1-41). New York : Wiley.
	SHANNON, C.E. & J. McCARTHY (Eds.) (1956). Automata studies.Princeton : Princeton University Press.
	KLEENE, S.C. (1956). Representation of events in nerve nets and finite automata. In C.E. Shannon & J. McCarthy (Eds.), Automata studies. (pp. 3-41). Princeton : Princeton University Press.
	MINSKY, M.L. (1956). Some universal elements for finite automata. In C.E. Shannon & J. McCarthy (Eds.), Automata studies. (pp. 117-128). Princeton : Princeton University Press.
	RUBINSTEIN, A. (1986). Finite automata play the repeated prisoner's dilemma. Journal of Economic Theory, 39, 83-96.

Théorie des catastrophes : Théorie élaborée par Thom.

	ZEEMAN, E.C. (1976). Catastrophe theory. Scientific American, 234, 65-83.
	THOM, R. (1983). Paraboles et catastrophes. Paris : Flammarion.
	THOM, R. (1990). La théorie des catastrophes. Dans R. Thom (Dir.), Apologie du logos (p. 333-451). Paris : Hachette.
	RAAIJMAKERS, J.G.W. VAN KOTEN, S. & MOLENAAR, P.C M. (1996). On the validity of simulating stagewise development by means of PDP networks : Application of catastrophe analysis and an experimental test of rule-like network performance. Cognitive Science, 20, 101-136.

Théorie des champs : Field theory.

	LEWIN, K. (1942). Field theory and learning. In D. Cartwright (Ed., 1951). Field theory in social science : selected theoretical papers. London : Social Science Paperbacks.
	LEWIN, K. (1943). Defining the field at a given time. Psychological Review, 50, 292-310.
	LEWIN, K. (1951). Field theory in social science. New York : Harper.

Théorie des cinq facteurs : Théorie qui stipule que la personnalité des individus peut-être réduite à cinq cinq traits centraux. Five-factor theory.

	McCRAE, R.R., COSTA, P.T., Jr. (2006). Perspectives de la théorie des Cinq Facteurs : Traits et Culture. Psychologie Française, 51, 227-244.

Théorie des jeux : Théorie qui tente de mesurer les avantages (pertes) et les inconvénients (gains) d'un comportement ou d'une stratégie (individuelle ou collective). EX: Un animal a-t-il avantage à être agressif si ses congénères lui tiennent tête? Un consommateur a-t-il avantage à acheter une maison si les taux d'intérêt sont élevés? Une enfant a-t-elle avantage à prêter ses jouets à ses amies si elle est la seule à le faire? ( ): Morgenstern, Olson, Rapoport, Von Neumann. Game theory.

	VON NEUMANN, J. & MORGENSTERN, O. (1944). Theory of games and economic behavior. Princeton : Princeton University Press.
	TUCKER, A.W. & LUCE, D. (Eds.). Contributions to the Theory of Games, IV, Annals of Mathematics Study, 40. Princeton, NJ : Princeton University Press.
	DAVID, F.N. (1962). Games, gods and gambling : the origins and history of probability and statistical ideas from the earliest times to the newtonian era. London : Griffin.
	RAPOPORT, A. (1974). Game theory as a theory of conflict resolution. D. Riedel Publishing Company.
	HINDE, R.A. (1981). Animal signals : ethological and games-theory approaches are not incompatible. Animal Behaviour, 29, 535-542.
	FUDENBERG, D. & TIROLE, J. (1991). Game theory. Cambridge, MA : MIT Press.
	STEPHENS, D.W. & CLEMENTS, K.C. (1995). Game theory and learning : The law of effect and altruistic cooperation. In L.A. Dugatkin & H.K. Reeve (Eds.), Advances in game theory and the study of animal behavior. Oxford, UK : Oxford University Press.
	VAN VUGT, M. & & KURZBAN, R.K. (2007). Cognitive and social adaptations for leadership and followership : Evolutionary game theory and group dynamics. In J. Forgas, W. von Hippel & M. Haselton (Eds.), The evolution of the social mind : Evolutionary psychology and social cognition (Vol. 9 pp. 229-244). London: Psychology Press.

Théorie des petits problèmes : Croyance selon laquelle un individu confronté à des problèmes a très peu de chance d'être affligé de problèmes encore plus graves, du moins dans un court laps de temp. EX: Un type qui découvre que sa femme le trompe avec son meilleur ami est convaincu d'être à l'abri d'un cancer ou de déboires financiers. Le raisonnement de ce pauvre type est simple, la malchance n'est pas aveugle, elle obéit a un principe de justice, en conséquence elle ne peut frapper un même individu deux fois, et si oui, elle ne poussera pas l'odieux de lui pourir davantage la vie. = justice des pauvres, l'équilibre de la malchance, optimisme des éclopés.

Théorie des portillons : Théorie développée par Melzack et Wall pour expliquer la douleur.

	MELZACK, R. & WALL, P. (1965). Pain mechanisms : A new theory. Science, 150, 971.
	WALL, P.D. (1978). The gate control of pain mecanism : re-examination and restatement. Brain, 101 (1), 1-18.
	MELZACK, R. (1996). Gate control theory : on the evolution of pain concepts. Official Journal of the American Pain Society, 5, 128-138.
	KUGELMANN, R. (1997). The psychology and management of pain : Gate control as theory and symbol. Theory & Psychology, 7 (1), 43-65.
	MELZACK, R. & KATZ, J (2003). The gate control theory : Reaching for the brain. In T. Hadjistavropoulos & K.D. Craig (Eds.), Pain : Psychological perspectives. New Jersey : Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Théorie des probabilités : ( ): loi normale, loi des moindres carrés.

Théorie des traits : Trait theory.

Théorie des types : Type theory.

	JACKSON, F.C, PARGETTER, R. & PRIOR, E.W. (1982). Functionalism and type-type identity theories. Philosophical Studies, 42, 209-225.
	MOSER, P.K. (1984). Types, tokens, and propositions : Quine's alternative to propositions. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research, 44 (3), 361-75.

Théorie des visuels et des auditifs : Théorie non-fondée empiriquement qui suggère l'existence de trois styles d'apprentissage (visuel, auditif et kinesthésique). N.D.L.R. : Pour une raison que j'ignore, cette pseudothéorie a un succès fou au Québec, notamment dans le milieu de l'éducation. Comprenne qui pourra...

	LAFONTAINE, R. & LESSOIL, B. (1989). Êtes-vous auditif ou visuel? Montréal : Québécor.
	LIEURY, A. (1990). Auditifs, visuels. La grande illusion. Cahiers pédagogiques, 267, 58-62.

Théorie du big five : Voir Traits centraux.

Théorie du comportement planifié : Théorie proposée par Aizen pour expliquer et prédire le comportement, centrée sur le rôle des intentions, des attitudes, des normes et de la perception de contrôle. Theory of planned behavior.

	AJZEN, I. (1985). From intentions to actions : A theory of planned behavior. In J. Kuhl & J. Beckman (Eds.), Action-control : From cognition to behavior (pp. 11-39). Heidelberg, Germany : Springer.	DOLL, J. & & AJZEN, I (1992). Accessibility and stability of predictor in the theory of planned behavior. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 63, 754-765.
	SCHIFTER, D.E. & AJZEN, I. (1985). Intention, perceived control, and weight loss : An application of the theory of planned behavior. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 49, 843-851.	CHEUNG, S.F., CHAN, D. & WONG, Z. (1999). Reexamining the theorie of planned behaviour in understanding waste paper recycling. Environment & Behaviour, 31 (5), 587-612.
	AJZEN, I. (1991). The theory of planned behavior. Organizational Behavior & Human Decision Processes, 50, 179-211.	BAMBERG, S., AJZEN, I. & SCHMIDT, P. (2003). Choice of travel mode in the theory of planned behavior : The roles of past behavior, habit, and reasoned action. Basic & Applied Social Psychology, 25, 175-188.
	BECK, L. & AJZEN, I. (1991). Predicting dishonest actions using the theory of planned behavior. Journal of Research in Personality, 25, 285-301.	SIDERIDIS, G.D. (2005). Performance approach-avoidance orientation and planned behaviour theory : Model stability with Greek students with and without learning disabilities. Reading and WritingQuarterly, 21, 331-359.
	PARKER, D. MANSTEAD, A.S.R., STRADLING, S.G. REASON, J.T. & BAXTER, J.S. (1992). Intention to commit driving violations. An application of the theoiy of planned behavior. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 77, 94-101.

Théorie du choix public : Théorie, développée par Buchanan et Tullock, qui tente d'expliquer le rôle de l'état et le comportement des acteurs (électeurs, hommes et femmes politiques, fonctionnaires, groupes de pression, etc.). ( ): Buchanan, Olson, Tullock. Public choice theory.

Théorie du complot : Conspiracy belief, conspiracy thinking.

	SIMMEL, G. (1991). Secret et sociétés secrètes. Circé.	CAMPION-VINCENT, V. (2005). La société parano, théories du complot, menaces et incertitude. Paris : Payot.
	ZONIS, M. & JOSEPH C.M. (1994). Conspiracy thinking in the Middle East. Political psychology, 15 (3), 443-459.	CHARPIER, F. (2005). L'obsession du complot. Bourin Éditeur.
	BIRD, S.T. & BOGART, L.M. (2003). Birth control conspiracy beliefs, perceived discrimination, and contraceptive attitudes and behavior among African Americans : An exploratory study. Journal of Health Psychology, 8, 263-276.	TAGUIEFF, P.-A. (2005). La foire aux illuminés : Esotérisme, théorie du complot, extrémisme. Paris : Mille et une nuits.
	BOGART, L.M. & BIRD, S.T. (2003). Exploring the relationship of conspiracy beliefs about HIV/AIDS to sexual behaviors and attitudes among African American adults. Journal of the National Medical Association, 95, 1057-1065.	WAGNER-EEGERT, P. & BANGERTER, A. (2007). La vérité est ailleurs : Corrélats de l'adhésion aux théories du complot. Revue Internationale de Psychologie Sociale, 20, 31-61.
	BIRD, S.T. & BOGART, L.M. (2005). Conspiracy beliefs about HIV/AIDS and birth control among African Americans : Implications for the prevention of HIV, other STDs, and unintended pregnancy. Journal of Social Issues, 61, 109-126.	BRATICH, J.Z. (2008). Conspiracy panics : Political rationality and popular culture. State University of New York Press.

Théorie du conditionnement opérant : Voir Conditionnement opérant.

Théorie du conditionnement répondant : Voir Conditionnement répondant

Théorie du développement : Voir développement. Developmental theory.

Théorie du monde juste : Croyance selon laquelle il existe un monde juste et équitable. En conséquence, «chacun reçoit ce qu’il mérite et mérite ce qui lui arrive». = hypothèse du monde juste. Belief in a just world.

	RUBIN, Z. & PEPLAU, L.A. (1973). Belief in a just world and reactions to another’s lot : A study of participants in the national draft lottery. Journal of Social Issues, 29 (4), 73-93.	FURNHAM, A. & GUNTER, B. (1984). Just world beliefs and attitudes towards the poor. British Journal of Social Psychology, 23, 265-269.
	RUBIN, Z. & PEPLAU, L.A. (1975). Who believes in a just world? Journal of Social Issues, 31, 65-89.	ZWEIGENHAFT, R.L., PHILLIPS, B.K.G., ADAMS, K.A., MORSE, C.K. & HORAN, A.E. (1985). Religious preference and belief in a just world. Genetic, Social, and General Psychology Monographs, 11, 333-348.
		DION, K.L. & DION, K.K. (1987). Belief in a just world and physical attractiveness stereotyping. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 52, 775-780.
	ZUCKERMAN, M. & GERBASI, K.C. (1977). Belief in internal control or belief in a just world : Use and misuse of I-E Scale in prediction of attitudes and behavior. Journal of Psychology, 45, 356-378.	FINAMORE, F. & CARLSON, J.M. (1987). Religiosity, belief in a just world and crime control attitudes. Psychological Reports, 61, 135-138.
	MILLER, D.T. (1977). Altruism and threat to a belief in a just world. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 13, 113-125.	FURNHAM, A. & PROCTER, E. (1989). Belief in a just world : Review and critique of the individual difference literature. British Journal of Social Psychology, 28, 365-384.
	LERNER, M.J. & MILLER, D.T. (1978). Just world research and the attribution process : Looking back and ahead. Psychological Bulletin, 85, 1030-1051.	JOSE, P.E. (1990). Just-world reasoning in children's immanent justice judgments. Child Development, 61, 1024-1033.
	LERNER, M.J. (1980). The belief in a just world : A fundamental delusion. New York : Plenum.	LERNER, M.J. (1998). The two forms of the belief in a just world : Some thoughts on why and how people care about justice. In M.J. Lerner & L. Montada (Eds.), Responses to victimizations and belief in a just world (pp. 246-269). New York : Plenum.
	SMITH, K.B. & GREEN, D.N. (1984). Individual correlates of the belief in a just world. Psychological Reports, 54, 435-438.	HAFER, C.L. & BÈGUE, L. (2005). Experimental research on just-world theory : problems, developments, and future challenges. Psychological Bulletin, 131, 128-167.

Théorie du schéma du genre : Gender schema theory.

	BEM, S.L. (1981). Gender schema theory : A cognitive account of sex-typing. Psychological Review, 88, 354-364.
	BEM, S.L. (1981). The BSRI and gender schema theory : A reply to Spence and Helmreich. Psychological Review, 88, 369-371.
	BEM, S.L. (1982). Gender schema theory and self-schema theory compared : A comment on Markus, Crane, Bernstein, and Siladi's "Self-schemas and gender". Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 43, 1192.
	LEMONS, M.A. & PARZINGER, M. (2007). Gender schemas : A cognitive explanation of discrimination of women in technology. Journal of Business and Psychology, 22 (1), 91-98.

Théorie général des systèmes :

Théorie implicite de la personnalité : Voir Thérorie naïve de la personnalité.

Théorie James-Lange : Théorie proposée par James et Lange pour expliquer les émotions.

Stimulus

Activation

Interprétation

Émotion

	JAMES, W. (1884). What is an emotion? Mind, 9, 188-205.
	LANGE, C.G. (1887). Eine psycho-physiologische Studie. In J. Rand (Ed.) (1912). The Classical psychologists (pp. 672-684). Boston : Houghton Mifflin.

Théorie naïve de la personnalité : Désigne chez un individu, un système de connaissances et de suppositions non-vérifiées (croyances), mais considérées comme vraies, qui concernent le fonctionnement d'autrui et de soi-même. EX: Certains individus croient que les personnes qui portent des lunettes sont plus intelligentes que la moyenne. Les jeunes enfants croient que les nuages choisissent la direction vers laquelle ils se déplacent (animisme). Le terme «théorie implicite» prête à confusion car il désigne à la fois les théories de monsieur et madame Tout-le-monde et les théories scientifiques qui essaient de comprendre les explications implicites de monsieur et madame Tout-le-monde. Théorie implicite et attribution. = théorie implicite de la personnalité, théorie de l'esprit, théorie scientifique des théories intuitive, théorie du monde physique. Implicit personality theory.

	BRUNER, J.S. & TAGIURI, R. (1954). The perception of people. In G. Lindzey (Ed.), Handbook of social psychology. Cambridge : Addison Wesley.	ANDERSON, C.A. (1995). Implicit personality theories and empirical data : Biased assimilation, belief perseverance and change, and covariation detection sensitivity. Social Cognition, 13, 25-48.
	AJZEN, I. (1977). Intuitive theories of events and the effects of base-rate information on prediction. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 35, 303-314.	HARE A.P., HARE S.E. & KOENIGS, R.J. (1996). Implicit personality theory, social desirability, and reflected appraisal of self in the context of new field theory (SYMLOG). Small Group Research, 27 (4), 504-531.
	ROSS,M. (1989). Relation of implicit theories to the construction of personal histories. Psychological Review, 96, 341–357.	CHIU, C., HONG, Y. & DWECK, C.S. (1997). Lay Dispositionism and Implicit Theories of Personality. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 73 (1), 19-30. [PDF]
	McFARLAND C., ROSS, M. & GILTROW, M. (1992). Biased recollections in older adults : The role of implicit theories of aging. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 62, 837-850.	ANDERSON, C.A. & LINDSAY, J. (1998). The development, perseverance, and change of naive theories. Social Cognition, 16, 8-30.
	ERDLEY, C.A. & DWECK, C.S., (1993). Children's implicit personality theories as predictors of their social judgments. Child Development, 64, 863-878.
	DWECK, C.S., HONG, Y. & CHIU, C. (1993). Implicit theories: Individual differences in the likelihood and meaning of dispositional inference. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 19, 644 -656.	POON, C.S.K. & KOEHLER, D.J. (2008). Person Theories : Their temporal stability and relation to intertrait inferences. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 34 (7). 965-977. [PDF]
	ANDERSON, C.A. (1995). Implicit theories in broad perspective. Psychological Inquiry, 6, 286-290.	GOLDSTEIN, M.D. (1998). Forming and testing implicit personality theories in cyberspace. Teaching of Psychology. 25, 216-218.
	DWECK, C.S., CHIU, C. & HONG, Y. (1995). Implicit theories: Elabora- tion and extension of the model. Psychological Inquiry, 6, 322-333.	OLSON, M.A. & FAZIO, R.H. (2004). Trait inferences as a function of automatically-activated racial attitudes and motivation to control prejudiced reactions. Basic & Applied Social Psychology, 26, 1-11.
		McFARLAND C. & BUEHLER, R. (2012). Negative moods and the motivated remembering of past selves: The role of implicit theories of personal stability. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 102, 242-263.

Théorie synthétique de l'évolution : Désigne les ajouts à la théorie de base de l'évolution de Darwin, notamment les connaissances en génétiques des populations.

Théorie triarchique : Théorie proposée par Sternberg pour expliquer le développement de l'intelligence. Comme le nom l'indique, cette théorie repose sur trois sous-types d'intelligence. Triarchic theory.

	STERNBERG, R.J. (1985). Beyond IQ : A triarchic theory of human intelligence. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.
	STERNBERG, R.J. (1988). The triarchic mind : A new theory of human intelligence. New York : Viking.

Théorie type/token :

	PEIRCE, C.S. (1931). Collected papers. Cambridge : Harvard University Press.
	HORGAN, T. (1981). Token physicalism, supervenience, and the generality of physics. Synthese, 49, 395-413.
	JACKSON, F., PARGETTER, R. & PRIOR, E. (1982). Fuctionalism and type-type theories. Philosophical Studies, 42, 209-225.

Theorie universelle : Voir Psychologie unifiée.

Theory & Decision : Revue scientifique. Éditeur : Sage.

BUNGE, M. (1993). Realism and antirealism in social science. Theory & Decision, 35, 207-35.

Theory & Psychology : Revue scientifique qui consacre ses pages à l'examen des théories de la psychologie. Éditeur : Sage.

GREEN, C.D. (2001). Scientific models, connectionist networks, and cognitive science. Theory & Psychology, 11, 97-117.

Theory into Practice : Revue scientifique qui consacre ses pages à l'application des théories. Éditeur : Ohio State University.

HORNER, S.L. & SHWERY, C. S. (2002). Becoming an engaged, self-regulated reader. Theory into Practice, 41, 102-109.

Thérapeute (en psychologie) : Au sens large, c'est celui ou celle qui administre un traitement à une personne souffrante ou en détresse, que ce traitement soit ou non éprouvé sur le plan clinique et scientifique. Au sens strict, spécialiste ou technologue qui utilise des thérapies qui se fondent sur les connaissances issues de la psychologie scientifique pour aider et guérir ses patients. = psychothérapeute, clinicien, psychologue clinicien.

Thérapeutes (Formation des...) : Ensemble des techniques pédagogiques qui permettent de former un psychologue thérapeute. Formation des thérapeutes et modèle de Boulder. Therapist training, supervision of psychotherapy.

	WOODY, R.H. (1969). Behavioral counseling : Role definition and professional training. The Counseling Psychologist, 1, 84-88.	CUSHWAY, D. (1992). Stress in clinical psychology trainees. British Journal Clinical Psychology, 31, 169-179.
	DODENHOFF, J.T. (1981). Interpersonal attraction and direct-indiret supervisor influence as predictors of counselor trainee effectivenes. Counselling Psychology, 28, 47-52.	BINDER, J.L. (1993). Is it time to improve psychotherapy training? Psychology Review, 13, 301-318.
	COLLINS, F.L., FOSTER, S.L. & BERLER, E.S. (1986). Clinical training issues for behavioral psychology. Professional Psychology: Research & Practice, 17, 301-307.	ELLIS, M.V, LADANY, N., KRENGEL, M. & SCHULT, D. (1996). Clinical supervision research from 1981 to 199 3: A methodological critique. Journal of Counselling Psychology, 43 (1), 35-50.
	CARROL, M. (1988). Counselling supervision : of personal the British context. Psychology Quarterly, 1, 387-396.	DORAN, A. & CARR, A. (1996). Clinical Psychologists' roles. Irish Journal Psychology, 17, 228-240.
	ALBERTS, G. & EDELSTEIN, B. (1990). Therapist training : a critical review of skill training studies. Clinical Psychology Review, 10, 497-511.	AVELINE, M. (1997). The use of audiotapes in supervision of psychotherapy. In G. Shipton (Ed.), Supervision of psychotherapy and counselling (pp. 80-93). Buckingham : Open University Press.
	BERNARD, J.M & GOODYEAR, R.K. (1992). Fundamentals supervision. Boston, MA, US : Allyn & Bacon, Inc.	MACRAN, S. & SHAPIRO, D.A. (1998). The role of personal therapy for therapists : A review. British Journal of Medical Psychology, 71, 13-25.
		DAVIDSON, C. & DAVIDSON, J. (1997). Similarities and differences between the training of clinical psychologists and counsellors. Clinical Psychology, 101, 9-12.

Thérapie/Thérapeute : Terme générique qui désigne une forme particulière de traitement. En psychologie, technologie qui repose sur des connaissances scientifiques ou/et des observations cliniques, et dont l'objectif est d'aider, soulager et guérir le patient/client. Le type de thérapie varie habituellement selon les perspectives. Thérapie, pseudothérapies et évaluation des thérapies. = psychothérapie, technologie ou technique psychologique, traitement. ( ): autothérapie, thérapie béhavioriste, thérapie béhaviorale, thérapie béhaviorale dilectique, thérapie brève, thérapie cognitivo-béhaviorale, thérapie centrée sur la personne, thérapie cognitive, thérapie comportementale, thérapie contextuelle, thérapie de couple, thérapie de groupe, thérapie de l'acceptation et de l'engagement, thérapie électroconvulsive, thérapie émotivorationelle, thérapie gestalt, thérapie famililale, thérapie humaniste, thérapie infantile, thérapie non-directive, thérapie par aversion, thérapie par exposition, thérapie par immersion, thérapie par les arts, thérapie psychanalytique, thérapie par satiété, thérapie sexuelle, thérapie systémique, thérapie verbale. Therapy, psychotherapy, treatment.

	HILGARD, E.R, KELLY, E.L, LUCKEY, B., SANFORD, N., SHAFFER, L.F. & SHAKOW, D. (1947). Recommended graduate training program in clinical psychology. American Psychologist, 2, 539-558.	ALFORD, B.A. (1991). Integration of scientific criteria into the psychotherapy integration movement. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 22 (3), 211-216.
	SHAPIRO, A.K. (1964). Factors contributing to the placebo effect, their implications for psychotherapy. American Journal of Psychotherapy, 18, 73-88.	STRICKER, G. & CUMMINGS, N.A. (1992). The professional school movement. In D.K. Freedheim, H.J. Freudenberger, J.W. Kessler, S.B. Messer, D.R. Peterson, H.H. Strupp & P.L. Wachtel (Eds.), History of psychotherapy : A century of change (pp. 801-828). Washington, DC : American Psychological Association.
	MARGOLIS, J. (1966). Psychotherapy and morality : A study of two concepts. New York : Random House.	LUNDH, L.G. (1993). The role of behaviour and cognition in psychotherapy. Towards an integration. Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy, 22, 3-30.
	ZEILBERGER, J. & SAMPEN, S.E. & SLOANE, H.N. (1968). Modification of a child's problem behaviors in the home with the mother as therapist. Journal of Applied Psychology, 1 (1), 47–53. [ PDF]
	SMITH, M.L. & GLASS, G.V. (1977). Meta-analysis of psychotherapy outcome studies. American Psychologist, 32, 752-760.	HOWARD, K.I., MORAS, K., BRILL, P.L., MARTINOVICH, Z. & LUTZ, W. (1996). The evaluation of psychotherapy : efficacy, effectiveness, patient progress. American Psychologist, 10, 1059-1064.
	LAMBERT, M.J., DEJULIO, S.S. & STEIN, D.M. (1978). Therapist interpersonal skills. And recommendations for future research. Psychological Bulletin, 85, 467-489.	KADERA, S.W., LAMBERT, M.J. & ANDREW, A.A. (1996). How much therapy is enough? A session-by-session analysis of the psychotherapy dose-effect relationship. Journal of Psychotherapy Practice and Research, 5, 132-151.
	ELLIS, A. (1980). The value of efficiency in psychotherapy. Psychotherapy Theory, Research and Practice, 17 (4), 414-419.	BLATT, S.J., SANISLOW, C.A., ZUROFF, D.C. & PILKONIS, P. (1996). Characteristics of effective therapists : Further analysis of data from the National Institute of Mental Health Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Program. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 64, 1276-1284.
	SMITH, M.L., GLASS, G.V. & MILLER, T.I. (1980). The benefits of psychotherapy. Baltimore : John Hopkins University Press.	BEYERSTEIN, B.L. (1997). Why bogus therapies seem to work. Skeptical Inquirer, 21 (5), 29-34.
	ANDREWS, G. & HARVEY, R. (1981). Does psychotherapy benefit neurotic patients? A reanalysis of the Smith, Glass and Miller data. Archives of General Psychiatry, 38, 1203-1208.	LAZAR, S.G. & GABBARD, G.O. (1997). The cost-effectiveness of psychotherapy. Journal of Psychotherapy Practice & Research 6, 307-314.
	LANDMAN, J.T. & DAWES, R.M. (1982). Psychotherapy outcome. American Psychologist, 37, 504-516.	GOLDFRIED, M.R., CASTONGUAY, L.G., HAYES, A.M., DROZD, J.F. & SHAPIRO, D.A. (1997). A comparative analysis of the therapeutic focus in cognitive-behavioural and psychodynamic-interpersonal sessions. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 65, 740-748.
	PRIOLEAU, L., MURDOCK, M. & BRODY, N. (1983). An analysis of psychotherapy versus placebo studies. The Behavioral & Brain Sciences 6, 275-310.	MILLER, N.E. & MacGRUDER K.M. (Eds.) (1999). Cost-effectiveness of psychotherapy. New York : Oxford University Press.
	LAMBERT, M.J., SHAPIRO, D.A. & BERGIN, A.E. (1986). The effectiveness of psychotherapy. In S.L. Garfield & A.E. BERGIN (Eds.), Handbook of psychotherapy and behavior change (pp. 157-211). Toronto : John Wiley and Sons.	MACRAN, S., STILES, W.B. & SMITH, J.A. (1999). How does personal therapy affect therapists’ practice? Journal of Counseling Psychology, 46, 419-431.
	HOWARD, K.I., KOPTA, S.M., KRAUSE, M.S. & ORLINSKI, D.E. (1986). The dose-effect relationship in psychotherapy. American Psychologist, 41, 159-164.	RUSH, A.J. (1999). Psychotherapy for major mood disorders. In N.E. Miller & K.M. Magruder (Eds.), Cost-effectiveness of psychotherapy (pp. 211-223). New York : Oxford University Press.
	WALTERS, E. & OFSHE, R. (1989). Therapy’s delusions. New York, NY : Scribne.	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (1999). Disorder as a black box essentialist concept. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 108, 465-472.
	POIRIER, M. et ROCHON-GOYER, L. (1990). L’efficacité et la rentabilité des services psychologiques de santé. Psychologie Québec, 7, (6).	SHADDISH, W.R., NAVARRO, A.M., MATT, G.E. & PHILLIPS, G. (2000). The effects of psychological therapies under clinically representative conditions : A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin, 126 (4), 512-529.
	ROBINSON, L.A., BERMAN, J.S. & NEIMEYER, R.A. (1990). Psychotherapy for the treatment of depression : A comprehensive review of controlled outcomes research. Psychological Bulletin, 108, 30-49.	ANDREWS, B., BREWIN, C.R., OCHERA, J., MORTON, J., BEKERIAN, D.A., DAVIES, G.M. & MOLLON, P. (2000). The process of memory recovery among adults in therapy. British Journal of Clinical Psychology, 39, 11-26.
		WARWICK, H.M.C. & SALKOVSKI, P.M. (2001). Cognitive- behavioral treatment of hypochondriasis. In V. Starcevic & D.R. Lipsitt (Eds.), Hypochondriasis: Modern perspectives on an ancient malady (pp. 314-328). New York : Oxford.
	BERGAN, J.R. & KRATOCHWILL, T.R. (1990). Behavioral consultation and therapy. Plenum Pub Corp. Hardcover.	McDDERMUT, W., MILLER, I.W. & BROWN, R.A. (2001). The efficacy of group psycho-therapy for depression : a meta-analysis and review of the empirical research. Clinical psychology : Science & Practice, 8 (1), 98-116.
	MASSON, J.M. (1990). Against therapy. London : Fontana.	SCHULBERG, H.C., RAUE, P.J. & ROLLMAN, B.L. (2002). The effectiveness of psychotherapy in treating depressive disorders in primary care practice : clinical and costperspectives. General Hospital Psychiatry, 24 (4), 203-212.
		POPE, K.S., SONNE, J.L. & GREENE, B.G. (2006). What therapists don’t talk about and why : Understanding taboos that hurt us and our clients. Washington, DC : American Psychological Association.
		WALKER, M.P. & VAN DER HELM, E. (2009). Overnight therapy? The role of sleep in emotional brain processing. Psychological Bulletin, 135 (5), 731-748.

Thérapies (Efficacité des...) : En psychologique, l'efficacité est le rapport optimal entre les bénéfices de la thérapie et ses effets secondaires. Les bénéfices de la thérapie sont nombreux et varient selon l'approche ou la perspective du thérapeute : diminution de la souffrance, modification des comportements indésirables ou inadaptés, agréable compagnie du thérapeute, attention accrue à votre égard, possibilité de ressasser de vieux souvenirs ou de dire du mal de ses collègues de travail sans subir de jugement ou de représailles, découverte de soi, enrichissement du vocabulaire du patient, etc. Il va de soi que le bénéfice escompté de la thérapie est la la guérison complète. Efficacité et évaluation des thérapies. Psychotherapy efficacy.

	ELLIS, A. (1956). The effectiveness of psychotherapy with individuals who have severe homosexual problems. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 20, 191-195.	ROTH, A. & FONAGY, P. (1996/2005). What works for whom? A critical review of psychotherapy research. New York : Guilford Press.
	LUBORSKY, L., AUEBACH, A.H., CHANDLER, M., COHEN, J. & BACHRACH, H. (1971). Factors influencing the outcome of psychotherapy : A review of quantitative research Psychological Bulletin, 75 (3), 145-185.
	RUSH, A.J., HOLLON, S., BECK, A.T. & KOVACS, M. (1978). Depression : Must pharmacotherapy fail for cognitive therapy to succeed? Cognitive Therapy & Research, 2, 199-206.	BARLOW, D.H. (1996). The effectiveness of psychotherapy : Science and policy. Clinical Psychology : Science and Practice, 3, 236-240.
	McLEAN, E D. & HAKSTIAN, A.R. (1979). Clinical depression : Comparative efficacy of outpatient treatments. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 47, 818-836.
	ANDERSON, M.P. & BORKOVEC, T.D. (1980). Imagery processing and fear reduction during repeated exposure to two types of phobic imagery. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 18, 537-540.	WAMPOLD, B.E. (1997). Methodological problems in identifying efficacious psychotherapies. Psychotherapy Research, 7, 21-43.
	ELLIS, A. (1980). The value of efficiency in psychotherapy. Psychotherapy, 17, 414-419.	NATHAN, P.E. (1997). In the final analysis, it’s the data that counts. Clinical Psychology : Science & Practice, 4, 281-284.
	KOVACS, M., RUSH, A.J., BECK, A.T. & HOLLON, S.D. (1981). Depressed outpatients treated with cognitive therapy or pharmacotherapy: A one-year follow-up. Archives of General Psychiatry, 38, 33-39.	CRASKE, M.G. & ROWE, M.K. (1997). A comparison of cognitive & behavioural treatments of phobias. In Davey, G.C.L. (Ed.), Phobias. A handbook of theory, research and treatment (pp. 247-280). London : Wiley.
	LANDMAN, J.T. & DAWES, R.M. (1982). Psychotherapy outcome. American Psychologist, 37, 504-516.
	SHAPIRO, D.A. & SHAPIRO, D. (1982). Meta-Analysis of comparative therapy outcome studies: A replication and refinement. Psychological Bulletin, 92 (3), 581-604.	ROSEN, G.M., LOHR, J.M., McNALLY, R. & HERBERT, J. (1998). Power therapies, miraculous claims, and the cures that fail. Behavioural & Cognitive Psychotherapy, 26, 97-99.
	SHAPIRO, D.A. & SHAPIRO, D. (1983). Comparative therapy outcome research : Methodological implications of meta-analysis. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 51 (1), 42-53.	GARFIELD, S.L. (1998). Some comments on empirically supported treatments. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 66, 121-125.
	PRIOLEAU, L., MURDOCK, M. & BRODY, N. (1983). An analysis of psychotherapy versus placebo studies. The Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 6, 275-310.
	WILSON, G.T. & RACHMAN, S.J. (1983). Meta-analysis and the evaluation of psychotherapy outcome : limitations and liabilities. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 51, 54-64.	DeRUBEIS, R.J. & CRITS-CHRISTOPH, P.J. (1998). Empirically supported individual and group psychological treatments for adult mental disorders. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 66 (1), 37-52.
	JACOBSON, N.S., FOLLETTE, W.C. & RAVENSTORF, D. (1984). Psychotherapy outcome research : Methods for reporting variability and evaluating clinical significance. Behavior Therapy, 15 (4), 336-352.	MUFSON, L., WEISSMAN, M.M., MOREAU, D. & GARFINKEL, R. (1999). Efficacy of interpersonalpsychotherapy for depressed adolescents. Archives of General Psychiatry, 56, 573-579.
	LUBORSKY, L. McCLELLAN, A.T., WOODY, G.E., O'BRIEN, C.P. & AUERBACH, A. (1985). Therapist success and its determinants. Archives of General Psychiatry, 42, 602-611.	QUITKIN, F.M., RABKIN, J.G., GERALD, J., DAVIS, J. & KLEIN, D.F. (2000). Validity of clinical trials of antidepressants. American Journal of Psychiatry, 157, 327-337.
		SHADISH, W.R. & MATT, G.E., NAVARRO, A.M. & PHILLIPS, G. (2000). The effects of psychological therapies under clinically representative conditions : A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin, 126, 512-529.
	LAMBERT, M.J., SHAPIRO, D.A. & BERGIN, A.E. (1986). The effectiveness of psychotherapy. In S.L. Garfield & A.E. Bergin (Eds.), Handbook of psychotherapy and behavior change (pp. 157-211). Toronto : John Wiley and Sons.
	STILES, W.B., SHAPIRO, D.A. & ELLIOT, R. (1986). Are all psychotherapies equivalent? American Psychologist, 41, 165-180.	NEZU, A.M., RONAN, G.F., MEADOWS, E.A, McCLURE, K.S. (2000). Practitioner’s guide to empirically based measures of depression. New York : Kluwer.
	HAYES, S.C. & NELSON, R.O. (1986). Assessing the effect of therapeutic intervention. In R.O. Nelson & S.C. Hayes, (Eds.), Conceptual foundations of behavioral assessment (pp. 430-460). New York : Guilford Press.	O’HARA, M.W., STUART, S., GORMAN, L.L. & WENZEL, A. (2000). Efficacy of interpersonal psychotherapy for postpartum depression. Archives of General Psychiatry, 57 (11), 1039-1045.
	TURNER, J.A. & & CLANCY, S. (1988). Comparison of operant behavioral and cognitive-behavioral group treatment for chronic low back pain. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 56, 261-266.	NATHAN, P.E. STUART, S.P. & DOLAN, S.L. (2000). Research on psychotherapy efficacy and effectiveness : Between Scylla & Charybdis? Psychological Bulletin, 126, 964-981.
	BORKOVEC, T.D. & MATHEWS, A.M. (1988). Treatment of nonphobic anxiety disorders : A comparison of nondirective, cognitive, and coping desensitization therapy. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 56, 877-884.	CHAMBLESS, D.L. & OLLENDICK, T.H. (2001). Empirically supported psychological interventions : controversies and evidence. Annual review of psychology, 52, 685-716.
		LEICHSENRING, F. (2001). Comparative effects of short- term psychodynamic psychotherapy and cognitive- behavioral therapy in depression : A meta-analytic approach. Clinical Psychology Review, 21, 401-419.
	KIRSCH, I. (1990). Changing expectations: A key to effective psychotherapy. Belmont, CA Brooks/Cole.	ANDREWS, G. (2001). Placebo response in depression : bane of research, boon to therapy. British Journal of Psychiatry, 178, 192 -194.
	POIRIER, M. et ROCHON-GOYER, L. (1990). L’efficacité et la rentabilité des services psychologiques de santé. Psychologie Québec, 7 (6).	WILSON, D.B. & LIPSEY, M.W. (2001). The role of method in treatment effectiveness research : evidence from meta-analysis. Psychol Methods, 6 (4), 413-429.
	BURNS, D. & NOLEN-HOEKSEMA, S. (1991). Coping styles, homework compliance and the effectiveness of cognitive-behavioral therapy. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 59, 305-311.	LAMBERT, M.J. & OGLES, B.M. (2004). The efficacy and effectiveness of psycho therapy. In M.J. Lambert (Ed.), Bergin and Garfield’s handbook of psycho therapy and behavior change. (pp. 139-193). New York : John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
	SHIRK, S.R. & RUSSELL, R.L. (1992). A reevaluation of estimates of child therapy effectiveness Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 31 (4), 703-710.	WESTEN, D., NOVNOTY, C.M. & THOMPSON-RENNE, H. (2004). Empirical status of empirically supported psychotherapies : Assumptions, findings, and reporting in controlled clinical trials. Psychological Bulletin, 130, 631-663.
	AREAN, P.A., PERRI, M.G., NEZU, A.M., SCHEIN, R.L., CHRISTOPHER, F. & JOSEPH, T.X. (1993). Comparative effectiveness of social problem-solving therapy and reminiscence therapy as treatments for depression in older adults. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 61, 1003-1010.	GREENBERG, R.P. (2004). Essential ingredients for successful psychotherapy : The impact of common factors. In M.J. Dewan, B.N. Steenbarger and R.P. Greenberg (Eds), The art and science of brief psychotherapies : A practitioner's guide. American Psychiatric Press.
	MASH, E.J. & HUNSLEY, J. (1993). Behavior therapy and managed mental health care : Integrating effectiveness and economics in mental health practice. Behavior Therapy, 24, 67-90.	JOSEPH, J. (2004). The gene illusion : Genetic research in psychiatry and psychology under the microscope. Ross-on-Wye, UK : PCCS Books.
	BORKOVEC, T.D. & COSTELLO, E. (1993). Efficacy of applied relaxation and cognitive behavioral therapy in the treatment of generalized anxiety disorder. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 61, 611-619.	BOHUS, M., HAAF, B., SIMMS, T., SCHMAHL, C., IMBERGER, M.F., SCHMAHL, C., UNCKELl, C., LIEB, K. & LINEHAN, M.M. (2004). Effectiveness of inpatient DBT for BPD : A controlled trial. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 42 (5), 487-499.
	LIPSEY, M.W. & WILSON, D.B. (1993). The efficacy of psychological, educational and behavioral treatment. Confirmation from meta-analysis. American Psychologist, 48 (12), 1181-1209.	JACOBSON, J.W., FOXX, R.M. & MULICK, J.A. (Eds.) (2005). Controversial therapies for developmental disabilities : Fad, fashion, and science in professional practice Hillsdale, NJ : Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
	QUINSEY, V.L., RICE, M.E., HARRIS, G.T. & LALUMIÈRE, M.L. (1993). Assessing treatment efficacy in outcome studies of sex offenders. Journal of Interpersonal Violence, 8, 512-523.	WEERSING, V.R., IYENGAR, S. KOLKO, D.J., BIRMAHER, B. & BRENT, D.A. (2006). Effectiveness of Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Adolescent Depression: A Benchmarking Investigation. Behavior Therapy, 37 (1), 36-48.
	SHAPIRO, D.A., BARKHAM, M., REES, A., HARDY, G.E., REYNOLDS, S. & STARTUP, M. (1994). Effects of treatment duration and severity of depression on the effectiveness of cognitive-behavioral and psychodynamic interpersonal psychotherapy. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 62, 522-534.	DIMIDJIAN, S., HOLLON, S.D., DOBSON, K.S., SCHMALING, K.B., KOHLENBERG, R.J., ADDIS, M.E., GALLOP, R., McGLINCHEY, J.B., MARKLEY, D.K., GOLLAN, J.K., ATKINS, D.C., DUNNER, D.L. & JACOBSON, N.S. (2006). Randomized trial of behavioral activation, cognitive therapy, and antidepressant medication in the acute treatment of adults with major depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 74 (4), 658-670.
	PERSONS, J.B. (1995). Why practicing psychologists are slow to adopt empirically-validated treatments. In S.C. Hayes, V.M. Follette, R.M. Dawes & K.E. Grady (Eds), Scientific standards of psychological practice. Context Press.	NATHAN, P.E. & GORMAN, J.M. (2007). A guide to treatments that work. New York : University press.
	ANTONOCCIO, D.O., DANTON, W.G. & DENELSKY, G.Y. (1995). Psychotherapy versus medication for depression : Challenging the conventional wisdom with data. Professional Psychology : Research & Practice, 26 (6), 574-585.	COFFMAN, S., MARTELL, C.R., DIMIDJIAN, S., GALLOP, R. & HOLLON, S.D. (2007). Extreme non-response in cognitive therapy : Can behavioral activation succeed where cognitive therapy fails ? Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 75, 531–541.
	SINGER, T. & LALICH, J. (1996). "Crazy" TherapiesWhat are they ? Do They Work ? San Francisco : Jossey-Bass Publishers.	ZLOMKE, K. & DAVIS, T.E. (2008). One-session treatment of specific phobias : A detailed description and review of treatment efficacy. Behavior Therapy, 39 (3), 207-223.
	GARFIELD, S.L. (1996). Some problems associated with "validated" forms of psychotherapy. Clinical Psychology : Research and Practice, 3, 218-229.	DOBSON, K.S., HOLLON, S.D., DIMIDJIAN, S., SCHMALING, K.B., KOHLENBERG, R.J., GALLOP, R., RIZVI, J., GOLLAN, J.K., DUNNER, D.L. & JACOBSON, N.S. (2008). Randomized trial of behavioral activation, cognitive therapy, and antidepressant medication in the prevention of relapse and recurrence in major depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 76 (3), 468-477. [LIRE]
	HOWARD, K.I., MORAS, K., BRILL, P.L., MARTINOVICH, Z. & LUTZ, W. (1996). Evaluation of psychotherapy : Efficacy, effectiveness, and patient progress. American Psychologist, 51, 1059–1064.	McLEOD, B. D. (2009). Understanding why therapy allegiance is linked to clinical outcomes. Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice, 16, 69–72.
		KENNY, D.A. & HOYT, W.L. (2009). Multiple levels of analysis in psychotherapy research. Psychotherapy Research, 19, 462-468.
	BLATT, S.J., SANISLOW, C.A., ZUROFF, D.C. & PILKONIS, P. (1996). Characteristics of effective therapists : Further analysis of data from the National Institute of Mental Health Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Program. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 64, 1276-1284.	KLINTWALL, L. GILLBERG, C., BÖLT, S. & FERNELLl, E. (2011). The efficacy of intensive behavioral intervention for children with autism: A matter of allegiance? Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders doi:10.1007/s10803-011-1223-z. [PDF]

Thérapies (Durée des...) : Time-limited therapy.

	BURLINGAME, G.M., FUHRIMAN, A.P.S. & OGLES, B.M. (1989). Implementing a time-limited therapy : program differential effects of training and experience. Psychotherapy : Theory, Research, Practice, Training, 26, 303-313.

Thérapie analytique fonctionnelle : Functional analytic psychotherapy, FAP.

	KOHLENBERG, R.J. & TSAI, M. (1987). Functional analytic psychotherapy. In N. Jacobson (Ed.), Cognitive and behavioral therapists in clinical practice. New York : Guilford.
	KOHLENBERG, R.J. & TSAI, M. (1991). Functional analytic psychotherapy : Creating intense and curative therapeutic relationships. New-York: Plenum Publishers.
	KOHLENBERG, R.J. & TSAI, M. (1994). Functional Analytic Psychotherapy : A behavioral approach to treatment and integration. Journal of Psychotherapy Integration, 4, 175-201.
	HAYES, S. C., MASUDA, A , BISSETT, R., LUOMA, J. & GUERRERO, L.F. (2004). DBT, FAP, and ACT : How empirically oriented are the new behavior therapy technologies? Behavior Therapy, 35, 35-54.
	TSAI, M., KOHLENBERG, R.J., KANTER, J.W., KOHLENBERG, B.S., FOLLETTE, W.C. & CALLAGHAN, G.M. (2008). A guide to functional analytic psychotherapy : Awareness, courage, love and behaviorism. New York : Springer.

Thérapie aversive : Voir Thérapie par aversion.

Thérapie béhavioriste : Ensemble des thérapies qui vise à modifier les comportements des client/patient/malade. Ces thérapies sont fondées sur les théories de l'apprentissage. Thérapie béhavioriste et modification du comportement. ( ): thérapie par aversion, thérapie par exposition, thérapie par immersion, désensibilisation systématique, façonnement, système ou économie de jetons, technique de punition et de renforcement, estompage et mise en relief. Behavior therapy, behavior therapy technique.

	LINDSLEY, O.R., SKINNER, B.F. & SOLOMON, H.C. (1953). Studies in behavior therapy. Walthama, MA. : Metropolitan State Hospital.	WILSON, G.T. & O'LEARY, K.D. (1980). Principles of behavior therapy. New Jersey : Prentice-Hall.
	WOLPE, J. (1958). Psychotherapy by reciprocal inhibition. Stanford : Stanford University Press.	KAZDIN, A.E. & HERSEN, M. (1980). The current status of behavior therapy. Behavior Modification, 4 (3), 283-302.
		FOA, E.B. & EMMELKAMP, P.M.G. (1983). Failures in behaviour therapy. New York : Wiley.
	EYSENK, H.J. (1959). Learning theory and behavior therapy. Journal of Mental Science, 105, 61-75.	VAN HOUTEN, R., AXELROD, S., BAILEY, J.S., FAVELL, J.E., FOXX, R.M., IWATA, B.A. & LOVAAS, O.I. (1988). The right to efective behavioral treatment.The Behavior Analyst, 11, 111-114.
		SKINNER, B.F. (1988). The operant side of behavior therapy. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry, 19, 171-79.
		BOWERS, T.G. & CLUM, G.A. (1988). Relative contribution of specific and nonspecific treatment effects : Meta-analysis of placebo-controlled behavior therapy research. Psychological Bulletin, 103, 315-323.
	EYSENK, H.J. (Ed.). (1960). Behaviour therapy and the neuroses. London : Pergamon.	NEZU, A.M. & NEZU, C.M. (Eds.) (1989). Clinical decision making in behavior therapy : A problem-solving perspective. Champaign, IL: Research Press.
	GLYNN, J.D. & HARPER, P. (1961). Behaviour therapy in transvestism. Lancet, 1, 619.	LADOUCEUR, R., BOUCHARD, M.A. et GRANGER, L. (1989). Principes et applications des thérapies behaviorales. Edisem.
	WOLPE, J. & LAZARUS, A.A. (1966). Behavior therapy technique. New York : Pergamon Press.	HERSEN, M. (1989). Innovations in child behavior therapy. New York : Springer.
	GREENSPOON, J.& BROWNSTEIN, A.J. (1967). Psychotherapy from the standpoint of a behaviorist. Psychological Record, 17, 401-416.	GOLDFRIED, M.R. & CASTONGUAY, L.G. (1993). Behavior therapy : Redefining strengths and limitations. Behavior Therapy, 24 (4), 505-526.
		KOHLENBERG, R.J., HAYES, S. C. & TSAI, M. (1993). Radical behavioral psychotherapy: Two contemporary examples. Clinical Psychology Review, 13, 579-592
		FOA, E.B. (1996).The efficacy of behavioral therapy with obsessive-compulsives. The Clinical Psychologist, 49, 2, 19-22.
		TERI, L, LOGSDON, R.G., UOMOTO J. & McURRY, S.M. (1997). Behavioral treatment of depression in dementia patients: A controlled clinical trial. Journal of Gerontology: Psychological Sciences, 52B, 159-166.
		AGRAS, W.S. (1997). Helping people improve their lives with behavior therapy. Behavior Therapy, 28, 375-384.
	KANFER, F. & SASLOW, G. (1969). Behavioral diagnosis. In C.M. Franks (Ed.), Behavior therapy : appraisal and status (pp. 2-16). New York : McGraw Hill.	DOUGHER, M.J. (1997). Cognitive concepts, behavior analysis, and behavior therapy. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 28, 65-70.
	KANFER, F. & SASLOW, G. (1969). Behavioral diagnosis. In C.M. Franks (Ed.), Behavior therapy : appraisal and status (pp. 2-16). New York : McGraw Hill.	PLAUD, J. & EIFERT, G. (1998). From behavior theory to behavior therapy. Boston : Allyn and Bacon.
	KANFER, F. & PHILLIPS, J.S. (1970). Learning foundations of behavior therapy. New York : Wiley.	MARTELL, C.R. (1999). Behavior therapy and sexual minorities : Thoughts on progress and future directions. The Behavior Therapist, 22 (10), 194-195.
	LAZARUS, A.A. (1971) Behavior therapy and beyond. New York : McGraw-Hill.	ZELIKOVSKY, N., RODRIGUE, J.R., GIDYZC, C.A. & DAVIS, M.A. (2000). Cognitive behavioral and behavioral interventions to help children cope during voiding cystourethogram. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 25, 535-543.
	FENSTERHEIM, H. (1974). Behavior therapy of the sexual variations. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 1 (1), 16-28.	O’DONOHUE, W.T., HENDERSON, D.A., HAYES, S.C. FISHER, J.E. & HAYES, L.J. (Eds.) (2001). A history of the behavioral therapies : Founders’ personal histories. Reno, NV : Context Press.
	RIMM, D.C. & MASTERS, J.C. (1974). Behavior therapy : Techniques and empirical findings. New York : Academic Press.	JACOBSON, N.S., MARTELL, C.R. & DIMIDJIAN, S. (2001). Behavioral Activation for depression : Returning to contextual roots. Clinical Psychology : Science and Practice, 8, 255-270
	O'LEARY, K.D. & WILSON, G.T. (1975/87). Behavior therapy : Application and outcome. New Jersey : Prentice-Hall. de psychologie.	MATAIX-COLS, D., MARKS, I.M., GREIST, J.H., KOBAK, K.A. & BAER, L. (2002). Obsessive-compulsive symptom dimensions as predictors of compliance with and response to behaviour therapy : Results from a controlled trial. Psychotherapy & Psychosomatics, 71, 255-262.
	AL-ISSA, I. (1976). Behavior therapy and hallucinations: A sociocultural approach. Psychotherapy : Theory, Research & Practice, 13 (2), 156-159.
	LAZARUS, A.A. (1976). Multimodal behavior therapy. New York : Springer.	NEZU, A.M. (2004). Problem solving and behavior therapy revisited. Behavior Therapy, 35, 1-33.
	RAMSAY, R. (1977). Behavioural approaches to obsessive-compulsive neurosis. In J.C. Boulougouris & A.D. Rabavilas (Eds.), The treatment of phobic and obsessive compulsive disorders : Selected papers from the sixth annual meeting of the European association of behaviour therapy ( pp. 102-103). Oxford : Pergamon Press.
	LADOUCEUR, R., BOUCHARD, M.A. et GRANGER, L. (1977). Principes et applications des thérapies behaviorales. St-Hyacinthe : Edisem/Paris : Maloine.	RACHMAN, S. (2009). Psychological treatment of anxiety : The evolution of behavior therapy and cognitive behavior therapy. Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 5, 97-119.
	LEWINSOHN, P.M. YOUNGREN, M.A. & GROSSCUP, S.J. (1979). Reinforcement and depression. In R.A. Dupue (Ed.), The psychobiology of depressive disorders : Implications for the effects of stress (pp. 291-316). New York : Academic Press.	MARTELL, C.R., DIMIDJIAN & HERMAN-DUNN, R. (2010). Behavioral activation for depression : A clinician's guide.
	LEWINSOHN, P.M., SULLIVAN, J.M. & GROSSCUP, S.J. (1980). Changing reinforcing events : An approach to the treatment of depression. Psychotherapy : Theory, Research, and Practice, 47, 322-334.	PIACENTINI, J., WOODS, D.W, SCAHILL, L., WILHELM, S., PETERSON, A.L., CHANG, S., GINSBURG, G.S., DECKERSBACH, T., DZIURA, J., LEVI-PEARL, S. & WALKTUP, J.T. (2010). Behavior therapy for children with tourette disorder : A randomized controlled trial. Journal of American Medecine Association, 303 (19), 1929-1937.

Thérapie béhavioriale : Voir Thérapie comportementale.

Thérapie béhavioriale dialectique : Thérapie d'inspiration béhaviorale, cognitive et bouddhiste (!), développée par Linehan pour traiter les cas de personnalité limite. = thérapie comportementale dialectique. Dialectical behavioral therapy.

	LINEHAN, M.M. (1987). Dialectical behavior therapy : A cognitive behavioral approach to parasuicide. Journal of Personality Disorders, 1, 328-333.	RIZVI, S.L. & INEHAN, M.M. (2001). Dialectical behavior therapy for personality disorders. Current Psychiatric Reports, 3, 64-69.
	LINEHAN, M.M. (1987). Dialectical behavior therapy for borderline personality disorder : Theory and method. Bulletin of the Menninger Clinic, 51, 261-276.	LINEHAN, M.M. & DIMEFF, L. (2001). Dialectical behavior therapy in a nutshell. The California Psychologist, 34, 10-13.
	LINEHAN, M.M. (2000). The empirical basis of dialectical behavior therapy : Development of new treatments vs. evaluation of existing treatments. Clinical Psychology : Science and Practice, 7, 113- 119.	HAYES, S. C., MASUDA, A , BISSETT, R., LUOMA, J. & GUERRERO, L.F. (2004). DBT, FAP, and ACT : How empirically oriented are the new behavior therapy technologies? Behavior Therapy, 35, 35-54.
	KOERNER, K. & LINEHAN, M.M. (2000). Research on dialectical behavior therapy for borderline personality disorder. The Psychiatric clinics of North America, 23 (1), 151-167.	HOLMES, P., GEORGESCU, S. & LILES, W. (2005). Further delineating the applicability of acceptance and change to private responses : The example of dialectical behavior therapy. The Behavior Analyst Today, 7 (3), 301-311.
	LINEHAN, M.M. (2000). Commentary on innovations in dialectical behavior therapy. Cognitive and Behavioral Therapy, 7 (4), 478-481

Thérapie brève : Ensemble de thérapies conçues pour atteindre rapidement leur objectifs thérapeutiques, du moins si on compare leur durée moyenne à celle des traitements reçus dans le cadre d'une psychanalyse. Short therapy, brief therapy, brief strategic therapy, one-session treatment, Rapid treatment.

	GILLIS, J.S. & JESSOR, R. (1970). Effects of brief psychotherapy on belief in internal control : An exploratory study. Psychotherapy, 7, 135-137.	ERON, J. & LUND, T. (1996). Narrative solutions in brief therapy. New York : Guilford Press.
	MADDOCK, J.W. (1975). Initiation problems and time structuring in brief sex therapy. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 1 (3), 190-197.	ÖST L-G. (1997). Rapid treatment of specific phobias. In G.Davey (Ed.), Phobias: A handbook of theory, research, and treatment (pp. 227-246). London : Wiley.
	WOODWARD, C., SANTA-BARBARA, J., LEVIN, S. & EPSTEIN, N. (1978). Aspects of consumer satisfaction with brief family therapy. Family Process, 17, 399-407.	NARDONE G. & WATZLAWICK, P. (2000). Brief strategic therapy. Rowman & Littlefield Publishers Inc /Paris : SeuiL.
	RUSH, A.J. & GILES, D.E. (1982). Cognitive therapy : Theory and research. In Rush, A.J. (Ed.), Short-Term Psychotherapies for Depression (pp. 143-180). New York : Guilford Press.	ÖST L-G., ALM, T., BANDBERG, M. & BREITHOLTZ, E. (2001). One vs. five sessions of exposure and five sessions of cognitive therapy in the treatment of claustrophobia. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 39, 167-183.
	RUSH, A.J. (Ed.) (1982). Short-term psychotherapies for depression. New York : Guilford Press.	ÖST L-G., SVENSSON, L., HELLSTROM, K. & LINDWALL, R. (2001). One-session treatment of specific phobias in youths : A randomized clinical trial. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 69, 814-824.
	ÖST L-G. (1989). One-session treatment for specific phobias. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 27 (1), 1-7.	BOND, F.W. & DRYDEN, W (2002). Handbook of brief cognitive therapy. Chichester, UK : Wiley.
	ELLIS, A. (1992). Brief therapy : The rational-emotive method or approach. In S.H. Budman, M.F. Hoyt & S. Fieman (Eds.), The first session in brief therapy (pp. 36-58). New York : Guilford.	SHAPIRO, D.A., BARKHAM, M., STILES, W.B., HARDY, G.E., REES, A., REYNOLDS, S. & STARTUP, M. (2003). Time is of the essence: A selective review of the fall and rise of brief therapy research. Psychology and Psychotherapy : Theory, Research and Practice, 76, 211-235.
	ELLIS, A. (1995). Better, deeper, more enduring brief therapy : A rational emotive behavior therapy approach. New York : Routledge.	DEWAN, M.J., STEENBARGAR, B.N. & GREENBERG, R.P. (2008). Brief psychotherapies. In R.E. Hales, S.C. Yudofsky, G.O. Gabbard (Eds.), The American Psychiatric Publishing Textbook of Psychiatry. Washington (pp. 155-1170). DC: American Psychiatric Publishing.
	ÖST L-G. (1996). One-session group treatment of spider phobia. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 34, 707-715.	ZLOMKE, K. & DAVIS, T.E. (2008). One-session treatment of specific phobias : A detailed description and review of treatment efficacy. Behavior Therapy, 39 (3), 207-223.
	BLATT, S.J., ZUROFF, D. C., QUINLAN, D.M. & PILKONIS, P. (1996). Interpersonal factors in brief treatment of depression: Further analysis of the NIMH Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Program. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 64, 162-171.

Thérapie centrée sur la personne : Thérapie développée par Rogers. Dans ce type de thérapie, le thérapeute doit accorder à son client une considération positive inconditionnelle et faire preuve à son égard d'authenticité et d'empathie, toute chose qui ont pour but de favoriser son bien-être et sa croissance. = thérapie centrée sur le client, thérapie humaniste. Person centred therapy, client-centered therapy, CCT.

	ROGERS, C.R. (1946). Signifiant aspects of client-centered therapy. American psychologist, 1, 415-422.
	HOBBS, N. (1955). Client-centered psychotherapy. In J.L. McCary (Ed.), New six approaches to psychotherapy (pp. 11-60). York, NY: Dryden Press.
	ROGERS, C.R. (1963). La relation thérapeutique : les bases de son efficacité. Bulletin de Psychologie, 17, 12-14.
	ROGERS, C.R. (1976). Client-centred therapy. Its current practice, implications and theory. London: Constable.
	MILTON, M (1993). Existential thought and client centred therapy. Counselling Psychology Quarterly, 6 (3), 239-248.
	O'LEARY, E. & KEANE, N. (1997). Person centred therapy. In P. Hawkins & J. Nesteros (Eds.), Perspectives in psychotherapy. Athens : Ellinika Grammata.

Thérapie cognitive : Ensemble de thérapies qui s'inspire de la perspective cognitive et dont l'objectif et de modifier les connaissances/pensées erronées et d'en acquérir de nouvelles plus adaptées à la réalité. Cognitive therapy.

	BECK, A.T. (1976). Cognitive therapy and the emotional disorders. New York: Penguin.	ANTONUCCIO, D.O., THOMAS, M. & DANTON, W.G. (1997). A cost-effectiveness analysis of cognitive behavior therapy and fluoxetine (Prozac) in the treatment of depression. Behavior Therapy, 28, 187-210. [PDF]
	RUSH, A.J., HOLLON, S.J., BECK, A.T. & KOVACS, M. (1978). Depression : Must psychotherapy fail for cognitive therapy to succeed? Cognitive Therapy & Research, 2, 199-206.	SCOTT, C., TACCHI, M.J., JONES, R. & SCOTT, J. (1997). Acute and one-year outcome of a randomised controlled trial of brief cognitive therapy for major depressive disorder in primary care. British Journal of Psychiatry, 171, 131-134.
	ELLIS, A. (1979). The history of cognition in psychotherapy. In A. Freeman., K.M. Simon, I.E. Beutler & H. Aronowitz (Eds.), Comprehensive handbook of cognitive therapy (pp. 5-19). New York : Plenum.	SCOTT, J. (1998). Where there's a will ... cognitive therapy for chronic depression. In N. Tarrier, G. Haddock, & A. Wells (Eds.), Cognitive therapy for complex cases (pp. 81—104). London : Wiley.
	BECK, A.T., RUSH, A.J., SHAW, B.F. & EMERY, G. (1979). Cognitive therapy of depression. New York : Guilford.	GLOAGUEN, V., COTTRAUX, J., CUCHERAT, M. & BLACKBURN, I-.M. (1998). A meta-analysis of the effects of cognitive therapy in depressed patients. Journal of Affective Disorders, 49, 59-72.
	KOVACS, M., RUSH, A.J., BECK, A.T. & HOLLON, S D. (1981). Depressed outpatients treated with cognitive therapy or pharmacotherapy : A one-year follow-up. Archives of General Psychiatry, 38, 33-39.	SILVERMAN, W.K., KURTINES, W.M., GINSBURG, G.S., WEEMS, C.F., LUMPKIN, P.W. & CARMICHAEL, D.H. (1999). Treating anxiety disorders in children with group cognitive-behavioral therapy : A randomized clinical trial. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 67, 995-1003.
	BLACKBURN, I.M., BISHOP, S., GLEN, A.I.M., WHALLEY, L.J. & CHRISTIE, J.E. (1981). The efficacy of cognitive therapy in depression : A treatment trial using cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy, each alone and in combination. British Journal of Psychiatry, 139, 181-189.	CLARKE, G.N., ROHDE, P., LEWINSOHN, P.M., HOPS, H. & SEELEY, J.R. (1999). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of adolescent depression : Efficacy of acute group treatment and booster sessions. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 38, 272-279.
	RUSH, A.J., BECK, A.T., KOVACS, M., WEISSENBURGER, J. & HOLLON, S.D. (1982). Comparison of the effects of cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy on hopelessness and self-concept. American Journal of Psychiatry, 139, 862-866.	YOUNG, J.E. (1999). Cognitive therapyforpersonality disorders : A schema-focused approach. Sarasota, FL: Professional Resource Exchange.
	MILLER, R.C. & BERMAN, J.S. (1983). The efficacy of cognitive behavior therapies : A quantitative review of the research evidence. Psychological Bulletin, 94 (1), 39-53.	VISSER, S. & BOUMAN, T.K. (2001). The treatment of hypochondriasis : Exposure plus response prevention vs cognitive therapy. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 39, 423-442.
	TEASDALE, J.D., FENNELL, M.J.V., HIBBERT, G. A. & AMIES, P.L. (1984). Cognitive therapy for major depressive disorder in primary care. British Journal of Psychiatry, 144, 400-406.
	BECK, A.T., HOLLON, S.D., YOUNG, J.E., BEDROSIAN, R.C. & BUDENZ, D. (1985). Treatment of depression with cognitive therapy and amitriptyline. Archives of General Psychiatry, 42, 142-148.	TEASDALE, J.D., SCOTT, J., MOORE, R.G., HAYHURS, H., POPE, M. PAYKEL, E.S. (2001). How does cognitive therapy prevent relapse in residual depression ? Evidence From a Controlled Trial Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 69 (3), 347-357. [PDF]
	CLARK, D.M. (1986). A cognitive approach to panic. Behavior Research & Therapy, 24, 461-470.	PERSONS, J.B., DAVIDSON, J. & TOMPKINS, M.A. (2001). Essential components of cognitive-behavior therapy for depression. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
	BLACKBURN I.M., EUNSON, K.M. & BISHOP, S. (1986). A two-year naturalistic follow-up of depressed patients treated with cognitive therapy, pharmacotherapy, and a combination of both. Journal of Affective Disorders, 10, 67-75.	MORRISON, A.P., RENTON, J.C., DUNN, H., WILLIAMS, S. & BENTALL, R.P. (2003). Cognitive therapy for psychosis : A formulation-based approach. New York : Brunner-Routledge.
	FREEMAN, A. & GREENWOOD, V.B. (Eds) (1987). Cognitive therapy. New York : Human Sciences Press.	MOORE, R. & GARLAND, A. (2003). Cognitive Therapy for chronic and persistent depression. Chichester, UK : Wiley.
	PIASECKI, J. & HOLLON, S.D. (1987). Cognitive therapy for depression : Unexplicated schemata andscripts. Dans N. S. Jacobson (Ed.), Psychotherapists in clinical practice : cognitive and behavioural perspectives (pp. 121-152). New York : Guilford.	STANGIER, U., HEIDENRICH, T., PEITZ, M., LAUERBACH, W. & CLARK, D.M. (2003). Cognitive therapy for social phobia: Individual versus group treatment. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 41, 991-1007.
	DOBSON, K.S. (1989). A meta-analysis of the efficacy of cognitive therapy for depression. Journal of the Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 57, 414-419.
	BARBER, J. P. & DeRuBEIS, R. J. (1989). On second thought: Where the action is in cognitive therapy for depression. Cognitive Therapy & Research, 13, 441-457.	CAHILL, J., BARKHAM, M., HARDY, G.E., REES, A., SHAPIRO, D.A., STILES, W.B., MacASKILL, N.D. (2003). Outcomes of patients completing and not completing cognitive therapy for depression. British Journal of Clinical Psychology, 42, 133-143.
	FREEMAN, A., SIMON, K.M., BEUTLER, L.E., & ARKOWITZ, H. (Eds.) (1989). Comprehensive handbook of cognitive therapy. New York : Plenum Press.	HERBERT, J.D., RHEINGOLD, A.A., GAUDIANO, B.A. & MYERS, V. H. (2004). Standard versus extended cognitive behavior therapy for social anxiety disorder : A randomized-controlled trial. Behavioural & Cognitive Psychotherapy, 32, 131-147.
	BOWERS, W.A. (1990). Treatment of depressed in-patients : Cognitive therapy plus medication, relaxation plus medication, and medication alone. British Journal of Psychiatry, 156, 73-78.
	CAUTELA, J.R. & KEARNEY, A.J. (1990). Behavior analysis, cognitive therapy, and covert conditioning. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 21 (2), 83-90.
	DeRUBEIS, R.J, EVANS, MD, HOLLON, S.D., GARVEY, M.J., GROVE, W.M. & TUASON V.B. (1990). How does cognitive therapy work ? Cognitive change and symptom change in cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy for depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 58, 862-869.	MORRISSON, A.P., FRENCH, P., WALFORD, L., LEWIS, S.W., KILCOMMONS, A., GREEN, J., PARKER, S. & BENTALL, R.P. (2004). Cognitive therapy for the prevention of psychosis in people at ultra-high risk : Randomised controlled trial. British Journal of Psychiatry, 185, 291-297.
	HOLLON, S.D., SHELTON, R.C. & LOOSEN, E.T. (1991). Cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy for depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 59, 88-99.	BENNETT-LEVY, J., BUTLER, G., FENNELL, M., HACKMANN, A., MUELLER, M., WESTBROOK, D. & ROUF, K. (2004). Oxford guide to behavioural experiments in cognitive therapy. Oxford, UK : OUP.
	HOLLON, S.D., DeRUBEIS, R .J., EVAN, M.D., WIEMER, M.J., GARVEY, M.J., GROVE, W.M. & TUASON, V.B., (1992). Cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy for depression : Singly and in combination. Archives of General Psychiatry, 49, 774-781.
	EVANS, M.D., HOLLON, S.D., DeRUBEIS, R.J,. PIASECK, J.M., GROVE, W.M., GARVEY, M.J. & TUASON, V.B. (1993). Differential relapse following cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy for depression. Archives of General Psychiatry, 49, 802-808.	GAUDIANO, B.A. (2005). Cognitive behavior therapies for psychotic disorders : Current empirical status and future directions. Clinical Psychology : Science & Practice, 12, 33-50.
	O'DONOHUE, W.T. & SZYMANSKI, J. (1993). Mechanisms of change in cognitive therapy in a simple phobia : logical analysis and empirical hypothesis testing. Journal of Rational-Emotive & Cognitive Behavior Therapy, 11, 207-222.	LEAHY, R. (2004). Contemporary cognitive therapy : Theory, research and practice. London : Guilford Press.
	PERSONS, J.B. (1993). The process of change in cognitive therapy: Schema change or acquisition of compensatory skills? Cognitive Therapy & Research, 17, 123-137.	BECK, A.T. (2005). The current state of cognitive therapy : A 40-year retrospective. Archives of General Psychiatry, 62, 953-959.
	WHISMAN, M.A. (1993). Mediators and moderators of change in cognitive therapy of depression. Psychological Bulletin, 114, 248-265.	SENSKY, T. (2005). The effectiveness of cognitive therapy for schizophrenia : what can we learn from the meta-analyses? Psychotherapy & Psychosomatics, 74, 131-134.
	STARTUP, M.J. & SHAPIRO, D.A. (1993). Dimensions of cognitive therapy for depression : A confirmatory factor analysis. Cognitive Therapy & Research, 17, 139-151.	GAUDIANO, B.A. (2006). Is symptomatic improvement in clinical trials of cognitive behavior therapy for psychosis clinically significant? Journal of Psychiatric Practice, 12, 11-23.
	CLARK, D.M., SALKOVSKIS, P.M., HACKMAN, A., MIDDLETON, H., ANASTASIADES, P. & GELDER, M. (1994). A comparison of cognitive therapy, applied relaxation, and imipra-mine in the treatment of panic disorder. British Journal of Psychiatry, 164, 759-769.	HOLLON, S.D., STEWART, M.O. & STRUNK, D. (2006). Cognitive behavior therapy has enduring effects in the treatment of depression and anxiety. Annual Review of Psychology, 57, 285-315.
	BUTLER A.C. & BECK. A.T. (1995). Cognitive therapy for depression. The Clinical Psychologist, 48 (3), 3-5.	DIMIDJIAN, S., HOLLON, S.D., DOBSON, K.S., SCHMALING, K.B., KOHLENBERG, R.J., ADDIS, M.E., GALLOP, R., McGLINCHEY, J.B., MARKLEY, D.K,. GOLLAN, J.K., ATKINS, D.C., DUNNER, D.L. & JACOBSON, N.S. (2006). Randomized trial of behavioral activation, cognitive therapy, and antidepressant medication in the acute treatment of adults with major depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 74 (4), 658-670.
	BECK, J.S. (1995). Cognitive therapy : basics and beyond. New York : Guilford Press.	SEGAL, Z.V., WILLIAMS, J.M.G. & TEASDALE, J.D. (2006). La thérapie cognitive basée sur la pleine conscience pour la dépression. Belgique : De Boeck.
	CHADWICK, P.D.J., BIRCHWOOD, M.J. & TROWER, P. (1996). Cognitive therapy for delusions, voices and paranoia. Chichester, UK : Wiley.	COFFMAN, S., MARTELL, C.R., DIMIDJIAN, S. GALLOP, R. & HOLLON, S.D. (2007). Extreme non-response in cognitive therapy : Can behavioral activation succeed where cognitive therapy fails ? Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 75, 531-541.
	CHAMBOM, O., PERRIS, C. & MARIE-CARDINE, M. (1997). Techniques de psychothérapie cognitive des psychoses chroniques. Paris : Masson.	BECKERMAN, N.L. & PASS, J. (2008). Assault : Cognitive trauma therapy with a single event trauma survivor. Clinical Social Work Journal, 36 (3), 255-263.
		DOBSON, K.S., HOLLON, S.D., DIMIDJIAN, S., SCHMALING, K.B., KOHLENBERG, R.J., GALLOP, R., RIZVI, J., GOLLAN, J.K., DUNNER, D.L. & JACOBSON, N.S. (2008). Randomized trial of behavioral activation, cognitive therapy, and antidepressant medication in the prevention of relapse and recurrence in major depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 76 (3), 468-477. [LIRE]

Thérapies combinées (Efficacité des...) : Forme de thérapie qui combine médicaments et thérapie. Peu d'études indépendantes semblent avoir fait clairement la démonstration de l'efficacité de cette combinaison. Dans certains cas, le rapport bénéfice/effets secondaires n'est pas supérieur à une simple thérapie ou à l'effet placebo.

	CHRISTENSEN, D. & SPRAGUE, R. (1973). Reduction of hyperactive behavior by conditioning procedures alone and combined with methylphenidate (Ritalin) . Behavior Research & Therapy, 11, 331-334.	HOLLON, S.D., DeRUBEIS, R.J., EVAN, M.D., WIEMER, M.J., GARVEY, M.J., GROVE, W.M. & TUASON, V.B. (1992). Cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy for depression : Singly and in combination. Archives of General Psychiatry, 49, 774-781.
	BLACKBURN, I.M., BISHOP, S., GLEN, A.I.M., WHALLEY, L.J. & CHRISTIE, J.E. (1981). The efficacy of cognitive therapy in depression : A treatment trial using cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy, each alone and in combination. British Journal of Psychiatry, 139, 181-189.	EVAN, M.D., HOLLON, S.D., DeRUBEIS, R.J., PIASECKI, J.M, GROVE, W.M., GARVEY, M.J. & TUASON, V.B. (1992). Differential relapse following cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy for depression. Archives of General Psychiatry, 49, 802–808.
	KOVACS, M., RUSH, A.J., BECK, A.T. & HOLLON, S.D., (1981). Depressed outpatients treated with cognitive therapy or pharmacotherapy. Archives of General Psychiatry, 38, 33-39.
	WILSON, P.H. (1982). Combined pharmacological and behavioural treatment of depression. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 20, 173-184.
	RUSH, J., BECK, A.T., KOVACS,, M., WEISSENBURGER, J, & HOLLON, S.D. (1982). Comparison of the effects of cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy on hopelessness and self-concept. American Journal of Psychiatry, 139 (7), 862-866.	STRAVYNSKI, A., VERREAULT, R., GAUDETTE, G., LANGLOIS, R., GAGNIER, & LAROSE, R. (1994). The treatment of depression with group behavioral-cognitivetherapy and imipramine. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 39, 387-390.
	ROTH, D., BIELSKI, R., JONES, M., PARLKER, W. & OSBORN, G. (1982). A comparison of self- control therapy and combined self-control therapy and antidepressant medication in the treatment of depression. Behavior Therapy, 13, 133-144.	DUVJONE, V.F., BARNARD, M.U. & RAPPOFF, M.A. (1995). Pharmacological and cognitive-behavioral approaches in the treatment of childhood depression : A review and critique. Clinical Psychology Review, 15, 589-611.
	MURPHY, G .E., SIMONS, A.D., WETZEL, R.D. & LUSTMAN, P.L. (1984). Cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy, singly and together in the treatment of depression. Archives of General Psychiatry, 41, 33-41.	STITZER, M.L. & WALSH, S.L. (1997) Psychostimulant abuse : The case for combined behavioral and pharmacological treatments. Pharmacology, Biochemistry & Behavior, 57, 457-470.
	BLACKBURN, I.M., EUNSON, K.M. & BISHOP, S. (1986). A two-year naturalistic follow-up of depressed patients treated with cognitive therapy, pharmacotherapy, and a combination of both. Journal of Affective Disorders, 10, 67-75.
	SIMONS, A.D, MURPHY, G.E., LEVINE, J.L., WETZEL, R.D. (1986). Cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy for depression : Sustained improvement over one year. Archives of General Psychiatry, 43, 43-50.	MIKLOWITZ, D.J., SIMONEAU, T.L., GEORGE, E.L., RICHARDS, J.A., KALBAG, A., SACHS-ERICSSON, N. & SUDDATH, R. (2000). Family-focused treatment of bipolar disorder : One-year effects of a psychoeducation program in conjunction with pharmacotherapy. Biological Psychiatry, 48, 582-592.
	CONTE, H. R., PLUTCHIK, R., WILD, K. V. & KARASU, T. B. (1986). Combined psychotherapy and pharmacotherapy for depression : A systematic analysis of the evidence. Archives of General Psychiatry, 43, 471-479.
	RUSH, A.J. (1986). Pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy. In L.R. Derogatis (Ed.), Clinical Psychopharmacology (pp. 46-67). Menlo Park, CA : Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.	BOND A.J., WINGROVE J., CURRAN H.V. & LADER M.H. (2002). Treatment of generalised anxiety disorder with a short course of psychological therapy, combined with buspirone or placebo. Journal of affective disorders, 72 (3), 267-271.
	FSIHER, W.W., PIAZZA, C.C. & PAGE, T. (1989). Assessing independent and interactional effects of behavioral and pharmacological interventions for a client with dual diagnosis. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 20, 241-250.	GREENBERG, R.P. & GOLDMAN, E.D. (2009). Antidepressants, psychotherapy or their combination : Weighing options for depression treatments. Journal of Contemporary Psychotherapy, 39 (2), 83-91.
	RUSH, A.J. (1989).The therapeutic alliance in short-term cognitive-behaviour therapy. In W. Dryden, & P. Trower (Eds.), Cognitive Psychotherapy : Stasis & change (pp. 59-72). London : Cassell Educational Ltd.	WATANABE, N., CHURCHILL, R. & FURUKAWA, T.A. (2007). Combination of psychotherapy and benzodiazepines versus either therapy alone for panic disorder : A systematic review. BMC Psychiatry, 7, 18.

Thérapie comportementale : Terme générique qui, par opposition aux thérapies verbales, désigne les thérapies qui insistent davantage sur les changements de comportements du client/patient/malade (mais non exclusivement) que sur les modifications de la personnalité (humaniste, psychanalyse, etc.). De fait, le terme renvoie à l'effet thérapeutique escompté (le changement de comportement), et non à l'explication sous-jacente. En ce sens, le mot englobe aussi bien les thérapies béhavioristes que les thérapies cognitivo-béhaviorale. = thérapie béhaviorale. /thérapie verbale. ( ): Thérapie béhavioriale, thérapie comportementale et cognitive. Behavioral therapy.

	BEAUDRY, M. et BOISVERT, J.-M. (1980). La thérapie behaviorale : courants actuels et perspective d’avenir. Revue de Modification du Comportement, 10, 113-130.
	COTTRAUX, J. (1979). Les thérapies comportementales. Paris : Masson.
	FONTAINE, O., COTTRAUX, J. et LADOUCEUR, R. (1984). Cliniques de thérapie comportementale. Montréal : Éditions.
	VAN RILLAER, J. (1995). Les thérapies comportementales. Bernet-Danilo/Essentialis.
	PLAUD, J.J. & EIFERT, G.H. (Eds.) (1998). Behavior theory to behavior therapy. Boston, MA : Allyn & Bacon.
	O´DONOHUE, W.T., HENDERSON, D.A., HAYES, S.C., FISHER, J.E. & HAYES, L.J. (2001). A History of the behavioral therapies : Founders´ Person Histories. Reno, NV : Context Press.
	ATTWOOD, T. (2003). Frameworks for behavioral interventions. Child & Adolescent Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 12 (1), 65-86.
	GAUDIANO, B.A. (2008). Review: Individual behavioural therapy reduces symptoms of depression. Evidence-Based Mental Health, 11, 108.

Thérapie comportementale et cognitive : Ensemble de thérapies et de techniques qui emprunte à la fois au béhaviorisme et au cognitivisme. Les fondements de ces thérapeutes se rapprochent souvent plus du cognitivisme que du béhaviorisme. L'objectif est de modifier le comportement et les pensées (cognition). = thérapie cognitivo-béhaviorale, thérapie béhavioriste-cognitiviste, thérapie cognitivo-béhaviorale, thérapie cognitivo-comportementale. ( ): autorenforcement, carnet thérapeutique, conditionnement opérant, conditionnement privé, contrat béhavioral, désensiblisation systématique, façonnement, thérapie par aversion, thérapie par immersion, thérapie par exposition. Cognitive-behavior modification, cognitive-behavior therapy (CBT).

	MAHONEY, M.J. (1974). Cognition and behavior modification. Cambridge, MA : Ballinger.	ROTHBAUM, B.O., MEADOWS, E.A., RESICK, P. & FOY, D.W. (2000). Cognitive-behavioral therapy. In B. Foa, T.M. Keane & M.J. Friedman(ds.), Effective treatments for PTSD : Practice guidelines from the International Society for Traumatic Stress Studies (pp. 60-83). New York & London : Guilford Press.
	MEICHENBAUM, D.H. (1976). A cognitive behavior approach to assessment. In M. Hersen, A.S. Bellack, (Eds), Behavioral assessment : A practical handbook (pp. 143-171). New York : Pergamon.	ZELIKOVSKY, N., RODRIGUE, J.R., GIDYZC, C.A. & DAVIS, M.A. (2000). Cognitive behavioral and behavioral interventions to help children cope during voiding cystourethogram. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 25, 535-543.
	MEICHENBAUM, D.H. (1977). Cognitive-behavior modification : An integrative approach. New York : Plenum Press.	LEICHSENRING, F. (2001). Comparative effects of short- term psychodynamic psychotherapy and cognitive- behavioral therapy in depression : A meta-analytic approach. Clinical Psychology Review, 21, 401-419.
	MAHONEY, M.J. & KAZDIN, A.E. (1979). Cognitive behavior modification: Misconceptions and premature evacuation. Psychological Bulletin, 86, 1044-9	DOBSON, K.S. (Ed.) (2001). Handbook of cognitive-behavioral therapies. New York : The Guilford Press.
	EYSENK, H.J. (1987) What does “cognitive” add to behavior therapy? Southern Psychology, 3 (2), 5-11	McCLANAHAN, T.M. & ANTONUCCIO, D.O. (2002). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of panic attacks. Clinical Case Studies, 1, 211-223.
	DOBSON, K.S. (Ed.) (1988). Handbook of cognitive-behavioral therapies. New York : The Guilford Press.	NEWMAN, M.G., CASTONGUAY, L.G. & BORKOVEC, T.D. (2002). Integrating cognitive behavioral and interpersonal/emotional processing treatments for generalized anxiety disorder : Preliminary outcome findings. Santa Barbara, CA : Symposium presentation at the annual meeting of the Society for Psychotherapy Research.
	ZINBARG, R.E., BARLOW, D.H., BROWN, T.A. & HERTZ, R.M. (1992). Cognitive-behavioral approaches to the nature and treatment of anxiety disorders. Annual Review of Psychology, 43, 235-267	TSAO, J.C., MYSKOWSKI, J.L. & ZUCKER, B.G. (2002). Effects of cognitive-behavioral therapy for panic disorder on comorbid conditions: Replication and extension. Behavior Therapy, 33 (4), 493-509.
	DOBSON, K.S. & SHAW, B.F. (1988). The use of treatment manuals in cognitive therapy : Experience and issues. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 56, 673-680.	O’DONOHUE, W., FISHER, J.E. & HAYES, S.C. (Eds.) (2003). Cognitive behavior therapy : Applying empirically supported techniques in your practice. Hoboken, NJ : John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
	MILLER, I.W., NORMAN, W.H., KEITNER, G.I., BISHOP, S.B. & DOW, M.G. (1989). Cognitive- behavioral treatment of depressed inpatients. Behavior Therapy, 20, 25-47.	GOLDFRIED, M.R. (2003). Cognitive-behavior therapy : Reflections on the evolution of a therapeutic orientation. Cognitivie behavior therapy & research, 27 (1), 53-69.
	MOYER, A. & HAAR, M.D. (1990). The efficacy of cognitive-behavior therapy and writing process training for alleviating writing anxiety. Cognitive Therapy & Research, 14, 515-528.	MARTELL C.R., SAFREN, S.A. & PRINCE, S.E. (2004). Cognitive-behavioral therapies with lesbian, gay, and bisexual clients. New York : Guilford.
	ANTONI, M.H., BAGGETT, L., IRONSON, G., LAPIERRE, A., AUGUST, S., LIMAS, N., CHNEIDERMAN, N. & LETCHER, M.A. (1991). Cognitive-behavioral stress management intervention buffers distress responses and immunologic changes following notification of HIV-1 seropositivity. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 59, 906-915.	ADDIS, M.E. HATGIS, C., KRASNOW, A.D., JACOB, K., BOURNE, L. & MANSFIELD, A. (2004). Effectiveness of cognitive-behavioral treatment for panic disorder versus treatment as usual in a managed care setting. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 72, 625- 635.
	DURLAK, J.A., FUHRMAN, T. & LAMPMAN, C. (1991). Effectiveness of cognitive-behavior therapy for maladapting children : A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin, 110 (2), 204-214.	NEZU, A., NEZU, C.M. & LOMBARDO, E. (2004). Cognitive-behavioral case formulation and treatment design : A problem-solving approach. Springer Publishing Company.
	LUNDH, L.G. (1993). The role of behaviour and cognition in psychotherapy. Towards an integration. Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy, 22, 3-30.
	COTTRAUX, J. (1995). Les thérapies comportementales et cognitives. Paris : Masson.	GAUDIANO, B.A. (2006). Review : Cognitive behavioural therapy is an effective treatment for depression, panic disorder and generalized anxiety disorder, but may be less effective in severe cases. Evidence-Based Mental Health, 9, 80.
	JACOBSON, N.S., DOBSON, K.S., TRUAX, P.A., ADDIS, M.E., KOERNER, K., GOLLAN, J.K., GORTNER, E. & PRINCE, S.E. (1996). A component analysis of cognitive-behavioral treatment for depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 64, 295-304.	ADDIS, M.E. HATGIS, C., CARDEMIL, E., JACOB, K., KRASNOW, A.D. & MANSFIELD, A. (2006). Effectiveness of cognitive behavioral treatment for panic disorder versus treatment as usual in a managed care setting: Two year follow-up. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 74 (2), 377-385.
	TAYLOR, S. (1996). Meta-analysis of cognitive-behavioral treatments for social phobia. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 27 (1), 1-9.	SOFRONOFF, K., ATTWOOD, T., HINTON, S. & LEVIN, I. (2007). A randomized controlled trial of a cognitive behavioural intervention for anger management in children diagnosed with Asperger syndrome. Journal of Autism & Developmental Disorders, 37 (7), 1203-1214.
	DOBSON, K.S. & CRAIG, K.D. (Eds.) (1996). Advances in cognitive-behavioral therapy. Thousand Oaks, CA : Sage Publications.	CHORPITA, B.F. (2007). Modular cognitive-behavioral therapy for childhood anxiety disorders. New York : Guilford.
	ADDIS, M.E. & JACOBSON, N.S. (1996). Reason-giving and the process and outcome of cognitive-behavioral psychotherapies. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 64, 1417-1424.	KRIJN, M, EMMELKAMP, P.M., OLAFSONN, R.P., BOUWMAN, M. VAN GERWEN, L.J., SPINHOVEN, P., SCHUEMIE, M.J. & VAN DER MAST, C.A. (2007). Fear of flying treatment methods : virtual reality exposure vs. cognitive behavioral therapy. Aviat Space Environ Med., 7 (2), 121-128.
	NELSON, H. (1997). Cognitive behavioural therapy with schizophrenia : A practice manual. Cheltenham : Nelson Thornes.	PIERSON, H. & HAYES, S.C. (2007). Using acceptance and commitment therapy to empower the therapeutic relationship. Dans P. Gilbert & R. Leahy (Eds.), The therapeutic relationship in cognitive behavior therapy (pp. 205-228). London : Routledge.
	GORTNER, E.T., GOLLAN, J.K., DOBSON, K.S. & JACOBSON, N.S. (1998). Cognitive-behavioral treatment for depression : relapse prevention. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 66, (2), 377-384.	O'CONNOR, K., STIP, E., PÉLISSIER, M.-C. AARDEMA, F., GUAY, S., GAUDETTE, G., VAN HAASTER, I., ROBILLARD, S., GRENIER, S., CAREAU, Y., DOUCET, P. & LEBLANC, V. (2007). Treating delusional disorder : A comparison of cognitive-behavioural therapy and attention placebo control. The Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 52, 182-190.
		GAUDIANO, B.A. (2008). Cognitive-behavioural therapies : Achievements and challenges. Evidence-Based Mental Health, 11, 5–7.
	REINECKE, M.A., RYAN, N.E. & DUBOIS, D.L. (1998). Cognitive-behavioral therapy of depression and depressive symptoms during adolescence : a review and meta-analysis. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 37 (1), 26-34.	RATHOOD, S., KINGDON, D., WEIDEN, P. & TURKINGTON, D. (2008). Cognitive-behavioral therapy for medication- resistant schizophrenia : A review. Journal of Psychiatric Practice, 14, 22-33.
	TSAO, J.C., LEWIN, M.R., & CRASKE, M.G. (1998) The effects of cognitive-behavior therapy for panic disorders on comorbid conditions. Journal of Anxiety Disorders, 12 (4), 357-371.	RACHMAN, S. (2009). Psychological treatment of anxiety : The evolution of behavior therapy and cognitive behavior therapy. Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 5, 97-119.
		GAUDIANO, B.A. (2009). Öst's (2008). Methodological comparison of clinical trials of acceptance and commitment therapy versus cognitive behavior therapy : Matching apples with oranges ? Behaviour Research & Therapy, 47 (12), 1066-1070. [LIRE]
	CLARKE, G.N., RHODE, P., LEWINSOHN, P.M., HOPS, H. & SEELY, J.R. (1999). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of adolescent depression : Efficacy of acute group treatment & booster sessions. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 38, 272-279.	DIONNE, F. (2009). Nouvelles avenues en thérapie comportementale et cognitive. Psychologie Québec, 26 (6), 20-24.
	TANG, T.Z. & DERUBEIS, R.J. (1999). Sudden gains and critical sessions in cognitive-behavioral therapy for depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 67, 894-904.	DIONNE, F. et NEVEU, C. (2010). La troisième génération de thérapie comportementale et cognitive. Revue Québécoise de Psychologie, 31 (3), 15-36.
		NEUDECK, P.. SCOEPF, D. & PENBERTHY, J.K. 9 2010). Learning theory aspects of the interpersonal discrimination exercise in cognitive behavioral analysis system of psychotherapy. Behavior Theapist, 33 (3), 58-63. [PDF]
		KOHLENBERG, R.J., KANTER J., TSAI, M. & WEEKS, C.E. (2010). FAP and cognitive behavior therapy. In J. Kanter, M. Tsai & R.J. Kohlenberg (Eds.), The practice of functional analytic psychotherapy. New York : Springer.
	BARLOW, D.H., GORMAN, J.M., SHEAR, M.K. & WOODS, S.W. (2000).Cognitive-behavioral therapy, imipramine, or their combination for panic disorder : A randomized controlled trial. Journal of American Medical Association, 283 (19), 2529-2536.	WATZKE, B., RÜDDEL, H., HOCH, U. GROTHGAR, B. & SCHULZ, H. (2010). Effectiveness of systematic treatment selection for psychodynamic and cognitive-behavioural therapy : randomised controlled trial in routine mental healthcare. The British Journal of Psychiatry, 197, 96-105.
		McCARTHY, B.W. (2010). Integrating sexual interventions and psychosexual skill exercises into cognitive- behavioral therapy. Behavior Theapist, 33 (3), 54-57. [PDF]

Thérapie contextuelle : Contextual therapy.

	ZETTLE, R.D. & RAINS, J. C. (1989). Group cognitive and contextual therapies in treatment of depression. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 45, 438-445.

Thérapie de couple : = théorie conjugale. Couple therapy, marital therapy.

	GOLBERG, M. (1974). The uses of dreams in conjoint marital therapy. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 1 (1), 75-81.	JACOBSON, N.S. & ADDIS, M.E. (1993). Research on couples and couple therapy what do we know? Where are we going? Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 61 (1), 85-93. [PDF]
	WEISS, R.L. (1975). Contracts, cognition, and change : A behavioral approach to marriage therapy. The Counseling Psychologist, 5 (3), 15-26.	DUNN, R.L. & SCHWEBEL, A.I. (1995). Meta-analytic review of marital therapy outcome research. Journal of Family Psychology, 9 (1), 58-68.
	JACOBSON, N.S. & MARGOLIN, G. (1979). Marital therapy : Strategies based on social learning and behavior exchange principles. New York : Brunner/Mazel.	PINSOF, W.M., WYNNE, L.C. & HAMBRIGHT, A.B. (1996). The outcomes of couple and family therapy : Findings conclusions, and recommendations. Psychotherapy : Theory, Research, Practice, Training, 33, 321-331.
	VANSTEENWEGEN, A. (1981). Apprendre à négocier dans un couple : entraînement à la dispute constructive. Thérapie Familiale, 2, 339-349.	JACOBOSON, N.S. & CHRISTENSEN, A. (1996). Acceptance and change in couple therapy : A therapist's guide for transforming relationships. New York : Norton.
	JACOBSON, N.S., FOLLETTE, W.C., REVENSTORF, D., BAUCOM, D.H., HALWEG, K. & MARGOLIN, G. (1984). Variability in outcome and clinical significance of behavioral marital therapy : A reanalysis of outcome data. Journal of Clinical & Consulting Psychology, 52, 497-504.	DAIUTO, A.D., BAUCOM, DH, EPSTEIN, N., DUTTON, S.S. (1998). The application of behavioral couples therapy to the assessment and treatment of agoraphobia : implications of empirical research. Clinical Psychology Review, 18 (6), 663-87.
	WEISS, R.L. (1984). Cognitive and strategic interventions in behavioral marital therapy. In K. Hahlweg & N.S. Jacobson (Eds.), Marital interaction : Analysis and modification. New York : Guilford.	O’LEARY, K.D., HEYMAN, R. & JONGSMMA, A. (1998). Couples therapy treatment planner. NY : Wiley.
	MARGOLIN, G. (1987). Marital therapy : A cognitive-behavioral affective approach. Dans N.S .Jacobson (Éd.), Psychotherapy in clinical practice (pp. 232-285). New York : Guilford.	VANSTEENWEGEN, A. (1998). Helpfulness of therapist verbal interventions in couple therapy. Sexual & Marital Therapy, 1, 15-20.
		CORODOVA, J., JACOBSON, N.S. & CHRISTENSEN, A. (1998). Acceptance versus change interventions in behavioral couple therapy : Impact on couples’ in-session communication. Journal of Marital and Family Therapy, 24 (4), 437-455. [PDF]
	DEWEY, D. & HUNSLEY, J. (1990). The effects of marital adjustment and spouse involvement on the behavioral treatment of agoraphobia : A meta-analysis review. Anxiety Research, 2, 69-83.	BUTLER M.H. & WAMPLER, K.S. (1999). A meta-analytic update of research on the couple communication program. The American Journal of Family Therapy, 27, 223-237.
	JACOBSON, N.S., DOBSON, K.S., FRUZETTI, A., SCHMALING, K.B. & SALUSKY, S. (1991). Social-learning based marital therapy as a treatment for depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 59, 547-5 53.	JACOBSON, N.S., CHRISTENSEN, A., PRINCE, S.E., CORODOVA, J. & ELDRIDGE, K. (2000). Integrative behavioral couple therapy : An acceptance-based, promising new treatment for couple discord. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 68, 351-355. [PDF]
		CÔTÉ, K. et WRIGHT, J., (2003). Caractéristiques, évaluation et traitement des couples dont l’un des conjoints souffre de dépression. Psychologie Canadienne, 44 (4), 382-393.
	ADDIS, M.E. & JACOBSON, N.S. (1991). Integration of cognitive therapy and behavioral marital therapy for depression. Journal of Psychotherapy Integration, 4, 249-264.	GARFIELD, R. (2004). The therapeutic alliance in couples therapy : Clinical considerations. Family Process, 43, 457-465.
		WRIGHT, J., LUSSIER, Y. & SABOURIN, S. (2008). Manuel clinique des psychothérapies de couple. Québec : PUQ.

Thérapie de groupe : Ensemble des thérapies qui utilise le groupe comme soutien ou catalyseur du changement thérapeutique. Le groupe est habituellement composé d'un praticien professionnel de la santé mentale (psychologue, psychiatre, psychanalyste, etc) et de malades/patients/clients. Group therapy, group psychotherapy, group treatment.

	HOBBS, N. (1951). Group-centered psychotherapy. In C.R. Rogers (Ed.), Client-centered therap. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin Co.	BIRK, L. (1974). Group psychotherapy for men who are homosexual. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 1 (1), 29-52.
	KELMAN, H.C. & LERNER, H.H. (1952). Group therapy, group work and adult education : The need for clarification. Journal of Social Issues, 8 (2), 3-10.	ZILBERGELD, B. (1975). Group treatment of sexual dysfunction in men without partner. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 1 (1), 204-214.
	GLATZER, H.T. (1953). Handling transference resistance in group therapy. Psychoanalytic Review, 40, 36-43.	YALOM, I.D. (1975/2005). The theory and practice of group psychotherapy. New York : Basic Books.
	CABEEN, C.W. & COLEMAN, J.C. (1961). Group therapy with sex offenders : Description and evaluation of a group therapy program in an institutional setting. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 17, 122-129.	YALOM, I.D. & VINOGRADOV, S. (1989). Concise guide to group psychotherapy. Washington, D.C. : American Psychiatric Press, Inc.
	KELMAN, H.C. (1963). The role of the group in the induction of therapeutic change. International Journal of Group Psychotherapy, 13, 399-432.	FALS-STEWART, W., MARKS, A.P. & SCHAFER, J. (1993). Comparison of behavioral group therapy and individual behavior therapy in treating OCD. Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases, 181, 189-193.
	MORENO, J.L. (1965/1987). Psychothérapie de groupe et psychodrame. Introduction théorique et clinique à la socianalyse. Paris : Presses Universitaires de France.	MORRISON, N. (2001). Group cognitive therapy : Treatment of choice or sub-optimal option? Behavioural & Cognitive Psychotherapy, 29, 311-332.
	ROETHER H.A., JOSEPH J. & PETERS, J.J. (1972). Cohesiveness and hostility in group psychotherapy. American Journal of Psychiatry 128, 1014-1017.	STANGIER, U., HEIDENRICH, T., PEITZ, M., LAUERBACH, W. & CLARK, D.M. (2003). Cognitive therapy for social phobia : Individual versus group treatment. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 41, 991-1007.
	CASTELL, R. & YALOM, I. (1972). Institutional group therapy. In H.LP. Resnick & M.F. Wolfgang (Eds.), Sexual behavior : Social, clinical, and legal aspects (pp. 305-330). Boston : Little, Brown.	NORTON, P.J. & HOPE, D.A. (2005). Preliminary evaluation of a broad-spectrum cognitive-behavioral group therapy for anxiety. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 36 (2), 79-97.
		BARROWCLOGH, C., HADDOCK, G., LOBBAN, F., JONES, S., SIDDLE, R., ROBERTS, C. & GREGG, L. (2006). Group cognitive behaviour therapy for schizophrenia : A randomised control trial. British Journal of Psychiatry, 189, 527-532.

Thérapie de l'acceptation et de l'engagement : Thérapie d’inspiration cognitivo-béhaviorale proposée par Hayes. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, ACT.

	HAYES, S.C., STROSHAL. K.D. & WILSON, K.G. (1999). Acceptance and commitment therapy : An experiential approach to behavior change. New-York : Guilford Press.	EIFERT, G.H & FORSYTH, J.P. (2005). Acceptance and Commitment Therapy for anxiety disorders : A practitioner's treatment guide to using mindfulness, acceptance, and value-guide behavior change strategies. Oakland CA : New Harbinger.
	WILSON, K.G., HAYES, S.C. & BYRD, M.R. (2000). Exploring compatibilities between acceptance and commitment therapy and 12-step treatment for substance abuse. Journal of Rational-Emotive & Cognitive-Behavior, 8, (4), 209-234. [PDF]
	HAYES, S.C. (2002). Buddhism and acceptance and commitment therapy. Cognitive & Behavioral Practice, 9, 58-66.	ZETTLE, R.D. (2005). The evolution of a contextual approach to therapy : from Comprenhensive Distancing to ACT. International Journal of Behavioral & Consultation Therapy, 2, 77-89.
	BACH, P. & HAYES, S.C. (2002). The use of acceptance and commitment therapy to prevent the rehospitalization of psychotic patients : A randomized controlled trial. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 70 (5), 1129-1139.	GAUDIANO, B.A. & HERBERT, J.D. (2006). Acute treatment of inpatients with psychotic symptoms using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy : Pilot results. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 44, 415–437.
	ZETTLE, R.D. (2003). Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) versus systematic desensitization in treatment of mathematic anxiety. The Psychological Record, 53, 197-215.	HARRIS, R. (2006). Embracing your demons : an overview of acceptance and commitment therapy. Psychotherapy in Australia, 12 (4), 2-8.
	HAYES, S.C., STROSAHL, K. & WILSON, K.G. (2003). Acceptance and commitment therapy : an experiential approach to behavior change. New York : Guilford Press.	HAYES, S.C., LUOMA, J., BOND, F., MASUDA, A. & LILLIS J. (2006). Acceptance and commitment therapy : Model, processes, and outcomes. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 44 (1), 1-25
	HAYES, S.C. (2004). Acceptance and commitment therapy, relational frame theory, and the third wave of behavior therapy. Behavior Therapy, 35, 639-665.	LAPPALAINEN, R., LEHTONEN, T., SKARP, E., TAUBERT, E., OJANEN, M. & HAYES, S.C. (2007). The impact of CBT and ACT models using psychology trainee therapists : A preliminary controlled effectiveness trial. Behavior Modification, 31, 488-511.
	DAHL, J., WILSON, K.G. & NILSSON, A (2004). Evaluation of an ACT-based intervention for persons at risk for long-term disability resulting from pain and stress symptoms : A preliminary randomized trial. Behavior Therapy, 35, 785-801 .	ARCH, J. & CRASKE, M. (2008). Acceptance and commitment therapy and cognitive behavioral therapy for anxiety disorders : different treatments, similar mechanisms ? Clinical Psychology : Science & Practice, 15, 263-279.
	HAYES, S. C., MASUDA, A , BISSETT, R., LUOMA, J. & GUERRERO, L.F. (2004). DBT, FAP, and ACT : How empirically oriented are the new behavior therapy technologies? Behavior Therapy, 35, 35-54.	LUNDGREN, T., DAHL, J. & HAYES, S C. (2008). Evaluation of mediators of change in the treatment of epilepsy with Acceptance and Commitment Therapy. Journal of Behavior Medicine, 31 (3), 225-235.
		HOFFMANN, S.G. & ASMUNDSON, G.J. (2008). Acceptance and mindfulness-based therapy : New wave or old hat? Clinical Psychology Review, 28, 1-16.
	HAYES, S.C. & STROSHAL, K.D. (2004). A practical guide to acceptance and commitment therapy. Springer.	ZETTLE, R.D., BARNER, S.L. & GIRD, S. (2009). ACT with depression : The role of forgiving. In J.T. Blackledge, J. Ciarrochi, & F. Deane (Eds.), Acceptance and commitment therapy : Current directions (pp. 151- 173). Bowen Hills QLD: Australian Academic Press. [PDF]
		PETERSEN, C.L. & ZETTLE, R.D. (2009). Treating inpatients with comorbid depression and alcohol use disorders: a comparison of acceptance and commitment therapy versus treatment as usual. The Psychological Record, 2009, 59, 521–536. [PDF]
		NEVEU, C. & DIONNE, F. (2009). La thérapie d’acceptation et d’engagement : une approche novatrice. Psychologie Québec, 26 (6), 29-31.
	HAYES, S.C. & SMITH, S. (2005). Get out of your mind and into your life : The new acceptance and commitment therapy. New Harbinger Publications.	ROEMER, L. & ORSILO, S.M. (2009). Mindfulness and acceptance-based behavioral therapies in practice. New York : The Guilford Press.
		GAUDIANO, B.A. (2009). Öst's (2008). Methodological comparison of clinical trials of acceptance and commitment therapy versus cognitive behavior therapy : Matching apples with oranges? Behaviour Research & Therapy, 47 (12), 1066–1070.
	ORSILLO, S.M. & BATTEN, S.V. (2005). ACT in the treatment of PTSD. Behavior Modification, 29, 95-130	RUIZ, F.J. (2010). A Review of acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) empirical evidence : Correlational, experimental psychopathology, component and outcome studies. International Journal of Psychology & Psychological Therapy, 10 (1), 125-162.
	ORSILLO, S.M., ROEMER, L. & HOLOWKA, D. (2005). Acceptance-based behavioral therapies for for anxiety : Using acceptance and mindfulness to enhance traditional cognitive-behavioral approaches. In S.M. Orsillo & L. Roemer (Eds.), Acceptance- and mindfulness-based approaches to anxiety : Conceptualization and treatment. New York : Springer.	NEVEU, C. & DIONNE, F. (2010). La thérapie d’acceptation et d’engagement. Revue Québécoise de Psychologie, 31 (3), 63-83.
		HAYES, S.C., ORSILLO, S.M. & ROEMER, L. (2010). Changes in proposed mechanisms of action in an acceptance-based behavior therapy for generalized anxiety disorder. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 48, 238-245.
		GAUDIANO, B.A. (2011). A review of acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) and recommendations for continued scientific advancement. The Scientific Review of Mental Health Practice, 8, 5-22.

Thérapie de l'activation comportementale : Behavioral activation therapy.

	JACOBSON, N.S., MARTELL, C.R. & DIMIDJIAN, S. (2001). Behavioral activation therapy for depression : Returning to contextual roots. Clinical Psychology : Science and Practice, 8 (3), 255-270. [PDF]	CULLEN, J.M., SPATES, C.R., AGOTO, S. & DORAN, N. (2006). Behavioral activation treatment for major depressive disorder : A pilot investigation. The Behavior Analyst Today, 7 (1), 151-165.
	MARTELL, C.R. & ADDIS, M.E. & JACOBSON, N.S. (2001). Depression in context : Strategies for guided action. New York : W.W. Norton & Co.	DIMIDJIAN, S., HOLLON, S.D., DOBSON, K.S., SCHMALING, K.B., KOHLENBERG, R.J., ADDIS, M.E., GALLOP, R., McGLINCHEY, J.B., MARKLEY, D.K,. GOLLAN, J.K., ATKINS, D.C., DUNNER, D.L. & JACOBSON, N.S. (2006). Randomized trial of behavioral activation, cognitive therapy, and antidepressant medication in the acute treatment of adults with major depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 74 (4), 658-670.
	ADDIS, M.E. & MARTELL, C.R. (2004). Overcoming depression one step at a time : The new behavioral activationapproach to getting your life back. New York : New Harbinger Press	SPATES, C.R., PAGOTO, S. & KALATA, A. (2006). A qualitative and quantitative review of behavioral activation treatment of major depressive disorder. The Behavior Analyst Today, 7 (4), 508-518.
	LEVITT, J.T., BROWN, T.A., ORSILLO, S.M. & BARLOW, D.H. (2004). The effects of acceptance versus suppression of emotion on subjective and psychophysiological response to carbon dioxide challenge in patients with panic disorder. Behavior Therapy, 35, 747-766.	PIERSON, H. & HAYES, S.C. (2007). Using acceptance and commitment therapy to empower the therapeutic relationship. Dans P. Gilbert & R. Leahy (Eds.), The therapeutic relationship in cognitive behavior therapy (pp. 205-228). London : Routledge.
	MARTELL, C.R., ADDIS, M.E. & DIMIDJIAN, S. (2004). Finding the action in behavioral activation : The search for empirically-supported interventions and mechanisms of change. In S. Hayes, M. Linehan & V. Folette (Eds.), Mindfulness Acceptance and Relationship: The New Behavior Therapies. (pp. 152-167). New York : Guilford.	DOBSON, K.S., HOLLON, S.D., DIMIDJIAN, S., SCHMALING, K.B., KOHLENBERG, R.J., GALLOP, R., RIZVI, J., GOLLAN, J.K., DUNNER, D.L. & JACOBSON, N.S. (2008). Randomized trial of behavioral activation, cognitive therapy, and antidepressant medication in the prevention of relapse and recurrence in major depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 76 (3), 468-477. [LIRE]
	KANTER, J.W. CALLAGHAN, G.M., LANDES, S.J., BUSCH, A.M. & BROWN, K.R. (2004). Behavior analytic conceptualization and treatment of depression : Traditional models and recent advances. The Behavior Analyst Today, 5, 255-274.	SYZDEK, M.R., ADDIS, M.E. & MARTELL, C.R. (2010). Working with emotion and emotion regulation in behavioral activation treatment for depression. In A. M. Kring & D.M. Sloan (Eds.), Emotion regulation and psychopathology : A transdiagnostic approach to etiology and treatment (pp. 405-426). New York : Guilford.
	JAKUPCAK, M., ROBERTS, L., MARTELL, CR., MULICK, P., MICHAEL, S., REED, R., BALSAM, K., YOSHIMOTO, D. & McALL, M. (2006). A pilot study of behavioral activation for veterans with post- traumatic stress disorder. Journal of Traumatic Stress, 19, 387-391.	gy : Science and Practice, 8 (3), 255-270. [PDF]

Thérapie du langage : Ensemble de thérapies visant à corriger les troubles du langages. Speech therapy, speech correction.

	TWITMEYER, E.B. & NATHANSON, Y.S. (1932). Correction of defective speech. Philadelphia, PA : P. Blakiston's Son and Co.
	STINCHFIELD, S. (1928). Speech pathology with methods in speech correction. Boston, Mass. : Expression Company.
	VAN RIPER, C. (1939/1981). Speech correction, principles and methods. New York : Prentice-Hall Inc.
	STINCHFIELD-HAWK, S. (1950). Speech therapy for the physically handicapped. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
	BACKUS, O. & BEASLEY, J. (1951). Speech therapy with children. NY: Houghton Mifflin.
	BARRY, H. (1961). The young aphasic child : Evaluation and training. Washington, D. C. : Volta Bureau.
	BLACK, M. (1966). The origins and status of speech therapy in the schools. ASHA, 419-425.
	STREMEL K. & WARYAS, C. (1974). A behavioral-psycholinguistic approach to language training. In L. McReynolds (Ed.), Developing systematic procedures for training children's language (Vol. 18, pp. 96-130). Washington, D. C. : American Speech and Hearing Association.
	DAVIS, G. & WILCOX, J. (1985). Adult aphasia rehabilitation : Applied pragmatics. NFER-Nelson : Windsor.

Thérapie électroconvulsive : Thérapie inventée par Duchenne, qui consiste à soumettre un patient, généralement affligé d'une dépression profonde, à une série de décharges électriques, délivrées dans la région du crâne. Bien qu'encore en usage, cette thérapie est controversée car son appui scientifique est très faible, voire inexistant. = sismothérapie, thérapie par électrochocs, électronarcose. Electrotherapy, ECT, shockwawe therapy.

	BRENGELMAN, J.C. (1959). The effect of repeated electroshocks on learning in depressives. Berlin : Springer.	BREGGIN, P.R. (1986). Neuropathology and cognitive dysfunction from ECT. Psychopharmacology Bulletin, 22, 476-479. [PDF]
	McGUIRE, R.J. & VALLANCE, M. (1964). Aversion therapy by electric shock : A simple technique. British Medical Journal, 2, 594-597.	BREGGIN, P.R. (1992). The return of ECT. Readings: A Journal of Reviews and Commentary in Mental Health, 3, 12-17. [PDF]
	VALENTINE, M., KEDDIE, H.M.G. & DUNNE, D. (1968). A comparison of techniques in electroconvulsive therapy. British Journa of Psychiatry, 114, 986-988.	ABRMAS, R. (1992). Electroconvulsive therapy. New York : Oxford University Press.
	BRUNSCHWIG, L, STRAIN, J. & BIDDER, T.G. (1971). Issues in the assessment of post-ECT memory changes. British Journal of Psychiatry, 119, 73-74.	MILLER, L.J. (1995). Use of electroconvulsive therapy during pregnancy. Obstetrical & Gynecological Survey, 50 (1), 10-11.
	COX, A. & HEATH, R.G. (1975). Neurotone therapy : a preliminary report of its effect of electrical activity of forebrain structures. Dis Nerv Sys, 36, 245-247.	O’LEARY, D.A. & LEE, A.S. (1996). Seven year prognosis in depression. Mortality and readmission risk in the Nottingham ECT cohort. British Journal of Psychiatry, 169, 423-429.
		SMITH, R.B. (1999). Cranial electrotherapy stimulation in the treatment of stress related cognitive dysfunction with an eighteen month follow-up. Journal of Cognitive Rehabilitation, 17 (6), 14-18.
	LICHSTEIN, K.L. & SCHREIBMAN, L. (1976). Employing electric shock with autistic children : A review of side effects. Journal of Autism & Childhood Schizophrenia, 6, 163-173.	FRIEDMAN, S.H., FESTINGER, D.F., NEZU, C.M., McGUFFIN, P.W. & NEZU, A.M. (1999). Group therapy for mentally-retarded sex offenders : A behavioral approach. The behavior Therapist, 22, 32-33.
	BREGGIN, P.R. (1979). Electroshock : its brain disabling effect. New York : Springler.	SCHROEDER, M.J. & BARR, R.E. (2001). Quantitative analysis of electroencephalogram during cranial electrotherapy stimulation. Clinical Neurophysiology, 112, 2075-2083.
	DANIEL, W.F., CROVITZ, H.F, WEINER, R.D. & ROGERS, H.F. (1982). The effects of ECT modifications on autobiographical and verbal memory. Biological Psychiatry, 17, 919-924.	KIRSCH, D.L. (2002). The science behind cranial electrotherapy stimulation. Edmonton, Alberta, Medical Scope Publishing.
		GILULA, M.F. & KIRSH, D.L. (2005). Cranial electrotherapy stimulation review : A safer alternative to psychopharmaceuticals in the treatment of depression. Journal of Neurotherapy, Vol. 9 (2), 7-26. [PDF]
	BREGGIN, P.R. (1984). Electroshock therapy and brain damage : the acute organic brain syndrome as treatment. Behavior & Brain Sciences, 7, 24-25. [PDF]	FITZGERALD, P.B., BENITEZ, J., DE CASTELLA, DASKALALIS, J. & KULKARNI, J. (2006). Randomized, controlled trial of sequential bilateral repetitive transcranial magnetic stimulation for treatment-resistant depression. American Journal of Psychiatry, 163, 88-94.
	BABIGAN, H.M., & GUTTMACHER, L.B. (1984). Epidemiological considerations in electroconvulsive therapy. Archives of General Psychiatry, 41, 246-253	SHORTER, E. & HEALY, E. (2007). Shock therapy The history of electroconvulsive treatment in mental illness. New Brunswick : Rutgers University Press.
		BREGGIN, P.R (2010) The FDA should test the safety of ECT machines. International Journal of Risk & Safety in Medicine, 22, 89-92. [PDF]

Thérapie émotivo-rationelle : Rational psychotherapy, Rational emotive behavior therapy, Rational Emotive Therapy, RET.

	ELLIS, A. (1957). How to live with a neurotic. New York : Crown Publishers.
	ELLIS, A. (1958). Rational psychotherapy. The Journal of General Psychology, 59, 35-49.
	ELLIS, A. (1972). Rational-emotive psychotherapy : A comprehensive approach to therapy. In G.D. Goldman & M.S. Milman (Eds.), Innovations in psychotherapy (pp. 147-163). Springfield : Charles C. Thomas.
	ELLIS, A. (1972). Philosophy and rational-emotive therapy. Counseling and Values, 16 (3), 158-161.
	ELLIS, A. (1980). Rational-emotive therapy and cognitive behavior therapy : Similarities and differences. Cognitive Therapy & Research, 4, 325-340.
	ELLIS, A. (1994). Reason and emotion in psychotherapy, Revised and updated. Secaucus, NJ : Carol.
	ELLIS, A. (2004). Why rational emotive behavior therapy is the most comprehensive and effective form of behavior therapy. Journal of Rational-Emotive & Cognitive-Behavior Therapy, 22 (2), 85-92.
	ELLIS, A. (2004). The road to tolerance : The philosophy of rational emotive behavior therapy. Prometheus Books.

Thérapie existentielle : Existential therapy.

	YALOM, I.D. (1980). Existential psychotherapy. Basic Books.	DEURZEN, E. VAN & KENWARD, R. (2002). Dictionary of existential psychotherapy and counseling. London : Sage Publications.
	MILTON, M. (1994). The case for existential therapy in HIV related psychotherapy. Counselling Psychology Quarterly, 7 (4), 367-374.	COOPER, M. (2003). Existential therapies. Sage.
	MAY, R. (1995). The discovery of being : Writings in existential psychology. W.W. Norton & Company.	SCHNEIDER, K.J. (2008). Existential-integrative psychotherapy : Guideposts to the core of practice. New York : Routledge.
	MILTON, M. (1997). An Existential Approach to HIV Related Psychotherapy. Journal of the Society for Existential Analysis, 8 (1), 115-129.	SCHNEIDER, K.J. & KRUG, O.T. (2010). Existential-humanistic therapy. Washington, DC : American Psychological Association Press.
	DEURZEN, E. VAN (2002). Existential counselling and psychotherapy in practice. London : Sage Publications.	CORBETTT, L. & MILTON, M. (2011). Existential therapy : A useful approach to trauma? British Psychological Society Counselling Psychology Review, 26 (1), 66-78.

Thérapie fondée sur la pleine conscience : Mindfulness-based therapy.

	HICK, S.F. & BIEN, T. (2008). Mindfulness and the therapeutic relationship. New York : Guilford Press.
	Hofmann, S. G., Sawyer, A. T., Witt, A. A., & Oh, D. (2010). The effect of mindfulness-based therapy on anxiety and depression: A meta-analytic review. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 78, 169-183.

Thérapie gestalt : Voir Gestalt.

Thérapie familiale : Family therapy.

	SATIR, V. (1964/2003). Thérapie du couple et de la famille. Paris : Éditions Desclée de Brouwer.	SATIR, V., BANMEN, J., GERBER, J. & GOMORI, M. (1991). Satir model : Family therapy and beyond. Palo Alto, CA : Science and Behavior Books.
	VANSTEENWEGEN, A. (1976). L’importance de l’attitude empirique en thérapie familiale et sexuelle : résultats de thérapies de couples et de sexothérapies. In Recherche et formation en sexologie (p. 26-34). Institut Interfacultaire des Sciences Familiales et Sexologiques. Université de Louvain.	MADANESM, C. (1991). Stratégies en thérapie familiale. Éditions ESF.
	WITKIN, M.H. (1977). Sex therapy as an aid to marital and family therapy. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 3 (1), 19-30.	MUESER, K.T., GINGERICH, S.L. & ROSENTHAL, C.K. (1993). Educational family therapy for schizophrenia : a new treatment model for clinical service and research. Schizophrenia Research, 13, 99-108.
	ELLIS, A. (1978). A rational-emotive approach to family therapy. Part I : Cognitive therapy. Rational Living, 13 (2), 15-19.	SHADISH, W.R., RAGSDALE, K., GLASER, R.R. & MONTGOMERY, L.M. (1995). The efficacy and effectiveness of marital and family therapy : A perspective from meta-analysis. Journal of Marital and Family Therapy, 21, 345-360.
	WOODWARD, C., SANTA-BARBARA, J., LEVIN, S. & EPSTEIN, N. (1978). Aspects of consumer satisfaction with brief family therapy. Family Process, 17, 399-407.	PINSOF, W.M., WYNNE, L.C. & HAMBRIGHT, A.B. (1996). The outcomes of couple and family therapy : Findings conclusions, and recommendations. Psychotherapy : Theory, Research, Practice, Training, 33, 321-331.
	SATIR, V. (1983). Conjoint family therapy. Palo Alto, CA : Science and Behavior Books.	GOLDSTEIN, M.J. & MIKLOWITZ, D.J. (1997). Bipolar disorder : A family focused treatment approach. NY : Guildford Press.
	MIKLOWITZ, D.J. & GOLDSTEIN, M.J. (1990). Behavioral family treatment for patients with bipolar affective disorder. Behavior Modification, 14, 457-489.	ALBERNKE, K. et ALBERNKE, T. (2000). Les therapies familiales systémiques. Paris : Masson.
		BEELS, C.C. (2002). Notes for a cultural history of family therapy. Family Process, 41, 67-82.
	CEDAR, B. & LEVANT, R.F. (1990). A meta-analysis of the effects of parent effectiveness training. The American Journal of Family Therapy, 18 (4), 373-384.	REA, M.M., TOMPSON, M.C., MIKLOWITZ, D.J., GOLDSTEIN, M.J., HWANG, S. & MINTZ, J. (2003). Family-focused treatment versus individual treatment for bipolar disorder : Results of a randomized clinical trial. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 71, 482-492.
		POTE, H., STRATTON, P., COTTRELL, D., SHAPIRO, D.A. & BOSTON, P. (2003). Systemic family therapy can be manualised: Research process and findings. Journal of Family Therapy, 25, 236-262.
		NICHOLS, M.P., & SCHWARTZ, R.C. (2004). Family therapy : Concepts and methods. Boston : Allyn & Bacon.

Thérapie fondée sur la réalité virtuelle : Voir Cyberpsychologie.

Thérapie humaniste : Ensemble de techniques thérapeutiques non-directives qui s'inspire de la perspective humaniste. Humanistic therapy.

	CAIN, D.J. & SEEMAN, J. (Eds.). (2002). Humanistic psychotherapies : Handbook of research and practice. Washington, DC : American Psychological Association.
	SCHNEIDER, K.J. & KRUG, O.T. (2010). Existential-humanistic therapy. Washington, DC : American Psychological Association Press.

Thérapie infantile : = Thérapie pour enfant. Child behavior therapy, child therapy.

	GELFAND, D.M. & HARTMANN, D.P. (1975). Child behavior analysis and therapy. New York : Pergamon Pres.
	CASEY, R.J. & BERMAN, J.S. (1985). The outcome of psychotherapy with children. Psychological Bulletin, 98 (2), 388-400.
	RUSSELL, R.L., GREENWALD, S. & SHIRK, S.R. (1991). Language change in child psychotherapy : A meta-analytic review. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 59 (6), 916-919.
	WEISZ, J.R., WEISS, B. & DONENBERG, G.R. (1992). The lab versus the clinic. Effects of child and adolescent psychotherapy. American Psychology, 47 (12), 1578-1585.
	WEISS, B. & WEISZ, J.R. (1995). Relative effectiveness of behavioral versus nonbehavioral child psychotherapy. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 63 (2), 317-320.
	WEISZ, J.R., WEISS, B., HAN, S.S., GRANGER, D.A. & MORTON, T. (1995). Effects of psychotherapy with children and adolescents revisited : a meta-analysis of treatment outcome studies. Psychological Bulletin, 117 (3), 450-468.
	WATSON, T.S. & GRESHAM, F.M. (Eds.) (1998). Handbook of child behavior therapy. Plenum Press.

Thérapie magnétique : Magnet Therapy.

	CARTER, R., HALL, T., ASPY, C.B. & MOLD, J. (2002). The effectiveness of magnet therapy for treatment of wrist pain attributed to carpal tunnel syndrome. The Journal of Family Practice, 51, 38-40.
	FINEGOLD, L. & FLAMM, B. (2006). Magnet therapy : Extraordinary claims, but no proved benefits. British Medical Journal, 332, 4.
	CEPEDA, M.S., CARR, D.B., SARQUIS, T., MIRANDA, N., GARCIA, R.J. & ZARATE, C. (2007). Static magnetic therapy does not decrease pain or opioid requirements : A randomized double-blind trial. Ambulatory Anesthesia, 104, 290-294.
	SCHIEVE, L. (2011). The effects of magnet therapy on short-term memory. Sentience, 5, 6-8. [PDF]

Thérapie médicamenteuse : Thérapie biochimique qui vise à soigner les maladies mentales et autres troubles psychologiques au moyen de médicament (de type psychotrope). Sur le plan théorique, la phamacothérapie repose soit sur une thèse forte, soit sur une thèse faible. 1) La thèse forte - développée et soutenue par l'industrie pharmaceutique, les médecins, les psychiatres et de nombreux psychologues - postule que les causes d'un grand nombre de problèmes psychologiques (dépression, psychose, hyperactivité, trouble obsessif-compulsif, etc.) résident sur le plan biologique en un déséquilibre biochimique du cerveau, programmé génétiquement ou développé par suite d'expériences pénibles ou traumatisantes (facteurs déclenchants qui mettent en évidence une prédisposition biologique, une fragilité, à développer une maladie mentale). Par conséquent, la pharmacothérapie consiste pour l'essentiel à prescrire des médicaments pour rétablir cet équilibre (accompagné parfois de psychothérapie de soutien). 2) La thèse faible, elle, soutient que le but des drogues n'est pas de s'attaquer aux sources du mal, mais plutôt d'atténuer la sévérité des symptômes afin de : 1) soulager le patient/client/malade; 2) lui permettre de suivre une psychothérapie qui, elle, s'attaquera aux véritables causes du problème (inconscient pour la psychanalyse, interaction avec le milieu social et physique pour les béhavioristes, raisonnement erroné ou pensées magiques pour les cognitivistes, etc.). Pour ces perspectives psychologiques, la pharmacothérapie commet une erreur en attribuant aux modifications biochimiques du cerveau un rôle causal ou central dans l'explication de la maladie mentale. Pour les tenants de cette thèse faible, ces modifications ou déséquilibres chimiques existent, sans nul doute, mais il s'agit d'abord et avant tout des conséquences ou des corrélats des causes réelles, et non des facteurs déterminants de la maladie. Pour cette raison, la pharmacothérapie serait moins efficace qu'on le pétend. Dans tous les cas, il faut déplorer le peu d'indépendance de la plupart des études/essais cliniques qui visent à évaluer l'efficacité de ces thérapies et la précipitation avac laquelle certains médecins/psychiatres prescrivent ces médicaments. Thérapie médicamenteuse, placebo et médicament. = pharmacothérapie, traitement pharmacologique. Drug therapy, chemical cure.

	WULBERT, M. & DRIES, R. (1977). The relative efficacy of methylphenidate (ritalin) and behavior-modification techniques in the treatment of a hyperactive child. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10 (1), 21-31.	ALLAIN, H., SCHÜCK, S., MAUDUIT, N. & DJEMAÏ, M. (2001). Comparative effects of pharmacotherapy on the maintenance of cognitive functions. Europeen Psychiatry, 16, 35-41.
	STERN, S.L., RUSH, A.J. & MENDELS, J. (1980). Toward a rational pharmacotherapy of depression. American Journal of Psychiatry, 137, 545-552.	LIN, K.-M., SMITH, M.W. & ORTIZ, V. (2001). Culture and psychopharmacology. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 24, 523–538.
	COLLINS, B.E., WHALEN, C.K. & HENKER, B. (1980). Ecological and pharmacological influences on behaviors in the classroom : The hyperkinetic behavioral syndrome. In S. Salzinger, J. Antrobus & J. Glick (Eds.), The ecosystem of the "sick" child : Implications for classification and intervention (pp. 103-137). New York : Academic Press.	FTZGERALD, M. (2001). Psychopharmacological treatment of adolescent and adult attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Irish Journal of Psychological Medicine 18, 93-98.
	STEINBRUECK, S.M., MAXWELL, S.E. & HOWARD, G.S. (1983). A meta-analysis of psychotherapy and drug therapy in the treatment of unipolar depression with adults. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 51 (6), 856-863.	EMSLIE, G., HEILIGENSTEIN, J., WAGNER, K., HOOG, S., ERNEST, D., BROWN, E., NILSSON, M. & JACOBSON, J. (2002). Fluoxetine for acute treatment of depression in children and adolescents : A placebo-controlled, randomized clinical trial. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 41, 1205-1215.
	SOLOFF P. H., GEORGE, A. & NATHAN, R. S. (1986). Progress in pharmacotherapy of borderline disorders : a double-blind study of amitriptyline, haloperidol and placebo. Archives of General Psychiatry, 43, 691-697.	FAVA, G. (2002). Long-term treatment with antidepressant drugs : the spectacular achievements of propaganda. Psychotherapy & Psychosomatics, 71, 127-132.
	MURRAY, E.J. (1989). Measurement issues in the evaluation of psychopharmacological therapy. In S. Fisher & R.P. Greenberg (Eds.), The limits of biological treatments for psychological distress : Comparisons with psychotherapy and placebo. Hillsdale : Erlbaum.	COHEN, D. (2003). The psychiatric medication history : Context, meaning, and purpose. Social Work in Mental Health, 1 (4), 5-28.
	GREENBERG, R.P. & FISHER, S. (1989). Examining antidepressant effectiveness : Findings, ambiguities, and some vexing puzzles. In S. Fisher and R.P. Greenberg (Eds.), The limits of biological treatments for psychological distress : Comparisons with psychotherapy and placebo. Hillsdale : Erlbaum.	BREGGIN, P.R. (2003). Psychopharmacology and human values. Journal of Humanistic Psychology, 43, 34-49.
	HOLLON, S.D., SHELTON, R.C. & LOOSEN, E.T. (1991). Cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy for depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 59, 88-99.	MONCRIEFF, J. & COHEN, D. (2005). Rethinking models of psychotropic drug action. Psychotherapy & Psychosomatics, 74, 145 -153.
	MARDER, S.R., WIRSHING, W.C. & VAN PUTTEN, T. (1991). Drug treatment of schizophrenia: Overview of recent research. Schizophrenia Research, 4, 81-90.	COHEN, D. (2005). Clinical trials in psychopharmacology : Gold standard or fool's gold? In S. Kirk (Ed.), Mental disorders in the social environment : critical perspectives (pp. 347-367). New York : Columbia University Press.
	GREENBERG, R.P., BORNSTEIN, R.F., ZBOROWSKI, M.J., FISHER, S. & GREENBERG, M.D. (1994). A meta-analysis of fluoxetine outcome in the treatment of depression. Journal of Nervous & Mental Disease, 182, 547 -551.	HUMPRHEYS, M.R. & REINBERG, Y. E. (2005). Contemporary and emerging drug treatments for urinary incontinence in children. Pediatric Drugs, 7 (3), 151-162.
	ANTONOCCIO, D.O., DANTON, W.G. & DENELSKY, G.Y. (1995). Psychotherapy versus medication for depression : Challenging the conventional wisdom with data. Professional Psychology : Research & Practice, 26 (6), 574-585.	ATTIA, E. & SCHROEDER, L. (2005). Pharmacologic treatment of anorexia nervosa : Where do we go from here? International Journal of Eating Disorders, 37, 60-63.
	SINGER, H., BROWN, J., QUASKEY, S., ROSENBERG, L., MELLITS, E. & DENCKLA, M. (1995). The treatment of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in Tourette’s syndrome : A double-blind placebo-controlled study with clonidine and desipramine. Pediatrics, 95, 74-81.	HARROW, M., GROSSMAN, L., JOBE, T.H., HERBENER, E. (2005). Do patients with schizophrenia ever show periods of recovery ? A 15 year multi-followup study. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 31, 723-734.
	KANE, J.M. (1996). Drug therapy. Schizophrenia. New England Journal of Medicine, 334, 34–41.	KELSEY, J.E., NEMEROFF, C.B. & NEWPORT, D.J. (2006). Principles of psychopharmacology for mental health professionals. John Wiley et Sons.
	FABRE, L., BIRKHIMER, L.J., ZABORNY, B.A., WONG, L.F. & KAPIK, B.M. (1996). Fluvoxamine versus imipramine and placebo: A double-blind comparison in depressed patients. International Clinical Psychopharmacology, 11 (2), 119-127.	MONCRIEFF, J. (2006). Why is it so difficult to stop psychiatric drug treatment ? It may be nothing to do with the original problem. Medical Hypotheses, 67 (3), 517-523. [PDF]
	GREENBERG, R.P. & FISHER, S. (1997). Mood-mending medicines : Probing drug, psychotherapy and placebo solutions. In S. Risher & R.P. Greenberg (Eds.), From placebo to panacea : Putting psychiatric drugs to the test. (pp 115-172). New York : Wily.	LANE, C. (2007). Psychiatrists and drug companies are thoroughly redefining normal behaviour. London : Institute of Ideas.
	EMSLIE, G., RUSH, J., WEINBERG, W., KOWATCH, R., HUGHES, C., CARMODY, T. & RINTELMANN, J. (1997). A double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial of fluoxetine in children and adolescents with depression. Archives of General Psychiatry, 54, 1031-1037.	HARROW, M. & JOBE, T.H. (2007). Factors involved in outcome and recovery in schizophrenia patients not on antipsychotic medications : A 15-year multifollow-up study. Journal of Nervous & Mental Disease, 195 (5), 406-414. [PDF]
	ANTONUCCIO, D.O., THOMAS, M. & DANTON, W.G. (1998). A cost-efffectiveness model : is pharmacotherapy really less expensive than psychotherapy for depression? In S. Hayes and Heiby (Eds.), Prescription privileges for psychologists : A critical analysis. Context Press.	LANE, C. (2007). Shyness : How normal behavior became a sickness. New Haven, CT : Yale University Press. / Comment la psychiatrie et l'industrie pharmaceutique ont médicalisé nos émotions. Paris : Flammarion.
	VALENSTEIN, E.S. (1998). Blaming the brain : The truth about drugs and mental health. New York: The Free Press.	HARROW, M. (2007). Factors involved in outcome and recovery in schizophrenia patients not on antipsychotic medications. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 195, 406-414.
	JACOBS, D. & COHEN, D. (1999). What is really known about psychological alterations produced by psychiatric drugs? International Journal of Risk & Safety in Medicine, 12 (1), 37-47.	BREGGIN, P.R. (2008). The role of psychiatric drugs in cases of violence, suicide and murder. St. Martin's Press.
	MALHI, G.S. & FARMER, A.E. (1999) Drug therapy in treatment-resistant depression (letter). British Journal of Psychiatry, 175, 390 -391	DOBSON, K.S., HOLLON, S.D., DIMIDJIAN, S., SCHMALING, K.B., KOHLENBERG, R.J., GALLOP, R., RIZVI, J., GOLLAN, J.K., DUNNER, D.L. & JACOBSON, N.S. (2008). Randomized trial of behavioral activation, cognitive therapy, and antidepressant medication in the prevention of relapse and recurrence in major depression. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 76(3), 468-477. [LIRE]
	WILENS, T. E. (1999). Straight talk about psychiatric medications for kids. New York : Guilford Press.	MONCRIEFF, J. (2008). The myth of the chemical cure : A critique of psychiatric drug treatment. London : Palgrave Macmillan.
	QUITKIN, F.M., RABKIN, J.G., GERALD, J., DAVIS, J. & KLEIN, D.F. (2000). Validity of clinical trials of antidepressants. American Journal of Psychiatry, 157, 327-337.

Thérapie non-directive : Nondirective therapy.

	ELLIS, A. (1948). A critique of the theoretical contributions of nondirective therapy. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 4, 248-255.

Thérapie par aversion : Désigne l'ensemble des thérapies qui font appel à un stimulus aversif pour diminuer la fréquence d'un comportement considéré comme nuisible (agression sexuelle, pédophilie, jeu compulsif, fumer, alcoolisme, etc). En opérant, on utilise une punition positive (faible décharge électrique, jet d'eau froide, bruit désagréable, présence d'un observateur afin de créé de la gêne ou un sentiment de culpabilité) comme conséquence immédiate à un comportement nuisible. En conditionnement répondant, on amène l'individu à associer un stimulus conditionnel agréable (une image d'enfant chez les pédophiles ou de femmes chez les agresseurs sexuels) à un stimulus inconditionnel aversif (odeur désagréable d'amoniac, décharge électrique de faible intensité, etc.). Thérapie par aversion et conditionnement aversif. Aversion therapy.

	RAYMOND, M. (1956). Case of fetishism treated by aversion therapy. British Medical Journal, 2, 854-856.	BANCROFT, J. & MARKS, I. (1968). Electric aversion therapy of sexual deviations. Proc. R. Soc Med., 61 (8), 796-799.
	JAMES, B. (1962). A case of homosexuality treated by aversion therapy. British Medical Journal, 1, (5280), 768-770.	BANCROFT, J.H.J. (1969). Aversion therapy of homosexuality. British Journal of Psychiatry, 115, 1417-1431.
	BLACKMORE, C.B., THORPE, J.G., BARKER, J.C., CONWAY, C.G. & LAVIN, N.I. (1963). Application of faradic aversion conditioning in a case of transvestism. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 1, 26-35.	RACHMAN, S. & TEASDALE, J. (1969). Aversion therapy and behaviour disorders : An analysis. Coral Gables, FL : University of Miami Press.

	THORPE, J.G., SCHMIDT, E. & CASTELL, D. (1964). A comparison of positive and negative (aversive) conditioning in the treatment of homosexuality. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 1, 357-362.	SERBER, M. (1970). Shame aversion therapy. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 1, 213-215.
	THORPE, J.G. & SCHMIDT, E. (1964). Therapeutic failure in a case of aversion therapy. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 1, 193-296.	SEAGER, C.P. (1970). Treatment of compulsive gamblers by electrical aversion. British Journal of Psychiatry, 117, 545-553.
	McGUIRE, R.J. & VALLANCE, M. (1964). Aversion therapy by electric shock : A simple technique. British Medical Journal, 2, 594-597.	ABEL, G.G., LEVIS, D. & CLANCY, J. (1970). Aversion therapy applied to taped sequences of deviant behavior in exhibitionism and other sexual deviations : A preliminary report. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychitary, 1, 59-66.
	BARKER, J.C. (1965). Behavior therapy for transvestism : A comparison of pharmacological and electrical aversion techniques. British Journal of Psychiatry, 111, 268-276.	COLSON, C.E. (1972). Olfactory aversion therapy for homosexual behavior. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 3, 185-187.
	MacCULLOCH M.J. & FELDMAN, M.P. (1967). Aversion therapy in management of 43 homosexuals. British Medical Journal, 3 (2), 594-597.	CALLAHAN, E. & LEITENBERG, H. (1973). Aversion therapy for sexual deviation : Contingent shock and covert sensitization. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 81 (1), 60-73.
	BOND, I.K. & EVANS, D.R. (1967). Avoidance therapy : Its use in two cases of underwear fetishism. Canadian Medical Association Journal, 96, 1160-1162.	WICKRAMASEKERA, I. (1976). Aversive behavior rehearsal for sexual exhibitionism. Behavior Therapy, 7, 167-176.
	FELDMAN, M.P., MacCULLOCH M.J. & MacCULLOCH, M.L. (1968). The aversion therapy treatement of a heterogeneous group of five cases of sexual deviation. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica, 44 (2), 113-123.	LEINWAND, S.N. (1976). Aversion therapy : Punishment as treatment and treatment as cruel and unusual punishment. Southern California Law Review, 49 (4), 880-983.
	BERKER, J.C. & MILLER, M. (1968). Aversion therapy for compulsive gambling. The Journal of Nervous & Mental Disease, 146 (4), 285-302.	McCONAGHY, N., ARMSTRONG, M.S. & BLASZCZYNSKY, A. (1981). Controlled comparison of aversive therapy and covert sensitization in compulsive homosexuality. Behavior Response & Therapy, 19, 425.
		McCONAGHY, N., ARMSTRONG, M., BLASZCZYNSKI, A. & ALLOCK, C. (1983). Control comparison of aversion therapy and imaginal desensitization in compulsive gambling. British Journal of Psychiatry, 142, 366-372.
		HOWARD, M. (2001). Pharmacological aversion treatment of alcohol abuse. American Journal of Drug and Alcohol Abuse, 27 (3), 561-585.

Thérapie par exposition : En thérapie, technique de désensibilisation visant à éteindre progressivement un comportement que l'on considère nuisible. Elle consiste à amener le patient à affronter graduellement la situation redoutée ou l'objet de sa peur (in vivo), ou la représentation de cet objet/situation (imagination). Cette désensibilisation repose sur l'habituation. Thérapie par exposition, phobie et par immersion. = traitement par exposition, désensibilisation systématique. ( ): thérapie par exposition in vivo, thérapie par exposition en imagination. Exposure therapy, In-vivo desensitization, exposure and response prevention.

	KOHLENBERG, R.J. (1974). In-vivo desensitization and aversive stimuli in the treatment of pedophilia. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 83, 192-195.
	MARKS, I.M., HODGSON, R. & RACHMAN, S. (1975). Treatment of chronic obsessive-compulsive neurosis by in vivo exposure : a two year follow-up and issues in treatment. British Journal of Psychiatry, 127, 349-364.
	LABERGE, B., GAUTHIER, J. & FRADET, C. (1988). L'imipramine dans le traitement par exposition de l'agoraphobie : Un examen critique de la littérature. Canadian Journal of Behavioural Science/Revue Canadienne des Sciences du Comportement, 20 (3), 332-348.
	FOA, E.B & ROTHBAUM, B.O. (1992). Exposure therapy for rape victims with posttraumatic stress disorder. The Behavior Therapist, 15, 219-222.
	MILTENBERGER, R.G., WRIGHT, K. & FUQUA, W. (1986). Graduated in vivo exposure with a severe spider phobic. Scandinavian Journal of Behavior Therapy, 15, 71-76.
	VISSER, S. & BOUMAN, T.K. (2001). The treatment of hypochondriasis : Exposure plus response prevention vs cognitive therapy. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 39, 423-442.
	ST-JACQUES, J., BOUCHARD, S. et BÉLANGER, C. (2008). La phobie spécifique chez l'enfant et l'adolescent : Une recension des écrits sur les traitements utilisant l'exposition. Counseling et Spiritualité, 27, 71-88.

Thérapie par exposition et prévention :

	MEYER, V. (1966). Modification of expectations in cases with obsessional rituals. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 4, 273-280.
	BAUM, M. (1966). Rapid extinction of an avoidance response following a period of response prevention in the avoidance apparatus. Psychological Reports, 18 (1), 59-64.
	HUPPERT & ROTH (2003) Treating obsessive-compulsive disorder with exposure and response prevention. The Behavior Analyst Today, 4 (1), 66- 67.

Thérapie par immersion : En thérapie, technique de désensibilisation, développée par Meyer, qui vise à éteindre subitement un comportement. Elle consiste à amener une personne à confronter directement et d'un seul coup la situation ou l'objet qui lui fait peur (plutôt que graduellement comme dans le traitement par exposition). Thérapie par immersion et par exposition. = traitement par immersion. ( ): thérapie par immersion in vivo, thérapie par immersion virtuelle (in virtuo). Flooding, implosive therapy.



	STERN, R.S. & MARKS, I.M. (1973). Brief and prolonged flooding : A comparison in agoraphobic patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 28, 270-276.
	KEANE, T.M., FAIRBANK, J.A., CADDELL, J.M. & ZIMERING, R.T. (1989). Implosive (flooding) therapy reduces symptoms of PTSD in Vietnam combat veterans. Behavior Therapy, 20 (2), 245-260
	HECKER, J.E. (1990). Emotional processing in the treatment of simple phobia : a comparison of imaginal and in vivo exposure. Behavioural Psychotherapy, 18, 21-34.
	LAMSON, R. & MEISNER, M. (1994). The effects of virtual reality immersion in the treatment of anxiety, panic, and phobia of heights. Proceedings for Virtual Reality and Persons with Disabilities, 63-68.
	BOUCHARD S., ST-JACQUES, J., RENAUD, P. et WIEDERHOLD, B.K. (2009). Side effects of immersions in virtual reality for people suffering from anxiety disorders. Journal of CyberTherapy & Rehabilitation, 2, 127-137.

Thérapie par internet : Online therapy.

	GRIFFITHS, M. & COOPER, G. (2003). Online Therapy : Implications for Problem gamblers and clinicians. British Journal of Guidance and Counselling, 31 (1): 113-135.

Thérapie par les arts : Art therapy, dance therapy.

	RITTER, M. & LOW, K.G. (1996). Effects of dance/movement therapy : A meta-analysis. The Arts in Psychotherapy, 23 (3), 249-260.

Thérapie par résolution de problème : Problem-solving therapy.

	NEZU, A.M. & NEZU, C.M. (2001). Problem-solving therapy. Journal of Psychotherapy Integration, 11, 187-205.

Thérapie par satiété : Satiation therapy.

	MARSHALL, W.L. (1979). Satiation therapy : a procedure for reducing deviant sexual arousal. Journal of Applied Analysis of Behavior, 12 (3), 377-389.

Thérapie psychanalytique : Voir Psychanalyse.

Thérapie psychodynamique : Au sens strict, ce terme désigne un ensemble de théories et de thérapies qui s'inspirent largement de la théorie freudienne, et du principe d'énergie psychique (d'où le terme dynamique), tout en demeurant critique face à un certain nombre de concepts fondamentaux de cette théorie, comme l'inconscient, le complexe d'Oedipe, la pulsion de vie, la pulsion de mort, l'envie du pénis, etc. Au sens large, le terme est synonyme de psychanalyse. = psychanalyse. Psychodynamic psychotherapy, dynamic psychotherapy. Psychodynamic psychotherapy.

	SVARTBERG, M. & STILES, T.C. (1991). Comparative effects of short-term psychodynamic psychotherapy : A meta-analysis. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 59 (5), 704-714.	LEICHSENRING, F. & LEIBLING, E. (2007). Psychodynamic psychotherapy: a systematic review of techniques, indications and empirical evidence. Psychological Psychotherapy, 80 (2), 217-228.
	HOGLEND, P GULDBERG, C.A. & PERRY, J.C. (1992). Scientific approaches to making psychodynamic formulations. Nordic Journal of Psychiatry, 46, 41-48.	LEICHSENRING, F. & RABUNG, S. (2008). Effectiveness of long-term psychodynamic psychotherapy : a meta-analysis. Journal of American Medical Association, 300 (13), 1551-1565.
	HOGLEND, P. (1993). Personality disorders and long-term outcome after brief dynamic psychotherapy. Journal of Personalaty Disorders, 7, 168-181.	HOGLEND, P., BOGWALD, K.P., AMLO, S., MARBLE, A., ULBERG, R.A., COSGROVE-SJAASTD, M., SORBYE, O., HEYERDAHL, O. & JOHANSSON, P. (2008). Transference interpretations in dynamic Psychotherapy : Do they really yield sustained effects? The American Journal of Psychiatry, 165, (6) [LIRE]
	LEICHSENRING, F. (2001). Comparative effects of short- term psychodynamic psychotherapy and cognitive- behavioral therapy in depression : A meta-analytic approach. Clinical Psychology Review, 21, 401-419.	GLASS, M. (2008). Psychodynamic psychotherapy and research evidence: Bambi survives Godzilla? Journal of American Medical Association, 300 (13), 1587-1589.
	LEICHSENRING, F. & LEIBLING, E. (2003). The effectiveness of psychodynamic therapy and cognitive behavior therapy in the treatment of personality disorders: A meta-analysis. American Journal of Psychiatry, 160, 1223-1232.	KNEKT, P., LINDFORS, O., HÄRKÄNEN, T., VÄLIKOSKI, M., VIRTALA, E., LAAKSONEN, M.A., MARTTUNEN, M., KAIPAINEN, M. & RENLUND, C. (2008). Randomized trial on the effectiveness of long-and short-term psychodynamic psychotherapy and solution-focused therapy on psychiatric symptoms during a 3-year follow-up. Psychological medicine, 38 (5), 689-703.
	LEICHSENRING, F., RABUNG, S. & LEIBLING, E. (2004).The Efficacy of Short-term Psychodynamic Psychotherapy in Specific Psychiatric Disorders : A Meta-analysi. Archives of General Psychiatry, 61 (12), 1208-1216.	ROEPKE, S. & RENNEBERG, B. (2009). Analyzing effectiveness of long-term psychodynamic psychotherapy. Journal of American Medical Association, 301 (9), 931-932.
	HOGLEND, P. (2003). Long-term effects of brief dynamic psychotherapy. Psychotherapy Research, 13, 271-292.	MILROD, B. (2009). Psychodynamic psychotherapy outcome for generalized anxiety disorder. merican Journal of Psychiatry, 166, 841-844.
	GABBARD, G.O. (2004). Long-term psychodynamic psychotherapy : A basic text. Arlington, VA : American Psychiatric Publishing.	BHAR, S.S., THOMBS, B.D., PIGNOTTI, M., BASSEL, M., JEWETT, l., COYNE, J.C. & BECK, A.T. (2010). Is longer-term psychodynamic psychotherapy more effective than shorter-term therapies? Review and critique of the evidence. Psychotherapy and psychosomatics, 79 (4), 208-216.
	MULLEN, L.S., RIEDER, R.O., GLICK, R.A., LUBER, B. & ROSEN, P.J. (2004). Testing psychodynamic psychotherapy skills among psychiatric residents : the Psychodynamic Psychotherapy Competency Test. American Journal of Psychiatry, 161, 1658-1664.	WATZKE, B., RÜDDEL, H., HOCH, U. GROTHGAR, B & SCHULZ, H. (2010). Effectiveness of systematic treatment selection for psychodynamic and cognitive-behavioural therapy: randomised controlled trial in routine mental healthcare. The British Journal of Psychiatry, 197, 96-105.
	HOGLEND, P. (2004). Analysis of transference in psychodynamic psychotherapy : a review of empirical research. Canadian Journal of Psychoanalysis, 12, 279-300.	HERSOUG, A.G. (2010). A closer look at good and poor outcome in psychodynamic psychotherapy : A case comparison study. Clinical Case Studies, 9 (2), 135-153.
	GABBARD, G.O. (2005). Long-term psychodynamic psychotherapy : A basic text. American Journal of Psychiatry, 162, 639-640.	GERBER, J.A., KOCSIS, J.H.,MILROD, B.L., ROOSE, S.P., BERBER, J.P., THASE, M.E., PERKINS, P. & LEON, A.C. (2011). A quality-based review of randomized controlled trials of psychodynamic psychotherapy. American Journal of Psychiatry, 168, 19-28
	HOGLEND, P., AMLO, S, MARBLE, A., BOGWALD, K.P., SORBYE, SJAASTAD, M.C. & HEYERDAHL, O. (2006). Analysis of the patient-therapist relationship in dynamic psychotherapy : An experimental study of transference interpretations. American Journal of Psychiatry, 163, 1739-1746.	LEICHSENRING, F. & RABUNG, S. (2011). Long-term psychodynamic psychotherapy in complex mental disorders : update of a meta-analysis. The British Journal of Psychiatry, 199, 15-22.

Thérapie sexuelle : Ensemble de techniques qui vise à résoudre des problèmes de nature sexuelle et les conséquences que ces problèmes engendrent sur le couple. = sexothérapie. Sex therapy.

	KURIANSKY, J.B. & SHARPE, L. (1976). Guidelines for evaluating sex therapy. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 2 (4), 303-308.
	WITKIN, M.H. (1977). Sex therapy as an aid to marital and family therapy. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 3 (1), 19-30.
	APFELBAUM, B. (1977). A contribution to the development of the behavioral-analytic sex therapy model. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 3 (2), 128-138.
	OSTROV, S. (1978). Sex therapy with orthodox Jewish couples. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 4 (4), 266-278.
	NICHOLS, M. (1989). Sex therapy with lesbians, gay men, and bisexuals. In S.R. Leiblum & R.C. Rosen (Eds.), Principles and practice of sex therapy (pp. 269-297). New York : Guilford
	WEEKS, G. (2004). The emergence of a new par- adigm in sex therapy. Sexual & Relationship Therapy, 20, 89-103.
	ALTHOF, S. (2006). Sex therapy in the age of pharmacotherapy. Annual Review of Sex Research, 17, 116-131.

Thérapie systémique :

	MIERMONT, J. (1994). Le paradigme systémique. Dans D. Widlöcher (Dir.), Traité de psychopathologie. Paris : PUF.
	MIERMONT, J. (1994). Thérapies systémiques. Encycl. Méd. Chir., Psychiatrie, 37-820-B-40, 8.

Thérapie verbale : Regroupe les thérapies qui : 1) mettent davantage l'accent sur la transformation de la personnalité du patient/malade/client que sur les changements de comportements problématiques; 2) le rôle du thérapeute consiste davantage à écouter ce que dit son patient/malade/client, que de tenter de modifier ses comportements problématiques. /thérapie comportementale. ( ): thérapie humaniste, thérapie psychanalytique, certaines phases ou étapes des thérapies cognitives. Language therapy, verbal cure.

	STAATS, A.W.(1972). Language behavior therapy : A derivation from social behaviorism. Behavior Therapy, 3, 165-192.

Thèse (de doctorat) : Ouvrage rédigé par un étudiant au doctorat et considéré dans la plupart des programmes universitaires comme une condition à l'obtention du diplôme de doctorat et au titre de docteur. Dans les domaines scientifiques, on peut considérer la thèse comme un ouvrage scientifique. On utilise les mots doctorant ou thésard pour désigner la personne qui est en train de faire un doctorat ou de rédiger sa thèse. Thèse et mémoire. Doctorat thesis, PhD thesis.

	BOUTHAT, C. (1993). Guide de présentation des mémoires et thèses. Montréal : Université du Québec à Montréal.
	BEAUD, M. (2006). L'art de la thèse. Paris : La Découverte.
	KAMLER, B. & THOMPSON, P. (2006). Helping doctoral students write : Pedagogies for supervision. London and New York : Routledge.

Thèse : Au sens philosophique, une thèse est un discours systématique et cohérent qui tente d'expliquer un phénomène ou un ensemble de phénomène. = théorie. Thesis.

Thiboutot Jacinthe ( ) : Psychologue québécoise et professeure (à la retraite) du Collège Ahuntsic.

	THIBOUTOT, J. (1992). Le nouveau programme de sciences humaines : continuité et changements. Pédagogie Collégiale, 5 (3), 39-41.
	THIBOUTOT, J. (2000). Gestion de stress et travail policier. Mont-Royal : Modulo Griffon.

Thinès Georges (Liège 1923-) : Psychologue, éthologiste, poète et romancier belge. Professeur de Zayan.

	THINÈS, G. (1966). Psychologie des animaux. Dessart : Bruxelles
	THINÈS, G. & HEUTS, B.A. (1968). The effects of submissive experiences on dominance and aggressive behaviour of Xiphophorus (Pisces, Poeciliidae). Zeitschrift für Tierpsychologie, 25, 139-154.
	THINÈS, G. (1970). The phenomenological approach in comparative psychology. Journal of Phenomenological Psychology, 1, 63-70.
	THINÈS, G. et LEMPEREUR, A. (1984). Dictionnaire général des sciences humaines. Louvain-la-neuve : CIACO.

Thinking & Reasoning : Revue scientifique de psychologie cognitive.

Thom René (Montbéliard France 1923-2002 Bures-sur-Yvette France) : Mathématicien et épistémologue français. Père de la théorie des catastrophes.

	THOM, R. (1972). Stabilité structurelle et morphogenèse. Paris : Interéditions.
	THOM, R. (1974). Modèles mathématiques de la morphogenèse. Paris : Collection 1018, Union Générale d'Éditions.
	THOM, R. (1983). Paraboles et catastrophes. Paris : Flammarion.
	THOM, R. (1990). La théorie des catastrophes. Dans R. Thom (Dir.), Apologie du logos (p. 333-451). Paris : Hachette.
	THOM, R. et NOËL, É. (1993). Prédire n'est pas expliquer. Paris : Flammarion.

Thomas Alexander (1914-2003 New York) : Psychiatre américain spécialisé dans l'étude de la personnalité et du tempérament. Il a a réalisé une recherche longitudinale qui a étudié le développement émotionnel et social de 133 enfant de leur naisance jusqu'à l'âge de 30 ans (New York Longitudinal Study)

	THOMAS, A., CHESS, S. & BIRCH, H., HETZIG, M., KORN, S. (1963). Behavioural individuality in early childhood. New York : New York University Press.
	THOMAS, A. & CHESS, S. (1968). Temperament and behavior disorders in children.New York : New York University Press.
	THOMAS, A., CHESS, S. & BIRCH, H.G. (1970). The origin of personality. Scientific American, 223 (2), 102-109. [LIRE]
	THOMAS, A. & CHESS, S. (1977). Temperament and development. New York : Brunner/Mazel.

Thomas Philip ( ): Psychiatre anglais et critique des pratiques en cette matière. Collaborateur de Bracken.

	THOMAS P, ROMME, M. & HAMELIJINK, J. (1996). Psychiatry and the politics of the underclass. British Journal of Psychiatry, 169, 401-404.
	THOMAS, P. & BRACKEN, P. (1999). The value of advocacy : putting ethics into practice. Psychiatric Bulletin, 23, 327-29
	THOMAS, P. & BRACKEN, P. (2004). Critical psychiatry in practice. Advances in Psychiatric Treatment, 10, 361-370. [PDF]
	THOMAS, P. & BRACKEN, P., CUTLER, P., HAYWARD, R, MAY, R. & YASMEEN, S. (2005). Challenging the globalisation of biomedical psychiatry. Journal of Public mental Health, 4, 23-32.
	THOMAS, P., BRACKEN, P. & YASMENN, S. (2007). Explanatory models for mental illness : Limitations and dangers in a global context. Pakistan Journal of Neurological Sciences, 176, 176-181. [PDF]

Thomas Williams I. (1863-1947) : Sociologue et psychosociologue américain et co-fondateur de l'École de Chicago (avec Park). Il s'est notamment intéressé à l'immigration, aux différences culturelles et à la condition des femmes.

	THOMAS, W.I. (1899). The psychology of modesty and clothing. American Journal of Sociology 5, 246-62.
	THOMAS, W.I. (1907). Sex and society : Studies in the social psychology of sex. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
	THOMAS, W.I. (1908). The mind of woman. American Magazine, 67, 146-52.
	THOMAS, W.I. (1927). The behavior pattern and the situation. Publications of the American Sociological Society, 22, 1-13.
	THOMAS, W.I. (1936). The comparative study of cultures. American Journal of Sociology, 42, 177-85.

Thorazine : Marque déposée en 1955 du chlorpromazine, surtout utilisé dans le traitement de la schizophrénie. Pour Shorter, cet antipsychotique est à la psychiatrie ce que la pénicilline est à la médecine.

	SHORTER, E. (1998). A history of psychiatry : From the era of the asylum to the age of prozac. John Wiley and Sons.

Thoreau Henry David (Concord 1817-1862) : Essayiste et philosophe américain.

	THOREAU, H.D. (1849/1983). Walden and civil disobedience. New York : Penguin Books.
	THOREAU, H.D. (1854). Walden or life in the woods

Thorndike Edward Lee (Williamsburg Massachusett 1874-1949 Montrose New York) : Psychologue américain et béhavioriste avant la lettre. Il a découvert l'apprentissage par essais et erreurs et formulé la loi de l'effet et de l'exercice. Il s'est également intéressé aux méthodes pédagogiques en éducation et à l'intelligence. Président de l'APA en 1912. Étudiant de Cattel. Professeur de Dashiell, Hollingworth et Bingham.

No 9	THORNDIKE, E.L. (1904). An introduction to the theory of mental and social measurements. New York : The Science Press.
	THORNDIKE, E.L. (1910). The contribution of psychology to education. The Journal of Educational Psychology, 1, 5-12.
	THORNDIKE, E.L. (1911/99). Animal intelligence : Experimental studies. Transaction Publisher.
	THORNDIKE, E.L. BERGMAN, E., COBB, M. & WOODYARD, E. (1926). The measurement of intelligence. New York : Teachers College Press.
	THORNDIKE, E.L. (1932). The fundamentals of learning. New York : Teachers College Press.

	DONAHOE, J.W. (1999). Edward L. Thorndike : The selectionist connectionist. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 72, 451-454. [PDF]
	CATANIA, A.C.(1999). Thorndike’s legacy: Learning, selection, and the law of effect. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 72, 425-428.

Thorndike Robert Ladd (Montrose États-Unis 1910-1990) : Psychométricien américain. Fils de Thorndike. Il est un des signataires du Groupe des 52. Étudiant de Thorndike. Professeur de Kaufman.

	THORNDIKE, R.L. (1949). Personnel selection : Test and measurement techniques. New York : Wiley.
	THORNDIKE, R.L. (1971). Educational measurement. Washington, D.C.: American Council on Education.
	TABET, P. (1998). La construction sociale de l’inégalité des sexes. Des outils et des corps. Paris : L’Harmattan/Bibliothèque du féminisme.
	TABET, P. (2001). La grande arnaque. L’expropriation de la sexualité des femmes. Actuel Marx, 30, 131-152.
	THORNDIKE, R.L. & HAGEN, E.P. (1977). Measurement and evaluation in psychology and education. New York : Wiley.
	THORNDIKE, R.L. (1982). Applied psychometrics. Boston, Mass. : Houghton-Mifflin.

Thuillier Pierre (1927-1999) : Philosophe, journaliste scientifique et historien des sciences.

	THUILLIER, P. (1972). Jeux et enjeux de la science. Paris : Laffont.
	THUILLIER, P. (1980). Le petit savant illustré. Paris : Seuil.
	THUILLIER, P. (1981). Les biologistes vont-ils prendre le pouvoir ? La sociobiologie en question. Paris : Éditions Complexe.
	THUILLIER, P. (1988). D’Archimède à Einstein. Paris : Fayard.
	THUILLIER, P. (1997). La revanche des sorcières : l'irrationnel et la pensée scientifique. Paris : Belin.

Thurstone Louis Leon (Chicago 1887-1955 Chapel Hill Caroline du Nord) : Psychométricien américain. Il a développé une échelle de mesure des attitudes et une théorie multi-factorielle de l'intelligence (en 1938). Président de l'APA en 1933. Étudiant d'Angell et de Bingham. Professeur de Coombs, Taylor et Thurstone.

No 88	THURSTONE, L.L. (1924/1973). The nature of intelligence. London : Routledge.
	THURSTONE, L.L. (1935). Vectors of the mind. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
	THURSTONE, L.L. (1938). Primary mental abilities. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
	THURSTONE, L.L. (1947). Multiple factor analysis. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
	THURSTONE, L.L. (1959). The measurement of values. Chicago : The University of Chicago Press.

	GUILFORD, J.P. (1972). Thurstone's primary mental abilities and SI abilities. Psychological Bulletin, 77 (2), 129-143.

Thurstone Thelma Gwinn (1897-1993) : Psychométricienne américaine. Étudiante de Thurstone.

	THURSTONE, L.L. & THURSTONE, T.G. (1941). Factorial studies of intelligence. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.

Thymorégulateur : Voir Régulateur de l'humeur.

Tiberghien Guy ( ) : Psychologue cognitiviste américain d'origine française, spécialisé dans l'étude de la mémoire. Étudiant de Le Ny.

	TIBERGHIEN, G. (1971). Certitude et mémoire. Paris : Editions du Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique.
	TIBERGHIEN, G., CAUZINILLE, E. & MATHIEU, J. (1979). Pre-decision and conditional search in long-term recognition memory. Acta Psychologica, 43, 329-343.
	TIBERGHIEN, G. (1994). Can we really dissociate the computational and algorithm-level theories of human memory? Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 17, 680-681.
	TIBERGHIEN, G. (1997). La mémoire oubliée. Liège : Mardaga.
	TIBERGHIEN, G., BAUDOIN, J-Y., GUILLAUME, F. & MONTOUTE, T. (2003). Should the temporal cortex be chopped in two? Cortex, 39 (1), 121-126.

Tic : Comportement moteur ou verbal bref et involontaire, qui se répéte à intervalles variables, sans fonction apparente ou réelle, mais qui crée un malaise chez la plupart des gens qui en sont affligés. Tic et syndrome de la Tourette. Tic.

	GILLES DE LA TOURETTE, G. (1899). La maladie des tics convulsifs. La semaine médicale, 19, 153-156.	GROUP, THE TOURETTE'S SYMPTOM STUDY GROUP. (2002). Treatment of ADHD in children with tics : a randomized controlled trial. Neurology, 58(4), 527-536.
	MEIGE, H. & FEINDEL, E. (1902). Les tics et leur traitement. Paris : Masson.	ROANE, H.S., PIAZZA, C.C., CERCONE, J.J. & GRADOS, M. (2002). Assessment and treatment of vocal tics associated with Tourette’s syndrome. Behavior Modification, 26 (4), 482-498.
	YATES, A.J. (1958). The application of learning theory to the treatment of tics. Social Psychology, 56, 175-182.	WOODS, D.W., KOCH, M. & MILTENBERGER, R.G. (2003). The impact of tic severity on the effects of peer education about Tourette’s syndrome. Journal of Developmental & Physical Disabilities, 15, 67-78.
	BARRETT, B. H. & LINDSLEY, O.R. (1962). Reduction in rate of multiple tics by free operant conditioning methods. Journal of Nervous & Mental Disease, 135, 187-195. [PDF]	MEIDINGER, A.L., MILTENBERGER, R.G., HIMLE, M., OMVIG, M., TRAINOR, C. & CROSBY, R. (2005). An investigation of tic suppression and the rebound effect in Tourette Syndrome. Behavior Modification, 29, 716-745.
	AZRIN, N.H. & NUNN, R. G. (1973). Habit- reversal : A method of eliminating nervous habits and tics. Behavior Research & Therapy, 11, 619-628.	MILTENBERGER, R.G., WOODS, D.W & HIMLE, M. (2007). Tic disorders and trichotillomania. In P. Sturmey (Ed.), Functional analysis in clinical treatment (pp. 151-170). Burlington, MA : Elsevier.
	LAHEY, B.B., McNEES, M.P. & McNEES, M.C. (1973). Control of an obscene “verbal tic” through timeout in an elementary school classroom. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6 (1), 101-104. [PDF]	WOODS, D.W., CONELEA, C.A. & WALTHER, M.R. (2007). Barriers to dissemination : Exploring the criticisms of behavior therapy for tics. Clinical Psychology : Science & Practice, 14, 280-283.
	GOLSE, B. (1983). Pour une psychopathologie ou une psychogenèse des tics de l'enfant : Une revue de la littérature. Actualités Psychiatrique, 1, 51-56.	CONELEA, C.A. & WOODS, D.W. (2008). The role of contextual factors in tic expression. Journal of Psychosomatic Research, 65, 487-496.
	WRIGHT, K. & MILTENBERGER, R.G. (1987). Awareness training in the treatment of head and facial tics. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 18, (3), 269-274.	CONELEA, C.A. & WOODS, D.W. (2008). Examining the impact of distraction on tic suppression in children and adolescents with Tourette syndrome. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 46, 1193-1200.
	RIDDLE, M.A., HARDIN, M.T., CHO, S.C., WOOLSTON, J.L. & LECKMAN, J.F. (1988). Desipramine treatment of boys with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder and tics: preliminary clinical experience. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 27, 811-814.
	SHARENOW, E., FUQUA, R.W. & MILTENBERGER, R.G. (1989). The treatment of motor tics with dissimilar competing response practice. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 22, 35-42. [PDF]	HIMLE, M.B. & WOODS, D.W. & BUNACIU, L. (2008). Evaluating the role of the reinforcement contingency in differentially reinforced tic suppression. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 41, 285-289.
	VAN DER MEERE, J., GUNNING, W. B., & STEMERDINK, N. (1996). Changing response set in normal development and in ADHD children with and without tics. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 24, 767–786.
	WOODS, D.W., MILTENBERER, R.G. & LUMLEY, V.A. (1996). Sequential application of major habit-reversal components to treat motor tics in children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 29 (4), 483–493. [PDF]
	WOODS, D.W., MILTENBERER, R.G. & FLACH, A.D. (1996). Habits, tics, and stuttering : Prevalence and relation to anxiety and somatic awareness. Behavior Modification, 20, 216-225.	WOODS, D.W., WALTHER, M.R., BAUER, C.C., KEMP, J.J. & CONELEA, C.A. (2009). The development of stimulus control over tics : A potential explanation for contextually-based variability in the symptoms of Tourette syndrome. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 47, 41-47.
	LAW, S. & SCHACHAR, R. (1999). Do typical clinical doses of methylphenidate cause tics in children treated for ADHD? Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 38, 944-951.
	WOODS, D.W. & TWOHIG, M.P. (2002). Using habit reversal to treat chronic vocal tic disorder in children. Behavioral Interventions, 17, 159-168.

TIC : Voir Technologie de l'information et de la communication.

Tienson John Leander ( ) : Philosophe et épistémologue américain. Collaborateur de Horgan.

	TIENSON, J.L. (1982). Synonyms and the objects of belief. Philosophical Studies 42 (3), 297-313.
	TIENSON, J.L. (1987). An argument concerning quantification and propositional attitudes. Philosophical Studies 51 (2), 145-168.
	HORGAN, T.E. & TIENSON, J.L. (1994). A nonclassical framework for cognitive science. Synthese, 101 (3), 305-345.
	HORGAN, T.E. & TIENSON, J.L. (1996). Connectionism and the philosophy of psychology. Bradford : M.I.T.
	TIENSON, J.L. (2002). Higher-order causation. Grazer Philosophische Studien 63 (1), 89-101.

Timberlake William D. ( ) : Psychologue béhavioriste américain.

	TIMBERLAKE, W. (1988). The behavior of organisms : Purposive behavior as a type of reflex. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 50, 305-318. [PDF]
	TIMBERLAKE, W. & WHITE, W. (1990). Winning isn't everything : Rats need only food deprivation not food reward to traverse a radial arm maze efficiently. Learning & Motivation, 21, 153-163.
	TIMBERLAKE, W. (1993). Behavior systems and reinforcement : an integrative approach. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of behavior, 60 (1), 105-128. [PDF]
	TIMBERLAKE, W. (2002). Niche-related learning in laboratory paradigms : The case of maze behavior in Norway rats. Behavioural Brain Research, 134, 355-374.
	TIMBERLAKE, W. (2003). Is the operant contingency enough for a science of purposive behavior? Behavior & Philosophy, 31, 1-33.

Timidité/timide : Voir Gêne.

Timimi Sami ( ) : Psychiatre anglais, spécialisé dans l'étude du trouble d'attention avec ou sans hyperacitivité. Timimi et les sceptiques.

	TIMIMI, S. (2002). Pathological child psychiatry and the medicalization of childhood. Hove, UK : Brunner-Routledge.
	TIMIMI, S. (2004). Rethinking childhood depression. British Medical Journal, 329, 1394-1396. [LIRE]
	TIMIMI, S. & TAYLOR, E. (2004). ADHD is best understood as a cultural construct. British Journal of Psychiatry, 184, 8-9. [LIRE]
	TIMIMI, S. & al. (2004). A critique of the international consensus statement on ADHD. Clinical Child & Family Psychology Review, 7, 59-63. [LIRE]
	TIMIMI, S. & RADCLIFFE, N. (2005) The rise and rise of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Public Mental Health, 4, 9-13.

Tinbergen Nikolaas (La haye Danemark 1907-1988 Oxford) : Éthologiste autrichien. Chef de file de l'étude du comportement animal et de l'instinct. Lauréat du prix Nobel de physiologie et de médecine en 1973 avec Frisch et Lorenz. Professeur de Bartock Franck et t Manning. Collaborateur de Verplanck.

	TINBERGEN, N. (1951). The study of instinct. Oxford : Clarendon Press.
	TINBERGEN, N. (1952). Derived activities : Their causation, biological significance, origin and emancipation during evolution. Quarterly Review of Biology, 27, 1-32.
	TINBERGEN, N. (1957). The fonction of territory. Bird study, 4, 14-27.
	TINBERGEN, N. (1963). On aims and method of ethology. Zeitschrift für Tierpsychologie, 20, 410-433.
	TINBERGEN, N., IMPREKOVEN, M. & FRANCK, D. (1967). An experiment on spacing out as a defense against predators. Behaviour, 28, 307-321.

	KRUUK, H. (2003). Niko’s nature : the life of Niko Tinbergen and his science of animal behaviour. Oxford : Oxford University Press

Tinto Vincent ( ) : Sociologue américain, spécialisé en éducation et plus particulièrement dans l'étude du décrochage scolaire.

	TINTO, V. (1975). Dropout from higher education : A theoretical synthesis of recent research. Review of Educational Research, 45, 89-125.
	TINTO, V. (1978). Reflections on classroom authority. Education and Urban Society, 11, 107-118.
	TINTO, V. (1982). Limits of theory and practice in student attrition. Journal of Higher Education, 53, 687-700.
	TINTO, V. (1990). The principles of effective retention. The Journal of the Freshman Year Experience, 2 (1), 35-48.
	TINTO, V. (1993). Leaving college : Rethinking the causes and cures of student attrition. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.

TIP : The Industrial and Organizational Psychology : Revue scientifique de psychologie industrielle et organisationnelle.

Tirage aléatoire : Seul procédé qui permet d'obtenir un échantillon représentatif de la population. = échantillonnage aléatoire, piger au hasard (expression à bannir), tirage au sort.

Tissot Samuel Auguste (Vaudois 1728-1797 Lausanne) : Médecin suisse. Il s'intéresse notamment à l'épilepsie et à l'onanisme.

	TISSOT, S.A.D. (1766). L'onanisme. Dissertation sur les maladies produites par la masturbation. Paris : Garnier et frères. / Onanism, or a treatise upon the disorders of masturbation. London : J. Pridden.

Tissu cérébral : Voir Substances blanche, grise et noire.

Titchener Edward Bradford (Chichester Angleterre 1867-1927 Ithaca États-Unis) : Psychologue structuraliste américain d'origine britannique. Considéré par certains historiens des sciences comme le père du structuralisme en psychologie. Il est aussi l'un des membres fondateur de l'American Psychological Association. Étudiant de Wundt et professeur de Dallenbach, Ogden et Washburn.

	TITCHENER, E.B. (1895). Simple reactions. Mind, 4, 74-81.
	TITCHENER, E.B. (1899). Structural and functional psychology. Philosophical Review, 8, 290-299.
	TITCHENER, E.B. (1912). The schema of introspection. American Journal of Psychology, 23, 485-508.
	TITCHENER, E.B. (1914). On "psychology as the behaviorist views it". American Philosophical Society, 53, 1-17.
	TITCHENER, E.B. (1921). Brentano and Wundt : empirical and experimental psychology. American Journal of Psychology, 32, 108-120.

Titre : Désignation d'un rang au sein d'un groupe. EX: un caporal dans l'armée ou vice-présidente dans une entreprise.

Titre (d'une communication scientifique) : Désigne le sujet abordé par une communication scientifique. ( ): Titre d'un article scientifique, titre d'un livre, titre d'un chapitre de livre.

Titre de psychologue : Au Québec, les psychologues sont des professionnels. Le titre de psychologue et l’exercice de cette profession sont donc réglementés par le code des professions. Tout individu portant le titre de psychologue doit obligatoirement possèder un permis de pratique et être inscrit au tableau des membres de l’Ordre des psychologues (OPQ). Pour obtenir ce permis, il faut depuis le 27 juillet 2006 détenir un doctorat (voir la liste des doctorats admissibles). Toutefois, les individus qui ont déjà une maîtrise reconnue par l’Ordre, qu’ils soient ou non membres de l’Ordre au moment de l’entrée en vigueur de ce nouveau règlement, continueront d’être admissibles à la profession en tout temps selon les procédures habituelles d’admission.

Statut professionnel des psychologues au Québec
Titre réservé	Acte réservé	Acte exclusif	Obligation de moyen	Obligation de résultat
OUI	OUI	NON	OUI	NON

	ORDRE DES PSYCHOLOGUES DU QUÉBEC [LIRE]

Titre d'un article scientifique : Dans la notice d'un article scientifique, désigne le sujet abordé par cette publication. Ce titre peut contenir les variables à l'étude (variable indépendante et variable dépendante ou variable observée/décrite), la population visée par l'étude, la théorie mise à l'épreuve ou le problème soulevé par l'auteur, s'il y a lieu. Dans le modèle de référence de l'American Psychological Association, cette information est placée entre l'année de publication et le nom de la revue.

BÉLANGER, J. (1978). Images et réalités du béhaviorisme. Philosophiques, 5 (1), 3-110.

Titre d'un livre : Dans la notice d'un livre, désigne le sujet couvert par cette publication. Dans le modèle de référence de l'American Psychological Association, cette information est placée en italiques entre l'année de publication et le lieu de l'édition.

SKINNER, B.F. (1971). L'analyse expérimentale du comportement. Paris : Seuil.

Titre d'un livre par chapitre : Dans la notice d'un livre par chapitre, désigne le sujet couvert par cette publication. Dans le modèle de référence de l'American Psychological Association, cette information est placée en italiques entre l'année de publication et le lieu de l'édition.

ROBERT, M. (Dir.) (1988). Fondements et étapes de la recherche scientifique en psychologie. St-Hyacinthe : Édisem.

Titre d'un chapitre de livre : Dans la notice d'un chapitre de livre, désigne l'un des chapitres du livre, et contient les grands thèmes couverts par cette publication. Dans le modèle de référence de l'American Psychological Association, cette information est placée entre l'année de publication et le nom du directeur du livre.

BEAUGRAND, J. (1988). Démarche scientifique et cycle de recherche. Dans M. Robert (Dir.), Fondements et étapes de la recherche scientifique en psychologie (p. 1-34).St-Hyacinthe : Édisem.

Titre d'un tableau : Le titre d'un tableau doit refléter son contenu, donc l'ensemble des variables et des groupes qui y sont présentés. Cependant, si ce contenu est trop imposant, on peut omettre les données de l'analyse secondaire ou scinder ce tableau de tableaux plus petits.

Tableau 1
Comparaisons entre les hommes et femmes sur le plan de la scolarité, du revenu et des réponses à la question 2.

Analyse principale --»

Indicateurs	Groupes	n=		Test t	Valeur de p	<0,05 = *
Scolarité (en année)	Hommes	15	17,20	-0,727	0,473
	Femmes	15	16,87
Revenu annuel (en $)	Hommes	15	57669	2,684	0,006	*
	Femmes	15	43297
			Foui	Khi carré
Question no 2	Hommes	15	10	4,821	0,028	*
	Femmes	15	4

Analyse secondaire --»

Tizard Barbara ( ) : Psychologue anglaise, spécialisée dans l'étude du développement et de l'attachement. Avec Hodges, elle a réalisé une recherche longitudinale sur l'attachement. Collaboratrice de Hodges.

	TIZARD, B., COOPERMAN, O., JOSEPH, A. & IZARD, J. (1972). Environmental effects on language development : A study of young children in long-stay residential nurseries. Child Development, 43, 337-358.
	TIZARD, B. & HODGES, J. (1978). The effect of early institutional rearing on the development of eight year old children. Journal of Child Psychology & Psychiatry, 19, 99-118.
	HODGES, J. & TIZARD, B. (1989). Social and family relationships of ex-institutional adolescents. Journal of Child Psychiatry & Psychology, 30, 77-97.
	TIZARD, B. (1991). Intercountry adoption : A review of the evidence. Journal of Child Psychology & Psychiatry, 32, 743–756.
	TIZARD, B. & PHOENIX, A. (1993). Black, white or mixed race ? : Race and racism in the lives of young people of mixed parentage. London : Routledge.

Tobin James (1918-2002) : Économiste américain et lauréat du prix Nobel d'économie en 1981. En 1972, il a suggéré une taxation des transactions monétaires internationales qui porte de nos jours son nom. Cette taxe avait pour but de réduire ou de décourager la spéculation boursière. Le taux de taxation proposé par Tobin oscillait entre 0,05 et 1 %.

	TOBIN, J. (1958). Liquidity preference as a behavior toward risk. Review of Economic Studies, 25, 65-86.

Tocqueville Alexis Henri Charles de Clérel de (Verneuil-sur-Seine/Paris 1805-1859 Cannes) : Philosophe et politoloque français. Élu à l'Académie en 1841 (fauteuil 18).

	TOCQUEVILLE, A. (1832). Du système pénitentiaire aux États-Unis.
	TOCQUEVILLE, A. (1835-1840/1963). De la démocratie en Amérique. Paris : Le monde en 10/18.
	TOCQUEVILLE, A. (1856). L'ancien régime et la révolution.

Todd James T. ( ) : Psychologue béhavioriste américain et historien de la psychologie, spécialisé dans l'étude du béhaviorisme. Collaborateur de Hart et Morris.

	TODD, J.T. & MORRIS, E.K. (1983). Misconception and miseducation : Presentations of radical behaviorism in psychology textbooks. The Behavior Analyst, 6, 153-160. [PDF]
	TODD, J.T. & MORRIS, E.K. (1986). The early research of J.B. Watson : Before the behavioral revolution. The Behavior Analyst, 9, 71-88. [PDF]
	TODD, J.T. (1987). The great power of steady misrepresentation : Behaviorism's presumed denial of instinct. The Behavior Analyst, 10, 117-118. [PDF]
	TODD, J.T. & MORRIS, E.K. (1992). Case studies in the great power of steady misrepresentation. American Psychologist, 47, 1441-1453.
	TODD, J.T. & MORRIS, E.K. (Eds.) (1995). Modern perspectives on B.F. Skinner and contemporary behaviorism. Westport, CT : Greenwood.

Todorov Alex ( ) : P sychosociologue américian, spécialisé dans l'étude de la reconnaissance du visage et des premières impressions. Collaborateur de Fiske.

	TODOROV, A. (2002). Communication effects on memory and judgment. European Journal of Social Psychology, 32, 531-546.
	TODOROV, A. MANDISODZA, A.N., GOREN, A. & HALL C.C. (2005). Inferences of competence from faces predict election outcomes. Science, 308, 1623-1626.
	WILLIS, J. & TODOROV, A. (2006). First impressions : Making up your mind after 100 ms exposure to a face. Psychological Science, 17, 592-598.
	GOREN, A. & TODOROV, A., (2009). Two faces are better than one : Eliminating false trait associations with faces. Social Cognition, 27, 222-248.
	TODOROV, A., PAKRASHI, M. & OOTERHOF, N.N. (2009). Evaluating faces on trustworthiness after minimal time exposure. Social Cognition, 27, 813-833.

Togeby Knud (1918-1974) : Linguiste danois et chef de file du Cercle linguistique de Copenhague. Collaborateur de Hjelmslev.

	TOGEBY, K. (1951). Structure immanente de la langue française. Copenhague : Nordisk sprog- og kulturforlag.
	TOGEBY, K. (1962). Comment écrire une grammaire historique des langues romanes?. Uppsala : Almqvist & Wiksells Boktryskeri.
	TOGEBY, K. (1962). L'infinitif dans les langues balkaniques. California : University of California Press.
	TOGEBY, K. (1966). Le sort du plus-que-parfait latin dans les langues romanes. Genève : Droz.
	TOGEBY, K. (174). Précis historique de grammaire française. Copenhague: Akademisk Forla.

Toilettage : Chez la plupart des mammifères et des oiseaux, comportement qui consiste à débrasser son corps d'un congénère de ses poux (ou de tout autre parasite), en les extirpant un à un au moyen de ses doigts/pattes, de ses dents ou de son bec, selon le cas. Toilettage et épouillage. Personal grooming.

	IVERSEN, I.H., RAGNARSDOTTIR, G.A. & RANDRUP, K.I. (1984). Operant conditioning of autogrooming in vervet monkeys (Cercopithecus aethiops). Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 42, 171-189. [PDF]

Tolérance : Toute chose que l'on acceptepassivement, sans en admettre la pertinence ou le bien-fondé. Tolerance.

	SCHWARTZ, S.H. (1996). Tolerance : Should we approve of it, put up with it, or tolerate it? Academe, 82 (3), 24-28.

Tolman Charles W. ( ) : Psychologue et historien de la psychologie.

	TOLMAN, C.W. (1989). For a materialist psychology. Recent Trends in Theoretical Psychology, 2, 37-49.
	TOLMAN, C.W. (1991). Theoretical indeterminacy, pluralism and the conceptual concrete. Theory & Psychology, 1, 147-162.
	TOLMAN, C.W. (1993). Is there a functionalist psychology ? Contemporary Psychology, 38, 1318-1319.
	TOLMAN, C.W. (1996). The critical psychological view of subject and subjectivity. In C. Tolman, F. Cherry, R. Van Hezewijk & I. Lubek (Eds.), Problems of theoretical psychology (pp. 40-45). North York, Canada : Captus Press.
	TOLMAN, C.W. (1997). The moral obligations of psychological theorizing. History and Philosophy of Psychology Bulletin, 9 (1), 34-36.

Tolman Edward Chace (West Newton 1886-1959 Berkeley) : Psychologue béhavioriste-cognitiviste américain. Il a développé l'une des premières théories de l'apprentissage. On lui doit le concept de carte cognitive et d'apprentissage latent. Président de l'APA en 1937. Étudiant de Holt. Collaborateur de Brunswick.

No 45	TOLMAN, E.C. (1922). A new formula for behaviorism. Psychological Review, 29, 44-53.
	TOLMAN, E.C. (1932). Purposive behavior in animals and men. New York : Century.
	TOLMAN, E.C. (1938). The determinants of behavior at a choice point. Psychological Review, 45, 1-41.
	TOLMAN, E.C. (1948). Cognitive maps in rats and men. Psychological Review, 55, 189-208.
	TOLMAN, E.C. (1955). Principles of performance. Psychological Review, 62, 315-326.

Tomasello, Michael ( ) : Psychologue et primatologue cognitiviste américain, spécialiste de la psychologie comparée et de la cognition animale, notamment chez le chimpanzé. Collaborateur de Bates, Boesch, Call, Hare, Savage-Rumbaugh et Slobin.

	TOMASELLO, M., KRUGER, A.C. & RATNER, H.H. ( 1993). Cultural learning. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 16, 495-552.
	TOMASELLO, M. & CALL, J. (1997). Primate cognition. New York : Oxford University Press.
	TOMASELLO, M. (1999). The cultural origins of human cognition. Cambridge : Harvard University Press.
	HARE, B., CALL, J., AGNETTA, B. & TOMASELLO, M. (2000). Chimpanzees know what conspecifics do and do not see. Animal Behaviour, 59, 771-785.
	HARE, B. & TOMASELLO, M. (2004). Chimpanzees are more skillful in competitive than in cooperative cognitive tasks. Animal Behaviour, 68, 571-81.

Tomographie : Technique d'imagerie.

Tomkins Silvan Solomon (Philadelphie 1911-1991 New Jersey) : Psychologue cognitiviste américain, spécialisé dans l'étude des émotions. Collaborateur d'Izard.

	TOMKINS, S.S. (1947). The thematic apperception test. A theory and technique of interpretation. New York USA : Grune & Stratton.
	TOMKINS, S.S. (1962). Affect imagery consciousness : The positive affects. London : Tavistock.
	TOMKINS, S.S. (1963). Affect imagery consciousness : The negative affects. London : Tavistock.
	TOMKINS, S.S. & IZARD, C.E. (1965). Affect, cognition, and personality : Empirical Studies New York : Springer.
	TOMKINS, S.S. (1991). Affect imagery consciousness : The negative affects : Anger and fear. New York : Springer.

Tønnessen Finn Egil ( ) : Spécialiste norvégien de l'éducation, notamment de la dyslexie.

	TØNNESSEN, F.E. (1993). Do schools make any differences? On the variety of reading abilities in the 3rd and 8th grade in Norway. Scandinavian Journal of Educational Research, 37 (1), 75-88.
	TØNNESSEN, F.E. (1995). On defining "Dyslexia." Scandinavian Journal of Educational Research, 39 (2), 139-56.
	TØNNESSEN, F.E. (1997). Testerone and dyslexia. Pediatric Rehabilitation, 51-58.
	TØNNESSEN F.E (1999). Options and limitations of the cognitive psychological approach to the treatment of dyslexia : Special Series : Prevention and Treatment of Dyslexia. Journal of learning disabilities, 32 (5), 386-393.
	BENEVENTI, H., TØNNESSEN F.E., ERSLAND, L. & HUGDAHL, K. (2010). Working memory deficit in dyslexia : behavioral and fMRI evidence. International Journal of Neuroscience, 120, 51-9.

Tonus musculaire : État de contraction permanente des muscles striés, assurant l'équilibre du corps au repos et le maintien de la posture.

Tooby John ( ) : Psychologue américain et chef de file de la psychologie évolutionniste. Collaborateur de Barrett, Cosmides et Klein.

	TOOBY, J. & DEVORE, I. (1987). The reconstruction of hominid behavioral evolution through strategic modeling. In W. Kinzey (1987), Primate models of hominid behavior. New York : SUNY Press.
	TOOBY, J. & COSMIDES, L. (1990). On the universality of human nature and the uniqueness of the individual : The role of genetics and adaptation. Journal of Personality, 58 (1), 17-67.
	COSMIDES, L. & TOOBY, J. (1994). Origins of domain specificity : The evolution of functional organization. In L.A. Hirschfeld & S.A. Gelman (Eds.), Mapping the mind. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.
	COSMIDES, L. & TOOBY, J. (2000). Consider the source : The evolution of adaptations for decoupling and metarepresentation. In D. Sperber (Ed.), Metarepresentations : A multidisciplinary perspective (pp. 53-115). New York : Oxford University Press.
	TOOBY, J., COSMIDES, L. & BARRETT, H.C. (2005). Resolving the debate on innate ideas : Learnability constraints and the evolved interpenetration of motivational and conceptual functions. In P. Carruthers, S. Laurence & S. Stich (Eds.), The innate mind : structure and content. New York : Oxford University Press.

Topics in Early Childhood Special Education : Revue scientifique multidisciplinaire qui consacre ses pages à l'étude de l'émotion. Éditeur : Sage.

YOUNGBLADE, L.M. & BELSKY, J. (1989). Child maltreatment, infant-parent attachment security, and dysfuntional peer relationships in toddlerhood. Topics in Early Childhood Special Education, 9, 1-15.

Topique : Synonyme de théorie ou d'explication. EX: La première topique de Freud, qui permet d'expliquer le fonctionnement de l'inconscient et le développement de la personnalité, repose sur trois systèmes ou structures : inconscient, préconscient et conscient. La seconde topique, quant à elle, se fonde sur le ça, le moi et le surmoi. = théorie.

Topographie (d'une réponse ou d'un comportement) : Pour les béhavioristes, désigne la forme ou la nature d'un comportement par opposition à sa fréquence. = manière de. Topography.

Topographie	et	Fréquence
Se laver les mains dans la cusine en frottant ses paumes et ses ongles avec les doigts.		Se laver les mains trente fois par jour.

	GARCIA, E., BAER, D.M. & FIRESTONE, I. (1971). The development of generalized imitation within topographically determined boundaries. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 4 (2), 101-112. [PDF]	STOKES, P.D. & BALSAM, P.D. (1991). Effects of reinforcing preselected approximations on the topography of the rat’s bar press. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 55, 213-231. [PDF]
	MORGAN, L. & NEURINGER, A. (1990). Behavioral variability as a function of response topography and reinforcement contingency. Animal Learning & Behavior, 18, 257-263.	EMERSON, E., THOMPSON, S., REEVES, D., HENDERSON, D. & ROBERTSON, J. (1995). Descriptive analysis of multiple response topographies of challenging behaviors across two settings. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 16, 301-329.
	SUNDBERG, C.A. & SUNDBERG, M.L. (1990). Comparing topography-based verbal behavior with stimulus selection-based verbal behavior. The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 8, 31-41. [PDF]	AKINS, C.K. & DOMJAN, M. (1996). The topography of sexually conditioned behavior : Effects of a trace interval. Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology, 49B (4), 346-356.
	WACKER D.P., STEEGE, M.W., NORTHUP, J., SASSO, G., BERG, W., REIMERS, T., COOPER, L., CIGRAND, K. & DONN, L. (1990). A component analysis of functional communication training across three topographies of severe behavior problems. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 23, 417–429. [PDF]	BONES, R., KEENAN, M., ASKIN, D., ADAMS, L., TAYLOR, D. & NICHOLAS, O. (2001). The effects of response topography on functional equivalence class formation. The Psychological Record, 2001, 51, 89-110. [PDF]
		CATANIA, A. C., SVEINSDOTTIR, I, DELEON I., CHRISTENSEN, A. & HINELINE, P.N. (2002). The paradoxical vocabularies of topography-based and selection-based verbal behavior. European Journal of Behavior Analysis, 3, 81-85. [PDF]
	WRAIKAT, R., SUNDBERG, C.T. & MICHAEL, J. (1991).Topography-based and selection-based verbal behavior: A further comparison. The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 9, 1-17. [PDF]	SEVIN, B.M., GULOTTA, C.S., SIERP, B.J., ROSICA, L.A. & MILLER, L.J. (2002). Analysis of response covariation among multiple topographics of food refusal. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 35 (1), 65-68. [PDF]

Torgesen Joseph K. ( ) : Psychologue cognitiviste américain et spécialiste de l'éducation, notamment de l'apprentissage de la lecture et de la dyslexie. Collaborateur de Fletcher, Foorman, Lyon, Shaywitz, Shaywitz.

	TORGESEN, J.K. (1995). Phonological awareness : A critical factor in dyslexia. Orton Dyslexia Society.
	TORGESEN, J.K. (1997). The prevention and remediation of reading disabilities : Evaluating what we know from research. Journal of Academic Language Therapy, 1, 11-47.
	TORGESEN, J.K. (2000). Individual differences in response to early interventions in reading : The lingering problem of treatment resisters. Learning Disabilities Research and Practice, 15, 55-64.
	TORGESEN, J.K. (2002). The prevention of reading difficulties. Journal of School Psychology, 40, 7-26.
	TORGESEN, J.K. (2005). Remedial interventions for students with dyslexia : National goals and current accomplishments. In Richardson, S. & Gilger, J. (Eds.), Research-based education and intervention : What we need to know (pp. 103- 124). Boston : Intenational Dyslexia Association.

Tortue :

	HAILMAN, J.P. & JAEGER, R.G. (1967). On criteria for color preferences in turtles. Journal of Herpetology, 5, 83-85.

Tortue bio-mécanique : Robot en forme de tortue inventé par Walter en 1947. Il s'agit des tout premiers spécimens de robot capables d'apprendre.

	WALTER, W.G. (1950). An imitation of life. Scientific American, 42-45.
	WALTER, W.G. (1951). A machine that learns. Scientific American, 60-63.
	HOLLAND, O (2003). The first biologically inspired robots. Robotica, 21, 351-363. [PDF]

Torture : Sévices volontairement infligés à une victime dans le but de lui extirper des aveux ou des renseignements. Torture et violence. Torture.

	RASMUSSEN, O.V. & LUNDE, I. (1989). The treatment and rehabilitaion of victims of torture. International Journal of Mental Health, 18, 122-130.
	KELMAN, H.C. (1993). The social context of torture: Policy process and authority structure. In R.D. Crelinsten & A.P. Schmid (Eds.), The politics of pain : Torturers and their masters. (pp. 21-38). Leiden, The Netherlands : COMT, University of Leiden. [PDF]
	KONECNI, V.J. (2005). Abuse of prisoners at Abu Ghraib. Letter for the policy forum “Why ordinary people torture prisoners. Science, 307, 1873.
	COSTANZO, M.A., GERRITY, E. & LYKES, M.B. (2007). Psychologists and the use of torture in interrogations. Analyses of Social Issues & Public Policy, 7 (1), 7-20.

Tote (modèle) : Modèle de traitement de l'information développé en 1960 par Miller, Galanter et Pribram. = Test-Operate-Test-Exit.

	MILLER, G.A., GALANTER, E. & PRIBRAM, K.H. (1960). Plans and the structure of behavior. New York : Henry Holt and Company.

Toucher : Un des cinq sens. = palper. Touch, tactile stimulation

Sens

Toucher

	SMITH, D., GIER, J., WILLIS, F. (1982). Interpersonal touch and compliance with a marketing request. Basic & Applied Social Psychology 3, 35–38.
	CRUSCO, A. & WETZEL C., (1984). The midas touch : the effects of interpersonal touch on restaurant tipping. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin 10, 512–517.
	STIER, D.S. & HALL, J.A. (1984). Gender differences in touch : An empirical and theoretical review. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 47, 440-59.	GUÉGUEN, N. (2001). Toucher et soumission à une requête : Réplications expérimentales en situation naturelle et évaluation de l'impact du statut. Revue Internationale de Psychologie Sociale, 14 (3), 113-158. [PDF]
	STEPHEN, R. & ZWIEGENHAFT, R. (1986). The effect on tipping of a waitress touching male and female customers. The Journal of Social Psychology, 126, 141–142.
	HORNIK, J. (1987). The effect of touch and gaze upon compliance and interest of interviewees. The Journal of Social Psychology, 127, 681–683.	GUÉGUEN, N. (2002). Touch, awareness of touch and compliance to a request. Perceptual & Motor Skills, 95, 355-360. [PDF]
	HORNIK, J. (1992). Tactile stimulation and consumer response. Journal of Consumer Research 19, 449–458.
	HOFFMAN, H.G., HOLLANDER, A.,SCHROEDER, K., ROUSSEAU, S. & FURNESS, T.A., III (1998). Physically touching and tasting virtual objects enhances the realism of virtual experiences. Virtual Reality : Research, Development & Application, 3, 226-234.	GUÉGUEN, N. (2002). Encouragement non-verbal à participer en cours : l'effet du toucher. Psychologie & Education, 51, 95-107. [PDF]
	HALL, J.A. & VECCIA, E.M. (1990). More “touching” observations : New insights on men, women, and interpersonal touch. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 59, 1155-1162.	GUÉGUEN, N. & FISHER-LOKOU, J. (2002). An evaluation of touch on a large request : A field setting. Psychological Reports, 90, 267-269. [PDF]
	CRAWFORD, C.B. (1994). Effects of sex and sex roles on same-sex touch. Perceptual & Motor Skills, 78, 391-394.	FISHER-LOKOU, J. & GUÉGUEN, N. (2003), Le toucher comme mode de régulation du conflit : de l'influence d'une variable non-verbale (pp. 27-38). In B.M. Garreau (Ed.), Dynamiques du conflit. Lorient : CRELLIC, Université de Bretagne-Sud : [PDF]
	CRAWFORD, C.B. (1994). Effects of sex and sex roles on avoidance of same- and opposite-sex touch. Perceptual & Motor Skills, 79, 107-112.	FISHER-LOKOU, J. & GUÉGUEN, N. (2004). Influence non verbale dans le cadre de la médiation : effets du toucher et du statut sur la prédisposition à atteindre un accord. Cahiers Internationaux de Psychologie Sociale,. 61, 35-42. [PDF]
	LYNN, M., LE, J.-M., SHERWYN, D. (1998). Reach out and touch your customers. Cornell Hotel and Restaurant Administration Quaterly 39, 60–65.
	FIELD, T. (1999). Preschoolers in American are touched less and are more aggressive than preschoolers in France. Early Childhood Development & Care, 151, 11–17.	GUÉGUEN, N. (2004). Nonverbal encouragement of participation in a course: the effect of touch. Social Psychology of Education 7, 89–98.
	FIELD, T. (1999). American adolescents touch each other less and are more aggressive toward their peers as compared with French adolescents. Adolescence 34, 753–758.
	KAUFMAN, D. & MAHONEY, J. (1999). The effect of waitresses’ touch on alcohol consumption in dyads. The Journal of Social Psychology 139, 261–267.
	GUÉGUEN, N. & DE GAIL, M.-A. (2000). Le toucher : un indicateur implicite du statut et du rôle. Communication & Organisation : N° Spécial Non-verbal, Communication, Organisation, 18, 135-145.	GUÉGUEN, N. & JACOB, C. (2006). Touch and consumer behavior : A new experimental evidence in a field setting, International Journal of Management, 23 (1), 24-33. [PDF]
	GUÉGUEN, N. (2001). L'effet d'influence du toucher sur le comportement du consommateur : 2 illustrations expérimentales en extérieur. Direction et Gestion : La Revue des Sciences de Gestion, 190-191, 123-132.

Toulmin Stephen Edelston (London 1922-) : Épistémologue, logicien et historien des sciences anglais. Collaborateur de Kneale.

	TOULMIN, S. (1953). The philosophy of science : An introduction. London : Hutchison University Library.
	TOULMIN, S. (1958). The uses of argument. Cambridge : University Press.
	TOULMIN, S. (1972). Human understanding. Oxford : Clarendon.
	TOULMIN, S. (1990). Cosmopolis : The hidden agenda of Modernity. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
	TOULMIN, S. (2001). Return to reason. Harvard University Press.

Toumai :

	BRUNET, M., GUY, F., PILBEAM, D., MACKAYE, H.T. & LIKIUS, A. (2002). A new hominid from the Upper Miocene of Chad, Central Africa. Nature, 418, 145-151.

Toupin Louise ( ) : Politologue et féministe québécoise. Elle enseigne à l'Université du Québec À Montréal. Collaboratrice de Dumont.

	TOUPIN, L. (1993). Peut-on faire l'histoire du féminisme? Recherches féministes, 6 (1), 25-51.
	TOUPIN, L. (1996). Des 'usages' de la maternité en histoire du féminisme. Recherches féministes, 9 (2), 113-135.
	DUMONT, M. et TOUPIN, L. (Dir.) (2003). La pensée féministe au Québec. Anthologie (1900-1985). Montréal : Éditions du remue-ménage.
	TOUPIN, L. (2003). À l'occasion du débat sur le "trafic des femmes", le féminisme radical connaît une nouvelle secousse. Canadian Women's Studies/Les Cahiers de la femme, 22 (3/4), 203-207.
	TOUPIN, L. (2005). Voir les nouvelles figures du féminisme et entendre leurs voix. Dans M.N. Mensah (Dir.), Dialogues sur la troisième vague du féminisme (p. 74-87). Montréal : Éditions du remue-ménage.

Touraine Alain (Hermanville-sur-Mer France 1925-) : Sociologue français.

	TOURAINE, A. (1965). Sociologie de l'action. Paris : Seuil.
	TOURAINE, A. (1969). La société post-industrielle. Paris : Denoël.
	TOURAINE, A. (1982). Critique de la modernité. Paris : Fayard.
	TOURAINE, A. (1994). Qu'est-ce que la démocratie? Paris : Fayard.
	TOURAINE, A. (1997). Pourrons-nous vivre ensemble? Égaux et différents. Paris : Fangard.

Tourigny Marc ( ) : Psychologue écologiste québécois et professeur à l'Université de Sherbrooke. Il se spécialise dans l'étude de la maltraitance. Collaborateur de Wright.

	TOURIGNY, M., LAVOIE, F., VÉZINA, J. & PELLETIER, V. (2006). La violence subie par des adolescentes dans leurs fréquentations amoureuses : incidence et facteurs associés. Revue de Psychoéducation, 35 (2), 323-354.
	TOURIGNY, M. & HÉBERT, M. (2007). Comparison of open versus closed group interventions for sexually abused adolescent girls. Violence & Victims, 22 (3), 335-350.
	TOURIGNY, M. (2008). Efficacité d’une thérapie de groupe pour adolescentes agressées sexuellement : suivi six mois après la thérapie. Revue Québécoise de Psychologie, 29 (3), 117-131.
	TOURIGNY, M., JACOB, M., MAYER, M., DAIGNEAULT, I., HÉBERT, M. & WRIGHT, J. (2009). Facteurs associés à la rétention des signalements impliquant une situation d’abus sexuel. Child Abuse & Neglect, 33 (12), 888-896.
	TOURIGNY, M., POIRIER, M. A., DION, J. & BOISVERT, I. (2010). Recommandation de placement de l’enfant dans le contexte de la protection de la jeunesse : Facteurs associés. Revue de Psychoéducation, 39 (2), 165-187.

Tours de Hanoi : Épreuve qui vise à évaluer la capacité de résolution de problème. Le but du test consiste à reconstruire la tour A en déplacant les trois anneaux un à un de B en C. Il n'y a qu'une seule règle à respecter : un anneau ne doit jamais reposer sur un anneau plus petit.

	KOTOVSKY, K. HAYES, J R. & SIMON, H. A. (1985).Why are some problems hard? Evidence from Tower of Hanoi. Cognitive Psychology , 17, 248-294.
	WELSH, M.C., SETTERLEE-CARTMELL, T. & STINE, M. (1999). Towers of Hanoi and London : contribution of working memory and inhibition to performance. Brain & Cognition, 41 (2), 231-243.

Tousignant Michel ( ) : Psychologue écologiste québécois et professeur à l'Université du Québec à Montréal. Il se spécialise dans l'étude du suicide. Collaborateur de Mishara.

	TOUSIGNANT, M. (1992). La santé mentale des migrants : analyse de son contexte social et longitudinal. Santé mentale au Québec, vol. XVII (2), 35-46.
	TOUSIGNANT, M., BASTIEN, M.F. et HAMEL, S. (1994). Prévenir le suicide chez les jeunes : une offensive à plusieurs volets. Revue Québécoise de Psychologie, 15 (2), 113-127.
	TOUSIGNANT, M. (1994). Les origines sociales et culturelles des troubles psychologiques. Paris : Les Presses universitaires de France.
	TOUSIGNANT, M., SÉGUIN, M., LESAGE, A. CHAWKY, N. et TURECKY, G. (2003). Le suicide chez les hommes de 18 à 55 ans : trajectoires de vie. Revue Québécoise de Psychologie, 24 (1), 145-160.
	TOUSIGNANT, M. & MISHARA, B. (2004). Comprendre le suicide. Montréal : Presses de l'Université de Montréal.

Tout : Quantificateur universel. Any.

	DAVISON, A. (1980). Any as universal or existential ? In J. van der Auwera (Ed.), The semantics of determiners. Londres : Croom Helm.

Tout est différent de la somme de ses parties (Le...) : Principe de la gestalt qui stipule que notre cerveau a tendance à regrouper en un tout cohérent - de manière automatique - des éléments épars; l'objet formé par ce tout - on dit aussi gestalt - possède alors une signification différente de la totalité de ses éléments. EX: Les différents sons (éléments) produit par un groupe de musique forment une pièce de musique (un tout).

Toutes catégories confondues : En statistique, expression qui désigne une opération qui consiste à fondre en une seule catégorie ou groupe tous les éléments de toutes les catégories/groupes. = toutes choses confondues, former un seul groupe, une seule catégorie, un seul indicateur.

Toutes choses égales par ailleurs (Principe du... ) : Cette expression, que l'on doit à Bernard, désigne un principe méthodologique qui stipule que tous les facteurs susceptibles d'influencer le phénomène que l'on tente d'expliquer (Y ou la variable dépendante) sont égaux, sauf un, celui que le chercheur considère comme la cause réelle (= X), et qui varie naturellement (variable indépendante assignée/évoquée) ou à la suite d'une manipulation expérimentale (variable indépendante maipulée/provoquée). Toutes choses étant égales par ailleurs et groupes équivalents. = ceteris paribus.

Townsend James T. ( ) : Psychologue connexioniste américain, spécialisé dans l'étude de la reconnaissance et le développement de modèles neuraux. Collaborateur de Ashby.

	TOWNSEND, J.T. (1972). Some results concerning the identifiability of parallel and serial processes. British Journal of Mathematical and Statistical Psychology, 25, 168-199.
	TOWNSEND, J.T. & ASHBY, F.G. (1982). An experimental test of contemporary mathematical models of visual letter recognition. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Perception and Performance, 8, 834-864.
	TOWNSEND, J.T. & NOZAWA, G. (1995). Spatio-temporal properties of elementary perception : An investigation of parallel, serial and coactive theories. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 39, 321-360.
	TOWNSEND, J.T. & WENGER, M.J. (2004). A theory of interactive parallel processing : New capacity measures and predictions for a response time inequality series. Psychological Review, 111 (4), 1003-1035.
	TOWNSEND, J.T. & HONEY, C.J. (2007). Consequences of base time for redundant signals experiments. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 51, 242-265.

Towse John ( ) : Psychologue cognitiviste américain d'origine anglaise, spécialisé dans l'étude de la mémoire, et plus particulièrement de la mémoire de travail chez les enfants. Collaborateur de Baddeley et Conway.

	TOWSE, J.N. & HOUSTON-PRICE, C.M.T. (2001). Reflections on the concept of the central executive. In J. Andrade (Ed.), Working memory in perspective (pp. 240-260). Hove, England : Psychology Press.
	TOWSE, J.N., HITCH, G.J. & HUTTON, U. (2002). On the nature of the relationship between processing activity and item retention in children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 82 (2), 156-184.
	TOWSE, J.N.& COWAN, N. (2005). Working memory and its relevance for cognitive development. In W. Schneider, R. Schumann-Hengsteler & B. Sodian (Eds.), Young children's cognitive development: Interrelationships Among Executive Functioning, Working Memory, Verbal Ability, and Theory of Mind (pp. 9-37). Mahwah, New Jersey: LEA.
	TOWSE, J.N., LEWIS, C. & KNOWLES, M. (2007). When knowledge is not enough : the phenomenon of goal neglect in preschool children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 96, 320-332.
	TOWSE, J.N., HITCH, G.J., HAMILTON, Z. & PIRRIE, S. (2008). The endurance of childrens working memory : a recall time analysis. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 101, 156-163.

Toxicicité : Propriété d'une substance qui, suivant la dose, peut empoisonner un organisme. Toxicité, posologie et médicament. Toxicity.

Toxicomanie/Toxicomane : Dépendance à toute substance toxique, notamment aux drogues (légales ou non), à l'alcool et aux solvants. Toxicomanie et sevrage. Drug-addiction, drug abuse.

	COHEN, D. et COLLIN, J. (2000). Les toxicomanies liées aux médicaments psychotropes chez les personnes âgées, les femmes et les enfants. Québec, Canada : Gouvernement du Québec.
	STANTON, M. & SHADISH, W. (1997). Outcome, attrition and family-couples treatment for drug abuse : a meta-analysis and review of the controlled comparative studies. Psychological Bulletin, 122, 170-191
	AKINS, C.K. & LEVENS, N. (2007). Sexual effects and drugs of abuse : Possible learning mechanisms. In S.K. Turrini (Ed), Consciousness and learning (pp. 79-95). Hauppauge, NY : Nova Science Publishers.

Trace mnésique : Voir Engramme.

Tradition : Chez les humains et certains mammifères ou oiseaux, ensemble de comportements transmis de génération en génération. Tradition et transmission culturelle. Tradition.

	GALEF, B.G. (1996). Traditions in animals. Field observations and laboratory analyses. In M. Bekoff & D. Jamieson (Eds.) Readings in animal cognition (pp. 91-106). Cambridge, MA : MIT Press.
	AVITAL, E. & JABLONKA, E. (2000). Animal traditions : Behavioural inheritance in evolution. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.
	GALEF, B.G. (2004). Animal traditions : the social transmission of behavior. In M. Naguib (Ed.), Encyclopedia of language and linguistics. Oxford : Elsevier.

Trafic des femmes : Commerce illégale de vente de femmes pour des fins de prostitution ou d'esclavage.

	UGARTE, M.B., ZARATE, L., & FARLEY, M. (2003) Prostitution and trafficking of women and children from Mexico to the United States. Journal of Trauma Practice, 2 (3/4), 147-165. [PDF]
	FARLEY, M. (2003) (Ed.) Prostitution, trafficking, and traumatic stress. Binghamton, NY: Haworth.
	FARLEY, M., COTTON, A., LYNNE, J., ZUMBECK, S., SPIWAK, F., REYES, M.E., ALVAREZ, D. & SEZGIN, U. (2003). Prostitution and trafficking in 9 countries : Update on violence and posttraumatic stress disorder. Journal of Trauma Practice, 2 (3/4), 33-74. [PDF]
	FARLEY, M. & SEO, S. (2006) Prostitution and Trafficking in Asia. Harvard Asia Pacific Review 8 (2), 9-12.
	FARLEY, M. (2006) Prostitution, trafficking, and cultural amnesia: What we must not know in order to keep the business of sexual exploitation running smoothly. Yale Journal of Law and Feminism, 18, 109-144.

Training autogène : Technique de relaxation développée par Schultz. = entraînement autogène.

Trait (de personnalité) : Selon la théorie, ce concept renvoie: a) à un adjectif qui permet de qualifier les comportements d'un individus (EX: Cet enfant est intelligent, cette femme est paresseuse). Le trait n'est ici qu'un mot, il n'a pas d'existence psychologie propre; b) à des propriétés mentales ou cognitives déterminantes du comportement (EX: cet enfant a de bons résultats à l'école car il est intelligent; cette femme étire ses pauses car elle est paresseuse). Ici, le trait désigne une disposition psychologique, innée ou acquises, qui peut remplir plusieurs fonctions. Chez certains auteurs, comme Allport, la personnalité est formée d'un ensemble de traits qui oriente les comportements et permet de sélectionner ou de trier les stimuli qui influencent la fréquence ou la nature de ces comportements. ( ): trait cardinal, trait central, trait d'aptitude, trait de source, trait de surface, trait de tempérament, trait dynamique, trait secondaire. Trait.

	ALLPORT. G.W. (1927). Concepts of trait and personality. Psychological Bulletin, 24, 284-293.	SZIRMAK, Z. & DE RAAD, B. (1994). Taxonomy and structure of Hungarian personality traits. European Journal of Personality, 8, 95-117.
	GUILFORD, J.P. (1958). Basic traits in intelligence performances. In C.W. Taylor (Ed.), Second research conference on identification of creative scientific talent (pp. 66-81). Salt Lake City, Utah : University of Utah.	McCRAE, R.R., COSTA, P.T. (1995). Trait explanations in personality psychology. European Journal of Personality, 9, 231-252.
	D'ANDRADE, R.G. (1965). Trait psychology and componential analysis. American Anthropologist, 67 (5), 215-228.	McCRAE, R.R., COSTA, P.T.. (1997). Personality trait structure as a human universal. American Psychologist, 52, 509-516.
	SHERMAN, S.J. & FAZIO, R.H. (1983). Parallels between attitudes and traits as predictors of behavior .Journal of Personality, 51, 308-345.	McCRAE, R.R. (2001). Traits through time. Psychological Inquiry, 12, 85-87.
	HUESMANN, L.R. & ERON, L.D. (1989). Individual differences and the trait of aggression. European Journal of Personality, 3 (2), 95-106. [PDF]	McCRAE, R.R. (2001). Trait psychology and culture : Exploring intercultural comparisons. Journal of Personality, 69, 819-846.
	MEEHL, P.E. (1992). Factors and taxa, traits and types, differences of degree and differences in kind. Journal of Personality, 60, 117-174.	PETRIDES, K.V. FREDERICKSON, N. & FURNHAM, A. (2004). The role of trait emotional intelligence in academic performance and deviant behavior at school. Personality & Individual Differences, 36, 277-293. [PDF]
		PETRIDES, K.V., VERNON, P. A., AITKEN, SCHERMER, J. & VESELKA, L. (2011). Trait emotional intelligence and the Dark Triad traits of personality. Twin Research & Human Genetics, 14, 35-41. [PDF]
		PETRIDES, K.V., (2011). A general mechanism for linking personality traits to affect, motivation, and action. New Ideas in Psychology, 29, 64-71. [PDF]

Trait cardinal : Chez Allport, trait de personnalité tellement envahissant qu'il influence l'ensemble des comportements. EX: Certains individus sont tellement anxieux que cela imprègne presque que toutes leurs conduites. Cardinal trait.

Trait central : Chez Allport, trait de la personnalité fondamental qui influence le comportement de l'indivudu dans un ensemble de situations. /trait secondaire. Central trait.

Trait centraux (La théorie des cinq...) : Théorie de la personnalité proposée par Costa et McCrae, qui se fonde sur l'existence de cinq traits centraux. Ces cinq traits sont : extraversion, névrosisme, agrabilité, ouverture à l'expérience, conscienceux. /trait secondaire. Big five, five factor model, Big Five Personality Traits.

	McCRAE, R.R. & COSTA, P.T. (1983). Joint factors in self-reports and ratings: Neuroticism, extraversion and openness to experience. Personality & Individual Differences, 4, 245-255.	SAUCIER, G. & GOLDBERG, L.R. (1998). What is beyond the Big Five? Journal of Personality, 66, 495-524.
	McCRAE, R.R. & COSTA, P.T. (1987). Validation of the five-factor model of personality across instruments and observers. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 52 (1), 81–90.	JEFFERSON, T., HERBST, J.H. & McCRAE, R.R. (1998). Associations between birth order and personality traits : Evidence from self-reports and observer ratings. Journal of Research in Personality, 32, 498-509.
	McCRAE, R.R. & COSTA, P.T. (1989). More reasons to adopt the five-factor model. Special Issue: Children and their development: Knowledge base, research agenda, and social polic. American Psychologist, 44, 451-452.	MOUNT, M.K. & BARRICK, M.R. (1998). Five reasons why the "Big Five" article has been frequently cited. Personnel Psychology, 51, 849-857.
	DIGMAN, J.M. (1990). Personality structure : Emergence of the five-factor model. Annual Review of Psychology, 41, 417-440.	LOEHLIN, J.C., McCRAE, R.R., COSTA, P.T. & JOHN, O.P. (1998). Heritabilities of common and measure-specific components of the Big Five personality factors. Journal of Research in Personality, 32, 431-453.
	GOLDBERG, L.R. (1990). An alternative “description of personality”: The big-five factor structure. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 59 (6), 216-1229.	SOLDZ, S. & VAILLANT, G.E. (1999). The Big Five personality traits and the life course : A 45-year longitudinal study. Journal of Research in Personality, 33, 208-232.
	JOHN, O.P. (1990). The "Big Five" factor taxonomy : Dimensions of personality in the natural language and in questionnaires. In L. A. Pervin (Ed.), Handbook of personality : Theory and research (pp. 66-100). New York : Guilford.	JOHN, O.P. & SRIVASTAVA, S. (1999). The Big-Five trait taxonomy : History, measurement, and theoretical perspectives. In L.A. Pervin & O.P. John (Eds.), Handbook of personality : Theory and research (Vol. 2, pp. 102-138). New York : Guilford Press.
	BARRICK, M.R. & MOUNT, M.K. (1991). The big five personality dimensions and job performance : A meta-analysis. Personnel Psychology, 44, 1-26.	PAUNONEN, S.V. & JACKSON, D.N. (2000). What is beyond the Big Five? Plenty! Journal of Personality, 68, 821-835.
	MILLER, T.R. (1991). The psychotherapeutic utility of the five-factor model of personality : a clinician's experience. Journal of Personality Assessment, 57 (3), 415-433.
	McCRAE, R.R. & JOHN, O.P. (1992). An introduction to the five-factor model and its applications. Journal of Personality, 60 (2), 175–215.	PAUNONEN, S.V & ASHTON, M.S. (2001). Big Five factors and facets and the prediction of behavior. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 81 (3), 524–539.
	GOLDBERG, L.R. (1992). The development of markers for the Big-five factor structure. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 59 (6), 1216–1229.	GOSLING, S.D., RENFROW, P.J. & SWANN, W B. (2003). A very brief measure of the Big-Five personality domains. Journal of Research in Personality, 37 (6), 504–528.
	McCRAE, R.R. & COSTA, P.T.. (1996). Toward a new generation of personality theories : Theoretical contexts for the five-factor model. In J.S. Wiggins (Ed.), The five-factor model of personality : Theoretical perspectives (pp. 51-87). New York : Guilford.	DE FRUYT, F., McCRAE, R.R., SZIRMAK, Z. & NAGY, J. (2004). The five-factor personality inventory as a measure of the five-factor model : Belgian, American, and Hungarian comparisons with the NEO-PI-R. Assessment, 11, 207-215.
	BUSS, D.M. (1996). Social adaptation and five major factors of personality. In J.S. Wiggins (Ed.), The five-factor model of personality : Theoretical perspectives (pp. 180-207). New York : Guilford.	SAULSMAN, L.M. & PAGE, A.C. (2004). The five-factor model and personality disorder empirical literature : A meta-analytic review. Clinical Psychology Review, 23, 1055-1085.
	WIGGINS, J.S. (Ed.) (1996). The five-factor model of personality : Theoretical perspectives. New York : Guilford.	TYLER, G., NEWCOMBE, P. & BARRETT P. (2005). The Chinese challenge to the Big-5. Selection & Development Review, 21, 10-14.
	CATTELL, H.E. (1996). The original big five : A historical perspective. European Review of Applied Psychology, 46, 5–14.	McCRAE, R.R. et COSTA, P.T. (2006). Perspectives de la théorie des Cinq Facteurs : Traits et Culture. Psychologie Française, 51, 227-244.
	JANG, K., LIVESLEY, W.J. & VERNON, P.A. (1996). Heritability of the Big Five Personality Dimensions and their facets: A twin study. Journal of Personality, 64 (3), 577–591.	SCHMITT, D.P., ALLIK, J., MCCRAE, R.R. & BENET-MARTÍNEZ, V. (2007). The geographic distribution of Big Five Personality Traits : Patterns and profiles of human self-description Across 56 nations. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 38, 173-212. [PDF]
	ARTHUR, W. & GRAZIANO, W. (1996). The five-factor model, conscientiousness, and driving accident involvement. Journal of Personality, 64, 593-618.	SCHMITT, D.P., REALO, A., VORACEK, M. & ALLIK, J. (2008). Why can't a man be more like a woman ? Sex differences in Big Five personality traits across 55 cultures. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 94, 168-182.
	LANGSTON, C.A. & SYKES, W.E. (1997). Beliefs and the big five. Journal of Research in Personality, 31, 142-165.	POROPAT, A.E. (2009). A meta-analysis of the five-factor model of personality and academic performance. Psychological Bulletin, 135 (2), 322–338.
	DIGMAN, J.M. (1997). Higher-order factors of the Big Five. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 73, 1246-1256.	FURNHAM, A., CRUMP, S.V. & SWAMI, V. (2009). Abstract reasoning and Big Five personality correlates of creativity in a British Occupational sample. Imagination, Cognition & Personality, 28 (4), 361-370.
	TRULL, T.J. & GEARY, D.C. (1997). Comparison of the big-five factor structure across samples of Chinese and American adults. Journal of Personality Assessment, 69 (2), 324-341.	BLOCK, J. (2010). The five-factor framing of personality and beyond : Some ruminations. Psychological Inquiry, 21(1), 2-25.

Trait d'aptitude (de personnalité) : Chez Cattel, disposition qui... Ability trait.

Trait de source (de personnalité) : Chez Cattel, disposition qui... Source trait.

Trait de surface : Chez Cattel, Surface trait.

Trait de tempérament : Chez Cattel, Temperament trait.

Trait dynamique (de personnalité) : Disposition qui... Dynamic trait.

Trait secondaire (de personnalité) : Chez Allport, trait de la personnalité qui dispose l'individu à se comportement de manière x dans un certain nombre de situation. /trait central.

Traitement (expérimental) : Variable à laquelle sont soumis les participants d'une recherche. Parfois utilisé pour noter la variable indépendante d'une recherche appliquée, par opposition à l'absence de traitement (groupe contrôle ou placebo). = intervention, variable expérimentale ou quasi-expérimentale, variable indépendante provoquée ou manipulée.

Traitement (thérapeutique) : En psychologie clinique, synonyme de thérapie ou de cure. Ensemble des techniques qui vise à aider et guérir le malade/patient/client. En psychiatrie, le traitement prend habituellement la forme d'une thérapie médicamenteuse. Traitement, principe actif, et adhérence au traitement. = intervention. treatment.

	PERSONS, J.B. (1995). Why Practicing psychologists are slow to adopt empirically-validated treatments. In S.C. Hayes, V.M. Follette, R.M. Dawes & K.E. Grady (Eds), Scientific standards of psychological practice. Context Press.
	BEYERSTEIN, B.L. (1999) Social and judgmental biases that make inert treatments seem to work. Scientific Review of Alternative Medicine, 13 (2), 20-33.
	MICHAEL, K.D. & CROWLEY, S.L. (2002). How effective are treatments for children and adolescent depression? A meta-analytic review. Clinical Psychology Review, 22, 247-269.
	NATHAN, P.E & GORMAN, J.M. (2007). A guide to treatments that work. New York : University press.

Traitement automatique : Traitement de l'information dont l'exécution ne requiert ni attention, ni conscience, et qui de ce fait peut difficilement être interrompu. Traitement automatique et automatisme. = inconscient cognitif, automaticité, automatisme. Automatic processes, automatic processing, automatic human information processing, automaticity.

	SHIFFRIN, R.M. & SCHNEIDER, W. (1977). Controlled and automatic human information processing : II. Perceptual learning, automatic attending, and a general theory. Psychological Review, 84, 127-190.	LOGAN, G.D. (1992). Shapes of reaction-time distributions and shapes of learning curves : a test of the instance theory of automaticity. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Learning, Memory and Cognition, 18, 883-914.
	JACOBY, L.L. & WITHERSPOON, D. (1982). Remembering without awareness. Canadian Journal of Psychology, 36, 300-324.[PDF]
	WINTER, L., ULEMAN, J.S. & CUNNIFF, C. (1985). How automatic are social judgments? Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 49, 904-917.	COHEN, J.D., SERVAN-SCHREIBER, D. & McCLELLAND, J.L. (1992). A parallel distributed processing approach to automaticity. American Journal of Psychology, 105, 239-269.
	LOGAN, G.D. (1981). Attention, automaticity, and the ability to stop a speeded choice response. In J. Long & A. D. Baddeley (Eds.), Attention and performance IX. Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.	AJZEN, I. & FISHBEIN, M. (2000). Attitudes and the attitude-behavior relation : Reasoned and automatic processes. In W. Stroebe M. Hewstone (Eds.), European Review of Social Psychology (pp. 1-33). John Wiley & Sons.
	LOGAN, G.D. (1988). Toward an instance theory of automatization. Psychological Review, 95, 492-527.	ASHBY, F.G., NNIS, J M, & PIERINGg, B.J. (2007). A neurobiological theory of automaticity in perceptual categorization. Psychological Review, 114, 632-656.
	LOGAN, G.D. (1990). Repetition priming and automaticity : Common underlying mechanisms? Cognitive Psychology, 22, 1-35.

Traitement de l'information : Ensemble des structures et des fonctions cognitives responsables de l'analyse de l'information dans le cerveau virtuel. Cet ensemble est calqué par analogie sur le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur, la thèse sous-jacente étant qu'un cerveau humain ou animal est une machine à résoudre des problèmes. Pour y parvenir, il faut traiter l'information disponible afin de trouver la meilleure solution possible, solution qui se matérialisera sous forme de comportement (output). = computation. ( ): algorithme, attention, balayage,cognition, indexer, information, mémoire, perception, rappel, reconnaissance, schémas, script, unité de traitement, etc. Information processing, information processing system.

	MILLER, G.A. (1956). The magical number seven, plus or minus two : Some limits on our capacity for processing information. Psychological Review, 63, 81-97.	NORMAN, D.A. & RUMELHART, D.E. (1981). The LNR approach to human information processing. Cognition, 10, 235-240.
	NEWELL, A. & SIMON, H.A. (1956). The logic theory machine : A complex information processing system. IRE Transactions on Information Theory, IT-2 (3), 61-79.	EDELL, J.A. & STAELIN, R. (1983). The information processing of pictures in print advertisements. Journal of Consumer Research, 10, 45-61.
	NEWELL, A. & SIMON, H.A.(1961). Computer simulation of human thinking. Science, 134 (3495), 2011-2017.	SOWA, J.F. (1984). Conceptual structures : Information processing in mind and machine. Reading, MA : Addison-Wesley.
	DANSEREAU, D. & GREGG, L.W. (1966). An information processing analysis of mental multiplication. Psychonomic Science, 6, 71-72.	SPERLING, G. & DOSHER, B.A. (1986). Strategy and optimization in human information processing. In K. Boff, L. Kaufman & J. Thomas (Eds.), Handbook of perception and human performance : Sensory processes and perception (Vol. 1., pp. 2-1 to 2-65.) New York : Wiley.
	BERLYNE, D.E. (1957). Uncertainty and conflict : a point contact between information-theory and behavior- theory concepts. Psychological Review, 64, 329- 339.	SWANSON, H. L. (1987). lnformation-processing theory and learning disabilities : An overview. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 20, 3-7.
	STERNBERG, S. (1969). The discovery of processing stages: Extensions of Donder’s method. Acta Psychologica, 30, 276-315.	BOCK, O. & DAUNICHT, W.J. (1987). Information processing in goal-directed movements. Behavior & Brain Research, 23, 23-28.
	ERKSEN, C.W. & SPENCER, T. (1969). Rate of information processing in visual perception : Some results and methodological considerations. Journal of Experimental Psychology Monograph, 79 (2), 1-16.	HUESMANN, L.R. (1988). An information processing model for the development of aggression. Aggressive Behavior, 14, 13-24. [PDF]
	SULS, J. M. (1972). A two-stage model for the appreciation of jokes and cartoons : An information processing analysis. In J.H. Goldstein & P.E. McGee (Eds.), The psychology of humor : Theoretical perspectives and empirical issues (pp. 81-100). New York : Academic Press.	DODGE, K.A. & CRICK, N.R. (1990). Social information-processing bases of aggressive behavior in children. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 16, 8-22.
	CRAIK, F.I.M. & LOCKHART, R.S. (1972). Levels of processing : A framework for memory research. Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior, 11, 671-684.	SEARLE, J.R. (1990). Is the brain a digital computer? Proceedings and Addresses of the APA, 64 (3).
	SCHANK, R.C. (1975). Conceptual information processing. New York : Elsevier.	JENSEN, A.R. (1990). Speed of information processing in a calculating prodigy. Intelligence, 14, 259-274.
	LOFTUS, G.F. & LOFTUS, E.F. (1976). Human memory : The processing of information. Hillsdale, NJ : Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.	CRICK, N.R. & DODGE, K.A. (1994). A review and reformulation of social information-processing mechanisms in children's social adjustment. Psychological Bulletin, 115, 74-101.
	KOSSLYN, S.M., HOLYOAK, K.J. & HUFFMAN, C.S. (1976). A processing approach to the dual coding hypothesis. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Human Learning and Memory, 2, 223-233.	RAYNER, K. (1998). Eye movements in reading and information processing. Psychological Bulletin, 124, 372-422.
	STERNBERG, R.J. (1977). Intelligence, information, processing, and analogical reasoning. Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.	WYER, R.S., CLORE, G.L. & ISBELL, L.M. (1999). Affect and information processing. In M.P. Zanna (Ed.), Advances in experimental social psychology (Vol. 31, pp. 1-77). San Diego, CA : Academic Press.
	HARRIS, R.J. & MONACO, G.E. (1978). Psychology of pragmatic implication : Information processing between the lines. Journal of Experimental Psychology : General, 107, 1-22.
	CARTER, D.E. & WERNER, T.J. (1978). Complex learning and information processing by pigeons : A critical analysis. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 29, 565-601.	MANDLER, G. (2002). Organization : What the levels of processing are levels of. Memory, 10, 333-338.
	BETTMAN, J.R. (1979). An information processing theory of consumer choice. Addison Wesley, MA, Reading.	POLLOCK, E., CHANDLER, P. & SWELLER, J. (2002). Assimilating complex information. Learning & Instruction, 12, 61–86.
	BJORK, R.A. (1979). An information-processing analysis of college teaching. Educational Psychologist, 14, 15-23. [PDF]	MARKOVITS, H. & DOYON, C. (2004). Information processing and reasoning with premises that are not empirically true : Interference, working memory and processing speed. Memory & Cognition, 32 (4), 592-601.
	JUDD, C.M. & KULIK, J.A. (1980). Schematic effects of social attitudes on information processing and recall. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 38, 569-578.
	HUNT, E.B. (1980). Intelligence as an information-processing concept. British Journal of Psychology, 71, 449-474.	McMAINS, S.A. & SOMERS, D.C. (2005). Processing efficiency of divided spatial attention mechanisms in human visual cortex. Journal of Neuroscience, 25, 9444-9448
	MATLIN, M. (2004/2001). Cognition / La cognition : Une introduction à la psychologie cognitive. Wiley, John & Sons, Incorporated/Paris : Deboeck Université.	MURAKATA, Y. (2006). Information processing approaches to development. In W. Damon (Ed.), Handbook of child psychology (Vol. 2., pp. 426-463). New York : Wiley.

Traitement de l'information de bas en haut : = traitement dirigé par les données, processus ascendant. Bottom-up processing, bottom-up guidance, bottom-up learning.

	NORMAN, D.A. & BOBROW, D. (1975). On data-limited and resource-limited processes. Cognitive Psychology, 7, 44-64.
	SHINGALA, R. & TOUSSAINT, G.T. (1977). A bottom-up and top-down approach to using context in text recognition. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 11 (2), 201-212
	CACIOPPO, J.T., PETTY, R.E. & SIDERA, J.A. (1982). The effects of a salient self-schema on the evaluation of proattitudinal editorials : Top-down versus bottom-up message processing. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 18 (4), 324-338.
	HSUA, S-M. & PESSOA, L. (2007). Dissociable effects of bottom-up and top-down factors on the processing of unattended fearful faces. Neuropsychologia, 45 (13), 3075-3086.
	HÉLIE, S., PROULX, R. & LEFEBVRE, B. (2011). Bottom-up learning of explicit knowledge using a Bayesian algorithm and a new Hebbian learning rule. Neural Networks, 24, 219-232.

Traitement de l'information de haut en bas : = traitement dirigé par les connaissances, processus descendant. Top-down processing. top-down guidance.

	NORMAN, D.A. & BOBROW, D. (1975). On data-limited and resource-limited processes. Cognitive Psychology, 7, 44-64.
	SHINGALA, R. & TOUSSAINT, G.T. (1977). A bottom-up and top-down approach to using context in text recognition. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 11 (2), 201-212.
	CACIOPPO, J.T., PETTY, R.E. & SIDERA, J.A. (1982). The effects of a salient self-schema on the evaluation of proattitudinal editorials: Top-down versus bottom-up message processing. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 18 (4), 324-338.
	WOLFE, J.M., HOROWITZ, T.S., KENNER, N., HYLE, M & VASAN, N. (2004). How fast can you change your mind? The speed of top-down guidance in visual search. Vision Research, 44, 1411-1426.
	HSUA, S-M. & PESSOA, L. (2007). Dissociable effects of bottom-up and top-down factors on the processing of unattended fearful faces. Neuropsychologia, 45 (13), 3075-3086.
	GILBERT, C.D. & SIGMAN, M. (2007). Brain states : Top-down influences in sensory processing. Neuron, 54, 677-696.

Traitement en profondeur : Niveau de traitement. Levels of processing, depth of processing.

	CRAIK, F.I.M. & LOCKHART, R.S. (1972). Levels of processing : A framework for memory research. Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior, 11, 671-684.
	CRAIK, F.I.M. & TULVING, E. (1975). Depth of processing and the retention of words in episodic memory. Journal of Experimental Psychology : General, 104, 268-294.
	LOCKHART, R.S., CRAIK, F.I.M. & JACOBY L.L. (1976). Depth of processing, recognition and recall: Some aspects of a general memory system. In J. Brown (Ed.), Recall and recognition. London : Wiley. [PDF]
	STEIN, B.S. (1978). Depth of processing reexamined : The effects of precision of encoding and test appropriateness. Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior, 17, 165–174.
	JACOBY L.L., BARTZ, W.H. & VANS, J.D. (1978). A functional approach to levels of processing. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Human Learning and Memory, 4, 331-346.
	TULVING, E. (1979). Relation between encoding specificity and levels of processing. In L.S. Cermak & F.I.M. Craik (Eds.), Levels of processing in human memory. Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.
	BRADSHAW, G.L. & ANDERSON, C.A. (1982). Elaborative encoding as an explanation of levels of processing Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior, 21, 165-174. [PDF]

Traitement intensif (... thérapeutique...) : Traitement thérapeutique appliqué plusieurs fois par jour pendant plusieurs heures. Intensive behavioral intervention.

	KLINTWALL, L. GILBERG, C., BÖLT, S. & FERNELLl, E. (2011). The efficacy of intensive behavioral intervention for children with autism: A matter of allegiance? Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders doi:10.1007/s10803-011-1223-z. [PDF]
	KLINTWALL, L. & EIKESETH, S. (2012). Number and controllability of reinforcers as predictors of individual outcome for children with autism receiving early and intensive behavioral intervention: A preliminary study. Research in Autism Spectrum Disorders, 6 (1), 493-499. [PDF]

Traitement parallèle (de l'information) : Forme de traitement de l'information qui permet à deux informations ou plus d'être simultanément analysé par le cerveau. /traitement sériel. Parallel processing, parallel distributed processing, PDP.

TOWNSEND, J.T. (1971). A note on the identifiability of parallel and serial processes. Perception & Psychophysics, 10, 161-163. JORDAN, M.I. (1986). Serial order : A parallel distributed processing approach. University of California, San Diego : Institute for Cognitive Science.

ELLIS, S.H. & CHASE, W.G. (1971). Parallel processing in item recognition. Perception & Psychophysics, 10, 379-384. RUMELHART, D.E. & McCLELLAND, J.L. (1986). Parallel distributed processing : Explorations in the microstructure of cognition. Cambridge, MA : MIT/Bradford.

TOWNSEND, J.T. (1972). Some results concerning the identifiability of parallel and serial processes. British Journal of Mathematical & Statistical Psychology, 25, 168-199. DICK, M., ULLMAN, S. & SAGI, D. (1987). Parallel and serial processes in motion detection. Science, 237, 400-402.

EGETH, H., JONIDES, J. & WALL, S. (1972). Parallel processing of multi-element displays. Cognitive Psychology, 3, 674-698. CAVE, K. & WOLFE, J. (1990). Modeling the role of parallel processing in visual search. Cognitive Psychology, 22, 225-271.

RATCLIFF, R. (1981). Parallel processing mechanisms and processing of organized information in human memory. In J.A. Anderson & G. Hinton (Eds.), Parallel models in associative memory. Hillsdale, N.J. : Erlbaum. EGETH, H.E. & DAGENBACH, D. (1991). Parallel versus serial processing in visual search. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Human Perception & Performance, 17, 550-559.

ELMAN, J.L. & McCLELLAND, J.L. (1985). An architecture for parallel processing in speech recognition : The TRACE model. In M.R. Schroeder (Ed.), Speech recognition (pp. 6-35). Gottingen : Biblioteca Phonetica. TOWNSEND, J.T. & WENGER, M.J. (2004). A theory of interactive parallel processing : New capacity measures and predictions for a response time inequality series. Psychological Review, 111 (4), 1003-1035.

THORNTON, T.L. & GILDEN, D.L. (2007). Parallel and serial processes in visual search. Psychological Review, 114 (1), 71-103

Traitement pharmacologique : Voir Médicament ou Thérapie médicameneuse.

Traitement sériel (de l'information) : Forme de traitement de l'information qui consiste à analyser une information à la fois. En cognition, les modèles classiques du traitement de l'information reposent sur ce postulat. Serial processes.

	EGETH, H.E. (1966). Parallel versus serial processes in multidimensional stimulus discrimination. Perception & Psychophysics, 1, 245-252.	EGETH, H.E. & DAGENBACH, D. (1991). Parallel versus serial processing in visual search : Further evidence from subadditive effects of a visual quality. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Human Perception & Performance, 17, 550-559.
	TOWNSEND, J.T. (1971). A note on the identifiability of parallel and serial processes. Perception & Psychophysics, 10, 161-163.	SCHWEICKERT, R., GIORGINI, M. & DZHAFAROV, E. (2000). Selective influence and response time cumulative distribution functions in serial-parallel task networks. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 44, 504-535.
	TOWNSEND, J.T. (1972). Some results concerning the identifiability of parallel and serial processes. British Journal of Mathematical & Statistical Psychology, 25, 168-199.	TOWNSEND, J.T. & FIFIC, M. (2004). Parallel versus serial processing and individual differences in high-speed search in human memory. Perception & Psychophysics, 66, 953-962
	JORDAN, M.I. (1986). Serial order : A parallel distributed processing approach. University of California, San Diego : Institute for Cognitive Science.	THORNTON, T.L. & GILDEN, D.L. (2007). Parallel and serial processes in visual search. Psychological Review, 114 (1), 71-103
	DICK, M., ULLMAN, S. & SAGI, D. (1987). Parallel and serial processes in motion detection. Science, 237, 400-402.

Trajectoire personnelle : Passé de l'individu-cible, plus particulièrement ce qui distingue cet individu en particulier de son groupe d'appartenance.

Tranquillisant :

Transcultural Psychiatry : Revue scientifique de psychiatrie qui s'intéresse plus particulièrement aux différences culturelles. Éditeur : Sage.

Transduction : Chez Piaget, raisonnement pré-opératoire par lequel l'enfant tire une conclusion par analogie, par différence ou par identité. Ce mode de raisonnement précède l'induction et la déduction. = raisonnement transductif.

Transfert : En psychanalyse, phase critique de la thérapie durant laquelle le patient transfère sur le thérapeute des émotions et des réactions inconscientes, comme ses réactions émotionnelles (colère, peur, haine, etc.) face à ses parents, et qui sont à l'origine de sa souffrance. Le transfert ne signifie pas que le patient est guéri, mais il indique qu'il est sur la bonne voie, que l'analyse commence à porter fruit. Transfert et contre-transfert. = transfert analytique. Transference.

	FERENCZI, S. (1909/69). Transfert et introjection. Dans Psychanalyse I. Paris : Payot.	BALKOURA, A. (1974). The fate of the transference neurosis after analysis. Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association, 22, 895-903.
	WHITE, W.A. (1917). The mechanism of transference. Psychoanalytic Review, 4, 373-381.	JUNG, C.G. (1980). Psychologie du transfert. Paris : Albin Michel.
	HUBBARD, L.D. (1923). Transference and sex. Psychoanalytic Review, 10, 453-456.	DRESSER, L. (1985). The use of transference and counter-transference in assessing emotional disturbance in children. Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy, 1, 95-106.
	BALINT, A. & BALINT, M. (1939). On transference and counter-transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 20, 223-230.	BRENMAN PICK, I. (1985). Development of the concepts of transference and counter-transference. Psycho-Analytic Psychotherapy, 1, 13-23.
	JEKELS, L. & BERGLER, E. (1949). Transference and love. Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 18, 325-350.	PAAS, F. (1992). Training strategies for attaining transfer of problem-solving skill in statistics : a cognitive-load approach. Journal of Educational Psychology, 84 (4), 429-434.
	KLEIN, M. (1952). The origins of transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 33, 433-438.	DE BLÉCOURT, A. (1993). Transference, counter transference and acting out in psychoanalysis. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 74, 757-774.
	KLEIN, M. (1952/95). Les influences mutuelles dans le développement du moi et du ça. Le transfert et autres écrits. Paris : Presses Universitaires de France.	CHIESA, M. (1994). Some thoughts on erotic transference. Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy, 8, 37-48.
	KLEIN, M. (1952/95). Les origines du transfert. Le transfert et autres écrits. Paris : Presses Universitaires de France.	KLEIN, M. (1995). Le transfert et autres écrits. Paris : Presses Universitaires de France.
	WINNICOTT, D.W. (1956). On transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 37, 386-388.	GABBARD, G.O. (2001). What can neuroscience teach us about transference? Canadian Journal of Psychoanalysis, 9 (1), 1-18.
	RAPPAPORT, E.A. (1956). The management of an erotized transference. Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 25, 515-529.	GABBARD, G.O. (2001). Cyberpassion : E-rotic transference on the Internet. Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 70 (4), 719-737.
	STERN, M.M. (1957). The ego aspect of transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 38, 146-157.	BARNETT, S.M. & CECI, S.J. (2002). When and where do we apply what we learn? A taxonomy for far transfer. Psychological Bulletin, 128, 612-637.
		HOGLEND, P. (2004). Analysis of transference in psychodynamic psychotherapy : a review of empirical research. Canadian Journal of Psychoanalysis, 12, 279-300.
	ACKERMAN, N.W. (1959). Transference and counter-transference. Psychoanalytic Review, 46C, 17-28.	YEOMANS, F.E. (2004). Transference-focused Psychotherapy in Borderline Personality Disorders. Psychiatric Annals, 34 (6), 449-454.
		HOGLEND, P., AMLO, S, MARBLE, A., BOGWALD, K.P., SORBYE, SJAASTAD, M.C. & HEYERDAHL, O. (2006). Analysis of the patient-therapist relationship in dynamic psychotherapy : An experimental study of transference interpretations. American Journal of Psychiatry, 163, 1739-1746.
		HOGLEND, P., BOGWALD, K.P., AMLO, S., MARBLE, A., ULBERG, R.A., COSGROVE-SJAASTD, M., SORBYE, O., HEYERDAHL, O. & JOHANSSON, P. (2008). Transference interpretations in dynamic Psychotherapy : Do they really yield sustained effects? The American Journal of Psychiatry, 165, (6) [LIRE]
	BARON, S. (1960). Transference and counter-transference in the classroom. Psychoanalytic Review,47A, 76-96.	YEOMANS, F.E., DELANEY J.C. & RENAUD, A. (2007). La psychothérapie focalisée sur le transfert. Santé Mentale au Québec, 32 (1), 17-34.
	LACAN, J. (1960-61/2001). Le transfert. Paris : Le Seuil.	HOBDAY, G., MELLMAN, L. & GABBARD, G.O. (2008). Clinical case conference : Complex Sexualized Transferences When the patient is male and the therapist female. American Journal of Psychiatry, 165 (12), 1525-1530.
	MENDES LEAL, R. (1970). Le transfert analytique dans l'analyse de groupe. Bulletin de psychologie,23 (13-16), 760-764.	YEOMANS, F.E. & DELANEY J.C., (2008). Transference-focused psychotherapy as a means to change the personality structure that underlies borderline personality disorder. Social Work in Mental Health, 6 (1/2), 157-170.
		LEVENSON, E.A. (2009). The enigma of the transference. Contemporary Psychoanalysis, 45 (2), 163-178.

Transfert (Contre-) : Transfert et contre-transfert. Counter-transference.

	STERN, A. (1924). On the counter-transference in psychoanalysis. Psychoanalysis Review, 11, 166-174.	REICH, A. (1960). Further remarks on counter-transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 41, 389-395.
	BALINT, A. & BALINT, M. (1939). On transference and counter-transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 20, 223-230.	GRINBERG, L. (1962). On a specific aspect of countertransference due to the patient’s projective identification. International Journal of Psychoanalysis, 43,436-440.
	WINNICOTT, D.W. (1949). Hate in the counter-transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 30, 69-74.	MONETTE, L. (1977). Le processus contre-transférentiel comme travail de deuil. Philosophiques, 4 (2), 305-312.
	HEIMANN, P. (1950). On counter-transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 31, 81-84.	GRINBERG, L. (1979). Counter-transference and projective counter-identification. Contemporary Psycho-Analysis, 15, 226-247.
		DRESSER, L. (1985). The use of transference and counter-transference in assessing emotional disturbance in children. Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy, 1, 95-106.
	REICH, A. (1951). On counter-transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 32, 25-31.	BRENMAN PICK, I. (1985). Development of the concepts of transference and counter-transference. Psycho-Analytic Psychotherapy, 1, 13-23.
	RACKER, H. (1953). A contribution to the problem of counter-transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 34, 313-324.	GABBARD, K.E. & GABBARD, G.O. (1985). Countertransference in the movies. The Psychoanalytic Review, 72 (1), 171-184.
		DIAMOND, D. (1993). The paternal transference : A bridge to the erotic, oedipal transference in severely disturbed male patients. Psychoanalytic Inquiry, 13, 206-225.
	WEIGERT, E. (1954). Counter-transference and self-analysis of the psycho-analyst. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 35, 242-246.	DE BLÉCOURT, A. (1993). Transference, counter transference and acting out in psychoanalysis. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis,74, 757-774.
	MOODY, R. (1955). On the function of counter-transference : A case-study. Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 1, 49-58.	GABBARD, K.E. (1993). An overview of countertransference with borderline patients. Journal of Psychotherapy Practice & Research, 2 (1), 7-18.
	ACKERMAN, N.W. (1959). Transference and counter-transference. Psychoanalytic Review, 46C, 17-28.	GABBARD, G.O. (1994). Management of countertransference with borderline patients. Washington, DC : American Psychiatric Press
	SEARLES, H.F. (1959). Oedipal love in the counter transference. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 40, 180-190.	DE URTUBEY, L. (1995). Counter transference effects of absence. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 76, 683-694.

Transfert des apprentissages : En apprentissage, désigne l'effet favorable ou nuisible d'un apprentissage A sur l'apprentissage d'un comportement B plus ou moins différent de l'apprentissage A. ( ): transfert négatif, transfert positif. Transfer, transfer of training.

	WEBB, L.W. (1917). Transfer of training and retroaction : A comparative study. Psychological Monographs, 24 (2), 1-90.	SALOMON, G. & GLOBERSON, T. (1987). Skill may not be enough : The role of mindfulness in learning and transfer. International Journal of Educational Research, 11 (6), 623-637.
	SCHULTZ, R.W. (1960). Problem solving behavior and transfer. Harvard Educational Review, 30, 61-77.	BALDWIN, T.T. & FORD, J.K. (1988). Transfer of training : A review and directions for future research. Personnel Psychology, 41, 61-105.
	ELLIS, H.C. (1965). The transfer of learning. New York, NY : MacMillan.	REDER, L.M. & KLATSKY, R. (1994). Transfer : Training for performance. In Druckman, D. et Bjork, R.A. (Eds.), Learning, remembering, believing : Enhancing team and individual performance. Washington, DC : National Academy Press.
	JEFFREY, W.E. & SAMUELS, S.J. (1966). The effect of method of reading training on initial training and transfer. Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior, 57, 159-163.	McKEOUGH, A., LUPART, J. & MARINI, A. (Eds.) (1995). Teaching for transfer. Fostering generalization in learning. Mahwah, NJ : Lawrence Erlbaum.
	RESNICK, L., SIEGEL, A.W. & KRESH, E. (1971). Transfer and sequence in learning double classification skills. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 11, 139-149.	TARDIF, J. et MEIRIEU, P. (1996). Stratégie pour favoriser le transfert des connaissances. Vie pédagogique, 98, 4-7.
	SHEA, J.B. & MORGAN, R.L. (1979). Contextual interference effects on the acquisition, retention, and transfer of a motor skill. Journal of Experimental Psychology : Human Learning and Memory, 5, 183.	TARDIF, J. (1999). Le transfert des apprentissages. Montréal : Éditions Logiques.
	CORDER, S.P. (1983). A role for the mother tongue. In S. M. Gass & L. Selinker (Eds.), Language transfer in language learning (pp. 18-31). Philadelphia, PA : John Benjamins North America.	HASKELL, R. E. (2001). Transfer of learning. Cognition, instruction, and reasoning. San Diego : Academic Press.
	WINKLES, J. (1986). Achievement, understanding, and transfer in a learning hierarchy. American Educational Research Journal, 23, 1275-1288.	HALPERN, D.F. & HAKEL, M.D. (2003). Applying the science of learning to the university and beyond : Teaching for long-term retention and transfer. Change, 35 (4), 36-41.
		KOHLENBERG, R.J. (2004).). AABT, human misery and transference: A response to Arnold Lazarus. The Behavior Therapist. 26, 7.
	CORMIER, S.M. & HAGMAN, J.D. (1987). Transfer of learning : Contemporary research and applications. San Diego, CA : Academic Press.	PÉLADEAU, N., FORGET, J. et GAGNÉ, F. (2005). Le transfert des apprentissages et la réforme de l’éducation au Québec : quelques mises au point. Revue des sciences de l'éducation : Le développement professionnel des enseignants, 31 (1), 187-209.

Transfert des connaissances : Knowledge transfer, transfer of cognitive skill.

	ELMES, D.G.R., ROEDIGER, H.L., WILKINSON, W.C. & GREENER, W.I. (1972). Positive and negative part/ whole transfer in free recall. Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior, 11, 251-256.	DETTERMAN, D.K. (1993). The case for the prosecution : Transfer as an epiphenomenon. In D.K. Detterman et R.J. Sternberg (Dirs.), Transfer on trial : Intelligence, cognition, and instruction (p. 1-24). Norwood, NJ : Ablex.
	GICK, M.L. & HOLYOAK, K.J. (1983). Schema induction and analogical transfer. Cognitive Psychology, 15, 1-38.
	GICK, M.L. & HOLYOAK, K.J. (1987). The cognitive basis of knowledge transfer. In S.M. Cormier & J.D. Hagman (Eds.), Transfer of learning contemporary research and application (pp. 9-45). New York, NY : Academic Press.	REEVES, L.M. & WEISBERG, R.W. (1994). The role of content and abstract information in analogical transfer. Psychological Bulletin, 115, 381-400.
	CORMIER, S. (1987). The structural processes underlying transfer of training. In S. Cormier & J. Hagman (Eds.), Transfer of learning : Contemporary research and applications. San Diego: Academic Press.
	BROOKS, L.W. & DANSEREAU, D.F. (1987). Transfer of information : An instructional perspective. In S.M. Cormier et J.D. Hagman (Eds.), Transfer of learning : Contemporary research and applications (p. 121-149). New York, NY : Academic Press.	BEREITER, C. (1995). A dispositional view of transfer. In A. McKeough, J. Lupart et A. Marini (Eds.), Teaching for transfer : Fostering generalization in learning (p. 21-34). Mahwah, NJ : Lawrence Erlbaum.
	POLSON, P.G. (1988). Transfer and retention. In R. Guindon (Ed.), Cognitive science and its application for human-computer interaction (pp. 59-162). Hillsdale, NJ : Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.	MEIRIEU, P. et DEVELAY, M. (Dirs.) (1996). Le transfert des connaissances en formation initiale et continue. Lyon : Centre régional de documentation pédagogique de l’Académie de Lyon.
	SINGLEY, M.K. & ANDERSON, J.R. (1989). The transfer of cognitive skill. Cambridge, MA : Harvard University Press.	TARDIF, J. et MEIRIEU, P. (1996). Stratégie pour favoriser le transfert des connaissances. Vie pédagogique, 98, 4-7.
	LANDRUM, R.E. (1990). Maier's (1931). two-string problem revisited : Evidence for spontaneous transfer? Psychological Reports, 67, 1079-1088.	MENDELSOHN, P. (1996). Le concept de transfert. In P. Meirieu et M. Develay (Dirs.), Le transfert des connaissances en formation initiale et continue (p. 11-19). Lyon : Centre régional de documentation pédagogique de l’Académie de Lyon.
	DETTERMAN, D.K. & STERNBERG, R.J. (1993). Transfer on trial : Intelligence, cognition, and instruction. Norwood, NJ : Ablex.	ARGOTE, L. & INGRAM, P. (2000). Knowledge transfer : A basis for competitive advantage in firms. Organizational Behavior & Human Decision Processes, 82 (1), 150-169.
	STERNBERG, R.J. & FRENCH, P.A. (1993). Mechanisms of transfer. In D. K. Detterman & R. J. Sternberg (Eds.), Transfer on Trial : Intelligence, Cognition, and Instruction (pp. 25-38). Stamford, CT : Ablex Publishing Corp.	HASKELL, R.E. (2001). Transfer of learning : Cognition, instruction, and reasoning. San Diego, CA : Academic Press.
	BUTTERFIELD, E.C., SLOCUM, T.A. & NELSON, G.D. (1993). Cognitive and behavioral analyses of teaching and transfer : Are they different ? In D.K. Detterrnan et R.J. Sternberg (Eds.), Transfer on trial : Intelligence, cognition, and instruction (p. 192-258). Norwood, NJ : Ablex.	PUGH, K.J. & BERGIN, D.A. (2006). Motivational influences on transfer. Educational Psychologist, 41, 147-160.
		KORNELL, N., SON, L. & TERRACE, H.S. (2007). Transfer of metacognitive skills and hint seeking in monkeys. Psychological Science, 18 (1), 64-71. [PDF]
		ROEDIGER, H.L. & (2007). Transfer : The ubiquitous concept. In H.L. Roediger, Y. Dudai, & S.M. Fitzpatrick (Eds.), Science of memory: Concepts (pp. 277-282). New York: Oxford University Press. [PDF]

Transfert horizontal : Utilsation dans un contexte particulier de comportements/connaissances acquis dans un contexte analogue mais plus simple. EX: Faire une passe du revers est un comportement acquis au niveau Atome (simple) qui sera utilisé par certains joueur au niveau Pee-wee (complexe).

	GAGNÉ, R.M. (1962). The acquisition of knowledge. Psychological Review, 69, 355-365.

Transfert négatif : Désigne l'effet nuisible de l'apprentissage d'un comportement A sur l'apprentissage d'un comportement B plus ou moins différent du premier comportement appris (A).

	LANDRUM, R.E. (2005). The production of negative transfer in a problem solving task. Psychological Reports, 97, 861-866.
	MALCUIT, G., POMERLEAU, A. et MAURICE, P. (1995). Psychologie de l'apprentissage : termes et concepts. St-Hyacinthe : Edisem.

Transfert positif : Désigne l'effet favorable de l'apprentissage d'un comportement A sur l'apprentissage d'un comportement B plus ou moins différent du premier comportement appris (A).

	BUTTERFIELD, E C. & NELSON, G. D. (1991). Promoting positive transfer of different types. Cognition and Instruction, 8, 69-102.
	MALCUIT, G., POMERLEAU, A. et MAURICE, P. (1995). Psychologie de l'apprentissage : termes et concepts. St-Hyacinthe : Edisem.

Transfert vertical : Utilsation dans un domaine X de comportements/connaissances acquis dans un domaine Y. EX: Apprendre à corriger ses dans le cours de françai (X) s pourra être utilisé dans le cour de psychologie (Y).

	GAGNÉ, R.M. (1962). The acquisition of knowledge. Psychological Review, 69, 355-365.

Transformation biologique : Ensemble des changements corporels d'origine biologique liés à la maturation ou au vieillissement, qui interviennent tout au cours de la vie, y compris lors de l'adolescence.

Transformisme : Doctrine biologique qui stipule que toutes les espèces ont subi des variations ou des transformations au cours de l'histoire géologique. /Fixisme. ( ): Darwin, Lamark, Wallace.

	LANESSAN, J.-L. de (1883). Le transformisme, évolution de la matière et des êtres vivants. Paris : O. Doin.
	GIARD, A. (1904). Controverses transformistes. Paris : Naud.

Transitive/Transitivité : Qualifie une relation de type si A > B et B > C donc A >. /intransitive. Transitive.

	SMEDLUND, J. (1963). Development of concrete transitivity of length in children. Child Development, 34, 389-405.
	BRAINERD, C.J. (1973). Order of acquisition of transitivity, conservation, and class inclusion of length and weight. Developmental Psychology, 8, 105-116.
	BRAINERD, C.J. (1974). Training and transfer of transitivity, conservation, and class inclusion of length. Child Development, 45, 324-334.
	REYNA, V.F. & BRAINERD, C.J. (1990). Fuzzy processing in transitivity development. Annals of Operations Research, 23, 37-63.
	TUFTO, J., SOLBERG, E.J. & RINGSBY, T.-H. (1998). Statistical models of transitive and intransitive dominance structures. Animal Behaviour, 55, 1489-1498.

Transmission culturelle : Pour un individu (humain ou animal), capacité d'apprendre un nouveau comportement (acquis) et de le montrer ou de l'enseigner aux autres membres du groupe (culture). Pour le groupe, capacité de transmettre ce nouveau comportement de génération en génération. Transmission culturelle et mème. /transmission génétique, hérédité. Cultural transmission, social transmission.

	GALEF, B.G. (1975). The social transmission of acquired behavior. Biological Psychiatry, 10, 155- 160.	GIRALDEAU, L.-A., CARACO, T. T. & VALONE, T. (1994). Social foraging : Individual learning and cultural transmission of innovations. Behavioral Ecology 5, 35-43.
	CAVALLI-SFORZA, L.L. & FELDMAN, M. (1981). Cultural transmission and evolution. Princeton : Princeton University Press.	LEFEBVRE, L. & GIRALDEAU, L.-A. (1994). Cultural transmission in pigeons is affected by the number of tutors and bystanders present. Animal Behaviour 47, 331-337.
	SHERRY, D.F. & GALEF, B.G. (1984). Cultural transmission without imitation : Milk bottle opening by birds. Animal Behaviour, 32, 937-938.	LEFEBVRE, L. (1995). Culturally-transmitted feeding behavior in primates : evidence for accelerating learning rates. Primates 36, 227-239.
	LALAND, K.N. & PLOTKIN, H.C. (1990). Social learning and social transmission of foraging information in Norway rats (Rattus norvegicus). Animal Learning & Behavior, 18, 246-251.	AUNGER, R. (1995). Cultural transmission and diffusion. In L. Nadel (Ed.), Encyclopedia of cognitive science. London : MacMillan.
	GALEF, B.G. & WHISKIN, E.E. (1992). Social transmission of information about multiflavored foods. Animal Learning & Behavior, 20, 56-62.

Transmission intergénérationelle : Transmission des parents aux enfants.

	BELSKY, J., YOUNGBLADE, L.M, & PWNSKY, E.M. (1989). Childrearing history, marital quality, and maternal affect : Intergenerational transmission in a low-risk sample. Development & Psychopathology, 1, 291-304.
	YING, Y.W., COOMBS, M. & LEE, P.A. (1999). Family intergenerational relationship of Asian American adolescents. Cultural Diversity & Ethnic Minority Psychology, 5 (4), 350-363.
	BELSKY, J., SLIGO, J., JAFFEE, S.R., WOODWARD, L. & SILVA, P.A. (2005). Intergenerational transmission of warm-sensitive-stimulating parenting : A prospective study of mothers and fathers of 3-year-olds. Child Development, 76, 384-396.
	BEKKERS, R. (2007). Intergenerational transmission of volunteering. Acta Sociologica. 50, 99-114.

Transsexualisme : Sentiment et conviction d'appartenir au sexe opposé, souvent à l'origine d'un changement de sexe. *travestisme.Transsexualism.

	BENJAMIN, H. (1966). The transsexual phenomenon. New York : Julian Press.	JOHNSON, S.L. & HUNT, D.D. (1990). The relationship of male transsexual typology to psychosocial adjustment. Archives of Sexual Behavior, 19 (4), 349-360.
	POMEROY, W. (1975). The diagnosis and treatment of transvestites and transsexuals. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 1 (3), 215-224.	LANDÉN, M.J., WALINDER, J. & LUNDSTRÖM, B. (1996). Prevalence, incidence, and sex ratio of transsexualism. Acta Psychiatrica Scandanvica, 93 (4), 221-223. [PDF]
	PERSON, E. & OVESEY, L. (1974).The transsexual syndrome in males. I. Primary transsexualism. American Journal of Psychotherapy, 28 (1), 4-20.	DIAMOND, M. (1996). Self-Testing among transsexuals : A check on sexual identity. Journal of Psychology & Human Sexuality, 8 (3), 61-82.
	BENTLER, P.M. (1976). A typology of transsexualism : Gender identity theory and data. Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (6), 567-84.	GREEN, R. & YOUNG, R. (2001). Hand preference, sexual preference, and transsexualism. Archives of Sex Behavior, 30 (6), 565-574.
	MORGAN, A.J. (1978). Psychotherapy for transsexual candidates screened out of surgery. Archives of Sexual Behavior, 7, 273-282.	BAILEY, J.M. (2003). The man who would be queen : The science of gender-bending and transsexualism. Washington, D.C. : Joseph Henry Press.
	LOTHSTEIN, L.M. (1983). Female-to-male transsexualism. Routledge.	SMITH, Y.L.S., VAN GOOZEN, S.H.M., KUIPER, A.J. & COHEN-KETTENIS, P.T. (2005). Transsexual subtypes : Clinical and theoretical significance. Psychiatry Research, 137 (3), 151-160. [PDF]
		DE CUYPERE, G., VAN HEMELRIJCK, M., MICHEL, A., CARAEL, B., HEYLENS, G., RUBENS, R. & MONSTREY, S. (2007). Prevalence and demography of transsexualism in Belgium. Europeen Psychiatry, 22 (3), 137-41.
	BLANCHARD, R., CLEMMENSEN, L.H. & STEINER, B.W. (1983). Gender reorientation and psychosocial adjustment in male-to-female transsexuals. Archives of Sexual Behavior, 12, 503-510.	LAWRENCE, A.A. (2007). Becoming what we love : autogynephilic transsexualism conceptualized as an expression of romantic love. Perspectives in Biology & Medicine, 50 (4), 506-520. [PDF]
	BLANCHARD, R. (1985). Typology of male-to-female transsexualism. Archives of Sexual Behavior, 14, 247-261.	ZUCKER, K.J., BLANCHARD, R., KIM, T.S., PAE, C.U. & LEE, C (2007). Birth order and sibling sex ratio in homosexual transsexual South Korean men : Effects of the male-preference stopping rule. Psychiatry & Clinical Neurosciences, 61 (5), 529-533.
		RAMACHADRAN, V.S. (2008). Phantom penises in transsexuals. Journal of Consciousness Studies, 15 (1), 5-16.

Traumatisme : Au sens large, le traumatisme est un choc physique et psychologique produit par un événement intense, qui perturbe le fonctionnement normal de l'individu. Trauma.

	FARLEY, M. & KEANEY, J. (1994). Development of a scale to measure physical symptoms in adults who report childhood trauma : a pilot study. Family Violence & Sexual Assault Bulletin, 10 (1-2), 23-27.
	REVIERE, S. (1996). Memory of childhood trauma. New-York : Guilford
	SCHORE, A.N. (2001). The effects of early relational trauma on right brain development, affect regulation, and infant mental health. Infant Mental Health Journal, 22, 201-269. [LIRE]
	BONNANO, G.A. (2004). Loss, trauma, and human resilience : have we underestimated the human capacity to thrive after extremely aversive events? American Psychologist, 59, 20-28.

Traumatisme cérébral : = traumatisme cranien. ( ): blessure à la tête, coma, commotion cérébrale, contusion cérébrale, lésion cérébrale. Traumatic brain injury, brain damage, brain dysfunction.

	GOLDSTEIN, K. (1942). After effects of brain injuries in war. New York : Grune & Stratton.
	RUTTER, M. (1982.) Syndromes attributed to “Minimal Brain Dysfunction”. Childhood Journal Psychiatry, 139, (1), 21-33.
	BREGGIN, P.R. (2001). From Prozac to Ecstasy : the implication of new evidence for drug-induced brain damage. Ethical Human Sciences and Services, 3, 3-5.
	ABDULLAEV, Y. & POSNER, M.I. (2005.) How the brain recovers following damage. Nature Neuroscience, 8, 1424-1425.
	GRANACHER, R.A. (2007). Traumatic brain injury : Methods for clinical & forensic neuropsychiatric assessment. Boca Raton : CRC.
	GASPAROVIC, C., YEO, R.A., MANNELL, M., ELGIE, R., PHILLIPS, J.P., DOZEMA, D. & MAYER, A.R. (2009). Neurometabolite concentrations in gray and white matter in mild traumatic brain injury : A 1H–magnetic resonance spectroscopy study. Journal of Neurotrauma, 26, 1635-1643. [PDF]
	YEO, R.A., GASPAROVIC, C., MERIDETH, F., RUHL, D., DOEZEMA, D. & MAYER, A.R. (2011). A Longitudinal proton magnetic resonance spectroscopy study of mild traumatic brain injury. Journal of Neurotrauma, 28, 1-11. [PDF]

Traumatisme sexuel : Sexual trauma.

	McCARTHY, B.W. (1986). A cognitive-behavioral approach to understanding and treating sexual trauma. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 12 (4), 322-329.
	DORAIS, M. (2004). La mémoire du désir - Du traumatisme au fantasme. Éditions TYPO.

Traumatology : Revue scientifique qui s'intéresse aux différentes formes de traumatisme. Éditeur : Sage.

Tranquillisant : Voir Dépresseur.

Travail : Le terme a au moins trois acceptions : a) En psychanalyse, efforts du patient pour prendre conscience de son inconscient ou pour investir un objet d'une pulsion; b) Le travail renvoie également aux efforts fournis pour produire un bien ou un service, à l'optimisation de cet effort, et, en conséquence, à la plus-value et aux problèmes qui en résulte (stress, somnolence, fatique, quart de travail irrégulier, etc.). Travail et motivation. Work, job. c) Finalement, il désigne le lieu où est effectué ce travail. Travail et épuisement professionnel. = milieu de travail, organisation, entreprise. Workplace.

	a
	GREEN, A. (1993). Le travail du négatif. Paris : Éditions de Minuit.
	b
	VROOM, V.H. (1964). Work and motivation. New York : Wiley	LAZARUS, R.S. (1991). Psychological stress in the workplace. Journal of Social Behavior & Personality, 6, 1-13.
	HACKMAN, J.R. & OLDHMAN, G.R. (1976). Motivation through the design of work : Test of a theory. Organizational Behavior & Human Performance, 16, 250-279.	THIBOUTOT, J. (2000). Gestion de stress et travail policier. Mont-Royal : Modulo Griffon
		JUDGE, T. A. & CABLE, D.M. (2004). The effect of physical height on workplace success and income. Journal of Applied Psychology, 89, 428-441.
	PINDER, C.C., (1984). Work motivation. Glenview, IL : Scott, Foresman.	BOARD, B.J. & FRITZON, K. (2005). Disordered personalities at work. Psychology Crime & Law, 11, 17-32.
	FRENCH, J.R.P., CAPLAN, R.D. & HARRISON, R.V. (1982). The mechanisms of job stress and strain. New York : John Wiley.	AMABILE, T.M., BARSADE, S.G., MUELLER, J.S. & STAW, B.M. (2005). Affect and creativity at work. Administrative Science Quarterly, 50, 367–403. [PDF]
	AKESTEDT, T. (1990). Psychological and psychophysiological effects of shift work. Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment & Health, 16 (S1), 67-73.	ATTALI, J. (2007). L'avenir du travail. Paris : Fayard.

Travail (Quart de...) : Shift.

	ÅKERSTEDT, T. & TORSVALL, L. (1985). Napping in shift work. Sleep, 8, 105-109.	TUCKER, P., SMITH, L., MaCDONALD, I. & FOLKARD, S. (2000). Effects of direction of rotation in continuous and discontinuous 8 hour shift systems. Occupational & Environmental Medicine, 57 (10), 678-684.
	MaCDONALD, I., SMITH, L. LOWE, S.L. & FOLKARD, S. (1997). Effects on accidents of time into shift and of short breaks between shifts. International Journal of Occupational & Environmental Health, 3, (S2), 40-45.	PARKES, K.R. (2002). Shift work and age as interactive predictors of body mass index among offshore workers. Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment & Health, 28 (1), 64-71.
	AXELSSON, J., KECKLUND, G. ÅKERSTEDT, T. & LOWDEN, A. (1998. Effects of alternating 8- and 12-hour shifts on sleep, sleepiness, physical effort and performance). Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment & Health, 24 (3), 62-68. [PDF]	FOLKARD, S. & TUCKER, P., (2003). Shift work, safety and productivity. Occupational Medicine, 53 (2), 95-101.
	LOWDEN, A., KECKLUND, G., AXELSSON, J. & ÅKERSTEDT, T. (1998). Change from an 8-hour shift to a 12-hour shift, attitudes, sleep, sleepiness and performance. Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment & Health, 24 (S3), 69-75. [PDF]	AXELSSON, J., ÅKERSTEDT, T., KECKLUND, G. & LOWDEN, A. (2003). Toleance to shift work-how does it relate to sleep and wakefulness? International Archives of Occupational & Environmental Health, 77 (2), 121-129.
	ÅKERSTEDT, T. (1998). Is there an optimal sleep-wake pattern in shift work? Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment & Health, 24 (S3), 18-27. [PDF]	HORROCKS, N. & POUNDER, R. (2006). Working the night shift : preparation, survival and recovery. London: Royal College of Physicians.

Travail à distance : Travail effectué hors du milieu de travail, souvent à domicile. = télétravail. Work-family.

	JUDGE T.A. & ILIES, R. (2004). Affect and job satisfaction : a study of their relationship at work and at home. Journal of Applied Psychology, 89, 661-73
	JUDGE T.A., ILIES, R. & SCOTT, B.A. (2006). Work-family conflict and emotions : Effects at work and at home. Personnel Psychology, 59, 779-814.

Travail de deuil : En psychanalyse, efforts du patient pour se détacher intellectuellement et émotivement de l'objet perdu. Travail de deuil et deuil.

Travail de nuit : Night work.

	HORROCKS, N. & POUNDER, R. (2006). Working the night shift : preparation, survival and recovery. London : Royal College of Physicians.
	BJORVATN, B., STANGENES, K., ØYANE, N., FORBERG, K., LOWDEN, A., HOLSTEN, F & ÅKERSTEDT, T. (2007). Randomized placebo-controlled field study of the effects of bright light and melatonin in adaptation to night work. Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment & Health, 33 (3), 204-215.

Travail supplémentaire : Nombre d'heures travaillées qui dépassent le quart normal de travail. Heures supplémentaires et insomnie. Overtime work.

	DAHLGREN, A., KECKLUND, G. & ÅKERSTEDT, T. (2006). Overtime work and its effects on sleep, sleepiness, cortisol and blood pressure in an experimental field study. Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment & Health, 32 (4), 318-327.

Travestisme : Consiste à se vêtir et à se comporter comme le sexe opposé (tendance surtout présente chez les hommes). *transsexualisme. Transvestism.

	FENICHEL, O. (1930). The psychology of transvestism. International Journal of Psycho-Analytic, 11, 211-226.
	GLYNN, J.D. & HARPER, P. (1961). Behaviour therapy in transvestism. Lancet, 1, 619.
	REKERS, G.A. & LOVAAS, O.I. (1974). Behavioral treatment of deviant sex-role behaviors in a male child. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7 (2), 173-190. [PDF]
	POMEROY, W. (1975). The diagnosis and treatment of transvestites and transsexuals. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 1 (3), 215-224.
	TALAMINI, J.T. (1982). Boys will be girls : The hidden world of the heterosexual male transvestite. Washington, DC : University Press of America.
	DOCTER, R.F. & PRINCE, V. (1997). Transvestism : A survey of 1032 cross-dressers. Archives of Sexual Behavior, 26 (6), 589-605.
	LANGSTROM, N. & ZUCKER, K.J. (2005). Transvestic fetishism in the general population : prevalence and correlates. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 31, 87-95.

Treisman Anne M. ( ) : Psychologue cognitive américaine, spécialisée dans l'étude de l'attention, de la perception et de la vision. Collaboratrice de Kahneman.

	TREISMAN, A.A.M. & GELADE, G. (1980). A feature-integration theory of attention. Cognitive Psychology, 12, 97-136.
	TREISMAN, A. (1992). Perceiving and re-perceiving objects. American Psychologist, 47, 862-875.
	TREISMAN, A. (1996). The binding problem. Current Opinion in Neurobiology, 6, 171-178.
	TREISMAN, A. (1999). Feature binding, attention and object perception. In G. Humphreys, J. Duncan & A. Treisman (Eds.), Attention, space, and action. Oxford : Oxford University Press.
	TREISMAN, A. (1999). Solutions to the binding problem : Progress through controversy and convergence. Neuron, 24, 105-110.

Tremblay Manon (Grand-Mère 1964-) : Politologue et féministe québécoise, spécialisée dans l'étude du parlementarisme et notamment de la sous-représentation des femmes au sein des institutions politiques. Elle enseigne à l'Université d'Ottawa.

	OLIVIER, M. et TREMBLAY, M. (2000). Questionnements féministes et méthodologie de la recherche. Paris : L’Harmattan.
	TREMBLAY, M. & PELLETIER, R. (2003). Feminist women in Canadian politics : A group ideologically divided ? A Women’s Studies Journal/Journal d’études sur la femme, 28 (1), 80-90.
	SAWER, M., TREMBLAY, M. & TRIMBLE, L. (Dirs.) (2006). Representing women in parliament. A comparative study. Londres : Routledge.
	TREMBLAY, M. (2008). Women and legislative representation : Electoral systems, political parties and sex quotas. New York : Palgrave Macmillan.
	TREMBLAY, M. PELLETIER, R. et PELLETIER, M.R. (2008). Le parlementarisme canadien. Québec : Université Laval.

Tremblay Richard E. ( ) : Psychologue cognitivo-béhavioriste québécois et professeur à l'Université de Montréal. Ses travaux portent sur le développement et l'agressivité chez les enfants et les adolescents. Collaborateur de Claes, Ladouceur, Montplaisir et Vitaro.

	TREMBLAY, R.E. (2000). The origins of youth violence. Revue Canadienne de Recherche sur les Politiques, 1 (2), 19-24.
	TREMBLAY R.E. (2000). The development of aggressive behavior during childhood : What have we learned in the past century? International Journal of Behavioral Development, 24 (2), 129-141.
	TREMBLAY R.E., HARTUP, W.W. & ARCHER, J. (Eds.) (2005). Developmental origins of aggression. New York : The Guilford Press.
	TREMBLAY, R.E. (2008). Prevenir la violence dès la petite enfance. Paris : Editions Odile Jacob.
	TREMBLAY, R.E. (2010). Developmental origins of disruptive behaviour problems : The original sin hypothesis, epigenetics and their consequences for prevention. Journal of Child Psychology & Psychiatry, 51 (4), 341-367.

Tremblement : Mouvement involontaire et répétitf du corps, surtout des des membres et de la tête. Tremor.

	SHIFFMAN, S.M., GRITZ, E.R., MALTESE, J., LEE, M.A., SCHNEIDER, N.G. & JARVIK, M.E. (1983). Effects of cigarette smoking and oral nicotine on hand tremor. Clinical Pharmacology & Therapeutics, 33, 800-805.

Tremblement de terre : Voir Désastre naturel.

Trends in Cognitive Sciences : Revue scientifique multidisciplinaire qui consacre ses pages aux sciences cognitives. Éditeur : Cell Press. = Trends Cogn. Sci.

CALL, J. (2001). Chimpanzee social cognition. Trends in Cognitive Sciences, 5 (9), 388-393.

Trends in Molecular Medicine : Revue scientifique multidisciplinaire qui se consacre à l'étude de la relation entre la biochimie et la médecine/psychiatire.

BRAY, N.J. & OWEN, M.J. (2001). Searching for schizophrenia genes. Trends in Molecular Medicine, 7, 169–174.

Trends in Neurosciences : Revue scientifique multidisciplinaire qui se consacre aux développements des neurosciences.

SIEGEL, J.M. (2008). Do all animals sleep. Trends in Neurosciences, 31, 208-213.

Trends in Pharmacological Sciences : Revue scientifique, spécialisé en pharmacologie. Édition : Elsevier.

BARRETT, J.E. (1980). Behavioral pharmacology : recent developments and new trends. Trends in Pharmacological Sciences, 1 (1), 215-218.

Treviranus Gottfried Reinhold (Brême 1776-1837 Brême) : Naturaliste allemand et biologiste avant la lettre. On lui doit notamment le terme biologie.

Triade (A > B > C) : Relation asymétrique entre trois individus. La triade est la plus petite expression d'une hiérarchie. Triadic interactions.

	KELLEY, H.H. & ArRROWOOD, A.J. (1960). Coalitions in the triad : Critique and experiment. Sociometry, 23, 231-244.
	SMITH, E.O. & PEFFER-SMITH, P.G. (1982). Triadic interactions in captive Barbary macaques (Macaca sylvanus, Linnaeus, 1758): "agonistic buffering"? American Journal of Primatology, 2, 99-107.
	SMITH, E.O. & WHITTEN, P.L. (1988). Triadic interactions in savanna-dwelling baboons. International Journal of Primatology, 9, 409-416.
	BOND, C.F., HORN, E.M. & KENNY, D.A. (1997). A model for triadic relations. Psychological Methods, 2, 79-94.

Triade cognitive de la dépression : Théorie proposée par Beck pour expliquer la dépression. Elle repose sur trois facteurs cognitifs, d'où le terme triade. Selon lui, la personne dépressive se dévalue systématiquement, ce qui la conduit : 1) à se percevoir comme un perdant, à qui rien de bon n'arrive; 2) à concevoir les autres comme des obstacles et une source perpétuelle de frustration; 3) à s'imaginer que les choses ne peuvent s'améliorer, que son état ne peut que s'aggraver. Cognitive triad.

Triade de Renzulli : Théorie proposée par Renzulli, qui décompose la douance en trois éléments : des aptitudes intellectuelles plus élevées que la moyenne, une capacité de concentration et de persévérance à trouver des solutions et finalement un degré élevé de créativité.

Triandis Harry C. ( ) : Psychosociologue américain, spécialisé dans l'étude des attitudes. Il a développé une théorie des comportements interpersonnels (Theory of interpersonal behavior). Il est un des pionniers de la psychologie culturel. Professeur de Leung. Collaborateur de Bandura, Fishbein, Kelman, Osgood et Ottati.

	TRIANDIS, H.C. & OSGOOD, C.E. (1958). A comparative factorial analysis of semantic structures of monolingual Greece and American students. Journal of Abnormal & Social Psychology, 57, 187-196.
	TRIANDIS, H.C. (1980). Values, attitudes and interpersonal behavior. In M.M. Page (Ed.), Nebraska symposium on motivation : Beliefs, attitudes and values. Lincoln : University of Nebraska Press.
	TRIANDIS, H.C. (1989). The self and social behavior in differing cultural contexts. Psychological Review, 96, 506-520.
	FISHBEIN, M.E., BANDURA, A. & TRIANDIS, H.C. (1992). Factors influencing behavior and behavior change : Final report-theorist’s workshop. Rockville : National Institute of Mental Health.
	TRIANDIS, H.C. (1994). Culture and social behavior. New York : McGraw-Hill.

Triangulation : Méthode de contre-vérification des données qui consiste à utiliser une seconde méthode/mesure pour appuyer les résultats obtenus au moyen de la première. On appelle données concurrentes les résultats obtenues par cette seconde méthode/mesure. Cette opération a pour but d'augmenter la validité interne d'une recherche. EX: Un chercheur utilisera des données quantitatives pour appuyer une hypothèse fondée sur des données qualitative, et vice versa. Triangulation.

	DENZIN, N.K. (1970). Strategies of multiple triangulation. In N. Denzin (Ed.), The research act in sociology : a theoretical introduction to sociological method (pp. 297-313). New York : McGraw-Hill.	KNAFL K.A. & BREITMAYER, B.J. (1991). Triangulation in qualitative research : Issues of conceptual clarity and purpose. In J.M. Morse (Ed.), Qualitative research : A contemporary dialogue (pp. 226-239). Newbury Park, CA : Sage.
	SMITH, H.W. (1975). Triangulation : the necessity for multi-method approaches. In H.W. Smith (Ed.), Strategies of social research : the methodological imagination (pp. 271-292). Englewood Cliffs, NJ : Prentice-Hall.	MORSE, J. (1991). Approaches to qualitative-quantitative methodological triangulation. Nursing Research, 40 (2), 120-123.
	JICK, T.D. (1983). Mixing qualitative and quantitative research methods : triangulation in action. In J. van Maanen (Ed.), Qualitative methodology (pp. 135-148). Beverley Hills, CA : Sage.	BLAIKIE N. (1991). A critique of the use of triangulation in social research. Quality and Quantity, 25, 115-136.
	DUFFY, M.E. (1987). Methodological triangulation a vehicle for merging quantitative and qualitative methods. Image, 19 (3), 130-133.	DEACON, D., BRYMAN, A. & FENTON, N. (1998). Collision or collusion? A discussion and case study of the unplanned triangulation of quantitative and qualitative research methods. International Journal of Social Research Methodology, 1 (1), 47-63.
	MATHISON, S. (1988). Why triangulate? Educational Researcher, 17 (2), 13-17.	RISJORD, M., MOLONEY, M. & DUNBAR, S. (2001). Methodological triangulation in nursing research. Philosophy of the Social Sciences, 31 (1), 40-59.
	GUBA E. & LINCOLN, Y. (1989). Fourth generation evaluation. Newbury Park : Sage.	O'LEARY, E. & HAYES, J. (2002). Methodological triangulation : The new way forward in counselling and health psychology. Irish Psychologist, 29 (4), 60.
	MURPHY, S.A. (1989). Multiple triangulation: Application in research. Qualitative Research, 38 (5), 291-297.

Tricher/tricherie : Tricher et coopérer. Cheating.

	SIERLES, F., HENDRICK, I. & CIRCLE, S. (1981). Cheating in medical school. Journal of Medical Education, 55, 124-125.
	STIMMEL, B. & YENS, D. (1982). Cheating by medical students on examinations. The American Journal of Medicine, 73, 160-164.
	EISENBERGER, R. & MASTERTON, F.A. (1983). Required high effort increases subsequent persistence and reduces cheating. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 44, 593-599.
	BREMBS, B. (1996). Chaos, cheating and cooperation : Potential solutions to the prisoner's dilemma. Oikos, 76, 14-24.

Tricher/tricherie (à l'école) : Tricher et plagier. Cheating on test, cheating in school.

	CISEK, G.H. (1999). Cheating on tests : How to do it, detect it, and prevent it. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
	DAVIS, S.F., DRINAN, P.F. & GALLANT, T.B. (2009). Cheating in school : What we know and what we can do.Wiley, John & Sons.
	ARTHUR W., GLAZE, R.M., VILLADO, A.J. & TAYLOR, J.E. (2009). Unproctored internet-based tests of cognitive ability and personality: Magnitude and extent of cheating and response distortion. Industrial and Organizational Psychology: Perspectives on Science and Practice, 2, 39-45.
	ARTHUR W. & GLAZE, R.M. (2011). Cheating and response distortion on remotely delivered assessments. In N. Tippins, & S. Adler (Eds.), Technology-enhanced assessment of talent (pp. 99-152). San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.

Trichotillomanie : Comportement compulsif qui consiste à s'arracher les cheveux ou les poils. Certains psychologues le considèrent comme un symptôme du trouble obsessionnel-compulsif. Trichotillomania, chronic hair pullers.

	ADAMS, W. (1980). Treatment of assaultive hair pullingin a multihandicapped youth. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 10, 335- 342.
	CHRISTENSON, G, MacKENZIE T., MITCHELL, J. & CALLIES, A.A. (1991). Placebo controlled, double-blind crossover study of fluoxetine in trichotillomania. Archives of General Psychiatry, 48, 1566-1571.
	ROTHBAUM, B.O. (1992). The behavioral treatment of trichotillomania. Behavioral Psychotherapy, 20, 85-90.	PENZEL, F. (2003). The hair-pulling problem : A complete guide to trichotillomania. Oxford University Press.
	CHRISTENSON, G.A. & CROW, S.J. (1996). The characterization and treatment of trichotillomania. The Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 57 (S8), 42-47.	ROMANIUK, C., MILTENBERGER, R. & DEAVER, C. (2003). Long term maintenance following habit reversal and adjunct treatment for trichotillomania. Child & Family Behavior Therapy, 25 (2), 45-59.
	O’SULLIVAN, R., RAUCH, S. & BRIETER, H. (1997). Reduced basal ganglia volumes in trichotillomania measured via morphometric MRI. Biological Psychiatry, 42, 39-45.
	STEIN, D., COETZER, R. & LEE, M. (1997). Magnetic resonance brain imaging in women with obsessive-compulsive disorder and trichotillomania. Psychiatry Research, 74, 177-82.
	MILTENBERGER, R.G., LONG, E.S., RAPP, J.T., LUMLEY, V, & ELLIOT, A.J. (1998). Evaluating the function of hair pulling: A preliminary investigation. Behavior Therapy, 29, 211-219.	WOODS, D.W., WETTERNECK, C.T. & FLESSNER, C.A. (2006). A controlled evaluation of acceptance and commitment therapy plus habit reversal for trichotillomania. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 44 (5), 639-656.
	RAPP, J.T., MILTENBERGER, R.G., GALENSKY, T.L., ELLINGTON, S.A. & LONG, E.S. (1999). A functional analysis of hair pulling. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 32, 329–337. [PDF]
	WATSON, T.S., DITTMER, K.I. & RAY K.P. (2000). Treating trichotillomania in a toddler : Variations of effective treatments. Child & Family Behavior Therapy, 22, 29–40.	MARKS, B. A., WETTERNECK C.T. & WOODS, D.W. (2006). Investigating health care providers’ knowledge about trichotillomania and its treatment. Cognitive Behaviour Therapy, 35, 19-27.
	BOUDJOUK, P., WOODS, D.W., MILTENBERGER, R.G. & LONG, E.S. (2000). Negative peer evaluation in adolescents: Effects of tic disorders and trichotillomania. Child & Family Behavior Therapy, 22, 17-28.	MILTENBERGER, R.G., WOODS, D.W & HIMLE, M. (2007). Tic disorders and trichotillomania. In P. Sturmey (Ed.), Functional analysis in clinical treatment (pp. 151-170). Burlington, MA : Elsevier.
	DIEFENBACH, G.J., REITMAN, D. & WILLIAMSON, D.A. (2000). Trichotillomania : A challenge to research and practice. Clinical Psychology Review, 20 (20), 289-309.	VORNDRAN, C.M., PACE, G.M., LUISELI, J.K., FLAHERTY, J., CHRISTIAN, L. & KLEINMANN, A. (2008). Functional analysis and treatment of chronic hair pulling in a child with cri du chat syndrome : Effects on co-occurring thumb sucking. Behavior Analysis in Practice, 1 (1), 10–15. [LIRE]
	WOODS, D.W. & MILTENBERGER, R.G. (Eds.). (2001). Tic disorders, trichotillomania, and other repetitive behavior disorders : Behavioral approaches to analysis and treatment. Norwell, MA : Kluwer Academic Publishers.

Tricyclique : Voir Antidépresseur tricyclique.

Triplett Norman (1861-1910) : Psychosociologue avant la lettre. Il fut le premier à étudier la facilitation sociale et à appliquer ce concept au milieu sportif. Certains historiens des sciences le considère comme le père de la psychologie sociale (titre partagé avec Ringelmann).

	TRIPLETT, N. (1898). The dynamogenic factors in pacemaking and competition. American Journal of Psychology, 9, 507-533.

Trisomie : Voir Syndrome de Down. Trisomy.

Tristesse : Sadness.

	BREHM, J.W., BRUMMETT, B. H. & HARVEY, L. (1999). Paradoxical sadness. Motivation & Emotion, 23, 31-44.
	HORWITZ, A.V. & WAKEFIELD, J.C. (2007/10). The loss of sadness : How psychiatry transformed normal sorrow into depressive disorder. New York : Oxford University Press / Comment la psychiatrie a medicalise nos tristesses. Paris : Edition Mardaga.

Trivers Robert L. (1943-) : Biologiste et sociobiologiste américain, pionnier de la psychologie évolutionniste. Professeur de Cosmides.

	TRIVERS, R.L. (1971). The evolution of reciprocal altruism. Quarterly Review of Biology, 46, 35-57.
	TRIVERS, R.L. (1972). Parental investment and sexual selection. In B. Campbell (Ed.), Sexual selection and the descent of man, 1871-1971 (pp 136-179). Chicago : Aldine.
	TRIVERS, R.L. (1974). Parent-offspring conflict. American Zoologist, 14, 249-264.
	TRIVERS, R.L. & HARE, R. (1976). Haplodiploidy and the evolution of the social insects. Science, 191 (4224), 250-263.
	TRIVERS, R.L. (1985). Social evolution. Menlo Park, CA : Benjamin/Cummings.

Troc : Échange de biens et de services entre deux individus ou plus, sans l'intermédiaire d'une monnaie ou d'un système monétaire.

Trois éléments de la contingence : Voir Contingence. Three-tem contingency.

Tromperie : Tromperie et mensonge. = duperie. Deception, verbal deception.

	BULLER, D.B., STRZYZEWSKI, K.D. & COMSTOCK, J. (1991). Interpersonal deception : I. Deceivers’ reactions to receivers’ suspicions and probing. Communications Monographs, 58, 1-24.
	BULLER, D.B. & BURGOON, J.K. (1994). Deception : Strategic and nonstrategic communication. In J.A. Daly & J.M. Wiemann (Eds.), Strategic interpersonal communication (pp. 191-223). Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.
	BULLER, D.B. & BURGOON, J.K. (1996). Interpersonal deception theory. Communication Theory, 6 (3), 203-242.
	FELDMAN, R.S., FORREST, J.A. & HAPP, B.R. (2002). Self-presentation and verbal deception : Do self-presenters lie more? Basic & Applied Social Psychology, 24, 163-170.

Tromperie (en recherche) : Procédure méthodologique qui consiste à dissimuler aux participants les véritables objectifs de la recherche et à leur fournir, en lieu et place, de fausses informations pour faire illusion. En conséquence, les sujets ne participent pas à la recherche en toute connaissance de cause. L'absence de consentement éclairé à une recherche soulève un problème d'éthique et de déontologie. Selon l'APA, le recours à la tromperie en recherche doit observer cinq critères : 1) Il n'existe pas d'autres moyens d'étudier le phénomène en question ou de tester l'hypothèse de recherche; 2) On ne peut s'attendre à ce qu'une fois informés des objectifs réels de la recherche, les participants accordent leur consentement; 3) Les participants ont, à tout moment, le droit de refuser de poursuivre la recherche; 4) À la fin de l'expérience, il est impératif de dévoiler aux participants les objectifs réels de la recherche. 5) Si la recherche ou la divulgation des objectifs de recherche produisent du stress chez les participants, le chercheur doit tout mettre en oeuvre pour le réduire ou l'éliminer. Tromperie, débriefing et déontologie. = duperie. Deception.

	ALIEN, V.L. (1966). Effect of knowledge of deception on conformity. Journal of Social Psychology, 101-106.	GOLDING, S.L. & LICHTENSTEIN, E. (1970). Confession of awareness and prior knowledge of deception as a function of interview set and approval motivation. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 14, 213-223.
	KELMAN, H.C. (1967). Human use of human subjects : The problem of deception in social psychological experiments. Psychological Bulletin, 67, 1-11. [PDF]	WILLIS, R.H. & WILLIS, Y.A. (1970). Role playing versus deception : An experimental comparison. Jounal of Personality & Social Psychology, 16, 472-477.
	FILLENBAUM, S., (1966). Prior deception and subsequent experimental performance : The "faithful" subject. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 4, 552-557.	ADAIR, J.O. (1972). Demand characteristics or conformity? : Suspiciousness of deception and experimenter bias in conformity research. Canadian Journal of Behavioral Science, 1, 238-248.
	STRICTER, L.J.. MESSIER, S. & JACKSON, D.N. (1967). Suspicion of deception : Implications for conformity research. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology,5, 379-389.	GALLO, P.S. SMITH. S. & MUMFORD, S. (1973). Effects of deceiving sublects upon experimental results. Jounal of Social Psychology, 89, 99-107.
	BERSCHEID, E., ABRAHAMS, D. & ARONSON, Y. (1967). Effectiveness debriefing following deception experiments. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 6, 371-380.	HOLMS, D.S. & BENNETT, D.H. (1974). Experiments to answer questions raised by the use of deception in psychological research : I. Role playing as an alternative to deception; II. Effectiveness of debriefing after deception; III. Effect of informed consent on deception. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 29, 385-367.
	GREENBERG, M.S. (1967). Role playing : An alternative to deception. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 7, 152-157.	FORWARD, J., CANTER, R. & KIRSCH, N. (1976). Role-enactment and deception methodologies. American Psychologist, 31, 595-604.
	STRICTER, L.J. MESSIER. S. & JACKSON, D.N. (1967). Suspicion of deception : Implications for conformity research. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 5, 379-389.	COOPER, I. (1976). Deception and role playing : On telling the good guys from the bad guys. American Psychologist, 31, 601-610.
	HOROWITZ, I.A. & ROTHSCHILD, B.H. (1970). Conformity as a function of deception and role playing. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 14, 224-226.	KOTESKEY, R.L. (1979). Deception and the Christian psychologist. Journal of the American Scientific Affiliation, 3, 58-59.
	SILVERMAN, I., SHULMN, A.D. & WIESENTHAL, D.L. (1970). Effects of deceiving and debriefing psychological subjects on performanee in later experiments. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 203-212.	JOHNSON, D.E. (1979). Deception in social psychological research : A reply to Koteskey. Journal of the American Scientific Affiliation, 31, 174-175.
	COOK. T.D., BEAN, J.R., CALDER, B.J., FREY, R., KROVETZ, M.L. & REISMAN, S.R. (1970). Demand characteristics and three conceptions of the frequently deceived subject. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 14, 185-194.	BASSETT, R.L., BASINGER, D. & LIVERMORE, P. (1992). Lying in the laboratory : Deception in human research from psychological, philosophical, and theological perspectives. Journal of the American Scientific Affiliation, 34, 201-212.
		WENDLER, D. (1996). Deception in medical and behavioral research : Is it ever acceptable? The Milbank quarterly, 74 (1), 33-49.
		NICKS, S.D., KORN, J.H. & MAINIERI, T. (1997). The rise and fall of deception in social psychology and personality research, 1921-1994. Ethics & Behavior, 7, 69-77.

Tronc cérébral : Partie du cerveau située au-dessus de la moelle épinière et responsable de fonctions automatiques comme les battements du coeur et la respiration. Il se divise en quatre parties : le mésenséphale (pédoncule cérébraux), le pont (protubérance annulaire), la moelle allongée (bulbe rachidien) et le cervelet. Brainstem.

Tropisme : Chez les plantes et les animaux, réponse d'orientation et de locomotion provoquées par des stimuli de l'environnement (lumière, humidité, chaleur). ( ): chimiotaxies (orientation en fonction des odeurs, des phéromones), galvanotropisme (orientation en fonction d'un champ électrique), géotaxie (orientation en fonction de la pesanteur), halotropisme (orientation en eauz salées), hygrotropisme (orientation en fonction de l'humidité), phototaxie (réaction à la lumière), phonotaxie (réaction à une source sonore), thermotropisme (orientation en fonction de la température), rhéotropisme (orientation en fonction du mouvement de l'eau).

	LOEB, J. (1912). The mechanistic conception of life. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
	BUDDENBROCK, W.V. (1916). A criticism of the tropism theory of Jacques Loeb. Journal of Animal Behavior, 6 (5), 341-366.
	CROZIER, W.J. (1928). Tropisms. Journal of General Psychology, 1, 213-218.

Troubetskoï Nicolas ( ) : Linguiste russe, membre du Cercle linguistique de Prague et chef de file de la phonologie structurelle. On lui doit le concept de phonème.

Trouble : Terme générique qui recouvre tout un pan de la réalité. Au sens large, il s'agit d'un problème, d'un déséquilibre ou d'une difficulté de nature biologique ou psychologique (ou les deux). Un trouble peut-être passagé, et donc se résorber rapidement (EX: un étourdissement) ou, dans certains cas, durer toute une vie (EX: handicap mental). Certains trouble sont minueur et n'engendrent que que quelques désagrément (EX: maux de tête), alors que d'autres ont des effets graves : ils diminuent la qualité de vie, empêche l'individu de faire ce qu'il veut faire ou provoquent de la douleur ou de la souffrance. lui l'origine biologique d'un problème engendre des conséquences sociales. EX : le cancer. Dans certains cas, c'est l'inverse, le problème psychologique a des conséquence sur la santé du malade. EX: Anorexie. Il existe également tout une gamme de troubles dont l'origne de la cause est matière à débat. EX: la dyslexie ou la dépression. Il va de soi qu'un problème, quel qu'il soit, a toujours une composante biologique (il se déroule toujours dans un cerveau) et une composante soicale (ce cerveau est toujours en relation avec un environnement social). On peut régler certains troubles soi-même (trouble mineur ou bénin), alors que d'autres requiert l'aide ou l'intervention d'un professionnel de la santé (trouble majeur). Dans un sens plus précis, le mot renvoi à tout une gamme de maladies biologiques ou mentales. ( ): Troubles ou maladies biologiques, troubles mentaux. Disorder.

Classement des troubles selon 4 axes
Origine	De nature biologique	Biologique et Psychologique	De nature psycholgique
Durée	Passagé	+- long	Toute une vie/Chronique
Gravité	Mineur	+- grave	Majeur
Séquelles	Mineur	+- grave	Majeur

	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (1999). Disorder as a black box essentialist concept. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 108, 465-472.
	WAKEFIELD, J.C (1999). Evolutionary versus prototype analyses of the concept of disorder. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 108, 374-399.

Troubles (mentaux) : Terme utilisé par la version française du DSM pour désigner l'ensemble des maladies mentales. *troubles psychologiques, trouble de santé mentale. NDLR : Un trouble est donc une maladie officiellement répertoriée; donc un trouble est une maladie, mais toute maladie n'est pas nécessairement un trouble. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas. Mental disorder, psychiatric disorder, psychological disorder.

L'ensemble des troubles mentaux
Troubles affectifs	Troubles de conduite	Troubles du langage
Troubles alimentaires	Troubles de somatisation	Troubles du sommeil
Trouble bipolaire	Troubles de la personnalité	Troubles envahissants du développement
Troubles cognitifs	Trouble de stress post-traumatique	Troubles neurocognitifs
Trouble d'anxiété	Trouble déficitaire de l'attention (avec h yperactivité)	Trouble obsessionnel-compulsif
Troubles d'apprentissage	Trouble déficitaire de l'attention (avec h yperactivité)	Trouble panique
Trouble d'attachement	Trouble dissociatif de l'identité	Troubles psychotiques
(Trouble) d'hyperactivité	Troubles du comportement

	BENTALL, R.P. (1992). A proposal to classify happiness as a psychiatric disorder. Journal of Medical Ethics, 18 (2), 94-8.	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (2000). Aristotle as sociobiologist : The 'function of a human being' argument, black box essentialism, and the concept of mental disorder. Philosophy, Psychiatry, & Psychology, 7, 17-44.
	MONAHAN, J. (1992). Mental disorder and violent behavior. American Psychologist, 47 (3), 511-521.	McNALLY, R.J. (2001). On Wakefield’s harmful dysfunction analysis of mental disorder. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 39, 309-314.
	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (1992). The concept of mental disorder : On the boundary between biological facts and social values. American Psychologist, 47 (3), 373-388.	HOUTS, A.C. (2001). Harmful dysfunction and the search for value neutrality in the definition of mental disorder : Response to Wakefield. Behavior Research & Therapy, 39, 1099-1132.
	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (1993). Limits of operationalization : A critique of Spitzer and Endicott's (1978) proposed operational criteria for mental disorder. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 102, 160-172.
		WAKEFIELD, J.C. (2006). High mental disorder rates are based on invalid measures: Questions about the claimed ubiquity of mutation-induced dysfunction. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 29, 424-426.

		WAKEFIELD, J.C. (2007). Fait et valeur dans le concept de trouble mental : le trouble en tant que dysfonction préjudiciable. Philosophiques, 33, (1), 37-63. [PDF]
		WAKEFIELD, J.C. (2007). What makes a mental disorder mental? Philosophy, Psychiatry, & Psychology, 13, 123-131.
	WAKEFIELD, J.C. (1999). Disorder as a black box essentialist concept. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 108, 465-472.	KESSLER, C. & WANG, P.S. (2008). The descriptive epidemiology of commonly occurring mental disorders in the United States. Annual Review of Public Health, 29, 115-129.
	WAKEFIELD, J.C (1999). Evolutionary versus prototype analyses of the concept of disorder. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 108, 374-399.	KELLER, M.C. (2008). The evolutionary persistence of genes that increase mental disorders risk. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 17, 395-399.
	KIRK, S.A., WAKEFIELD, J.C., HSIEH, D. & POTTICK, K. (1999). Social context and social workers' judgment of mental disorder. Social Service Review, 73, 82-104.	BROOME, M & BORTOLLOTI, L. (2010). What's wrong with 'mental' disorders? Psychological Medicine, 40,1783-1785.
		FIRST, M.B. & WAKEFIELD, J.C. Defining 'mental disorder' in DSM-IV. Psychological Medicine, 40, 1783-1785.

Troubles affectifs : Ensemble des troubles de l'humeur. = trouble de l'humeur, trouble thymique. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas.

Les troubles de l'humeur
Trouble bipolaire	Trouble d'anxiété	Dépression

Troubles alimentaires : Ensemble des troubles liés à l'alimentation et au comportement de manger. Il y a trouble lorsque un individu est incapable ou refuse de manger ou de boire des quantités suffisantes pour assurer une alimentation adéquate. Parfois, c'est la qualité des aliments qui en cause (aliment trop gras, trop de sel, malbouffe, pas assez de fruits, etc.). = trouble des conduites alimentaires. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas. Eating disorder, feeding disorder, problematic eating behaviors, feeding problem.

Les troubles alimentaires
Anorexie	Hyperphagie	Pica
Aversion alimentaire	Mérycisme	Refus de manger
Boulimie	Obésité	Vomissement
Caprice alimentaire	Obésité morbide
Coprophagie	Orthorexie

	SCHMIDEBERG, M. (1938). Intellectual inhibition and disturbances in eating. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 19, 17-22.	FAIRBURN, C.G. & HARRISON, P.J. (2003). Eating disorders. Lancet, 361 (9355), 407-416.
	PATTON, G.C. (1988). The spectrum of eating disorders in adolescence. Journal of Psychonomic Research, 32, 579-584.	HINRICHSEN, H., WRIGHT, F., WALLER, G. & MEYER, C. (2003). Social anxiety and coping strategies in the eating disorders. Eating Behaviors, 4 (2), 117-126.
	VADEREYCKEN, W., KROG, E. & VANDERLINDEN, J. (Eds.) (1989). The family approach to eating disorders. New York : PMA Publishing Corp.	PATEL, D.R., GREYDANUS, D.E., PRATT, H.D. & PHILLIPS, E.L. (2003). Eating disorders in adolescent athletes. Journal of Adolescent Research, 18 (3), 280-296.
	FAVAZZA, A.R., DE ROSEAR, L. & CONTERIO, K. (1989). Self-mutilation and eating disorders. Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior, 19, 352-361.	PIAZZA, C.C., PATEL. M.R., GULOTTA, C.S., SEEVIN, B.M. & LAYER, S.A. (2003). On the relative contributions of positive reinforcement and escape extinction in the treatment of food refusal. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 36 (3), 309-324.
	VITOUSEK, K.M. & HOLLON, K.B. (1990). The investigation of schematic content and processing in eating disorder. Cognitive Therapy & Research, 14, 191-214.	FAIRBURN, C.G. & HARRISON, P.J. (2003). Eating disorders. Lancet, 361 (9355), 407-416.
	YATES, A. (1990). Current perspectives on the eating disorders : 2. Treatment, outcome, and research directions. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 29.	BECKER, C.B., EVIVA, J.C. & ZAYFERT, C. (2004). Eating disorder symptoms amongfemale anxiety disorder patients in clinical practice: The importance of anxiety comorbidity assessment. Journal of Anxiety Disorders, 18 (3), 255-274.
	SHISSLAK, C.M., CRAGO, M. & NEAL, M.E. (1990). Prevention of eating disorders among adolescents. American Journal of Health Promotion, 5, 100-106.	KJELSAS, E., BJORNSTROM, C. & GÖTESTAM, K.G. (2004). Prevalence of eating disorders in female and male adolescents (14-15 years). Eating Behaviors, 5 (1), 13-25.
	PIKE, K.M. & RODIN, J. (1991). Mothers, daughters, and disordered eating. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 100, 198-204.	KEEL, P.K., KLUMP, K.L., MILLER, K.B., McGUE, M. & LACONE, W.G. (2005). Shared transmission of eating disorders and anxiety disorders. International Journal of Eating Disorders, 38 (2), 99- 105.
	BUDD, K. S., McGRAW, T. E., FARBISZ, R., MURPHY, T.B., HAWKINS, D., HEILMAN, N. (1992). Psychosocial cocomitants of children's feeding disorders. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 17, 81-94.	WILSON, G.T. (2005). Psychological treatment of eating disorders. Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 1, 439-465.
	BABBITT, R.L., HOCH, T.A., COE, D.A., CATALDO, M.F., KELLY, K.J., STACKHOUSE, C. & PERMAN, J.A. (1994). Behavioral assessment and treatment of pediatric feeding disorders. Developmental & Behavioral Pediatrics, 15 (4), 278-291.	REED, G.K., DOLEZAL, D.N., COOPER-BROWN, L.J. & WACKER, D.P. (2005). The effects of sleep disruption on the treatment of a feeding disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 38, 243-245.
	BABBIT, R.L., HOCH, T.A & COE, D.A. (1994). Behavioral feeding disorders. In D. Tuchman & R. Walters (Eds), Pediatric feeding and swallowing disorders : Pathology, diagnosis, and treatment. San Diego, CA : Singular Publishing Group.	VITOUSEK, K.M. & STUMPF, R.E. (2005). Difficulties in the assessment of personality traits and disorders in eating-disordered individuals. Eating disorders, 13 (1), 37-60.
	SLADE, P. (1995). Prospects for prevention. In G. Szmukler, G.C. Dare & Treasure, J. (Eds.), Handbook of eating disorders : Theory, treatment and research (pp. 385-398). London : John Wiley & Sons Ltd.	FAIRBURN, C.G., COOPER, Z., DOLL, H.A. & DAVIES, B.A. (2005). Identifying dieters who will develop an eating disorder : a prospective, population-based study. American Journal of Psychiatry, 162 (12), 2249-2255.
	WONDERLICH, S.A. (1995). Personality and eating disorders. In K.D. Brownell et C.G. Fairburn. (Eds.), Comprehensive textbook of eating disorders and obesity. New York : Guilford Press.	JONES, R.L., GLINTMEYER, N. & McKENZIE, A. (2005). Slim bodies, eating disorders and the coach-athlete relationship : A tale of identity creation and disruption. International Review for the Sociology of Sport, 40 (3), 377-391.
	ANDERSEN, A.E. (1995). Eating disorders in males. In K.D. Brownel & C.G. Fairburn (Eds.), Eating disorders and obesity : a comprehensive handbook (pp. 177-187). New York : Guilford Press.	SILBERG, J.L. & BULIK, C.M. (2005). The developmental association between eating disorders symptoms and symptoms of anxiety and depression in juvenile twin girls. Journal of Child Psychology & Psychiatry, 46 (12), 1317-1326.
	ABRAHAM, S. (1996). Characteristics of eating disorders among young ballet dancers. Psychopathology, 29, 223-229.	AIMÉ, A., SABOURIN, S. & RATTÉ, C. (2006). The eating disturbed spectrum in relation with coping and interpersonal functioning. Eating and Weight Disorders, 11 (2), 66-72.
	WILSON, T.G., HEFFERNAN, K. & BLACK, C.M.D. (1996). Eating disorders. Dans E.J. Mash et R.A. Barkley (Eds.), Child psychopathology (pp. 541-571). New York : Guilford Press.	ROSS, C.A. (2006). Overestimates of the genetic contribution to eating disorders. Ethical Human Psychology & Psychiatry, 8 (2), 123-131.
	HEWITT, J.K. (1997). Behavior genetics and eating disorders. Psychopharmacology Bulletin, 33, 355-358.	ADAIR, C.E., MARCOUX, G., WILLIAMS, A. & REIMER, M. (2006). The Internet as a source of data to support the development of a quality-of-life measure for eating disorders. Qualitative Health Research, 16, 538-546.
	WILSON, G.T. (1997). Cognitive behavioral treatment of bulimia nervosa. The Clinical Psychologist, 50 (2), 10-12.	TAYLOR, C.B., BRYSON, S., LUCE, K.H., CUNNIN, G.D., DOYLE, A.C., ABASCAL, L.B., ROCKWELL, R., DEV, P., WINZELBERG, A.J. & WILFLEY, D.E. (2006). Prevention of eating disorders in at-risk college-age women. Archives of General Psychiatry, 63 (8), 881-888.
	PIKE, K.M. (1998). Long-term course of anorexia nervosa : Response, relapse, remission, and recovery. Clinical Psychology Review, 18, 447-475.	WILSON, G.T., GRILO, C.M. & VITOUSEK, K.M. (2007). Psychological treatment of eating disorders. The American psychologist, 62 (3), 199-216.
	BECKER, A.E., GRINSPOON, S.K., KLIBANSKI, A. & HERZOG, D.B. (1999). Eating Disorders. New England Journal of Medicine, 340 (14), 1092-1098. Stein, M. T. & Robinson, J. R. (2000). Feeding problems, sleep disturbances, and negative behaviors in a toddler. Journal of Developmental & Behavioral Pediatrics, 21, 351-355.	MAZZEOA, S.E., TRACE, S.E., MITCHELLA, K.S. & WALKER GOW, R. (2007). Effects of a reality TV cosmetic surgery makeover program on eating disordered attitudes and behaviors. Eating Behaviors, 8 (3), 390-397.
	STEIN, M.T. & ROBINSON, J.R. (2000). Feeding problems, sleep disturbances, and negative behaviors in a toddler. Journal of Developmental & Behavioral Pediatrics, 21, 351-355.	COURTNEYA, E.A., GAMBOZA, J. & JOHNSON, J.G. (2008). Problematic eating behaviors in adolescents with low self-esteem and elevated depressive symptoms. Eating Behaviors, 9 (4), 408-414.
	PATEL, M.R., PIAZZA, C.C., KELLY, M.L., OSCHNER, C.A. & SANTANA, C.M. (2001). Using a fading procedure to increase liquid consumption in a child with feeding problems. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 34, 357-360.	PIAZZA, C.C. (2008). Feeding disorders and behavior : what have we learned? Developmental Disabilities Research Reviews, 14 (2), 174-181.
	LIEBERMAN, M., GAUVIN, L., BUKOWSI, W.M. & WHITE, D.R. (2001). Interpersonal influence and disordered eating behaviors in adolescent girls : The role of peer modeling, social reinforcement, and body-related teasing. Eating Behaviors, 2 (3), 215-236.	KLUCK, A.S. (2008). Family factors in the development of disordered eating : Integrating dynamic and behavioral explanations. Eating Behaviors, 9 (4), 471-483.
	FAIRBURN, C.G., COOPER, Z. & SHAFRAN, R. (2003). Cognitive behaviour therapy for eating disorders : a "transdiagnostic" theory and treatment. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 41 (5), 509-528.	CAREI, T.R., FYFE-JOHNSON, A.L., BREUNER, C.C. & BROWN, M.A. (2010). Randomized controlled clinical trial of yoga in the treatment of eating disorders. Journal of Adolescent Health, 46 (4), 346-351.
		AGRAS, W.S. (2010). The Oxford handbook of eating disorders. Oxford : Oxford University Press.

Trouble bipolaire : La découverte de cette maladie mentale est souvent attribuée à Kraepelin. Le trouble bipolaire est un trouble de l'humeur qui se se caractérise par une alternance de périodes de grande euphorie et d'irritabilité (état maniaque) et de mélancolie profonde (état dépressif), entrecoupées de périodes de relative stabilité. En psychaitrie, on utilise surtout le lithium pour soigner le trouble bipolaire (anciennement appelé maniaco-dépression). Dans la phase dépressive, les symptômes sont : perte d’énergie, sentiment d’impuissance et d’inutilité, insomnie, période de sommeil plus ou moins longue que d'habitude, prise ou perte de poids significative, difficulté à se concentrer et à se décider, diminution de la libido, perte d'intérêt dans les activités normalement gratifiantes, évitement des autres et isolement social, sentiment de tristesse et de désespoir, consommation abusive d'alcool ou de drogue, sentiment de culpabilité déraisonnable, idéation suicidaire, pensées morbides et tentative de suicide. Dans la phase dépressive, les symptômes sont : sentiments d’euphorie et d'irritabilité, optimisme exagéré, estime de soi gonflée à bloc, élocution rapide et parfois incompréhensible, pensées qui défilent sans arrêt, idées récurentes et obsédantes, période de sommeil plus courte que d'habitude, insomnie, agitation et manque de concentration. = maniaco-dépression, psychose maniaco-dépressive, désordre bipolaire, état maniaco-dépressif. Manic-depressiveness, bipolar disorder.

	KLEIN, M. (1935). A contribution to the psychogenesis of manic-depressive states. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis 16, 145-74.
	LOOMIS, M. & SINGER, J. (1980). Testing the bipolar assumption in Jung typology. Journal of Analytical Psychology, 25 (4), 351-356.
	BEMPORAD, J.R. (1988). Psychodynamic models of depression and mania. In A. Georgotas and R. Cancro (Eds.), Depression and mania. New York : Elsevier Science.	GOLDBERG, J. & HARROW, M. (2001) Risk for bipolar illness in patients initially hospitalized for unipolar major depression. American Journal of Psychiatry, 158, 1265- 1270.
	BAUER, M.S. & WHYBROW, P.C. (1990). Rapid cycling bipolar affective disorder. Treatment of refractory rapid cycling with high dose levothyroxine a preliminary study. Archives of General Psychiatry, 47, 435-440.	ANGST, J., GAMMA, A., BENZAAI, F., AJDACIC, V. EICH, D. & W. ROSSLER, W. (2003). Toward a re-definition of subthreshold bipolarity : Epidemiology and proposed criteria for bipolar-II minor bipolar disorders and hypomania. Journal of Affective Disorders, 73, 133-146.
	ZORNBERG, G.-L. & POPE, H.-G. (1993). Treatment of depression in bipolar disorder new direction for research. Journal of Clinical Psychopharmacology, 13, 397-408.
	THALBOURNE, M.A. & FRENCH, C.C. (1995). Paranormal belief, manic-depressiveness, and magical ideation : A replication. Personality & Individual Differences, 18, 291-292.	MacKINNON, D.F., ZANDI, P.P., GERSHON, E., NURNBERGER, J.I., REICH, T. & DEPAULO, J.R. (2003). Rapid switching of mood in families with multiple cases of bipolar disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 60, 92-928.
	AZORIN, J.M. (1995). Troubles bipolaires à cycles rapides. L’Encéphale, 6, 43-48.
	ISSAC, G. (1995). Is bipolar disorder the most common diagnostic entity in hospitalised adolescents and children ? Adolescence, 30, 273-276.	McGUFFIN, P., RIJSDIJK, F. & ANDREW, M. (2003). The heritability of bipolar affective disorder and the genetic relationship to unipolar depression. Archives of General Psychiatry, 60 (5), 497-502.
	GOLDBERG, J.F., HARROW, M. & GROSSMAN, L.S. (1995).Course and outcome in bipolar affective disorder : a longitudinal follow- up study. American Journal of Psychiatry, 152, 379-384.	SCOTT, J. (2004). What is the role of psychological therapies in the treatment of bipolar disorders? European Neuropsychopharmacology, 14 (S3), 111-112.
	GITLIN, M.J., SWENDSEN, J., HELLER, T.L. & HAMMEN, C. (1995). Relapse and impairment in bipolar disorder. American Journal of Psychiatry, 152 (11), 1635-1640.	LAM, D.H., HAYWARD, P., WATKINS, E.R., WRIGHT, K. & SHAM, P. (2005). Relapse prevention in patients with bipolar disorder: Cognitive therapy outcome after 2 years. American Journal of Psychiatry, 162, 324-329.
	STOBER, M., SCHMIDT-LACKNER, S., FREEMAN, R., BOWER, S., LAMPERT, C. & DeANTONIO, M. (1995). Recovery and relapse in adolescents with bipolar affective illness : a five-year naturalistic, prospective follow-up. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 34, 724-371.	AKISKAL, K.K. & AKISKAL H.S. (2005). The theoretical underpinnings of affective temperaments : Implications for evolutionary foundations of bipolar disorder and human nature. Journal of Affective Disorders, 85, 231-239.
	CHEN, Y.W. & DILSAVER, S.C. (1995). Comorbidity of panic disorder in bipolar illness : evidence from the epidemiologic catchment area survey. American Journal of Psychiatry, 152, 280-282.	PERLIS, R.H. (2005). Misdiagnosis of bipolar disorder. American Journal of Managed Care, 11 (9), 271-274.
	GROSSMAN, L.S. & HARROW, M. (1996). Interactive behavior in bipolar manic patients and its link to thought disorder. Comprehensive Psychiatry, 37, 245-252.	CLARK, L. & SAHAKIAN, B. (2005). Neuropsychological and biological approaches to understanding bipolar disorder. In S. Jones & R. Bentall (Eds.), The psychology of bipolar disorder. Oxford, UK : OUP.
	BASCO, M.R. & RUSH, A. J. (1996). Cognitive-behavioral therapy for bipolar disorder. New York Guilford Press.	GAUDIANO, B.A., MILLER, I.W. (2005). Anxiety disorder comorbidity in Bipolar I Disorder: Relationship to depression severity and treatment outcome. Depression and Anxiety, 21, 71- 77.
	TORREY, E.F., MILLER J., RAWLINGS, R. & YOLKEN, R.H. (1997). Seasonality of births in schizophrenia and bipolar disorder : A review of the literature. Schizophrenia Research, 28, 1–38.	HARRIS, M., CHANDRAN, S., CHAKRABORTY, N. & HEALY, D. (2005). The impact of mood stabilizers on bipolar disorder : The 1890s and 1990s compared. History of Psychiatry, (16), 423-434.
	GOLDSTEIN, M.J. & MIKLOWITZ, D.J. (1997). Bipolar disorder : A family focused treatment approach. NY : Guildford Press.	CHISTODOULOU, T., LEWIS, M., PLOUBIDIS, G.B. & FRANGOU, S. (2006). The relationship of impulsivity to response inhibition and decision-making in remitted patients with bipolar disorder. European Psychiatry, 21, (4), 270-273.
	GELLER, B. & LUBY, J. (1997). Child and adolescent bipolar disorder : a review of the past 10 years. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 36, 168-1176.	JONES, S.H. & BENTALL, R.P. (2006). The psychology of bipolar disorder. Oxford : Oxford University Press.
	GOODWIN, F.K. & GHAEMI, S.N. (1998). Understanding manic-depressive illness. Archives of General Psychiatry, 55, 23-25.
	GREEN, D.P., SALOVEY, P. & TRUAX, K.M. (1999). Static, dynamic, and causative bipolarity of affect. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 76, 856-867.	BALL, J. R., MITCHELL, P.B., CORRY, J.C., SKILLECORN, A., SMITH, M. & MALHI G.S. (2006). A randomized controlled trial of cognitive therapy for bipolar disorder : Focus on long-term change. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 67, 277-286.
	LAM, D.H., JONES, S., HAYWARD, P. & BRIHT, J. (1999). Cognitive therapy for bipolar disorder : A therapist’s guide to the concept, methods and practice. Chichester, UK : Wiley and Son Ltd.	LAM, D.H. & JONES, S.H. (2006). Bipolar disorder In A. Carr & M. McNulty (Eds), Handbook of adult clinical psychology. London : Routledge.
	THALBOURNE, M.A., KEOGH, E. & CRAWLEY, S.E. (1999). Manic-depressiveness and its correlates. Psychological Reports, 85, 45-53.	LAM, D.H. (2006). What can we conclude from studies on psychotherapy in bipolar disorder ? The British Journal of Psychiatry, 188, 321-322.
	ZARATE, C.A. TOHEN, M., LAND, M. & CAVANAGH, S. (2000). Functional impairment and cognition in bipolar disorder. Psychiatric Quarterly, 71, 309-329.	BLADER, J.C. & CARLSTON, G.A. (2007). Increased rates of bipolar disorder diagnoses among U.S. child, adolescent, and adult populations, 1996-2004. Biological Psychiatry, 62, 107-114.
	ANGST, J. & SELLORO, R. (2000). Historical perspectives and natural history of bipolar disorder. Biological Psychiatry, 48 (6), 445-457.	SYSKO, R. & WALSH, B.T. (2007). A systematic review of placebo response in studies of bipolar mania. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 68 (8), 1213-1217.
	TSEVAT, J., KECK, P.E., HORNUNG, R.W & McELROY, S.L. (2000). Health values of patients with bipolar disorder. Quality of Life Research, 9 (5), 579-586.	HEALY, D. (2008). Mania : A short history of bipolar disorder. Baltimore : Johns Hopkins.
	AKISKAL, H.S., BOURGEOIS, M.L., ANGST, J., POST, R., MOLLER, H. & HIRSCHFELD, R. (2000). Re-evaluating the prevalence of and diagnostic composition within the broad clinical spectrum of bipolar disorders. Journal of Affective Disorders, (59), S5-S30.	LAM, D.H., JONES, S.H & HAYWARD, P. (2010). Cognitive therapy for bipolar disorder : A therapist's guide to concepts, Methods and Practice. Wiley Series in Clinical Psychology.

Trouble cognitif : Trouble de la pensée et de la mémoire. Troubles cognitifs et neurocognitifs.

Trouble concomitant : Ce terme renvoie à tout trouble qui se manifeste en même temps qu'un autre trouble considéré comme le trouble principal ou du moins celui qui fait l'objet de la recherche ou du traitement. Trouble concomitant et comorbidité. = trouble secondaire.

Trouble d'anxiété (généralisée) : Peur diffuse et irrationnelle. Anxiété et trouble d'anxiété. = troubles anxieux. Anxiety disorder, Generalized Anxiety Disorder (GAD).

	TORGENSEN, S. (1983). Genetic factors in anxiety disorders. Archives of General Psychiatry, 40, 1085-1089. :	FORSYTH, J.P. & McNEIL, D.W. (2002). Mastery of your anxiety and worry : A multimodal case study of the effectiveness of a manualized treatment for generalized anxiety disorder. Cognitive & Behavioral Practice, 9, 200-212.
	BECK, A.T., EMERY, G. & GREENBERG, R.L. (1985). Anxiety disorder and phobias : a cognitive perspective. New York : Basic book.	GORMAN, J.M. (2003). Treating generalized anxiety disorder. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 64 (S2), 24-29. [PDF]
	BARLOW, D.H. (1987). The classification of anxiety disorders. In G.L. Tischler (Ed.), Diagnosis and classification in psychiatry : A critical appraisal of DSM-III. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.	BARLOW, D.H. & ALLEN, L.B. (2004). The scientific basis of psychological treatments for anxiety disorders : past, present and future. In J.M. Gorman (Ed.), Fears and anxiety: Benefits of translational research. Washington, DC : American Psychiatric Press.
	BARLOW, D.H. (1988). Anxiety and its disorders : The nature and treatment of anxiety and panic. New York : Guilford Press.	HERBERT, J.D., RHEINGOLD, A.A., GAUDIANO, B.A. & MYERS, V. H. (2004). Standard versus extended cognitive behavior therapy for social anxiety disorder : A randomized-controlled trial. Behavioural & Cognitive Psychotherapy, 32, 131-147.
	EFFERS, S. (1992). Feel the fear and do it anyway. New York : Fawcett.	HUDSON, J.L., DEVENEY, C. & TAYLOR, L. (2005). Nature, assessment, and treatment of generalized anxiety disorder in children. Pediatric Annals, 34, 97-106.
	ORSILLO, S.M. & McCAFFREY, R.J. (1992). Anxiety disorders. In A. Puente & R.J. McCaffrey (Eds.). Handbook of neuropsychological assessment : A biopsychosocial perspective (pp. 215-261). New York : Plenum.	HERBERT J. D., GAUDIANO, B.A. , RHEINGOLD, A.A., Myers, V. H., DARYMPLE, K.L, & NOLAN, E.M. (2005). Social skills training augments the effectiveness of cognitive behavior group therapy for Social Anxiety Disorder. Behavior Therapy, 36, 125-138.
	CANDILIS, P.J., & POLLACK, M.H. (1997). The hidden costs of untreated anxiety disorders. Harvard Review of Psychiatry, 5, 40-42.	WELLS, A. & KING, P. (2006). Metacognitive therapy for generalized anxiety disorder : An open trial. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 37 (3), 206-212.
	BOURNE, E.J. (2001). The anxiety and phobia workbook. Oakland, CA : New Harbinger.	ROEMER, L. & ORSILO, S.M. (2007). An open trial of an acceptance-based behavior therapy for generalized anxiety disorder. Behavior Therapy, 38, 72-85.
	HOFMANN, S.G. & BARLOW, D.H. (1999). The costs of anxiety disorders: Implications for psychosocial interventions. In N.E. Miller & K.M. Magruder (Eds.), Cost effectiveness of psychotherapy (pp. 224-234). New York: Oxford University Press.
	BALLENGER, J.C. (1999). Current treatments of the anxiety disorders in adults. Biological Psychiatry, 46, 1579-1594.	TURGEON, L. & GENDREAU, P. (2007). Les troubles anxieux chez les enfants et les adolescents. Marseille : Solal.
	MATHEW, S.J., COPLAN, J.D. & GORMAN, J.M. (2001). Neurobiological mechanisms of social anxiety disorder. American Journal of Psychiatry, 158 (10), 1558-1567.	ROEMER, L. & ORSILO, S.M. & SALTERS-PEDNEAULT, K. (2008). Efficacy of an acceptance-based behavior therapy for generalized anxiety disorder : Evaluation in a randomized controlled trial. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 76, 1083-1089.
	FELGOISE, S.H., NEZU, C.M. & NEZU, A.M. (2002). Problem-solving approaches to treating anxiety disorders. In Ditomasso & Gosch (Eds.), Comparative treatment of anxiety disorders. NY : Springer.

Trouble d'apprentissage (TA) : Difficulté à apprendre, à acquérir de nouveaux comportements. = difficulté d'apprentissage. Learning Disabilies, (LD), learning problems.

	KIRK S.A. & BATEMAN, B. (1962) Diagnosis and remediation of learning disabilities. Exceptional Children, 29, 73-78.	FINLAN, T.G. (1994). Learning disability: The imaginary disease. Westport, CT : Bergin & Garvey.
		MATHER, N. & ROBERTS, R. (1994). Learning disabilities: A field in danger of extinction? Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 9, 49-58.
	HALLAHAN, D.P. & CRUICSHANK, W.M. (1973). Psychoeducational foundations of learning disabilities. Englewood Cliffs, NJ : Prentice Hall.	PINTRICH, P.R., ANDERMAN, E.M. & KLOBUCAR, C. (1994). Intraindividual differences in motivation and cognition in students with and without learning disabilities. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 27, 360-370.
		TORGESEN, J.K. (1997). The prevention and remediation of reading disabilities : Evaluating what we know from research. Journal of Academic Language Therapy, 1, 11-47
		BRODY L.E., MILLS. C.F. (1997). Gifted children with learning disabilities : A review of the issues.ournal of Learning Disabilities, 30, 282-296.
	BERK, R.A. (1983) Learning disabilites as a category of underachievement. In L.H. Fox, L. Brody & Tobin, D. (Eds.), Learning disabled gifted children : Identification and programming (pp. (51-76). Baltimore : University Park Press.	FULK, B.M., BRIGHAM, F.J. & LOHMAN, D.A. (1998). Motivation and self-regulation : A comparison of students with learning and behavior problems. Remedial & Special Education, 19, 300-309.
	ALGOZZINE, B. & YSSELDYKE, J.E. (1983). Learning disabilities as a subset of school failure : The oversophistication of a concept. Exceptional Children, 50, 242-246.	MACCINI, P. & HUGHES, C.A. (1997). Mathematics interventions for adolescents with learning disabilities. Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 12 (3), 168-176.
	REYNOLDS, C.R. (1984). Critical measurement issues in learning disabilities. Journal of Special Education, 18, 451-476.	SPEAR-SWERLING, L. & STERNBERG, R.J. (1998). Curing our "epidemic" of learning disabilities. Phi Delta Kappan, 397-401.
	GADDES, W.H. (1985). Learning disabilities and brain function. A Neuro-psychological Approach. Springer, New York.	SANDLER, A. (2005). Placebo effects in developmental disabilities: implications for research and practice. Mental Retardation and Developmental Disabilities Research Reviews, 11 (2), 164-170.
	LYON, G.R. & TOOMEY, F. (1985). Neurological, neuropsychological, and cognitive- developmental approaches to learning disabilities. Topics in Learning Disabilities, 1, 1-10.	SWANSON, H.L. & HOSKYN, M. (1998). Experimental intervention research on students with learning disabilities : a meta-analysis of treatment outcomes. Review of Educational Research, 68 (3), 277-321.
	GANSCHOW, L. (1985). Diagnosing and remediating writing problems of gifted students with language learning disabilities. Journal for the Education of the Gifted, 9 (1) 24-43.	SLEETER, C.E. (1998). Yes, learning disabilities is political; what isn't? Learning Disability Quarterly, 21, 289-296.
	SLEETER, C.E. (1986). Learning disabilities: The social construction of a special education category. Exceptional Children, 53, 46-54.	STANOVICH, K.E. (1999). The sociopsychometrics of learning disabilities. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 32, 350-361.
		SWANSON, H.L. (2001). Searching for the best model for instructing students with learning disabilities. Focus on Exceptional Children, 34, 1-15.
	SHINN, M.R., YSSELDYKE, J.E., DENO, S.L. & TINDAL, G.A. (1986). A comparison of differences between students labeled learning disabled and low achieving on measures of classroom performance. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 19, 545-552.	LYON, G.R. FLETCHER, J.M.,SHAYWITZ, S.E., SHAYWITZ, B.A., TORGESEN, J.K., WOOD, F. B., SCHUTLE, A. & OLSON, R. (2001). Rethinking Learning Disabilities. Hudson Institute.
		SWANSON, H.L. & HOSKYN, M. (2001). Instructing adolescents with learning disabilities : A component and composite analysis. Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 16 (2), 109-119.
	COLES, G. (1987). The learning mystique : A critical look at "learning disabilities." New York : Pantheon.	SWANSON, H.L. (2001). Research on interventions for adolescents with learning disabilities : A meta-analysis of outcomes related to higher-order processing. The Elementary School Journal, 101 (3), 331-348.
	CARNINE, D.W. (1987). (1989). Teaching complex content to learning disabled students : The role of technology. Exceptional Children, 55 (6), 524- 533.	ZIGMOND, N. (2003). Searching for the most effective service delivery model for students with learning disabilities. In H.L. Swanson, K.R. Harris, & S. Graham (Dir.), Handbook of learning disabilities (pp. 110-124). New York : Guilford Press.
	SIEGEL, L.S. (1989). I.Q. is irrelevant to the definition of learning disabilities. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 22, 469-478.	SWANSON, H.L. & DESHLER, D. (2003). Instructing adolescents with learning disabilities : Converting a meta-analysis to practice. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 36 (2), 124-135.
	HAMMILL, D.D. (1990). On defining learning disabilities : An emerging consensus. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 23, 76-84.	FLETCHER, J.M., FRANCIS, D.J., MORRIS, R.D. & LYON, G.R. (2005). Evidence-based assessment of learning disabilities in children and adolescents. Journal of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology, 34, 506-522.
	FRANKBERGER W., & FRONZAGLIO, K. (1991). A review of states' criteria for identifying children with learning disabilities. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 24, 495-500.	FLETCHER, J.M., DENTON, C. & FRANCIS, D.J. (2005). Validity of alternative approaches for the identification of LD : Operationalizing unexpected underachievement. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 38, 545-552.
	KLATT, H. J. (1991). Learning disabilities : A questionable construct. Educational Theory, 41, 47-60.	DE GRAVE, D., DEBOUTTE, D., ROEYERS, H., VAN BORSEL, J., CONTENT, A., WETZBURGER., BONNIER, C., SCHELSTAETE, M.A., GOETRY, V., NOSSENT, C. et VAN HECKE, P. (2006). Troubles du langage et de l’apprentissage. Une recherche de la littérature. Bruxelles, Belgique : Le Service des Soins de Santé de l’Institut National d’Assurance Maladie-Invalidité.
	CHASE, C. & TALLAL, P.A. (1992). Learning disabilities : cognitive aspects. In L. R. Squire (Ed.), Encyclopedia of learning and memory. New York : Macmillian Publishing Company,	FLETCHER, J.M., LYON, G.R., FUCHS, L. & BARNES, M. (2007). Learning disabilities : From identification to intervention. New York : Guilford Press.
	DORIS, J.L. (1993). Defining learning disabilities : A history of the search for consensus. In G.R. Lyon, D B. Gray, J.F. Kavanagh, & N.A. Krasnegor (Ed.), Better understanding learning disabilities : New views from research and their implications for education and public policies (pp. 97-115). Baltimore : Brookes.	PRATT, H.D., & PATEL, D.R. (2007). Learning disorders in children and adolescents. Primary Care, 34, 361-374.
	ELLIS, E.S. (1993). Integrative strategy instruction : A potential model for teaching content area subjects to adolescents with learning disabilities. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 26, 358-383.	MACCINI, P., MULCAHY, C.A. & WILSON, M.G. (2007). A follow-up of mathematics interventions for secondary students with learning disabilities. Learning Disabilities Research et Practice, 22 (1), 58-74.
	SHAFRIR, U. & SIEGEL, L.S. (1994). Subtypes of learning diabilities in adolascents and adults. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 23 (2), 123-134.	BERRY, K., BARROWCLOUGH, C. & WEARDEN, A. (2008). Attachment theory : A framework for understanding symptoms and interpersonal relationships in psychosis. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 46 (12), 1275-1282.

Trouble d'apprentissage spécifique : Difficulté à apprendre, à acquérir de nouveaux comportements dans un domaine particulier. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas. Specific learning difficulties.

Les troubles d'apprentissage
Dyscalculie	Dyslexie	Dysorthographie

	FRANCES-WILLIAMS, J. (1970). Children with Specific learning difficulties. Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Trouble d'attachement : Trouble et attachement. Attachment disorder.

	AINSWORTH, M.D., BLEHAR, M.C., WATERS, E. & WALL, S. (1978). Patterns of attachment : A psychological study of the strange situation. Hillsdale, NJ : Lawrence Erlbaum.
	RUTTER, M. (1995). Clinical implications of attachment concepts : Retrospect and prospect. Journal of Child Psychology & Psychiatry & Allied Disciplines, 36, 549-571.
	KING, M.G. & NEWHAM, K. (2007). Attachment disorder, basic trust and educational psychology. Australian Journal of Educational & Developmental Psychology, 7, 27-35.
	KING, M.G. & NEWHAM, K. (2007). Affective anomia : An interventional focus for attachment disorder. Australian Journal of Educational & Developmental Psychology, 7, 103-113.

Trouble d'attention : Voir Trouble déficitaire de l'attention (avec ou sans hyperactivité).

Trouble d'hyperactivité (TH) : Trouble d'hyperactivité, Ritalin et déficit d'attention. = hyperactivité, trouble d'hyperactivité sans déficit d'attention. Hyperactivity Disorder, hyperactive child syndrome, HD.

	STEWART, M.A., PITTS, F.N., CRAIG, A.G. &DIERUF, W. (1966). The hyperactive child syndrome. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 36, 861-867.
	WEISS, G. & HECHTMAN, L. (1979). The hyperactive child syndrome. Science, 205, 1348–1354.

Troubles de conduite :

	PAQUETTE, G., PAUZÉ, R. & JOLY, J. (2006) Caractéristiques sociofamiliales et personnelles qui permettent de distinguer les filles et les garçons présentant un trouble des conduites. Revue de Psychoéducation, 35 (2), 251-276.

Trouble de somatisation : Trouble de somatisation et hypocondrie. = syndrome de briquet. somatization disorder, Briquet’s syndrom.

	GUZE, S.B., CLONINGER, C.R., MARTIN, R.L. & CLAYTON, P.J. (1986). A follow-up and family study of Briquet’s syndrome. British Journal of Psychiatry, 149, 17-23.
	SIMON, G.E. & GUREJE, O. (1999). Stability of somatization disorder and somatization symptoms among primary care patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 56, 90-95.
	RIEF, W., HILLER, W. & MARGRAF, J. (2003). Cognitive aspects of hypochondriasis and the somatization syndrome. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 107, 587-595.

Troubles de la personnalité : Ensemble de troubles qui se caractérise par une désorganisation plus ou moins importante de la personnalité. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas. Personality disorder.

Les troubles de la personnalité
Personnalité paranoïaque	Personnalité limite	Personnalité dépendante
Personnalité schizoïde	Personnalité histrionique	Personnalité obsessionnelle-compulsive
Personnalité schizotypique	Personnalité narcissique	Personnalité passive-agressive
Personnalité antisociale	Personnalité évitante

	AUSUBEL, D.P. « Personality Disorder is disease. American Psychologist, 16, 59-74.
	KERNBERG, O. (1984). Severe personality disorders. New Haven, CT : Yale University Press
	LIEBOWITZ, M.R., STONE, M.H. & TURKAT, I.D. (1986) Treatment of personality disorders. In A.J. Frances & R.E. Hales (Eds.), American Psychiatric Association Annual Review (Vol. 5). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press.
	RAPOPORT J.L. & ZAMETKIN, A. (1988). Drug treat- ment of attention deficit disorder. In L.M. Bloomingdale & J. Sergeant (Eds.), Attention deficit disorder : Criteria, cognition, intervention (pp. 161-182). New York: Pergamon Press.
	FAHY, T.A. (1988). The diagnosis of multiple personality disorder : A critical review. British Journal of Psychiatry, 153, 597-606.	FÉLINE, A., GUELFI, J.D. et HARDY, P. (2002). Les troubles de la personnalité. Paris : Flammarion.
	ALDEN, L. (1989). Short-term structured treatment for avoidant personality disorder. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 57, 756-764.	JONES, S.H. (2002). Assessment of prevalence of personality disorder in primary and secondary care. Proceedings of the British Psychological Society, 10, 112.
	STONE, M.H. (1993). Long-term outcome in personality disorders. British Journal of Psychiatry, 162, 299-313.	McDERMUT, W., ZIMMERMAN, M. & CHELMINSKI, I. (2003). The construct validity of depressive personality disorder. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 112, 49-60.
	FELDBRUGGE, J. (1992) Rehabilitation of patients with personality disorders: patient-staff collaboration used as a working model and a tool. Criminal Behaviour & Mental Health, 2, 169-176.
	EPPRIGHT, T.D., KASHANI, J.H. & ROBINSON, B.D. (1993) Comorbidity of conduct disorder and personality disorders in an incarcerated juvenile population. American Journal of Psychiatry, 150, 1233-1236.
	SAMUELS, J.F., NESTADT, G, ROMANOSKI, A.J., FOLSTEIN, M.F., McHUGH, P.R. (1994). DSM-III personality disorders in the community. American Journal of Psychiatry, 151, 1055-1062.	HUPRICH, S.K. (2004). Convergent and discriminant validity of three measures of depressive personality disorder. Journal of Personality Assessment, 82, 321-328.
	MILLON, T. & DAVIES, R.D. (1996). Disorders of personality : DSM-IV and beyond. New York : John Wiley & Sons, Inc..	BOARD, B.J. & FRITZON, K. (2005). Disordered personalities at work. Psychology Crime & Law, 11, 17-32.
	MARSHALL, W. & SERIN, R. (1997). Personality disorders. In S.M. Turner & R. Hersen (Eds.), Adult psychopathology and diagnosis (pp. 508-541). New York : Wiley.
	MILLER, P.M. & LISAK, D. (1999). Associations between childhood abuse and personality disorder symptoms in college males. Journal of Interpersonal Violence, 14 (6), 642-656.	PROULX, J. (2006). Les troubles de la personnalité des agresseurs sexuels. Dans T. Pham (Dir.), L'évaluation diagnostique des agresseurs sexuels (p. 43-68). Belgique : Mardaga.
	GABBARD, G.O. (2000). Psychotherapy of personality disorders. Journal of Psychotherapy Research & Practice, 9 (1), 1-6.	HUPRICH, S.K., ZIMMERMAN, M. & CHELMINSKI, I. (2006). Disentangling depressive personality disorder from avoidant, borderline, and obsessive-compulsive personality disorders. Comprehensive Psychiatry, 47, 298-306.
	COSTA, P.T. & WIDIGER, T.A. (2001). Personality disorders and the five-factor model of personality. Washington, DC : American Psychological Association.	HUPRICH, S.K. & BORNSTEIN, R.F. (2007). Categorical and dimensional assessment of personality disorders : A consideration of the issues. Journal of Personality Assessment, 89, 3-15.
	BENDER, D.S., DOLAN, R.T., SKODOL, A.E., SANISLOW, C.A., DYCK, I.R., McGlASHAN, T.H., SHEA, M.T., ZANARINI, M.C., OLDHAM, J.M. & GUNDERSON, J.G. (2001). Treatment utilization by patients with personality disorders. American Journal of Psychiatry, 158, 295-302.	NELSON-GRAY, R.O., MITCHELL, J.T., KIMBREL N.A. & HURST, R.M. (2007). The development and maintenance of personality disorders : A behavioral perspective. The Behavior Analyst Today, 8 (4), 443-482.
	ALDEN, L.E., LAPOSA, J.M., TAYLOR C.T. & RYDER, A.G. (2002). Avoidant personality disorder : Current status and future directions. Journal of Personality Disorders, 16, 1-29.	FOUNTOULAKIS, K.N., LECHT, S. & APRINIS, G.S. (2008). Personality disorders and violence. Current Opinion in Psychiatry, 21, 84-92.
	GABBARD, G.O. (2005). Mind, brain, and personality disorders. American Journal of Psychiatry, 162 (4), 648-655.	MURPHY, N. & McVEY, D. (2010). Treating severe personality disorder : Creatin robust services for clients with complex mental health needs. London : Routledge

Troubles deficitaire de l'attention (avec hyperactivité) : THDA, conduite automobile et hyperactivité. TDHA et échelle de Wender. = THDA ou THADA. ADHD, Attention Disorder Hyperactivity Disorder.

	DOUGLAS, V.I. (1972). Stop, look, and listen : The problem of sustained attention and impulse control in hyperactive and normal children. Canadian Journal of Behavioural Science, 4, 259-282.	JENSEN, P., ARNOLD, L. & RICHTERS, J. (2000). 14-month randomized clinical trial of treatment strategies for attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 56, 1073-1086.
	DOUGLAS, V.I. & PETERS, K.G. (1979). Toward a clearer definition of the attentional deficit of hyperactive children. In G.A. Hale & M. Lewis (Eds.), Attention and the developments of cognitive skills (pp. 173–248). New York : Plenum.	POISSANT, H. (2000). Le trouble déficitaire d'attention/d'hyperactivité. Revue canadienne de psycho-éducation, 29 (2).
	HAENLEIN, M. & CAUL, W.F. (1987). Attention deficit disorder with hyperactivity : A specific hypothesis of reward dysfunction. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 26, 356– 362.	RESNICK, R.J. (2000). The hidden disorder : A clinician’s guide to attention deficit hyperactivity disorder in adults. APA.
	MILICH, R., PELHAM, W. & HINSHAW, S.P. (1985). Issues in the diagnosis of attention deficit disorder: A caution- ary note. Psychopharmacology Bulletin, 22, 1101– 1104.	CHARLEBOIS, P. (2000). La prévention des problèmes associés au déficit d'attention avec hyperactivité. Dans F. Vitaro et C. Gagnon (Eds), Prévention des problèmes d'adaptation chez les enfants et adolescents (Tome II, pp. 69-113). Sainte-Foy : Presses de l'Université du Québec.
	LAHEY, E.B., SCHAUGHENCY, E.A., HYND, G.W. & CARLSON, C.L. (1987). Attention deficit disorder with and without hyperactivity : Comparison of behavioral characteristics of clinic-referred children. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 26, 718–723.
	HINSHAW, S.P. (1987). Hyperactivity, attention deficit disorders, and learning disabilities. In V.B. Van Hasselt & M. Hersen (Eds.), Psychological evaluation of the developmentally and physically disabled (pp. 213-260). New York : Plenum Press.	REID, R., RICCIO, C.A., KESSLER, R.H., DUPAUL, G.J., POWER, T.J., ANASTOPOULOS, A.D., ROGERS-ADKINSON, D. & NOLL, M.B. (2000). Gender and ethnic differences in ADHD as assessed by behavior ratings. Journal of Emotional & Behavioral Disorders, 8, 38-48.
	HINSHAW, S.P. (1987). On the distinction between attentional deficit/hyperactivity and conduct problems/aggression in child psychopathology. Psychological Review, 101, 443-463.	BINDER, L.M., DIXON, M.R. & GHEZI, P.M. (2000). A procedure to teach self-control to children with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 33, 233-237.
	BARKLEY, R.A. (1987). The assessment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorders. Behavioral Assessment, 5, 207-233.	BREGGIN, P.R. (2000). What psychologists and psychotherapists need to know about ADHD and stimulants. Changes : An International Journal of Psychology & Psychotherapy, 18, 13-23. [PDF]
	DOUGLAS, V.I. (1988). Cognitive deficits in children with attention deficit disorder with hyperactivity. In L. M. Bloomingdale & J. A. Sergeant (Eds.), Attention defi- cit disorder : Criteria, cognition, intervention (pp. 65–82). New York : Pergamon Press.	BROWN, R.T., FREEMAN, W.S. & PERRIN, J.M. (2001). Prevalence and assessment of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in primary care settings. Pediatrics, 107 (3), 1-11.
	MEICHENBAUM, D. (1988). Cognitive behavioral modifi- cation with attention deficit hyperactive children. In L.M. Bloomingdale & J. Sergeant (Eds.), Attention deficit disorder : Criteria, cognition, intervention (pp. 127–140). New York : Pergamon Press.	WILLCUTT, E.G., PENNINGTON, B.F., OLSON, R.K., BOADA, R., OGLINE, J., TUNICK, R. & CHABILDAS, N. (2001). A comparison of the cognitive deficits in reading disability and attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 110, 157-172.
	ANASTOPAULOS, A. & BARKLEY, R.A. (1988). Biological factors in attention deficit-hyperactivity disorder. The Behavior Therapist, 11, 47-53.	NEEF, N.A., BICARD, D.F. & ENDO, S. (2001). Assessment of impulsivity and the development of self-controling students with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 34, 397- 408.
	BENNINGER, R.J. (1989). Dopamine and learning : Implications for attention deficit disorder and hyperkinetic syndrome. In T. Sagvolden & T. Archer (Eds.), Attention deficit disorder : Clinical and basic research (pp. 323-338). Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.	FARAONE, S. V., BIEDERMAN, J., MONUTEAUX, M.C., DOYLE, A.E. & SEIDMAN, L.J. (2001). A psychometric measure of learning disability predicts educational failure four years later in boys with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Attention Disorders, 4, 220-230. [PDF]
	RUTTER, M. (1989). Attention deficit disorder/hyper- kinetic syndrome: Conceptual and research issues re- garding diagnosis and classification. In T. Sagvolden & T. Archer (Eds.), Attention deficit disorder : Clinical and basic research (pp. 1–24). Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum.	MILICH, R., PELHAM, W. & HINSHAW, S. (1985). Issues in the diagnosis of attention deficit disorder : A caution- ary note. Psychopharmacology Bulletin, 22, 1101– 1104.
	HENKER, B. & WHALEN, C.K. (1989). Hyperactivity and attention deficits. American Psychologist, 44, 216-223.	McDOWELL C. & KENNAN, M. (2001). Developing fluency and endurance in a child diagnosed with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 34 (3), 345-348.
	BAUERMEISTER, J.J., BERRIOS, V, JIMENEZ, Al. I., ACEVEDO, L. & GOORDON, M. (1990). Some issues and instruments for the assessment of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder in Puerto Rican Children. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 19, 9-16.	FTZGERALD, M. (2001). Psychopharmacological treatment of adolescent and adult attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Irish Journal of Psychological Medicine 18, 93-98.
	HORN, W.F., IOLONGO, N., GREENBERG, G., PACKARD, T. & SMITH-WINBERRY, C. (1990). Additive effects of behavioral parent training and self-control therapy with attention deficit hyperactivity disordered children. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 19, 98-110.	NIGG, J.T. (2001). Is ADHD an inhibitory disorder? Psychological Bulletin, 125, 571–596.
	BARKLEY, R.A., DUPAUL, G.J. & McMURRAY, M.B. (1990). Comprehensive evaluation of attention deficit disorder with and without hyperactivity as defined by research criteria. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 58 (6), 775-789.	WOLF, L.E. (2001). College students with ADHD and other hidden disabilities : Outcomes and interventions. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 931, 385-395.
	HECHTMAN, L. (1991) Resilience and vulnerability in long-term out-come of attention deficit hyperactive disorder. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 36, 415-421.
	PAULS, D.L. (1991). Genetic factors in the expression of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology, 1, 353–360.	WILLIAMS, A., CHACKO, A., FABIANO, G.A. & PELHAM, W.E. (2001). Behavioral treatments for children with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Primary Psychiatry, 8, 67-72.
	BARKLEY, R.A. (1991). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : A clinical workbook. New York, Guilford Press.	RAPPORT, M.D. & MOFFITT, C. (2002). Attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder and methylphenidate. A review of height/weight, cardiovascular, and somatic complaint side effects. Clinical Psychology Review, 22 (8), 1107-1131.
	WHALEN, C.K. & HENKER, B. (1991). The social impact of stimulant treatment for hyperactive children. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 24, 231-241.	PELHAM, W.E. (2002) Psychosocial interventions for ADHD. In P.S. Jensen & J.R. Cooper (Ed.), Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : State of the science : best practices (pp. 121-124). New Jersey : Civic Research Institute, Inc.
	BENSON, D.F. (1991). The role of frontal dysfunction in attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Child Neurology, 6 (S), 9-12.	SHALLICE, T., MARZOCCHI, G.M., COSER, S., DEL SAVIO, M., MEUTER, R.F. & RUMIATI, R.I. (2002). Executive function profile of children with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Development Neuropsycholy, 21 (1), 43-71.
	BARKLEY, R.A. (1991). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Psychiatric Annals, 21 (12), 725-733.	DAVIDS, E., ZHANG, K., TARAZI, F.I. & BALDESSARINI, R.J. (2002). Animal models of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Brain Research Reviews, 42, 1-21
	BARKLEY, R.A. (1991). Diagnosis and assessment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorders. Comprehensive Mental Health Care, 1, 27-44.	ARMSTONG, T. (2002). Déficit d'attention et hyperactivité, stratégies pour intervenir autrement en classe. Montréal : Chenelière/McGrawHill.
	DUPAUL, G.J., GUEVERMONT, D.C. & BARKLEY, R.A. (1992). Behavioral treatment of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder in the classroom. Behavior Modification, 16, 204-225.	OTA, K.R. & DUPAUL, G.J. (2002). Task engagement and mathematics performance in children with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : Effects of supplemental computer instruction. School Psychology Quarterly, 17, 242-257.
	GOODYEAR, P. & HYND, G. (1992). Attention deficit dis- order with (ADD/H) and without (ADD/WO) hyper-activity: Behavioral and neuropsychological differenTiation. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 21, 273–304.	ABIKOFF, H., JENSEN, P.S., ARNOLD, L L., HOZA, B., HECHTMAN, L., POLLACK, S., MARTIN, D., ALVIR, J., MARCH, J.S., HINSHAW, S., VITIELLO, B., NEWCORN, J., GREINER, A., CANTWELL, D.P., CONNERS, C.L., ELLIOTT, G., GREENHILL, L.L., KRAEMER, H., PELHAM, W.E., SEVERE, J.B., SWANSON, J.M., WELLS, K. & WIGAL, T. (2002). Observed classroom behavior of children with ADHD : Relationship to gender and comorbidity. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 30, 349-359.
	GILGER, J.W., PENNINGTON, B.F. & DEFRIES, J C. (1992). A twin study of the etiology of comorbidity : Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder and dyslexia. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 31, 343–348.	STEIN, D.B. (2002). Ritalin is not the answer : Action guide. Jossey-Bass.
	FUNK, J.B., CHESSARE, J.B., WEAVER, M.T. & EXLEY, A.R. (1993). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, creativity, and the effects of methylphenidate. Pediatrics, 91 (4), 816-819.	BICARD, D.F. & NEEF, N.A. (2002). Effects of strategic versus tactical instructions on adaptation to changing contingencies in children with ADHD. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 35, 375-390.
	SCHACHAR, R.J., TANNOCK, R. & LOGAN, G.D. (1993). Inhibitory control, impulsiveness, and attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Clinical Psychology Review, 13, 721-739.	FLOOD, W.A., WILDER D.A., FLOOD, A.L. & MASUDA, A. (2002). Peer-mediated reinforcement plus prompting as treatment for off-task behavior in children with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 35, 199-204.
	DUPAUL, G.J. & HENNINSON, P.N. (1993). Peer tutoring effects on the classroom performance of children with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. School Psychology Review, 22, 134-143.	RUBIA, K. (2002). The dynamic approach to neurodevelopmental psychiatric disorders : Use of fMRI combined with neuropsychology to elucidate the dynamics of psychiatric disorders, exemplified in ADHD and schizophrenia. Behavioral Brain Research, 130, 47-56.
	WARD, M.F., WENDER, P.H., REIMHERR, F.W. (1993). The Wender Utah Rating Scale : An aid in the retrospective diagnosis of childhood Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder. American Journal of Psychiatry, 150, 885-890. [PDF]	PARKER, H.C. (2002). Problem solver guide for students with ADHD : ready-to-use interventions for elementary and secondary students. Plantation, Florida: Specialty Press, Inc.
	BIEDERMAN, J., FARAONE, S.V., SPENCER, T., WILENS, T., NORMAN, D., LAPEY, K. A., MICK, E., LEHMAN, B.K. & DOYLE, A. (1993). Patterns of psychiatric comorbidity, cognition, and psychosocial functioning in adults with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. American Journal of Psychiatry, 150, 1792–1798.	CASTELLANOS, F.X., LEE, P.P., SHARP, W., JEFFRIES, N.O., GREENSTEIN, D.K. & CLASEN, L.S. (2002). Developmental trajectories of brain volume abnormalities in children and adolescents with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of the American Medical Association, 288, 1740-1748.
	SHAFFER, D. (1994). Attention deficit hyperactivity disor- der in adults. American Journal of Psychiatry, 151, 633–638.	MICK, E., BIEDERMAN, J., PRINCE, J., FISCHER, M.J. & FARAONE, F.V. (2002). Impact of low birth weight on attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Developmental & Behavioral Pediatrics, 23, 16–22.
	CRAMOND, B. (1994). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder and creativity : What is the connection ? Journal of Creative Behavior, 28 (3), 193-210.	HUPP, S.D.A., REITMAN, D., NORTHUP, J., O'CALLAGHAN, P. & LEBLANC, M. (2002). The effects of delayed rewards, tokens, and stimulant medication on sports man like behavior with ADHD-diagnosed children. Behavior Modification, 26, 148-162.
	SPENCER, T., WILENS, T. & BIEDERMAN, J. (1995). A double-blind, crossover comparison of methylphenidate and placebo in adults with childhood-onset attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 52, 434-443.	SOWELL, E.R., THOMPSON, P.M., WELCOME, S.E., HENKENIUS, A.L., TOGA, A.W. & PETERSON, B.S. (2003). Cortical abnormalities in children and adolescents with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. The Lancet, 362, 1699-1707.
	GREENHILL, L.L. (1995). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : The stimulants. Child & Adolescent Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 4 (1), 123-168.	WILENS, T., FARAONE, S., BIEDERMAN, J. & GUNAWARDENE, S. (2003). Does stimulant therapy of attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder beget later substance abuse? A meta-analytic review of the literature. Pediatrics, 111 (1), 179-85.
	WENDER, P.H. (1995). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder in Adults. New York : Oxford University Press.	LEO, J. & COHEN, D. (2003). Broken brains or flawed studies? A critical review of ADHD neuroimaging studies. The Journal of Mind & Behavior, 24, 29-56.
	BIEDERMAN, J., FARAONE, S.V., MICK, E., SPENCER, T., WILENS, T., KIELY, K., GUITE, J., ABLON, J.S., REED, E. & WARBURTON, R. (1995). High risk for attention deficit hyperactivity disorder among children of parents with childhood onset of the disorder : A pilot study. American Journal of Psychiatry, 152, 431–435.	BARKLEY, R.A. (2003). Issues in the diagnosis of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in children. Brain & Development, 25, 77-83.
	BIEDERMAN, J., MILBERGER, S. & FARAONE, S.V. (1995). Family- environment risk factors for ADHD : A test of Rutter’s indicators of adversity. Archives of General Psychiatry, 52, 464–470.	CHRONIS, A.M., CHACKO, A., FABIANO, G.A., WYMBS, B.T. & PELHAM, W.E.J. (2004). Enhancements to the behavioral parent training paradigm for families of children with ADHD : Review and future directions. Clinical Child & Family Psychology Review, 7 (1), 1-27.
	WILENS, T. (1995). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder and comorbid substance use disorders in adults. Psychiatric Services, 46, 761-763.	COHEN, D. & LEO, J. (2004). An update on ADHD Neuroimaging Research. The Journal of Mind & Behavior, 25 (2), 161-166. [PDF]
	NORTHUP, J., BROUSSARD, C., JONES, K. & GEORGE, T., VOLLMER, T. & HERRING, M. (1995). The differential effects of teacher and peer attention for children with Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 28, 225-227. [PDF]	TIMIMI, S. & al. (2004). A critique of the international consensus statement on ADHD. Clinical Child & Family Psychology Review, 7, 59-63. [LIRE]
	LEUTWYLER, K. (1996). Paying Attention : The controversy over ADHD and the drug Ritalin is obscuring a real look at the disorder and its underpinnings. Scientific American, 275 (2), 12-14.	BARKLEY, R.A. (2004). Adolescents with ADHD : An overview of empirically based treatments. Journal of Psychiatric Practice, 10, 39-56.
	MURPHY, K.R., & BARKLRY, R.A. (1996). Attention defi- cit hyperactivity disorder in adults. Comprehensive Psychiatry, 37, 393–401.	HERVEY, A.S., EPSTEIN, J.N. & CURRY, J.F. (2004). Neuropsychology of adults with attention-deficit/hyper- activity disorder : A meta-analytic review. Neuropsy- chology, 18, 495–503.
	RIEF, S.F. (1996). How to reach and teacher ADD/ADHD children. New York : John Wiley.	SAUVER, J.L.S., BABERESI, W.J., KATUSIC, S.K., COLLIGAN, R.C., WEAVER, A.L. & JACOBSEN, S.J. (2004). Early life risk factors for attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder : A population-based co- hort study. Mayo Clinical Proceedings, 79, 1124–1131.
	GORDON, M. (1997). ADHD in cyberspace. ADHD Report, 5 (4), 4–6.	MONTANO, B. (2004). Diagnosis and treatment of ADHD in adults in primary care. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 65, 18-21.
	GILLBERG, C., MELANDER H.,VON KNORRING, A.-L., ANOLS, L.-O., THERLUND, G., HAGGLOF, B. (1997). Long-term stimulant treatment of children with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder symptoms : A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Archives of General Psychiatry, 54, 857–864.	FRAZIER, T.W., DEMAREE, H.A. & YOUNGSTORM, E.A. (2004). Meta-analysis of intellectual and neuropsy- chological test performance in attention-deficit/hy- peractivity disorder. Neuropsychology, 18, 543–555.
		TIMIMI, S. (2004). Developing non-toxic approaches to helping children who could be diagnosed with ADHD and their families : Reflections of a UK clinician. Ethical Human Psychology & Psychiatry, 6, 41-52. [LIRE]
	TOONE, B.K. & VAN DER LINDEN, J.H. (1997). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder or hyperkinetic disorder in adults. British Journal of Psychiatry, 170, 489-491.	SHASTRY, B.S. (2004). Molecular genetics of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) : an update. Neurochemistry International, 44, 469-474.
		TIMIMI, S. & TAYLOR, E. (2004). ADHD is best understood as a cultural construct. British Journal of Psychiatry, 184, 8-9. [LIRE]
		TIMIMI, S. & al. (2004). A critique of the international consensus statement on ADHD. Clinical Child & Family Psychology Review, 7, 59-63. [LIRE]
	QUAY, H. C. (1997). Inhibition and attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 25, 7-13.	COHEN, D., LLOYD, G. &STEAD, J. (2005). Critical new perspectives on AD/HD. New York : Routledge.
	KLEIN, R.G. & ABIKOFF, H. (1997). Behavior therapy and methylphenidate in the treatment of children with ADHD. Journal of Attention Disorders, 2 (2), 89-114.	PELHAM, W.E., FABIANO, G.A. & MASSETTI, G.M. (2005). Evidence-based assessment of attention-deficit/Hyperactivity disorder in children and adolescents. Journal of Clinical Child & Adolescent Psychology, 34 (3), 449-476.
		TIMIMI, S. (2005). ADHD : The medicalisation of naughty boys. Human Givens, 12, 10-15.
		CATANIA, A.C. (2005). Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) : One process or many? Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 28, 446-450.
		CATANIA, A.C. (2005). Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) : Delay-of- reinforcement gradients and other behavioral mechanisms. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 28, 419-424.
	HUNT, R.D. (1997). Nosology, neurobiology, and clinical patterns of ADHD in adults. Psychiatric Annals, 27 (8), 572-581.	BARKLEY, R.A. & MACIAS, M. (2005). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. In R. David (Ed.), Child and adolescent neurology. New York : Blackwell.
	HINSHAW, S.P., ZUPAN, B.A., SIMMEL, C., NIGG, J.T. & MELNICK, S. (1997). Peer status in boys with and without ADHD : Predictions from overt and covert antisocial behavior, social isolation and authoritative parenting beliefs. Child Development, 68, 880-896.	BIEDERMAN, J. (2005). Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder : A selective overview. Biological Psychiatry, 57 (11), 1215-1220.
	LEVY, F., HAY, D.A., McSTEPHEN, M., WOOD, C. & WALDMAN, I. (1997). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder : A category or a continuum ? Genetic analysis of a large-scale twin study. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 36, 737–744.	NEEF, N.A., BICARD, D.F., ENDO, S., COURY, D.L. & AMAN, M.G. (2005). Evaluation of pharmacological treatment of impulsivity in children with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 38, 135-146.
	DUPAUL, G.J., POWER, T.J. & ANASTOPAULOS A.D. (1997). Teacher ratings of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder symptoms: Factor structure and normative data. Psychological Assessment, 9, 436- 444.	FARAONE, S.V., PERLIS, R.H., DOYLE, A.E., SMOLLER, J.W., GORALNICK, J.J., HOLMGREN, M.A. & SKAER, P. (2005). Molecular genetics of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Biological Psychiatry, 57 (11), 1313-1323.
	THOMAS, J. & WILLEMS, g. (1997). Troubles de l’attention, impulsivité et hyperactivité chez l’enfant. Approche neurocognitive. Paris : Masson.	NEEF, N.A., MARCKEL, J., FERRERI, S.J., BICARD, D.F., ENDO, S., AMAN, M.G., MILLER, K.M., JUNG, S., NIST, L. & ARMSTRONG, N. (2005). Behavioral assessment of impulsivity : A comparison of children with and without attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 38 (1), 23-37.
	BARKLEY, R.A. (1997). ADHD and the nature of self-control. New York : Guilford Press.	WEYANDT, L. & DUPAUL, G.J. (2006). ADHD in college students. Journal of Attention Disorders, 10 (1), 9-19.
	WENDER, P.H. (1997). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder in Adults : A wide view of a widespread condition. Psychiatric Annals, 27 (8), p. 556-562.	SCHNEIDER, H. & EISENBERG, D. (2006). Who receives a diagnosis of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in the United States elementary school population? Pediatrics, 117, 601–609.
	HONOREZ, J.M. (1997). Les limites en milieu scolaire du paradigme médical du trouble hyperactivité et d’attention. Dans R. Féger (Dir.), L’éducation face aux nouveaux défis. Actes du 4^e congrès des sciences de l’éducation de langue française au Canada (pp. 337-345). Montréal : Éditions Nouvelles.	BARKLEY, R.A. (2006). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder : A handbook for diagnosis and treatment. New York : Guilford Press.
	WHALEN, C.K. & HENKER, B. (1997). Stimulant pharmacotherapy for attention deficit/hyperactivity disorders : An analysis of progress, problems, and prospects. In S. Fisher & R. Greenberg (Eds.), From placebo to panacea : Putting psychiatric drugs to the test (pp. 323-355). New York : Wiley.	LLOYD, G., STEAD, J. & COEHEN, D. (2006). Critical new perspectives on ADHD. London/New York : Routledge.
PLISZKA, S. R. (1998). Comorbidity of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder with psychiatric disorder : an overview. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 59 (S7), 50-58.	CHEVALIER, N., GUAY, M.-C. et ACHIM, A. (Dirs.) (2006). Trouble déficitaire de l'attention avec hyperactivité : Soigner, éduquer, surtout valoriser. Sainte-Foy : Presses de l'Université du Québec.
GOLDSTEIN, S. & GOLDSTEIN, S. (1998). Managing attention deficit hyperactivity disorder in children: a guide for practitioners. New York, NY : John Wiley.	GUAY, M.-C. & LAPORTE, P. (2006). Profil cognitif des jeunes avec un TDAH. In N. Chevalier, M.-C. Guay, A. Achim, P. Lageix & H. Poissant (Eds.), Trouble déficitaire de l'attention avec hyperactivité : soigner, éduquer, surtout valoriser (pp. 37-55). Québec : Presses de l'université du Québec.
FIRESTONE, P., MONTEIRO-MUSTEN, L., PISTERMAN, S., MERCER, J. & BENNETT, S. (1998). Short-term side effects of stimulant medication are increased in preschool children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder : A double-blind placebo-controlled study. Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology, 8, 13-25.	AGUIRRE, A.M.V., SHORT, E.J., PELHAM, W.E., CASERTA, D. & MANOS, M. (2006). Influence of setting on academic and behavioral performance of children diagnosed with ADHD. Advances in ADHD, 1, 16-22.
SPENCER, T. J., BIEDERMAN, J. & WILENS, T. (1998). Pharmacotherapy of ADHD with antidepressants. In R A. Barkley (Ed.), Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder: A handbook for diagnosis and treatment. (pp. 552-563). New York: Guilford.	GWYNEDD, L. STEAD, J. & COHEN, D. (Eds.) (2006). Critical new perspectives on attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Routledge.
WEYANDT, L., RICE, J.A., LINTERMAN, I., MITZLAFF, L. & EMERT, E. (1998). Neuropsychological performance of a sample of adults with ADHD, developemental reading disorder, and controls. Developmental Neuropsychology, 14 (4), 643-656.	SEIDMAN, L.J. (2006). Neuropsychological functioning in people with ADHD across the lifespan. Clinical Psychology Review, 26, 466-485. [PDF]
	BARKLEY, R.A. (2006). 80+ Classroom Accommodations for children or teens with ADHD. ADHD Report, 16 (4), 7-10. [PDF]
BIEDERMAN, J. (1998). Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder : a life-span perspective. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 59 (S7), 4-16.	FLORA, S.R (2007). Taking america off drugs : Why behavioral therapy is more effective for treating ADHD, OCD, depression and other psychlogical problems. New York : University of New York Press.
BERGEN, D.F. & SAGVOLDEN, T. (1998). Sex differences in operant discrimination behavior in an animal model of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Behavioural Brain Research, 94, 73-82.	GOMEZ, R. (2007). Australian parent and teacher ratings of the DSM- IV ADHD symptoms : Differential symptom functioning and parent-teacher agreement and differences. Journal of Attention Disorders, 11, 17–27.
FARAONE, S.V. & BIDERMAN, J. (1998). Neurobiology of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Biological Psychiatry, 44 (10), 951-958.	POLANCYZK, G., DE LIMA, M. S., HORTA, B. L., BIEDERMAN, J., & RHODE, L.A. (2007). The worldwide prevalence of ADHD : A systematic review and metaregression analysis. American Journal of Psychiatry, 164, 942–948.
BARKLEY, R.A. (Dir.) (1998). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder : A handbook for diagnosis and treatment. New York : Guilford Press.	RE, A.M., PEDRON, M. & CORNOLDI, C. (2007). Expressive writing difficulties in children described as exhibiting ADHD symptoms. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 40 (3), 244-255.
SWANSON, J.M., SERGEANT, J.A., TAYLOR, E., SONUGA-BARKE, E.J.S., JENSEN, P.S. & CANTWELL, D.P. (1998). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder and hyperkinetic disorder. The Lancet, 351, 429-433.	JACOB, C., ROMANOS, J., DEMPFLE, A., HEINE, M., WINDERMUTH-KIESELBACK, C., KRUSE, A., REIF, A., WALITZA, S., ROMANOS, M., STROBEL, A., BROCKE, B., SCHÄFER, H., SCHMIDTKE, A., BÖNING, J. & LESCH, K.P. (2007). Comorbidity of adult attention -deficit/hyperactivity disorder with focus on personality traits and related disorders in a tertiary referral center. European Archives of Psychiatry & Clinical Neuroscience, 257 (6), 309-317.
DUPAUL, G.J., ERVIN, R.A., HOOK, C.L. & McGOEY, K.E. (1998). Peer tutoring for children with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : Effects of classroom behavior and academic performance. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 31, 579-592.	FURMAN, L.M. (2008). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) : Does new research support old concepts ? Journal of Child Neurology, 23 (7), 775-784.
ERVIN, R.A., DUPAUL, G.J., KERN, L. & FRIMAN, P.C. (1998). Classroom-based functional assessment : A proactive approach to intervention selection for adolescents diagnosed with Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 31, 65-78.	PELHAM, W.E. & FABIANO, G.A. (2008). Evidence-based psychosocial treatment for attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder : An update. Journal of Clinical Child & Adolescent Psychology, 37 (1), 185- 214.
	SINGH, I. (2008). Beyond polemics: science and ethics of ADHD. Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 9 (12), 957–64.
DOUGLAS, V.I. (1998). Cognitive control processes in attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. In H.C. Quay & A.E. Hogen (Eds.), Handbook of Disruptive Behavior Disorders, (105-138). Plenum Publishing Company.	RAMSAY, J.R. & ROSTAIN, A. (2008). Cognitive-behavioral therapy for adult ADHD : An integrative psychosocial and medical approach. New York : Routledge.
HEILIGENSTEIN, E., GUENTHER, G., LEVY, A., SAVINO, F. & FULWILER, J. (1999). Psychological and academic functioning in college students with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of American College Health, 47 (4), 181-185.	CAMPBELL, S.B. & VON STAUFFENBERG, C. (2009). Delay and inhibition as early predictors of ADHD symptoms in third grade. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 37, 1-15. [PDF]
MASSÉ, L. (1999). Déficit de l'attention/hyperactivité. Dans Troubles psychopathologiques de l'enfant et de l'adolescent : Approche intégrée (p. 163-182). Boucherville, Québec : Gaëtan Morin.	RAY, G., CROEN, L.A. & HABEL, L. A. (2009). Mothers of children diagnosed with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder : Health conditions and medical care utilization in periods before and after birth of the child. Medical Care, 47, 105–114.
CHARLEBOIS, P., NORMANDEAU, S., VITARO, F. & BERNÈCHE, F. (1999). Skills training for inatttentive-overactive aggressive boys : différential effects of content and delivery method. Behavioral Disorders, 24, 137-150.	SCIBERRAS, E., UKOUMUNNE, O.C. & EFRON, D. (2011). Predictors of parent-reported attention-deficit/ hyperactivity disorder in children aged 6–7 years : A National longitudinal study. Journal of Abnormality Child Psychology, 39, 1025–1034. [PDF]
BREGGIN, P.R. (1999). NIH consensus report highlights controversy surrounding ADHD diagnosis and stimulant treatment. Ethical Human Sciences & Services, 1, 9-11. [PDF]
ZITO, J.M., SAFER, D.J., DOSREIS, S., MAGDER, L.S., GARDNER, J.F. & ARIN, D.A. (1999). Psychotherapeutic medication patterns for youths with attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Archives of Pediatrics and Adolescent Medicine, 153 (12), 1257-1263.

Troubles deficitaire de l'attention (sans hyperactivité) : Incapacité à demeurer attentif suffisamment longtemps pour apprendre ou améliorer une habileté particulière. Troubles deficitaire de l'attention et trouble d'hyperactivité. ADD, Attention Deficit Disorders, Attention-deficit.

	VARLEY, CK. (1984). Diet and the behavior of children with attention deficit disorder. Journal of American Academy. Child Psychiatry, 23 (2), 182-185.	PFIFFBER L.J. & McBURNETT, K. (1997). Social skills training with parent generalization: Treatment effects for children with attention deficit disorder. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 65, 749–757.
	LYON, G.R. (1985). Attention deficit disorders in children. Topics in Learning Disabilities, 2, 3-10.	BHANDARY, A.M. (1997). The chronic attention deficit syndrome. Psychiatric Annals, 27 (8), 543-544.
	BIEDERMAN, J., GASTFRIEND, D.R. & JELLINEK, M. S. (1986). Desipramine in the treatment of children with attention deficit disorder. Journal of Clinical Psychopharmacology, 6, 359–363.
	DOUGLAS, V.I., BARR, R.G., O'NEIL, M.E. & BRITTON, B.G. (1986). Short term effects of methylphenidate on the cognitive, learning and academic performance of children with attention deficit disorder in the laboratory and the classroom. Journal of Child Psychology & Psychiatry, 27 (2), 191-211.	KADESJÖ, B. & GILBERG, C. (1998). Attention deficits and clumsiness in Swedish 7-year-old children. Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology, 40, 796-804.
	LAHEY, E.B., SCHAUGHENCY, E.A., HYND, G.W. & CARLSON, C. L. (1987). Attention deficit disorder with and without hyperactivity : Comparison of behavioral characteristics of clinic-referred children. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 26, 718–723.
	PLISKA, S.R. (1987). Tricyclic antidepressants in the treatment of children with attention deficit disorder. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 26, 127–132.	BARKLEY, R.A. (1998). Your defiant child. New York : Guilford Press.
	DOUGLAS, V.I., BARR, R.G., AMIN, K., O'NEIL, M.E. & BRITTON, B.G. (1988) . Dosage effects and individual responsivity to Methylphenidate in attention deficit disorder. Journal of Child Psychiatry, 29 (4), 453-475.	LANDGREN, M., KJELLMAN, B. & GILBERG, C. (1998). Attention deficit disorder with developmental coordination disorder. Archives of Disease in Childhood, 79, 207-212.
	ATKINS, M. S., PELHAM, W. & LICHT, M. (1989). The differential validity of teacher ratings of inattention/overactivity and aggression. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 17, 423-435.	PELLETIER, E. (2000). Déficit d'attention sans hyperactivité : compréhension et interventions. Outremont, Québec : Québécor.
	DOUGLAS, V.I. (1988). Cognitive deficits in children with attention deficit disorder with hyperactivity. In. L.M. Bloomingdale & J.A. Sergeant (Eds.), Attention deficit disorder : Criteria, cognition, intervention (pp. 65–82). London : Pergamon Press.	BARKLEY, R.A. (2000) Taking charge of ADHD : The complete authoritative guide for parents. New York : Guilford Press.
	DOUGLAS, V.I. (1989). Can Skinnerian psychology acount for the deficits in attention deficit disorder ? A reply to Barkley. In L. Bloomingdale & J. Sergeant (Eds.), Attention deficit disorder (Vol. 6, pp. 235–253). New York : Pergamon Press.	PARY, R., LEWIS, S., MATUSCKA, P.R., RUDZINSKIY, P., SAFI, M. & LIPPMANN, S. (2002). Attention deficit disorder in adults. Annals of clinical psychiatry, 14 (2), 105-111.
	PELHAM, W.E. (1989). Behavior therapy, behavioral assessment, and psychosocial medication in the treatment of attention deficit disorders : An interactive approach. In J. Swanson & L. Bloomingdale (Eds.), Attention deficit disorders : Current concepts and emerging trends in attentional and behavioral disorders of children (pp. 169-195). London : Pergamon.	WEISS, M., MURRAY, C. & WEISS, G. (2002). Adults with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder : current concepts. Journal of Psychiatric Practice, 8, 99-111.
	HINSHAW, S.P. (1989). Pharmacologic and psychosocial interventions for children with ADD : Comparative and combined outcomes. In L.M. Bloomingdale & J.M. Swanson (Eds.), Attention deficit disorder (Vol. 4, pp. 283-301). Oxford : Pergamon Press.	LEUNG, A.K. & LEMAY, J.F. (2003). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : An update. Advances in Therapy, 20, 305-318.
	BIEDERMAN, J., BALDESSARINI, R.J., WRIGHT, V., KNEE, D. & HARMATZ, J.S. (1989). A double-blind placebo controlled study of desimpramine in the treatment of ADD : I. Efficacy. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 28, 777–784.
	ATKINS, M.S. (1990). A selected survey of basic and applied research in attention deficit disorder. Contemporary Psychology, 35, 125-126.
	GAMMON, G.D. & BROWN, T.E. (1991). Fluoxetine and methylphenidate in combination for treatment of attention deficit disorder and comorbid depressive disorder. Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology, 3, 1-10.
	BARKLEY, R.A. (1991). Diagnosis and assessment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorders. Comprehensive Mental Health Care, 1, 27-44.	GOMEZ, R. (2003). Underlying processes in the poor response inhibition of children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Attentional Disorders, 6 (3), 111-122.
	WEISS, L. (1992). ADD in adults. Dallas, TX : Taylor.
	BARKLEY, R.A., GRODZINSKY, G. & DUPAUL, G.J. (1992). Frontal lobe functions in attention deficit disorder with and without hyperactivity : A review and research report. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 20, 163-188.	KAPALKA, G.M. (2004). Longer eye contact improves ADHD children’s compliance with parents’ commands. Journal of Attention Disorders, 8 (1), 17-23.
	GOODYEAR, P. & HYND, G. (1992). Attention deficit dis- order with (ADD/H) and without (ADD/WO) hyper-activity: Behavioral and neuropsychological differenTiation. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 21, 273–304.
	INGERSOLL, B. & GOLDSTEIN, S. (1993). Attention deficit disorder and learning disabilities : Realities, myths, and controversial Treatments. New York : Doubleday Publishing Group.	McGOUGH, J.J., SMALLEY, S.L., McCRACKEN, J.T., YANG, M., DEL'HOMME, M., LYNN, D.E. & LOO, S. (2005). Psychiatric comorbidity in adult attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : findings from multiplex families. American Journal of Psychiatry, 162, 1621-1627.
	ZAMETKIN, A. J. (1995). Attention-deficit disorder : born to be hyperactive? Journal of the American Medical Assocation, 273 (23), 1871-1874.	HURTIG, T., EBELING, H. TAANILA, A. MIETTUNEN, J., SMALLEY, S., McGOUGH, J.J., LOO, S., JARVELIN, M.R. & MOILANEN, I. (2007). ADHD and comorbid disorders in relation to family environment and symptom severity. Europeen Journal of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 16, 362-369.
	RIEF, S.F. (1996). How to reach and teacher ADD/ADHD children. New York : John Wiley.	KOESTERS M, BEXKER, T, KILIAN, R., FEGERT & J.M., WEINMAN, S. (2009). Limits of meta-analysis : methylphenidate in the treatment of adult attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Psychopharmacololgy, 23, 733-744.
	GREEN, M.F. (1996) What are the functional consequences of neurocognitive deficits in schizophrenia ? American Journal of Psychiatry, 153, 321-330.	TIMIMI, S. & LEO, J. (Eds.) (2009). Rethinking ADHD : from brain to culture. Palgrave.
	PARISIEN, M. (1996). Le modèle de Brown sur les déficits d’attention. Psychologie Québec, 13 (6), 23-24.	MONCRIEFF, J. & TIMIMI, S. (2010). Is ADHD a valid diagnosis in adults? No. British Medical Journal [LIRE]

Troubles de l'humeur : Voir Trouble affectifs. = trouble thymique.

Trouble de stress post-traumatique : Voir Syndrome de post-traumatisme.

Trouble dissociatif de l'identité : Trouble psychologique définit par le DSM-IV, cqui se aractérise par la présence chez une même personne d'au moins deux personnalités distinctes (dissociation), chacune ayant son propre nom et ses traits caractéristiques. Dans le CIM, ce troublese nomme trouble de personnalité multiple. Il convient de noter que certains psychologues remettent en question l'existence de ce phénomène. = personnalités multiples, trouble dissociatif de la personnalité. *schizophrénie. Dissociative identity disorder, multiple personality, multiple personality disorder.

	BLISS, E.L. & JEPPSEN, E.A. (1985). Prevalence of multiple personality among inpatients and outpatients. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 142 (2), 250-251.	MERCKLEBACH, H., DEVILLY, G.J. & RASSIN, E. (2002). Alters in dissociative identity disorder : Metaphors or genuine entities? Clinical Psychology Review, 22, 481-497.
	ROSS, C.A., HEBER, S., NORTON, G.R., ANDERSON, G., ANDERSON, D. & BARCHET, P. (1989). The dissociative disorders interview schedule : A structured interview. Dissociation, 2 (3), 169-189.	LILIENFELD, S.O. & LYNN, S.J. (2003). Dissociative identity disorder : Multiple personalities, multiple controversies. In S.O. Lilienfeld, S.J. Lynn & J.M. Lohr (Eds.), Science and pseudoscience in clinical psychology (pp. 109-142). New York : Guilford Press
	PUTNAM, F.W. (1989). Diagnosis and treatment of multiple personality disorder. New York : The Guilford Press.	PIPER, A. & MERSKEY, H (2004). The persistence of folly : critical examination of dissociative identity disorder. Part II. The defence and decline of multiple personality or dissociative identity disorder. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 49 (10), 678-683.
	MILLER, S.D., BLACKBURN, T., SCHOLES, G., WHITE, G.L. & MAMALIS, N (1991). Optical differences in multiple personality disorder. A second look. Journal of Nervous & Mental Disorders, 179 (3), 132-135.	VERMETTEN, E., SCHMAHL, C., LINDER, S., LOEWENSTEIN, R.J. & REMMER, J.D. (2006). Hippocampal and amygdalar volumes in dissociative identity disorder. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 163 (4), 630-636.
	McALLISTER, M.M. (2000). Dissociative identity disorder : A literature review. Journal of Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing, 7, 25-33.
	ELMORE, J.L. (2000). Dissociative Spectrum Disorders in the Primary Care Setting. Primary Care Companion to the Journal of Cinical Psychiatry, 2 (2), 37-41.	ROSS, C.A. (2006). Dissociative identity disorder. Current Psychosis & Therapeutics Reports, 4, 112-116.
	PHELPS, B.J. (2001) Personality, personality “theory” and dissociative identity disorder : What behavior analysis can contribute and clarify. The Behavior Analyst Today, 2 (4), 325-335.	SAR, V., UNAL, S.N. & OZTURK, E. (2007). Frontal and occipital perfusion changes in dissociative identity disorder. Psychiatry Research, 156, 217-223.

Troubles du comportement : Voir Modification du comportement.

Troubles du langage : Ensemble des troubles qui affectent la production et la compréhension du langage. = trouble de la parole. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas. Speech pathology, speech disorders, defects of speech, loss of speech, language disturbances.

Les troubles du langage
Aphasie	Dyslexie	Bégaiement
Dysphasie	Dysorthographie

Troubles du sommeil : Difficulté ou incapacité à trouver le sommeil ou sommeil de mauvaise qualité. Trouble du sommeil et parasomnie. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas. Sleep disturbance, sleep problem.

Les troubles du sommeil
Apnée du sommeil	Énurésie e	Somnambulisme
Bruxisme	Insomnie	Somniloquie
Cauchemar	Ronflement

	BASTIAN, H.C. (1869). On the various forms of loss of speech in cerebral disease. British and Foreign Medical-Chirurgical Review, 43, 209-236, 470-492.	ELDRIDGE, M. (1968). A history of the treatment of speech disorders. Edinburgh : E. & S. Livingstone.
	KUSSMAUL, P.A. (1877). Disturbances of speech. (Vol. 14). NY : Ziemssen's Cyclopaedia of the Practice of Medicine.	MOELLER, D. (1975). Speech pathology and audiology: Iowa origins of a discipline. Iowa City : University of Iowa Press.
	STINCHFIELD, S. (1928). Speech pathology with methods in speech correction. Boston, Mass. : Expression Company.	MOWRER, D.E. (1977). Methods of modifying speech behaviors : Learning theory in speech pathology. Columbus, OH : Charles E. Merrill Publishing Company.
	VAN THAL, J. (1929). The education of children suffering from defects of speech. Mental Welfare, 10, 1.	BLOOM, L. (1978). Notes for a history of speech pathology. Psychoanalytic Review, 65 (3), 432-463.
	TRAVIS, L.E. (1931). Speech pathology. NY : D. Appleton Co.	ROCKEY, D. (1979). John Thelwall and the origins of British speech therapy. Medical History, 23, 156-175.
	STINCHFIELD, S. (1933). Speech disorders : A psychological study of the various defects of speech. New York : Harcourt Brace and Company.	O'NEILL, Y.V. (1980). Speech and speech disorders in Western Thought before 1600. Westport, CO : Greenwood Press.
	BERRY, M. & EESENSON, J. (1942). The defective in speech. New York : Appleton-Century-Crofts.	BLOOM, L. (1982). Notes for a history of speech pathology : An addendum. Folia Phoniatrica, 34 (6), 296-299.
	GOLDSTEIN, K. (1948). Language and language disturbances. NY : Grune and Stratton.	WEINER, P. (1986). The study of childhood language disorders : 19th century perspectives. Journal of Communication Disorders, 19, 1-47.
		BLAMPIED, N.M. & FRANCE, K.G. (1993). A behavioral model of infant sleep disturbance. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 26 (4), 477-492.
		LUND, H.G., REIDER, B.D., WHITING, A.B. & PRICHARD, J.R. (2010). Sleep patterns and predictors of disturbed sleep in a large population of college students. Journal of Adolescent Health, 46 (2), 124-132.

Troubles envahissants du développement (TED) : Ensemble de troubles majeurs qui nuisent au développement. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas. Pervasive Developmental Disorder, PDD, developmental disabilities.

Les troubles envahissants du développement
Autisme	Syndrome d'Asperger	Syndrome de Kanner
		Syndrome de Rett

	NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (1991). National Institutes of Health Consensus Development Conference Statement. In Treatment of destructive behaviors in persons with developmental disabilities. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.
	MAUK, J.E. (1993). Autism and pervasive developmental disorders. Pediatric Clinics of North America, 40, 567-578.
	REEVE, C.E. & CARR, E.G. (2000). Prevention of severe behavior problems in children with developmental disorders. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 144-160.
	NEEF, N.A. (2001) The past and future of behavior analysis in developmental disabilities : When good news is bad and bad wews is good. The Behavior Analyst Today, 2 (4), 336-340.

Trouble majeur : Trouble qui nécessite l'aide ou l'intervention d'un professionnel. = Trouble lourd.

Échelle de gravité des troubles
Santé	Trouble mineur/léger		Trouble majeur/lourd
0	1	2	3	4
Absence de trouble	Que l'on peut résoudre soi-même	Qui peut être résolu grâce à nos ressources sociales	Qui peut être résolu grâce aux soins d'un para-professionnel	Qui requiert les services d'un professionel

Troubles mineur : Trouble que l'on peut généralement résoudre soi-même. = trouble léger ou bénin.

Échelle de gravité des troubles
Santé	Trouble mineur/léger		Trouble majeur/lourd
0	1	2	3	4
Absence de trouble	Que l'on peut résoudre soi-même	Qui peut être résolu grâce à nos ressources sociales	Qui peut être résolu grâce aux soins d'un para-professionnel	Qui requiert les services d'un professionel

Troubles neurocognitifs : Ensemble des troubles cérébraux qui engendrent des troubles mentaux/cognitifs. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas.

Les troubles envahissants du développement
Alzeihmer	Démence	Épilepsie

Trouble obsessionnel-compulsif (TOC) : Ensemble de phobies et de comportements ritualisés qui semble avoir pour rôle de réduire l'anxiété et les obsessions. = Trouble Obsessionnel Compulsif, TOC, névrose obsessionelle compulsive. Obsessive Compulsive Disorder, OCD.

	SHAPIRO, D. (1962). Aspects of obsessive-compulsive style. Psychiatry : Journal for the Study of the Interpersonal Processes, 114, 46-59.
	JUDD, L.L. (1965). Obsessive-compulsive neurosis in children. Archives of General Psychiatry, 12, 136-143.
	WOLPE, J. & LAZARUS, A.A. (1966). Behavior therapy technique. New York : Pergamon Press.
	MEYER, V. (1966). Modification of expectations in cases with obsessional rituals. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 4, 273-280.	SCHWARTZ, J.M., STOESSEL, P. W.. BATXER, L. R. MARTIN, K. M & PHELPS, M. E. (1996). The systematic changes in cerebral glucose metabolic rate after successful behavior modification treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 53, 109-113.
	RACHMAN, S., HODGSON, R. & MARKS, I.M. (1971). The treatment of chronic obsessive-compulsive neurosis. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 9, 237-247.	FOA, E.B. (1996).The efficacy of behavioral therapy with obsessive-compulsives. The Clinical Psychologist, 49 (2), 19-22.
	TEMPLER, D.I. (1972). The obsessive-compulsive neurosis : Review of research findings. Comprehensive Psychiatry, 13 (4), 375-383.
	MEYER, V., LEVY, R. & SCHNURER, A. (1974). A behavioral treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorders. In H.R. Beech (Ed.), Obsessional states. London : Methuen.	KOZAK, M.J. & FOA, E. (1997). Mastery of obsessive-compulsive disorder A cognitive-behavioral approach. The Psychological Corporation.
	AKHTAR, S., WIG, N.N., VERMA, V.K., PERSHAD, D. & VERMA, S.K. (1975). A phenomenological analysis of symptoms in obsessive-compulsive neurosis. British Journal of Psychiatry, 127, 342-348.
	MARKS, I.M., HODGSON, R. & RACHMAN, S. (1975). Treatment of chronic obsessive-compulsive neurosis by in vivo exposure. British Journal of Psychiatry, 127, 349-364.	SWINSON, R., MATIN, A., RACHMAN, S. & RICHTE, M. (Eds.) (1998). Obsessive-compulsive disorder : Theory, research, treatment. New York : The Guilford Press.
	RABAVILAS, A.D., BOULOUGOURIS, J.C. & STEFANIS, C. (1976). Duration of flooding sessions in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive patients. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 14, 349-355.	SCHWARTZ, J.M. (1988). Neuroanatomical aspects of cognitive-behavioural therapy response in obsessive-compulsive disorder : An evolving perspective on brain and behaviour. British Journal of Psychiatry, 35, 38-44.
	RAMSAY, R. (1977). Behavioural approaches to obsessive-compulsive neurosis. In J.C. Boulougouris & A.D. Rabavilas (Eds.), The treatment of phobic and obsessive compulsive disorders : Selected papers from the sixth annual meeting of the European association of behaviour therapy (pp. 102-3.) Oxford : Pergamon Press.
	FOA, E.B. & GOLDSTEIN, A. (1978). Continuous exposure and complete response prevention of obsessive-compulsive neurosis. Behavior Therapy, 9, 821-829.	LADOUCEUR, R, FREESTON, M.H. et RHÉAUME, J. (1996). Traitement cognitif et comportemenal du trouble obsessionnel-compulsif. Partie I : Modèle explicatif. Revue Québécoise de Psychologie, 17 (1), 77-102.
	FOA, E.B., STEKETEE, G.S. & MILBY, J.B. (1980). Differential effects of exposure and response prevention in obsessive-compulsive washers. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 48, 71-79.	ELLIS, A. (1997). REBT with obsessive-compulsive disorder. In J. Yankura & W. Dryden (Eds.), Using REBT with common psychological problems : A therapist’s casebook (pp. 197-222). New York : Springer.
	MARKS, I.M., STERN, R.S. & MAWSON, D., COBB, J. & McDONALD, R. (1980). Clomipramine and exposure for obsessive-compulsive rituals. British Journal of Psychiatry, 136, 1-25.	ABRAMOVITZ, J.S. (1997). Effectiveness of psychological and pharmacological treatments for obsessive-compulsive disorder : A quantitative review. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 65 (1), 44-52.
	FOA, E.B., STEKETEE, G.S., TURNER, R.M. & FISHER, S.C. (1980). Effects of imaginal exposure to feared disasters in obsessive-compulsive checkers. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 18, 449-455.	BAKKER, A., VAN BALKOM, A.J., SPINHOVEN, P., BLAAUW, B.M. & VAN DYCK, R. (1998). Follow-up on the treatment of panic disorder with or without agoraphobia: a quantitative review. The Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease , 186 (7), 414-419.
	RACHMAN, S.J. & HODGSON, R. (1980). Obsessions and compulsions. Englewood Cliffs, NJ : Prentice Hall.	SZECHTMAN, H., SULIS, W. & EILAM, D. (1998). Quinpirole induces compulsive checking behavior in rats : A potential animal model of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Behavioral Neuroscience, 112, 1475-1485.
	STEKETEE, G.S., FOA, E.B. & GRAYSON, J.B. (1982). Recent advances in the treatment of obsessive-compulsives. Archives of General Psychiatry, 39, 1365-1371.	RADOMSKY, A.S. & RACHMAN, S. (1999). Memory bias in obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD). Behaviour Research & Therapy, 37 (7), 605-618.
	RACHMAN, S.J. (1983). Obstacles to the successful treatment of obsessions. In E. B. Foa & P. M. G. Emmelkamp (Eds.), Failures in behavior therapy (pp. 35-57). New York : Wiley.
	FOA, E.B., STEKETEE, G.S. & GRAYSON, J.B. (1983). Treatment of obsessive- compulsives : When do we fail? In E.B. Foa & P.M.G. Emmelkamp (Eds.), Failures in hehavior therapy (pp. 55-81). New York : Wiley.
	FOA, E.B., STEKETEE, G.S., GRAYSON, J.B., TURNER, R.M. & LATIMER, P. (1984). Deliberate exposure and blocking of obsessive-compulsive rituals : Immediate and long-term effects. Behavior Therapy, 15, 450-472.	STEKETEE, G.S. (1999). Client manual. Overcoming obsessive-compuslive disorder : A behavioral and cognitive protocol for the treatment of OCD. Oakland, CA : New Harbinger Publications.
	CLIFFORD, C.A., MURRAY, R.M. & FULKER, D.W. (1984). Genetic and environmental influences on obsessional traits and symptoms. Psychological Medicine, 14, 791-800	SALKOVSKIS, P.M. (1999). Understanding and treating obsessive-compulsive disorder. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 37, 29-52.
	PERSONS, J. & FOA, E. (1984). Processing of fearful and neutral information by obsessive compulsives. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 22, 259-265. SALKOVSKIS, PM. (1985). Obsessional-compulsive problems : A cognitive-behavioural analysis. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 23 (5), 571-583.	ABRAMOVITZ, J.S., FRANKLIN, M.E., STREET, G.P., KOZAK, M.J. & FOA, E.B. (2000). Effects of comorbid depres- sion on response to treatment for obsessive- compulsive disorder. Behavior Therapy, 31, 517-528.
	INSEL, T.R., MUELLER, E.A. & ALTERMAN, I., LINNOILA, M. & MURPHY, D.L. (1985). Obsessive-compulsive disorder and serotonin : Is there a connection? Biological Psychiatry, 20 (11), 1174-1188.
	SALKOVSKIS, P. (1985). Obsessional-compulsive problems : A cognitive-behavioral analysis. Behavior Research & Therapy, 23 (5), 571-583.
	REED, G.F. (1985). Obsessional experience and compulsive behaviour : A cognitive-structural approach. London : Academic Press.	ROTHBAUM, B.O. & SHAHAR, F. (2000). Behavioral treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder in a naturalistic setting. Cognitive & Behavioral Practice, 7, 262-270.
	CHRISTENSEN, H., HADZI-PAVLOVIC, D., ANDREWS, G. & MATTICK, R. (1987). Behavior therapy and tricyclic medication in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder : A quantitative review. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 55 (5), 701-711.	PURDON, C. & CLARK, D.A. (2000). White bears and other elusive intrusions : Assessing the relevance of thought suppression for obsessional phenomena. Behavior Modification, 24, 425-453.
	PITMAN, R.K. (1987). A cybernetic model of obsessive-compulsive psychopathology. Comprehensive Psychiatry, 28, 334-343.	ABRAMOVITZ, J.S. & KALSY, S.A. (2001). Recent developments in the cognitive-behavioral treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. The Behavior Analyst Today, 2 (2), 141-147.
	KOZAK, M.J., FOA, E.B. & McCARTHY, B.R. (1988). Obsessional-compulsive disorder. In C.G. Hersen & M. Last (Eds.), Handbook of anxiety disorders. New York : Pergamon Press.	TOLIN, D.F., ABRAMOWITZ, J.S., KOZAK, M.J. & FOA, E.B. (2001). Fixity of belief, perceptual aberration, and magical ideation in obsessive-compulsive disorder. Journal of Anxiety Disorders, 15 (6), 501-510.
	GOODMAN, W., PRICE, L., RASMUSSEN, S., MAZURE, C., DELGADO, P., HENINGER, G. & CHERNEY, D. (1989). The Yale-Brown obsessive compulsive 87 scale : validity. Archives of General Psychiatry, 46, 1012-1016.	FRANKLIN, M.E., ABRAMOWITZ, J.S., BUX, D.A., ZOELLNER, L.A. & FEENY, N.C. (2002). Cognitive-behavioral therapy with and without medication in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Professional Psychology, Research & Practice, 33 (2), 162-168.
		CLARK, D.A. & BECK, A.T. (2002). Clark-Beck Obsessive-Compulsive Inventory. San Antonio, TX : The Psychological Corporation.
	GREIST, J.H. (1990). Treatment of obsessive compulsive disorder : Psychotherapies, drugs, and other somatic treatment. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 5, 44-50.	FROST, R.O. & STEKETEE, G. (Eds) (2002). Cognitive approaches to obsessions and compulsions : Theory, assessment, and treatment. Amsterdam : Elsevier Science.
		LOPEZ-IBOR, J., LOPEZ-IBOR, M.(2003). Research on obsessive-compulsive disorder. Current Opinion in Psychiatry, 16 (S2), S85-S91.
	OTTO, M.W. (1992). Normal and abnormal information processing : A neuropsychologicalperspective on obsessive-compulsive disorder. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 15, 825-848.	COHEN, Y., LACHENMEYER, J.R. & SPRINGER, C. (2003). Anxiety and selective attention in obsessive-compulsive disorder. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 41 (11), 1311-1323.
	HAUCK, E.R. & BLUMENTHAL, J.A. (1992). Obsessive-compulsive traits in athletes. Sports Medicine, 14, 215-227.	BERTHIAUME, C., TURGEON, L. & O'CONNOR (2004). L'évaluation et le traitement psychologique du trouble obsessionnel-compulsif chez les enfants et les adolescents : découvertes récentes. Journal de Thérapie Comportementale et Cognitive, 14 (1), 35-46.
	BARSKY, A.J. (1992). Hypochondriasis and obsessive-compulsive disorder. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 15, 791-801.	McKAY, D., ABRAMOVITZ, J.S., CALAMARI, J.E., KYRIOS, M., RADOMSKY, A., SOOKMAN, D., TAYLOR, S. & WILHEM, S.A. (2004). A critical evaluation of obsessive-compulsive disorder subtypes: symptoms versus mechanisms. Clinical Psychology Review, 24, 283-313.
	RASMUSSEN, S.A. & EISEN, J.L. (1992). The epidemiology and clinical features of obsessive compulsive disorder. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 15, 743-758.	CLARK, D.A. (2004). Cognitive-behavioral therapy for OCD. New York : Guilford Press.
	BLACK, D.W., NOYES, R., GOLDSTEIN, R.B. & BLUM, N. (1992). A family study of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 49, 362-368.	ABRAMOVITZ, J.S., WHITESIDE, S.R. & DEACON, B.J. (2005). The effectiveness of treatment for pediatric obsessive-compulsive disorder : A meta-analysis. Behavior Therapy, 36, 55-63.
	ENRIGHT, S.J. & BEECH, A.R. (1993). Reduced cognitive inhibition in obsessive-compulsive disorder. British Journal of Clinical Psychology, 32, 67-74.	ABRAMOVITZ, J.S. & HOUTS, A.C. (Eds.) (2005). Concepts and controversies in obsessive-compulsive disorder. New York, NY : Springer.
	STEKETEE, G.S. (1993). Treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. New York : Guilford Press.	CLARK, D.A (2005) Lumping vs. splitting : A commentary on subtyping in OCD. Behavior Therapy, 36, 401-404.
	FALS-STEWART, W., MARKS, A.P.& SCHAFER, J. (1993). Comparison of behavioral group therapy and individual behavior therapy in treating OCD. Journal of Nervous & Mental Diseases, 181, 189-193.	CLARK, D.A (2005). Focus on ‘cognition’ in cognitive behavior therapy for OCD : Is it really necessary? Cognitive Behavior Therapy, 34, 131-139.
		GELLER, D. (2006). Obsessive-compulsive and spectrum disorders in children and adolescents. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 29, 353-370.
	HISS, H., FOA, E.B. & KOZAK, M.J. (1994). Relapse prevention program for treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 62, 801-808.	FLORA, S.R. (2007). Taking america off drugs : Why behavioral therapy is more effective for treating ADHD, OCD, depression and other psychlogical problems. New York : University of New York Press.
	VAN OPPEN, P. & ARNTZ, A. (1994). Cognitive therapy for obsessive-compulsive disorder. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 32, 79-87.	BJORGVINSSON, T., HART, J. & HEFFELFINGER, S. (2007). Obsessive-compulsive disorder : Update on assessment and treatment. Journal of Psychiatric Practice, 13, 362-372.
	YARYURA-TOBIAS, J.A., NEZIROGLU, F.A. & KAPLAN, S. (1995). Self-mutilation, anorexia, and dysmenorrhea in obsessive-compulsive International Journal of Eating Disorders, 17, 33-38.	RACHMAN, S. (2007). Unwanted intrusive images in obsessive compulsive disorders. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 38 (4), 402-410.
	O'CONNOR. K. & ROBILLARD, S. (1995). Inference processes in obsessive-compulsive disorder : Some clinical observations. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 33, 887-896.	RADUA, J. & MATAIX-COLS, D. ( 2009). Voxel-wise meta-analysis of grey matter changes in obsessive-compulsive disorder. British Journal of Psychiatry, 195 (5), 393-402.
	ARAÚJO, L.A., ITO, L.M., MARKS, I.M. & DEALE, A. (1995). Does imagined exposure to the consequences of not ritualizing enhance live exposure for OCD? A controlled study. British Journal of of Psychology, 167, 65-70.	WATERS, A.M., HENRY, J., MOGG, K. BRADLEY, B. & PINE, D.S. (2010). Attentional bias towards angry faces in childhood anxiety disorders. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 41 (2), 158-164.
	ABRAMOVITZ, J.S. (1996). Variants of exposure and response prevention in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder : A meta-analysis. Behavior Therapy, 27, 583-600.	BOSHEN, M. DRUMMOND, L.N., PILLAYA, A. & MORTON, K. (2010). Predicting outcome of treatment for severe, treatment resistant OCD in inpatient and community settings. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 41 (2), 90-95.
		ABRAMOVITZ, J.S., TAYLOR, S. & McAY, D. (2009). Obsessive-compulsive disorder. The Lancet, 374, 491-499. [PDF]

Trouble panique : Se caractérise par des attaques récurrentes et inattendues de crainte intense et d’anxiété qui se traduisent par des symptômes comme : des palpitations, une sensation d’étouffement ou d’étranglement, une douleur à la poitrine, des sensations de vertige, de la transpiration, des nausées ou une gêne abdominale, des tremblements ou des bouffées de chaleur ou des frissons, la crainte de vomir ou de s'évanouir, des jambes en spaghetthi. Trouble panique et agoraphobie. Panic anxiety, panic disorder.

	GRANT, B., KATON, W. & BEITMAN, B. (1983). Panic disorder. Journal of Family Practice, 17 (5), 907-914.	HUPPERT, J.D., BUFKA, L.F., BARLOW, D.H., GORMAN, J.M., SHEAR, M.K. & WOODS, S.W. (2001). Therapists, therapists variables, and cognitive-behavioral therapy outcome in a mulitcenter trial for panic disorder. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 69, 747-755.
	CARR, D. & SHEEHAN, M. (1984). Panic anxiety : A new biological model. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 45, 323-330.	MARCHAND, A. et LETARTE, A. (2001). La peur d'avoir peur : Guide de traitement du trouble panique avec agoraphobie. Montréal : Stanké.
	MARGRAF, J., EHLERS, A. & ROTH, W. (1986). Sodium lactate infusions and panic attacks : A review and critique. Psychosomatic Medicine, 48, 23–51.
	CLARK, D.M. (1986). A cognitive approach to panic. Behavior Research & Therapy, 24, 461-470.	GARDENSWARTZ, C.A., & CRASKE, M.G. (2001). Prevention of panic disorder. Behavior Therapy, 32, 725-737.
	BECK, A.T. (1988). Cognitive approaches to panic disorder : Theory and therapy. In S. Rachman & J. D. Maser (Eds.), Panic : Psychological perspectives. Hillsdale, NJ : Erlbaum	HINO, T., TAKEUCHI, T. & YAMANOUCHI, N. (2002). A 1-year follow-upstudy of coping in patients with panic disorder. Comprehensive Psychiatry, 43 (4), 279-284.
	FOA, E.B. (1988). What cognitions differentiate panic disorder from other anxiety disorders? In I. Hand & H.V. Wittchen (Eds.), Panic and phobias 2. New York : Springer-Verlag.	SCHMIDT, N.B., FORSYTH, J.P., SANTIAGO, H.T. & TRAKOWSKI, J.H. (2002). Classification of panic attack subtypes in patients and normal controls in response to biological challenge : Implications for assessment and treatment. Journal of Anxiety Disorders, 16, 625-638.
	BARLOW, D.H. (1988). Anxiety and its disorders : The nature and treatment of anxiety and panic. New York : Guilford Press.	McCLANAHAN, T.M. & ANTONUCCIO, D.O. (2002). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of panic attacks. Clinical Case Studies, 1, 211-223.
	BARLOW, D.H., CRASKE, M.G., CERNY, J.A. & KLOSKO, J.S. ( 1989). Behavioral treatment of panic disorder. Behavior Therapy, 20 (2), 261-282.	TSAO, J.C., MYSKOWSKI, J.L. & ZUCKER, B.G. (2002). Effects of cognitive-behavioral therapy for panic disorder on comorbid conditions: Replication and extension. Behavior Therapy, 33 (4), 493-509.
	THYER, B.A. (1992). Controlling panic attacks : Good technology, bad theory. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25 (3), 757-758.	KATERNDAHL, D.A. (2003). Predictors and outcomes in people told theyhave panic attacks. Depression & Anxiety, 17 (2), 98-100.
	CLUM, G.A., CLUM, G.A. & SURLS, R. (1993). A meta-analysis of treatment for panic disorder. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 61 (2), 317-326.	CARBRING, P., EKSELIUS, L. & ANDERSSON, G. (2003). Treatmentof panic disorder via the Internet : A randomized trial of CBT vs. applied relaxation. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 34, 129-140.
	EHLERS, A. (1993). Interoception and panic disorder. Advances of Behaviour Research & Therapy, 15, 3-21.	EIFERT, G.H. & HEFFNER, M. (2003). The effects of acceptance versus control contexts on avoidance of panic-related symptoms. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 34, 293-312.
	EHLERS, A. (1993). Somatic symptoms and panic attacks : A retrospective study of learning experiences. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 31, 269-278.	BAKER, B., KHAYKIN, Y., DEVINS, G., DORIAN, P., SHAPIRO, C. & NEWMAN, D. (2003). Correlates of therapeutic response in panic disorder presenting with palpitations : heart rate variability, sleep, and placebo effect. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 48 (6), 381-387.
	GOULD, R.A., OTTO, M.W. & POLLACK, M.H. (1995). A meta-analysis of treatment out-come for panic disorder. Clinical Psychology Review, 15, 810-844.	MARCAURELLE, R. BÉLANGER, C. & MARCHAND, A. (2003). Marital relationship and the treatment of panic disorder with agoraphobia : a critical review. Clinical Psychology Review, 23 (2), 247-276.
	EHLERS, A. (1995). A one-year prospective study of panic attacks. Clinical course and factors associated with maintenance. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 104, 164-172.	BALLENGER, J.C. & LYDIARD, R.B. (2004). Panic disorder : results of apatient survey. Human Psychopharmacology, 12, 27-33.
	WEISSMAN, M.M., BLAND, R.C. & CANINO, G.J., FARAVELLI. C., GREENWALD, S., HWU, H.G., JOYCE, P.R., KARAM E.G., LEE, C.K., LELOUCH, J., LÉPINE, J.P., NEWMAN, S.C., OAKLEY-BROWNE, M.A., RUBIO-STIPEC, M., WELLS, J.E., WICKRAMARATNE, P.J., WITTCHEN, H.U. & YEH, E.K. (1997). The cross-national epidemiology of panic disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 54 (4), 305-309.	HEINRICHS, N., HOFMANN, S.G. & BARLOW, D.H. (2004). Non-specific encoding of threat in social phobia and panic disorder. Cognitive Behaviour Therapy, 33 (4), 199-207.
	STARCEVIC, V., DJORDJEVIC, A., LATAS, M. & BOGOJEVIC G. (1998). Characteristics of agoraphobia in women and men with panic disorder withagoraphobia. Depression and Anxiety, 8 (1), 8-13.	LANDON, T.M. & BARLOW, D.H. (2004). Cognitive-behavioral treatment for panic disorder : Current status. Journal of Psychiatric Practice, 10 (4), 211-226.
	TURGEON, L. MARCHAND, A. & G. DUPUIS, G. (1998). Clinical features inpanic disorder with agoraphobia : a comparison of men and women. Journal of Anxiety Disorders, 12 (6), 539-553.	ADDIS, M.E. HATGIS, C., KRASNOW, A.D., JACOB, K., BOURNE, L. & MANSFIELD, A. (2004). Effectiveness of cognitive-behavioral treatment for panic disorder versus treatment as usual in a managed care setting. Journal of Consulting & Clinical Psychology, 72, 625- 635.
	TSAO, J.C., LEWIN, M.R., & CRASKE, M.G. (1998) The effects of cognitive-behavior therapy for panic disorders on comorbid conditions. Journal of Anxiety Disorders, 12 (4), 357-371.	KLEIN, B., RICHARDS, J.C. & AUSTIN, D.W. (2005). Efficacy of internet therapy for panic disorder. Journal of Behavior Therapy & Experimental Psychiatry, 37 (3), 213-238.
	LUNDH, L.G. WILKSTRÖM, J., WESTERLIND, J. & ÖST, L.G. (1999). Preattentive bias for emotional information in panic disorder with agoraphobia. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 108, 222-232.	ZVOLENSKY, M.J., BERNSTEIN, A., SACH-ERICCSON, N., SCHMIDT, N.B., BUCKENER, J. & BONN-MILLER, M.O. (2006). Cannabis use, abuse, and dependence and panic attacks in a representative sample. Journal of Psychiatric Research, 40, 477-486.
	HOFFMANN, S.G. & BARLOW, D.H. (1999). The costs of anxiety disorders. Implicationsfor psychosocial intervention. In N.E. Miller & K.M. Magruder (Dirs.), Cost-effectiveness of psychotherapy (pp. 224-235). New York : Oxford University Press.	EHLERS, A., MARGRAF, J., ROTH, W.T., TAYLOR, C.B. & BIRBAUMER, N. (1988). Anxiety induced by false heart rate feedback in patients with panic disorder. Behavior Research & Therapy, 26, 1–11.
	BARLOW, D.H., GORMAN, J.M., SHEAR, M.K. & WOODS, S.W. (2000). Cognitive-behavioral therapy, imipramine, or their combination for panic disorder : A randomized controlled trial. Journal of American Medical Association, 283 (19), 2529-2536.	ADDIS, M.E., HATGIS, C., CARDEMIL, E., JACOB, K., KRASMOW, A.D .& MANSFIELD, A. (2006). Effectiveness of cognitive–behavioral treatment for panic disorder versus treatment as usual in a managed care setting : 2-year follow-up. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 74 (2), 377–385. [PDF]
	FORSYTH, J.P., EIFERT, G.H. & CANNA, M.A. (2000). Evoking analogue subtypes of panic attacks in a non-clinical population using carbon dioxide-enriched air. Behaviour Research & Therapy, 38, 559-572.	GRILLON, C., LISSEK, S. RABIN, S. McDOWELL, D., DVIR, S. & PINE, D.S. (2008). Increased anxiety during anticipation of unpredictable but not predictable aversive stimuli as apsychophysiologic marker of panic disorder. American Journal of Psychiatry, 165, 898-904.
	HEDLEY, L.M., HOFFART, A., DAMMEN, T., EKEBERG, O. & FRIIS, S. (2000). The relationship between cognitions and panic attack intensity. Acta Psychiatrica Scandanavia, 101, 300-302.	CRASKE, M.G. & BARLOW, D.H. (2008). Panic disorder and agoraphobia. In D.H. Barlow (Ed.), Clinical handbook of psychological disorders (pp. 1-64). New York : The Guilford Press.
	MATHEW, S.J., COPLAN, J.D. & GORMAN, J.M. (2001). Management of treatment-refractory panic disorder. Psychopharmacology Bulletin, 35, 97-110.

Troubles psychologiques : Terme générique qui englobe aussi bien les troubles mentaux du DSM-IV que les autres problèmes de nature psychologique. Ce terme recouvre donc une réalité plus vaste que les troubles mentaux ou la maladie mentale. EX: un enfant qui ne parvient pas toujours à se concentrer en classe ne souffre pas nécessairement d'une maladie mentale. Il s'agit plutôt d'un trouble ou d'un problème que l'on peut résoudre en classe au moyen d'une technique de modification du comportement, donc sans nécessairement recourir au service d'un professionnel de la santé ou d'une thérapie médicamenteuse. Cette nuance n'est pas spécieuse. Elle permet d'exclure tout un ensemble de problèmes du champ légal d'intervention de la psychologie, de la médecine et de la psychiatrie (médicalisation). Cette nuance s'applique également aux problèmes biologiques; ce n'est pas parce que vous avez mal au dos ou aux jambes que vous êtes malade. Un peu d'exercice ou un changement de posture devant votre écran d'ordinateur peut s'avérer plus bénéfique qu'une consultation chez le médecin. Autrement dit, il existe un état intermédiaire entre la santé parfaite et la maladie, un état qui, bien qu'insatisfaisant ou souffrant, ne réclame pas nécessairement l'intervention d'un expert. Bref, tout problème ou difficuté personelle n'est pas anormal. De fait, si on exclut les soins personnels (1), il existe trois niveaux d'intervention des troubles psychologiques hors du champ de pratique de la psychiatrie/psychologie clinique: 2) les ressources sociales de l'individu malade (famille, amis, vosinage, etc.); 3) Les soins offerts par un professionnel ou un para-professionnel hors des institutions psychiatriques ou du système de santé (psychologue en pratique privée, ressources alternatives et communautaires); 4) Le système de santé et la psychiatrie (médecin, psychiatre, psychologue rémunérés par l'état, travailleurs sociaux, etc). Il faut préciser Les niveau 1 et 2 correspondent habituellement à ce que l'on nomme les troubles légers, mais pas nécessairement, tandis que les cas dit lourds sont réservés aux deux derniers niveaux d'intervention. Finalement, il convient de noter que le terme problème de santé mentale est en passe de remplacer cette expression. = problèmes psychologiques, problème de santé mentale. ( ): Voir tableau ci-bas. Psychological disorder.

Troubles psychologiques
Santé mentale adéquate	Troubles mineurs/Légers		Troubles majeurs/Lourds
0	1	2	3	4
Pas d'intervention	Que l'on peut résoudre soi-même	Qui peut être résolu grâce à nos propres ressources sociales	Qui peut être résolu grâce aux soins d'un professionnel ou d'un para-professionnel hors du sytème de santé	Qui requiert les services d'un professionel oeuvrant généralement au sein d'une institution psychiatrique ou d'une ressource alternative en santé mentale.

	KESSLER. C. & WANG, P.S. (2008). The descriptive epidemiology of commonly occurring mental disorders in the United States. Annual Review of Public Health, 29, 115-129.

Troubles psychotiques : ( ): psychose, schizophrénie.

Les troubles psychotiques
Psychose	Schizophrénie	Trouble dissociatif de l'identité

Trusted Jennifer ( ) : Philosophe anglaise. Elle s'est notamment intéressée au quasi-réalisme scientifique.

	TRUSTED, J. (1981). An introduction to the philosophy of knowledge. Macmillan.
	TRUSTED, J. (1984). Free will andresponsibility. Oxford : Oxford University Press.
	TRUSTED, J. (1987). Moral principles and social values. Taylor & Francis Library.
	TRUSTED, J. (1991). Physics and metaphysics : theories of space and time. Routledge.
	TRUSTED, J. (1996). Beliefs and biology : Theories of life And living. Palgrave Macmillan.

Tsai Jeanne L. ( ) : Psychologue écologiste américaine, spécialisée dans l'étude des effets et des différences culturelles. Collaboratrice de Levenson, Vitousek et Ying.

	TSAI, J.L. & LEVENSON, R.W. (1997). Cultural influences on emotional responding : Chinese American and European American dating couples during interpersonal conflict. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 28, 600-625.
	TSAI, J.L., YING, Y. & LEE, P.A. (2000). The meaning of "being Chinese" and "being American": Variation among Chinese American young adults. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 31, 302-322.
	TSAI, J.L., YING, Y.W. & LEE, P.A. (2001). Cultural predictors of self-esteem : A study of Chinese American female and male young adults. Cultural Diversity & Ethnic Minority Psychology, 7, 284-297.
	TSAI, J.L., KNUTSON, B. & FUNG, H.H. (2006). Cultural variation in affect valuation. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 90, 288-307.
	TSAI, J.L., MIAO, F.F., SEPPALA, E., YEUNG, D. & FUNG, H.H. (2007). Influence and adjustment goals : Sources of cultural differences in ideal affect. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 92, 1102-1117.

Tsai Mavis ( ) : Psychologue béhavioriste américain et co-auteure, avec Kohlenberg, de la thérapie analytique fonctionnelle. Collaboratrice de Hayes et Kohlenberg.

	KOHLENBERG, R.J. & TSAI, M. (1991). Functional analytic psychotherapy : Creating intense and curative therapeutic relationships. New York : Plenum Publishers.
	KOHLENBERG, R.J. & TSAI, M. (1994). Functional Analytic Psychotherapy: A behavioral approach to treatment and integration. Journal of Psychotherapy Integration, 4, 175-201.
	KOHLENBERG, R.J. & TSAI, M. (2002). Functional Analytic Psychotherapy. In Zimmar, G. (Ed.) Encyclopedia of psychotherapy. New York : Academic Press.
	TSAI, M., KOHLENBERG, R.J., KANTER, J.W., KOHLENBERG, B., FOLLETTE, W.C. & CALLAGHAN, G.M. (2008). Guide to functional analytic psychotherapy: Awareness, courage, love, and behaviorism. New York : Springer.
	KOHLENBERG, R.J., KANTER J., TSAI, M. & WEEKS, C.E. (2010). FAP and cognitive behavior therapy. In J. Kanter, M. Tsai & R.J. Kohlenberg (Eds.), The practice of functional analytic psychotherapy. New York : Springer.

Tukey John Wilder (New Bedford 1915-2000 New Brunswick États-Unis) : Mathématicien et statisticien américain. Professeur de Goodman et Mosteller. Collaborateur de Abelson, Friedman, Mosteller, Sheffe et Siegel.

	SCHEFFÉ, H. & TUKEY, J.W. (1944). A formula for sample sizes for population tolerance limits. Annals of Mathematical Statistics, 15, 217.
	TUKEY, J.W. (1949). Comparing individual means in the analysis of variance. Biometrics, 5, 99-114.
	SIEGEL, H. & TUKEY, J.W. (1960). A nonparametric sum of ranks procedure for relative spread in unpaired samples. Journal of the American Statistical Association, 55, 429-445.
	TUKEY, J.W. (1969). Analyzing data : Sanctification or detective work. American Psychologist, 24, 83-91.
	TUKEY, J.W. (1991). The philosophy of multiple comparisons. Statistical Science, 6 (1), 98-116.

Tullock Gordon (1922-) : Économiste américain et père de la théorie du public choice (avec Buchanan). Collaborateur de Buchanan.

	BUCHANAN, J.M. & TULLOCK, G. (1962). The calculus of consent : Logical foundations of constitutional democracy. Ann Arbor : University of Michigan Press.
	TULLOCK, G. (1970). Private wants, public means : An economic analysis of the desirable Scope of government. New York : Basic Books.
	TULLOCK, G. (1985). Public choice statement. Public Choice, 46 (3), 225-226.
	TULLOCK, G. (1986). The economics of wealth and poverty. London, England : Wheatsheaf Press
	TULLOCK, G. (1994). The economics of nonhuman societies. Tucson AZ : Pallas Press.

Tulving Endel (Estonie 1927-) : Psychologue canadien et chef de file de la perspective cognitive américaine. On lui doit la distinction entre mémoire épisodique et mémoire sémantique. Professeur de Habib. Collaborateur de Bower, Craik, Roediger et Schacter.

No 36	TULVING, E. (1972). Episodic and semantic memory. In E. Tulving & W. Donaldson (Eds.), Organization of memory. New York : Academic Press.
	TULVING, E. (1983). Elements of episodic memory. Oxford : Oxford University Press.
	TULVING, E. (1985). Memory and consciousness. Canadian Psychology, 26, 1-12.
	TULVING, E. (1985). How many memory systems are there ? American Psychologist, 40, 385-398.
	TULVING, E. & CRAIK, F.M.I. (Eds) (2000). The Oxford handbook of memory. New York : Oxford University Press.

Tumeur : Tumeur et cancer.

	BROCA, P. (1866/69). Traité des tumeurs. Paris.
	SHALLICE, T., MUSSONI, A., D'AGOSTINO, S. & SKRAP, M. (2010). Right posterior cortical functions in a tumour patient series. Cortex, 46 (9), 1178-1188.

Tuomela Raimo (Helsinki 1940-) : Philosophe et épistémologue finlandais.

	TUOMELA, R. & NINILUOTO, I. (1973). Theoretical concepts and hypothetico-inductive inference. Dordrecht and Boston : D. Reidel Publishing Company.
	TUOMELA, R. (1977). Human action and its explanation : A study on the philosophical foundations of psychology. Dordrecht and Boston : D. Reidel Publishing Co.
	TUOMELA, R. (1984). A theory of social action. Dordrecht, Boston, and Lancaster : D. Reidel Publishing Company.
	TUOMELA, R. (1985). Science, action, and reality. Dordrecht, Boston, and Lancaster : D. Reidel Publishing Company.
	TUOMELA, R. (2002). The philosophy of social practices : A collective acceptance view. Cambridge University Press.

Turgeon Lise ( ) : Psychologue cognitivo-béhavioriste québécoise, spécialisée dans l'étude de l'anxiété chez les enfants et les adolescents. Collaboratrice de Julien, Marchand et Vitaro.

	TURGEON, L. & CHARTRAND, E. (2003). Reliability and validity of the Revised Children’s Manifest Anxiety Scale in a french-canadian sample. Psychological Assessment, 15 (3), 378-383.
	BERTHIAUME, C., TURGEON, L. et O'CONNOR (2004). L'évaluation et le traitement psychologique du trouble obsessionnel-compulsif chez les enfants et les adolescents : découvertes récentes. Journal de Thérapie Comportementale & Cognitive, 14 (1), 35-46.
	BRENDGEN, R., VITARO, F., TURGEON, L. & POULIN, F. (2004). Over- Versus Underestimation of social relations with peers : Links with subsequent behavioral, emotional, and social adjustment. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 32 (3), 305-332.
	BERTHIAUME, C., BÉRIAULT, M. et TURGEON, L. (2006). L’état de stress post-traumatique chez les enfants : manifestations et traitement. In S. Guay & A. Marchand (Eds.), Les troubles liés aux événements traumatiques : dépistage, evaluation et traitements. Montréal : Les Presses de l’Université de Montréal.
	TURGEON, L. et GENDREAU, P. (2007). Les troubles anxieux chez les enfants et les adolescents. Marseille : Solal.

Turing Alan Mathison (Paddington Angleterre 1912-1954 Manchester) : Mathématicien, cybernéticien et philosophe anglais. Inventeur de la machine qui porte aujourd'hui son nom. Lors de deuxième guerre mondiale, il a aussi collaboré au perfectionnement de La Bombe - une machine à décrypter, l'ancêtre de l'ordinateur - qui a permis aux alliés de décoder les messages secrets de l'Allemagne (opération Ultra). Il est considéré comme l'un des précurseurs du cognitivisme américain. Membre du Ratio club.

	TURING, A.M. (1936). On computable numbers with an application to the entscheidungs problem. Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society, 42.
	TURING, A.M. (1950). Computing machinery and intelligence. Mind, 59, 433-460.

	Leavitt, David, The Man Who Knew Too Much: Alan Turing and the Invention of the Computer, W. W. Norton, 2006

Turing (Machine de...) : Inventé par Turing, cette machine - un programme exécuté par un ordinateur - vise à simuler les fonctions de certains états mentaux (calcul, prise de décision, degré de certitude, langage, etc).

Turing (test de...) : Test élaboré par Turing visant à distinguer un ordinateur d'un humain et à montrer que la machine « pense ». Il consiste à mettre en confrontation verbale un humain avec un ordinateur et à demander à un tiers humain d'interroger l'un et l'autre. Si le tiers humain n'est pas capable de dire qui est l'ordinateur et qui est l'autre humain, on peut considérer que l'ordinateur a passé le test de Turing avec succès : il pense. Ce test permet aussi d'affirmer qu'une fonction cognitive (par exemple le langage) est humaine ou non. Une version fictive de ce test, le test d'empathie Voight-Kampff , est utilisé dans le film Blade Runner par Rick Deckard (joué par Harisson Ford) pour distinguer un humain d'un réplicant (androïde humanisé).

	TURING, A.M. (1950). Computing machinery and intelligence. Mind, 59, 433-460.
	RICHARDSON, R.C. (1982). Turing tests for intelligence : Ned Block's defense of psychologism. Philosophical Studies, 34, 421-426.
	MITCHELL, R.W. & ANDERSON, J.R. (1998). Primate theory of mind is a Turing test. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 21, 127-128.
	HARNAD, S. & DROR, I. (2006). Distributed cognition : Cognizing, autonomy and the Turing test. Pragmatics & Cognition, 14 (2), 209-213.

Turkle Sherry (Brooklyn New York 1948-) : Sociologue et psychologue cognitiviste américaine et spécialiste de l'étude des technologies de l'information et des media de masse.

	TURKLE, S. (1978/1992). Psychoanalytic politics : Jacques Lacan and Freud's french revolution. Guilford Press.
	TURKLE, S. (1984/2005). The second self : Computers and the human spirit. MIT Press.
	TURKLE, S. (1995). Life on the screen : Identity in the age of the internet. Simon and Schuster.
	TURKLE, S. (2008). Simulation and its discontents. MIT Press.
	TURKLE, S. (2011). Alone Together : Why we expect more from technology and less from each other. Basic Book.

Turner John C. (-2011) : Psychosociologue anglais, spécialiste de l'étude des groupes et de la dominance sociale. Collaborateur de Haslam, McGarty, Reynolds et Tajfel.

	TURNER, J.C. (1989). Rediscovering the social group : A self-categorization theory. London : Blackwell Publishers.
	TURNER, J.C. (1991). Social influence. Belmont, CA : Wadsworth Publishing.
	TURNER, J.C. & REYNOLDS, K.J. (2003). Why social dominance theory has been falsified. British Journal of Social Psychology, 42, 199-206.
	TURNER, J.C. (2005). Explaining the nature of power : A three-process theory. European Journal of Social Psychology, 35, 1-22.
	TURNER, J.C. (2006). Tyranny, freedom and social structure : Escaping our theoretical prisons. British Journal of Social Psychology, 45, 41-46.

Turner Mark ( ) : Philosophe cognitiviste américain. Collaborateur de Fauconnier et Lakoff.

	TURNER, M. & LAKOFF, G. (189). More than cool reason : A field guide to poetic metaphor. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
	TURNER, M. (1996). The literary mind : The origins of thought and language. New York : Oxford University Press.
	TURNER, M. (2001). Cognitive dimensions of social science : The way we think about politics, economics, law, and society. New York : Oxford University Press.
	TURNER, M. (2006). Compression and representation. Language & Literature, 15 (1), 17-27.
	TURNER, M. (2006). The artful mind : Cognitive science and the riddle of human creativity. New York : Oxford University Press. [PDF]

Turvey, Michael T. ( ) : Psychologue écologiste américain.

	TURVEY, M.T. (1973). On peripheral and central processes in vision: Inferences from an information-processing analysis of masking with patterned stimuli. Psychological Review, 80, 1-52.
	TURVEY, M.T. & CARELLO, C. (1981). Cognition : The view from ecological realism. Cognition, 10, 313-321.
	TURVEY, M.T. & CARELLO, C. (1986). The ecological multiple reference frames, specification alinformation, and extraordinary boundary conditions on natural law. Behavioral & Brain Sciences, 9, 153-155.
	TURVEY, M.T., SOLOMON, H.Y. & BURTON, G. (1989). An ecological analysis of knowing by wielding. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 52 (3), 387–407. [PDF]
	TURVEY, M.T. & FONSECA, S. (2009). Nature of motor control : perspectives and issues. Advances in Experimental Medicine & Biology, 629, 93-123.

Tustin Frances (Angleterre 1913-1994) : Psychanalyste néo-kleinienne anglaise, spécialisée dans le traitement des enfants autistes. Étudiante de Bowlby. Analysée par Bion.

	TUSTIN, F. (1977/82). Autisme et psychose de l'enfant. Paris : Seuil.
	TUSTIN, F. (1986). Les états autistiques chez l'enfant. Paris : Seuil.
	TUSTIN, F. (1991). The protective shell in children and adults. London : Karnac.
	TUSTIN, F. (1991). Revised understandings of psychogenic autism. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 72, 585-591.
	TUSTIN, F. (1992). Autisme et protection. Paris : Seuil.

Tutin C.E.G. ( ) : Primatologue anglais, spécialisé dans l'étude de la culture, de la coopération et de l'utilisation d'outils chez le chimpanzé et le gorille. Collaborateur de Boesch, Goodall, McGrew, Nishida, Whiten et Wrangham.

	TUTIN, C.E.G. & McGREW, W.C. (1973). Chimpanzee copulatory behaviour. Folia Primatologica, 19, 237-256.
	TUTIN, C.E.G. & FERNANDEZ, M. (1985) Foods consumed by sympatric populations of Gorilla gorilla gorilla and Pan troglodytes troglodytes in Gabon : some preliminary data. International Journal of Primatology, 6, 27-43.
	TUTIN, C.E.G. & FERNANDEZ, M. (1992). Insect-eating by sympatric lowland gorillas (Gorilla gorilla gorilla) and chimpanzees (Pan troglodytes troglodytes) in the Lopé Reserve, Gabon. American Journal of Primatology, 28, 29-40.
	WHITEN, A., GOODALL, J., McGREW, W.C., NISHIDA, T., REYNOLDS, V. SUGIYAMA, Y., TUTIN, C.E.G., WRANGHAM, R.W. & BOESCH, C. (1999). Cultures in chimpanzees. Nature, 399, 682-685.
	TUTIN, C.E.G. (2003) An introductory perspective : behavioural ecology of gorillas. In A.B. Taylor & M.L. Goldsmith (Eds ), Gorilla biology : a multidisciplinary perspective (pp. 295-301). Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.

Tutorat/Tuteur : Aide et encadrement systématique offert par un pairs (employé ou étudiant) à d'autres employés/étudiants moins compétents ou habituellement plus jeunes. Contrairement au mentor, le tuteur est formé par un expert. = guide, aide par les pairs. *mentorat. Tutoring, peer tutoring, peer helping programs.

	ROSENSHINE, B.V. & FURST, N. (1969). The effects of tutoring upon pupil achievement : A research review. Washington, D.C.: Office of Education.
	HARRIS, W.V. & SHERMAN, J.A. (1973). Effects of peer tutoring and consequences on the math performance of elementary classroom students. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6 (4), 587-597.	BRUNEAU, M. (1997). Le tutorat et le monitorat : Faits et questions. Dans L. Langevin et L. Villeneuve (Dirs.), L’encadrement des étudiants. Un défi du XXI^e siècle (p. 280-300). Montréal : Les éditons logiques.
	DEVIN-SHEEHAN, L., FELDMAN, R.S. & ALLEN, V.L. (1976). Research on children tutoring children : A critical review. Review of Educational Research, 46, 355-385.
	ELLSON, D.G. (1976). Tutoring. In N. Gage (Ed.), The psychology of teaching methods. Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
	ROBERTSON, S.J., REREUS, D.M. & DRABMAN, R.S. (1976). Peer and college-student tutoring as reinforcement in a token economy. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9 (2), 169-177.	SIDERIS, G.D., UTLEY, C., GREENWOOD, C.R., DAWSON, H., DELQUADRI, J. & PALMER, P. (1997). Classwide peer tutoring and its effects on the spelling performance and social interactions of students with mild disabilities in an integrated setting. Journal of Behavioral Education, 7, 435-462.
	DINEEN, J.P., CLARK, H.B. & RISLEY, T.R. (1977). Peer tutoring among elementary students : educational benefits to the tutor. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10 (2), 231-238.	DUPAUL, G.J., ERVIN, R.A., HOOK, C.L. & McGOEY, K.E. (1998). Peer tutoring for children with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : Effects of classroom behavior and academic performance. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 31, 579-592.
	COHEN, P.A., KULIK, J.A. & KULIK, C.L.C. (1982). Educational outcomes of tutoring : A meta-analysis of findings. American Educational Research Journal, 19, 237-248. [PDF]	CHI, M. T.H., SILER, S. A., JEONG, H. & YAMAGUSHI, T. & HAUSMAN, R.G. (2001). Learning from human tutoring. Cognitive Science, 25, 471-533.
	LAWSON, D. (1989). Peer helping programs in the colleges and universities of Quebec and Ontario. Canadian Journal of Councelling, 23 (1), 41-54.	CHI, M.T.H., SILER, S.A. & JEONG, H. (2004). Can tutors diagnose student’s misunderstandings ? Cognition & Instruction, 22, 363–387.
	JUEL, C. (1996). What makes literacy tutoring effective? Reading Research Quarterly, 31, 268- 289.	TOPPING, K.J. (2005). Trends in peer learning. Educational Psychology, 25 (6), 631-645.
	TOPPING , K.J. (1996). The effectiveness of peer tutoring in further and higher education. Higher Education, 32, 321-345.	RITTER, G.W., BARNETT, J.H. DENNY, G.S. & ALBIN, G.R. (2009). The effectiveness of volunteer tutoring programs for elementary and middle school students : a meta-analysis. Review of Educational Research, 79 (1), 3-38.

Tutoriel : Programme ou environnement informatique qui remplace le professeur dans l'exécution de certaines tâches d'enseignement, en classe ou à la maison. Tutoriel et apprentissage assisté par ordinateur.

	ABERSON, C L., BERGER, D.E., HEALY, M.R., KYLE, D.J. & ROMERO, V.L. (2000). Evaluation of an interactive tutorial for teaching the central limit theorem. Teaching of Psychology, 27, 289-291.
	BEYT-MAROM, R., SAPORTA, K. & CASPI, A. (2005). Synchronous vs. asynchronous tutorials : Factors affecting student perferences and choices. Journal of Research on Technology in Education, 37, 245-262

Tutorials in Quantitative Methods for Psychology : Revue scientifique qui s'intéresse au développement de turoriel en psychologie. Éditeur :

HÉLIE, S. (2006). An introduction to model selection : Tools and algorithms. Tutorials in Quantitative Methods for Psychology, 2, 1-10.

Tversky Amos N. (Haifa Israël 1937-1996) : Psychologue cognitiviste américain. Il a développé une théorie de la décision et du jugement. On lui doit notamment le concept d'aversion à la perte. Étudiant de Coombs. Collaborateur de Clark, Gilovich, Kahneman, Krantz, Luce, Quattrone et Suppes.

No 93	TVERSKY, A., SATTAH. S. & SLOVIC, P. (1988). Contingent weighting in judgement and choice. Psychological Review, 95, 371-395.
	TVERSKY, A. & KAHNEMAN, D. (1983). Extension versus intuititve reasoning : The conjunction fallacy in probability judgment. Psychological Review, 90, 293-315.
	KAHNEMAN, D. & TVERSKY, A. (1979). Prospect theory : an analysis of decision under risk. Econometrica, 42, 263-291.
	TVERSKY, A. & KAHNEMAN, D. (1973). Availability : A heuristic for judging frequency and probability. Cognitivie Psychology, 5 (2), 207-232.
	KAHNEMAN, D. & TVERSKY, A. (1973). On the psychology of prediction. Psychological Review, 80, 237-251.

Twenge Jean M. ( ) : Psychosociologue américaine et spécialiste de l'étude des générations et du narcissisme. Étudiante de Baumeister. Collaboratrice de Nolen-Hoeksema.

	TWENGE, J.M. (1997). Changes in masculine and feminine traits over time : A meta-analysis. Sex Roles, 36, 305-325.
	TWENGE, J.M. & BAUMEISTER, R.F. (2002). Self-control : A limited yet renewable resource. In Y. Kashima, M. Foddy & M. Platow (Eds.), Self and identity : Personal, social, and symbolic (pp. 57-70). Mahwah, NJ : Erlbaum.
	TWENGE, J.M. & NOLEN-HOEKSEMA, S. (2002). Age, gender, race, socioeconomic status, and birth cohort differences on the Children’s Depression Inventory : A meta-analysis. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 111, 578-588.
	TWENGE, J.M. (2009). Status and gender : The paradox of progress in an age of narcissism. Sex Roles, 61, 338-340.
	TWENGE, J.M. & CAMPBELL, W.K. (2009). The narcissism epidemic : living in the age of entitlement. New York : Free Press.

Twin research : Revue scientifique multidisciplinaire qui consacre ses pages à l'étude des jumeaux. Éditeur : Australian Academic Press Pty Ltd.

KNOPIK, V.S. & DEFRIES, J.C. (1999). Etiology of covariation between reading and mathematics performance : a twin study. Twin Research, 2, 226-234.

Twin Research and Human Genetics : Revue scientifique multidisciplinaire qui consacre ses pages à l'étude des jumeaux. = Twin Res Hum Genet. Éditeur : Australian Academic Press Pty Ltd

VOLK, H.E., McDERMOOT, K.B., ROEDIGER, H.L. & TODD, R.D. (2006). Genetic influences on free and cued recall in long-term memory tasks. Twin Research & Human Genetics, 9, 623-631.

Type : Type et trait. Type

	TARDE, G. (1890). Le type criminel. Revue Philosophique, 19, 593-627.
	MEEHL, P.E. (1992). Factors and taxa, traits and types, differences of degree and differences in kind. Journal of Personality, 60, 117-174.

Type A (personnalité de...) : Selon les cardiologues Friedman et Rosenman, catégorie d'individus qui se caractérise par une hostilité, une agressivité, une impatience et une difficulté à se détendre plus élevés que la moyenne. Ces individus ont également pour eux-mêmes des exigences très élevées. Pour toutes ces raisons, ils seraient plus susceptibles de souffrir de maladie cardio-vasculaire. Type A et stress. /type B.

	ROSENHAM, R.H., FRIEDMAN, M., STRAUS, R., WURM, M., KOSITCHEK, R., HAHN, W. & WERTHESSEN, N.T. (1964). A predictive study of coronary heart disease. Journal of American Medical Association, 189 (1), 15-22.	BLUMENTHAL, J.A., O'TOOLE, L.C. & HANEY, T. (1984). Behavioral assessment of the type A behavior pattern. Psychosomatic Medicine, 46, 415-423.
	BORTNER, R.W. & ROSENHAM, R.H. (1967). The measurement of Type A behavior. Journal of Chronic Diseases, 20 (7), 525-533.	HANEY, T.L. & BLUMENTHAL, J.A. (1985). Stress and the Type A behavior pattern. In S. Burchfield (Ed.), Stress : Psychological and physiological interaction. Washington, D.C. Hemisphere Publishing Co.
	GLASS, D.C., SNYDER, M.L. & HOLTIS, J.F. (1974). Time urgency and the Type A coronary-prone behavior pattern. Journal of Applied Social Psychology 4 (2), 125-140.	ROSKIES, E. (1987). Stress management for the healthy type A. New York : The Guilford Press.
		COHEN, S. & MATTHEWS, K.A. (1987). Social support, Type A behavior and coronary artery disease. Psychosomatic Medicine, 49, 325-330. [LIRE]
	BURNAM, M. A., PENNEBAKER, J.W. & GLASS, D.C. (1975). Time consciousness, achievement striving, and the Type A coronary-prone behavior pattern. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 84 (1), 76-79.	WHALEN, C.K., HENKER, B. & HINSHAW, S.P. & GRANGER, D.A. (1989). Externalizing behavior disorders, situational generality, and the Type A behavior pattern. Child Development, 60, 1453-1462.
	BLUMENTHAL, J.A., WILLIAMS, R.B., KONG, Y., SCHANBERG, S. & THOMPSON, L. (1978). Type A behavior pattern and coronary atherosclerosis. Circulation, 58, 634-639.	FURNHAM, A. (1990). The type A behaviour pattern and the perception of self. Personality & Individual Differences 11, 841-851.
	BLUMENTHAL, J.A., WILLIAMS, R.S., WILLIAMS, R.B. & WALLACE, A.G. (1980). The effects of exercise on the Type A behavior pattern. Psychosomatic Medicine, 42, 289-296.	O'LEARY, E. (1991). Type A behaviour : A consideration of some research findings and emerging issues. Irish Journal of Psychology, 12, 338-345.
		GRIFFITHS, M.D. & DANCASTER, I. (1995). The effect of Type A personality on physiological arousal while playing computer games. Addictive Behaviors, 20, 543-548.
		LYNCH, P.J. (1999). Hostility, type A behavior, and stress hromones at rest and after playing violent video games in teenagers. Psychosomatic Medicine, 61, 113.

Type B (personnalité de...) : Selon les cardiologues Friedman et Rosenman, catégorie d'individus qui se caractérise par un faible besoin d'accomplissement de soi, l'absence d'agressivité et de compétitivité et la tolérance à l'égard d'autrui. Ces individus ont également pour eux-mêmes des exigences peu élevées. Pour toutes ces raisons, ils seraient moins susceptibles de souffrir de maladie cardio-vasculaire. Type B et besoin d'accomplissement. /type A.

	ROSENHAM, R.H., FRIEDMAN, M., STRAUS, R., WURM, M., KOSITCHEK, R., HAHN, W. & WERTHESSEN, N.T. (1964). A predictive study of coronary heart disease. Journal of American Medical Association, 189 (1), 15-22.
	EKELUND, L.G., BLUMENTHAL, J.A., MOREY, M.C. & EKELUND, C.C. (1986). The effect of nonselective and selective betablockade on perceived exertion during treadmill exercise in mild hypertensive Type A and B males and the interaction with aerobic training. In G. Borg & D. Ottoson (Eds.), The perception of exertion in physical work (pp. 191-199). London : MacMillan Press.
	KONECNI, V.J. & GOTLIEB, H. (1987). Type A/Type B personality syndrome, attention, and music processing. In R. Spintge and R. Droh (Eds.), Music in Medicine/Musik in der Medizin (pp. 169-175). Berlin : Springer-Verlag.

Type/Typologie : Classement raisonné d'un phénomène et de ses variations qui obéit à un ensemble de règles explicites et logiques. typology.

	ROSENTHAL, J.S. (1932). Typology in the light of the theory of conditioned reflexes. Journal of Personality, 1, (1), 56–69.
	GRAY, J.A. (1964). Pavlov's typology. Elsevier.
	GORLOW L., SIMONSON. R. & KRAUSS H. (1966). An empirical invsestigation of the Jungian typology. British journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, 5 (2), 108-117.
	COOK, D.A. (1971). Is Jung's typology true? A theoretical and experimental study of some assumptions implicit in a theory of personality types. Dissertation Abstracts international, 31, 2979B.
	CARBON, R. & LEVY, N. (1973). Studies of Jungian typology: 1. Memory, social perception and social actions. Journal of personality, 41 (4), 559-576.
	SAGER, C.F. (1977). A typology of intimate relationships. Journal of Sex & Marital Therapy, 3 (2), 83-112.
	LOOMIS, M. & SINGER, J. (1980). Testing the bipolar assumption in Jung typology. Journal of Analytical Psychology, 25 (4), 351-356.
	TAYLOR, D.L., THOMPSON, B. & BOGOTCH, I.E. (1995). A typology of school climate reflecting teacher participation : A Q-technique study. Research in the Schools, 2 (2), 51-57.
	SLOBIN, D.I. (2006). Issues of linguistic typology in the study of sign language development of deaf children. In B. Schick, M. Marschark & P.E. Spencer (Eds.), Advances in the sign language development of deaf children (pp. 20-45). Oxford University Press.

Typicalité : Dans la théorie de Rosch, désigne l'exemple le plus représentatif d'une catégorie. = exemple parfait. Typicaly.

	RAJANI, S. & SWATHI, K. (2007). Effect of typicality of ad hoc categories in lexical access. Brain & Language, 103 (1-2), 138-139.
	MATLIN, M. (2004/2001). Cognition. Wiley, John & Sons, Incorporated. / La cognition : Une introduction à la psychologie cognitive. Paris : Deboeck Université.

Tyran/Tyranie : Utilsation abusive de la force, de son pouvoir, dans le but d'humilier la victime (individu, groupe, pays, etc).

	REICHER S.D. & HASLAM, S.A. (2006). Rethinking the psychology of tyranny : The BBC Prison Study. British Journal of Social Psychology, 45, 1-40.
	TURNER, J.C. (2006). Tyranny, freedom and social structure : Escaping our theoretical prisons. British Journal of Social Psychology, 45, 41-46.
	HASLAM, S.A. & REICHER S.D. (2007). Beyond the banality of evil : Three dynamics of an interactionist social psychology of tyranny. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 33, 615-622.

Tzeng Olivier C.S. : Psychologue américain, d'origine taïwanaise, et collaborateur de Osgood.

	TZENG, O.C.S. & DIMIT, M. (1974). Attitudinal differences of college students and their parents. Psychology Reports, 35, 1247-1249.
	TZENG, O.C.S., OSGOOD, C.E. & MAY, W.H. (1976). Idealized cultural differences in kinship conceptions. International Journal of Psycholinguistics, 5, 51-77.
	TZENG, O.C.S. & TZENG, C.H. (1982). Myth or fact of implicit personality theory ? An illustration of how empirical research can miss. Journal of Personality, 30 (2), 223-239.
	TZENG, O.C.S. & EVERETT, A.V. (1985). A cross-cultural perspective of self-related conceptions in adolescence. International Journal of Psychology, 22, 231-239.
	TZENG, O.C.S. (1992). Theories of love development, maintenance, and dissolution : Octagonal cycle and differential perspectives. Praeger.

TA --- TAC --- TAX--- TAR--- TE --- TEM --- TES --- THÉ --- THÉR --- TI --- TO --- TOP--- TR --- TRI --- TRO --- TROU --- TW --- TV

Comment citer ce site?

Pl@nètePsy

A à Z
Auteurs
Revues
Sources
Réference